invitation for bids for pump stations r/r tier 16

Transcription

******************************************************************************
INVITATION FOR BIDS
FOR
PUMP STATIONS R/R TIER 16 - BREEZEWOOD UNIT 1- PS 3014, LAKE
SPARLING HEIGHTS UNIT 1- PS 3028, LAKE SPARLING HEIGHTS UNIT 2- PS
3202 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
*****************************************************************************
PART H
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BID SUBMITTAL
******************************************************************************
PART H
******************************************************************************
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
INDEX
TO
PROJECT MANUAL
ORANGE COUNTY
PUMP STATIONS R/R TIER 16 - BREEZEWOOD UNIT 1- PS 3014, LAKE
SPARLING HEIGHTS UNIT 1- PS 3028, LAKE SPARLING HEIGHTS UNIT 2- PS
3202 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
OCU Project Sequence No. 60485
CPH Project No. O28302
May 2013
DIVISION 0 -
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
TO BE PROVIDED BY ORANGE COUNTY PURCHASING
DIVISION 1 01001
01010
01021
01025
01027
01050
01065
01070
01091
01200
01300
01301
01310
01370
01380
01400
01410
01516
01560
01570
01580
01590
01610
01650
01700
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Work Requirements
Summary of Work
Soils Report and Other Reports
Measurement and Payment
Application for Payment
Surveying and Field Surveying
Permits and Fees
Abbreviations and Symbols
Reference Specifications
Project Meetings
Submittals
Product Substitutions
Progress Schedule
Schedule of Values
Audio-Visual Documentation
Quality Control
Testing and Testing Laboratory Services
Collection System Bypass
Erosion and Sedimentation Control
Maintenance of Traffic
Project Identification and Signs
Construction Field Office
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Pump Station Start-Up and Testing
Project Closeout
Index-1
01001-1 – 01001-19
01010-1 – 01010-4
01021-1 – 01021-5
01025-1 – 01025-29
01027-1 – 01027-4
01050-1 – 01050-9
01065-1
01070-1 - 01070-5
01091-1 - 01091-2
01200-1 – 01200-4
01300-1 – 01300-11
01301-1 – 01301-3
01310-1 – 01310-8
01370-1 – 01370-2
01380-1 – 01380-4
01400-1 - 01400-3
01410-1 – 01410-2
01516-1 – 01516-3
01560-1 – 01560-3
01570-1 – 01570-5
01580-1 – 01580-3
01590-1 – 01590-5
01610-1 – 01610-5
01650-1 – 01650-3
01700-1 – 01700-5
01720 Project Record Documents
01730 Pump Station Operation and Maintenance Manual
01740 Warranties and Bonds
01720-1 – 01720-6
01730-1 – 01730-4
01740-1 – 01740-4
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02050 Demolition of Existing Structures
02050-1 – 02050-6
02080 Abandonment, Removal and Salvage or
02080-1 – 02080-4
Disposal of Existing Pipe
02100 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control
02100-1 – 02100-2
02140 Dewatering
02140-1 – 02140-5
02210 Site Rough Grading
02210-1 – 02210-2
02215 Finish Grading
02215-1 – 02215-2
02220 Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting
02220-1 – 02220-9
02230 Site Preparation
02230-1 – 02230-4
02250 Compaction Control and Testing
02250-1 – 02250-4
02320 Trenching, Bedding, and Backfilling
02320-1 – 02320-7
02370 Erosion and Sedimentation Control
02370-1 – 02370-2
02501 Concrete Paving
02501-1 – 02501-4
02530 Sanitary Sewer Systems
02530-1 – 02530-6
02535 Sanitary Sewer Force Main Systems
02535-1 – 02535-13
02605 Precast Structures and Accessories
02605-1 – 02605-4
02650 Retirement, Removal, Salvage, and Disposal of Existing Pipe 02650-1 – 02650-7
02710 Stabilized Subgrade
02710-1 – 02710-4
02717 Soil Cement Base
02717-1 – 02717-9
02740 Paving
02740-1 – 02740-9
02771 Cure-in-Place Pipe for Sanitary Sewer Renewal
02771-1 – 02771-15
02775 Wastewater Manhole Rehabilitation
02775-1 – 02775-8
02784 Chain Link Fences and Gates
02784-1 – 02784-4
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100
03250
03300
03410
03600
Concrete Formwork
Concrete Accessories
Concrete
Precast Concrete Structures
Grout
03100-1 – 03100-4
03250-1 – 03250-4
03300-1 – 03300-12
03410-1 – 03410-4
03600-1 – 03600-7
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100
04150
04200
04220
Mortar
Masonry Accessories
Unit Masonry
Concrete Unit Masonry
04100-1 – 04100-4
04150-1 – 04150-4
04200-1 – 04200-4
04220-1 – 04220-3
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05025 Materials, Methods, and Fastening
05570 Miscellaneous Metal Assemblies
Index-2
05025-1 – 05025-4
05570-1 – 05570-3
DIVISION 6 – WOODS AND PLASTICS - NOT USED
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07900 Joint Sealants
07900-1 – 07900-5
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS - NOT USED
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09900
09905
09910
09966
Painting
Pump Station Valve Identification System
Prefabricated Fiberglass Liners
Graffiti Resistant Coatings
09900-1 – 09900-20
09905-1 – 09905-1
09910-1 – 09910-4
09966-1 – 09966-5
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10400 Identifying Devices
10400-1 – 10400-2
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11310 Submersible Pumps
11310-1 – 11310-18
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS - NOT USED
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13300 Pump Control Panel
13515 Lining Existing Sewer Piping
13516 Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes
13300-1 – 13300-7
13515-1 – 13515-5
13516-1 – 13516-8
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15064
15065
15105
15110
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings
Check Valves
Plug Valves
15064-1 - 15064-7
15065-1 – 15065-5
15105-1 – 15105-5
15110-1 – 15110-4
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010
16100
16120
16195
16476
16482
16500
16709
Basic Electrical Requirements
Raceways, Boxes and Cabinets
Wires and Cables
Electrical Identification
Disconnects Transformers and Circuit Breakers
480-Volt Motor Control Centers
Lighting System
High-Performance Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
Index-3
16010-1 – 16010-3
16100-1 – 16100-4
16120-1 – 16120-4
16195-1 – 16195-2
16476-1 – 16476-2
16482-1 – 16482-8
16500-1 – 16500-5
16709-1 – 16709-5
APPENDICES
A
Geotechnical Engineering Report
B
Forms (Digital Data Submission)
C
FDEP Wastewater Permit (General Permit)
D
List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers – Appendix D of the Manual of
Standards and Specifications for Wastewater and Water Main Construction
E
Boundary Survey(s)
Index-4
S E CT I O N 01001
GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
NOTICE AND SERVICE
A. In conformance with the requirements of Notice and Service of the General Conditions, all
notices or other papers required to be delivered by the Contractor to the County shall be
delivered to the office of the R/R Program, Engineering Division, Orange County Utilities
Department, 9150 Curry Ford Road, Orlando, FL 32825.
1.02 WORK TO BE DONE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools services and incidentals to
complete all work required by these specifications and as shown on the Drawings, at a rate of
progress which will ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Time stipulated.
B. All materials, equipment, skills, tools and labor which is reasonably and properly inferable
and necessary for the proper completion of the Work in a substantial manner and in
compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these Specifications or Drawings shall
be furnished and installed by the Contractor without additional compensation, whether
specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not.
C. The Contractor shall perform the Work complete, in place, and ready for continuous service,
and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up, replacements, and restoration required as
a result of damages caused during this construction.
D. The Contractor shall comply with all City, County, State, Federal, and other codes, which are
applicable to the proposed construction Work.
E. All newly constructed Work shall be carefully protected from injury in any way. No
wheeling, walking, or placing of heavy loads on it shall be allowed and all portions damaged
shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at his own expense.
F. Scope of Work: See Section 01010 "Summary of Work" and the Bid Schedule for details.
1.03
DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL
A. The Work shall be performed in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications prepared
by the County/Professional. All work and materials shall conform to the Orange County
Utilities Standards and Construction Specifications Manual, latest edition or as indicated in
these Specifications or Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Drawings,
Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data received from the
County/Professional, and shall notify same, in writing, of all errors, omissions, conflicts and
01001-1
discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts or discrepancies
shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory Work, faulty
construction or improper operation resulting there from, nor from rectifying such conditions at
his own expense.
C. All schedules are given for the convenience of the County and the Contractor and are not
guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the making of
estimates of the size, kind, and quantity of materials and equipment included in the Work to
be done under this Contract.
D. Intent:
1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on
the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or
mentioned in both. Work not specified either in the Drawings or in the Specifications,
but involved in carrying out their intent, or in the complete and proper execution of the
Work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically
delineated or described.
2. Items of material, equipment, machinery, and the like may be specified on the Drawings
and not in the Specifications. Such items shall be provided by the Contractor in
accordance with the specification on the Drawings.
3. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from
them of a detailed description concerning any Work to be done and materials to be
furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail
and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and
interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis.
4. Reference to the following standards of any technical society, organization or body shall
be construed to mean the latest standard, code or specification or tentative specification
adopted and published at the date of advertisement for bids, even though reference has
been made to an earlier standard. Such reference is hereby made a part of the Contract
the same as if herein repeated in full and in the event of any conflict between any of
these specifications, standard codes or tentative specifications and the Contract
Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
AA
AASHTO
ABPA
ACI
AFBMA
AGA
AGMA
AI
AIA
AIEE
AIMA
AISC
AISI
AMCA
ANSI
API
APWA
AREA
Aluminum Association
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
Acoustical and Board Products Association
American Concrete Institute
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association
American Gas Association
American Gear Manufacturers Association
The Asphalt Institute
American Institute of Architects
American Institute of Electrical Engineers
Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
American Moving and Conditioning Association
American National Standards Institute
American Petroleum Institute
American Public Works Association
American Railway Engineering Association
01001-2
ASA
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSCBC
ASTM
AWPA
AWBP
AWS
AWWA
CRSI
CS
DOT Spec
FAC
FS
IEEE
IPCEA
NBFU
NBS
NEC
NECA
NEMA
NFPA
NPT
NSF
OSHA
PCA
PCI
PS
SAE
SDI
SJI
SMACNA
SSPC
UL
USASI
American Standards Association (now ANSI)
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Standard Safety Code for Building Construction
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wood Preservers Association
American Wood Preservers Board
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standard
Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction – Florida Department of
Transportation
Florida Administrative Code
Federal Standard
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Bureau of Standards
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Contractor's Association
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Pipe Threads
National Science Foundation
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Portland Cement Association
Prestressed Concrete Institute
United States Products Standards
Society of Automotive Engineers
Steel Decks Institute
Steel Joists Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Structural Steel Painting Council
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
United States of American Standards Institute (Now ANSI)
E. When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, conflicts, errors, and discrepancies
shall be resolved from the documents given the following order of precedence:
1.
Agreement
2.
Change Orders
3.
Addenda
4.
Supplementary Conditions
5.
Instructions to Bidders
6.
General Conditions
7.
Specifications (Div. 1 through 16)
8.
Drawings
9.
Dimensions
When measurements are affected by conditions already established or where items
are to be fitted into constructed conditions, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility
to verify all such dimensions at the site and the actual job dimensions shall take
01001-3
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
1.04
precedence over scale and figure dimensions on the Drawings.
Full-size Drawing
Large-scale Drawing
Small-scale Drawing
Advertisement for Bids
Bid
Bonds
Insurance Certificates
Insurance Endorsements
Affidavits
PROTECTION AND RESTORATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property,
and shall use every means of protection necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or
indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission,
neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the Work on the part of the Contractor, such
property shall be restored by the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to
that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other manner
acceptable to the County/Professional.
B. Protection of Trees and Shrubs:
1.
Protect with boxes or other barricades
2.
Do not place excavated material so as to injure trees or shrubs
3.
Install pipelines in short tunnels between and under root systems
4.
Support trees to prevent root disturbance during nearby excavation
C. Tree and Limb Removal
1. Tree limbs, which interfere with equipment operation and are approved for pruning, shall
be neatly trimmed and the tree cut coated with tree paint.
2. The County may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the County, to remove trees
along the line or trench excavation. The Contractor shall obtain any permits required for
removal of trees. Ordered tree removal shall be paid for under the appropriate Contract
Items.
E. Trees or shrubs destroyed by negligence of the Contractor or his employees shall be replaced
by him with new stock of similar size and age, at the proper season and at the sole expense of
the Contractor.
D. Lawn Areas - All lawn areas disturbed by construction shall be replaced with like kind to a
condition similar or equal to that existing before construction. Where sod is to be removed, it
shall be carefully removed, and the same resodded, or the area where sod has been removed
shall be restored with new sod in the manner described in the applicable section.
E. Fences - Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of the
Work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor, and shall be left in as good a condition
as before the starting of the Work.
F. Where fencing, walls, shrubbery, grass strips or area must be removed or destroyed incident
01001-4
to the construction operation, the Contractor shall, after completion of the Work, replace or
restore to the original condition all such destroyed or damaged landscaping and
improvements.
G. The cost of all labor, materials, equipment, and work for restoration shall be deemed
included in the appropriate Contract Item or items, or if no specific item is provided
therefore, as part of the overhead cost of the Work, and no additional payment will be made
therefore.
1.05
PUBLIC NUISANCE
A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to, encroachment
on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive noise.
B. Sound levels measured by the County/Professional shall not exceed 45 dBA from 8 p.m. to 8
a.m. or 55 dBA 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. This sound level shall be measured at the exterior of the nearest
exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equipment shall not exceed 85 dBA at any
time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have the Work halted until
equipment can be quieted to these levels. Work stoppage by the County/Professional for
excessive noise shall not relieve the Contractor of the other portions of this specification
including, but not limited to, completion dates and bid amounts.
E. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting from the creation
of a public nuisance.
1.06
CONTRACTOR’S PAYMENTS TO COUNTY FOR OVERTIME WORK
A. County Inspector Work Hours: Normal work hours for the County’s inspector(s) are defined as
any eight (8) hour period between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. on the weekdays of
Monday through Friday. Any Owner’s Inspector(s) work beyond the aforementioned normal
work hours shall be requested in writing 48 hours in advance. All overtime and weekend work
compensation to the Owner’s Inspector(s) for working beyond the normal working hours are
considered overtime compensation and shall be paid for by the Contractor at the overtime pay
rate of $47.50 per hour. This overtime pay rate is subject to adjustment by the Owner. The
Contractor agrees that the Owner shall deduct charges for work outside normal work hours and
for overtime pay from payments due the Contractor.
1.07
MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE
A. This project includes the demolition, rehabilitation and replacement of facilities that transmit
wastewater within a wastewater collection system. The collection and transmission of
wastewater is a continuous operation and must remain in service at all times. Unless noted
otherwise on the plans, the operation of the existing wastewater pumping facility on each of
the respective locations shall remain in service until the transfer of service has been completed.
See "Transfer of Service" for additional description of these requirements. In lieu of
maintaining the existing pumping station, the Contractor may provide bypass pumping. Bypass
pumping provided by the Contractor either as alternate to maintaining the existing pumping
facility or as required when noted on the specific facility plan shall meet the requirements as
noted in Section 01516 "Collection System Bypass".
01001-5
B. The Contractor shall, prior to interrupting a any utility service (water, sewer, etc.) for the purpose
of making cut-ins to the existing lines or for any other purposes, contact the County and make
arrangements for the interruption which will be satisfactory to the County.
C. Utility lines that are damaged during construction shall be repaired by the Contractor and
service restored within 4 hours of the breakage.
1.08
TRANSFER OF SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall use temporary plugs in the existing and proposed sewer lines to control
the routing of gravity flow to the active pumping facility during the transfer period. The
proposed pumping facility shall be constructed while the existing or bypass facility is in
operation. When the County has accepted the proposed facilities and placed the facility into
operation, the transfer of service is complete. The Contractor may begin the work of
removing the existing facility or bypass pumping equipment. The Contractor shall also
install permanent plugs in the sewer pipes to allow abandonment or removal of the existing
sewer system and pumping facilities as noted on the plans.
1.09
LABOR
A. Supervision - The Contractor shall keep the Contract under his own control and it shall be his
responsibility to see that the Work is properly supervised and carried on faithfully and
efficiently. The Contractor shall supervise the Work personally or shall have a competent,
English speaking superintendent or representative, who shall be on the site of the Project at
all working hours, and who shall have full authority by the Contractor to direct the
performance of the Work and make arrangements for all necessary materials, equipment, and
labor without delay.
B. Jurisdictional Disputes - It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to pay all costs that
may be required to perform any of the Work shown on the Drawings or specified herein to
avoid any work stoppages due to jurisdictional disputes. The basis for subletting work in
question, if any, shall conform with precedent agreements and decisions on record with the
Building and Construction Trades Department, AFL-CIO, dated June, 1973, including any
amendments thereto.
C. Apprenticeship - The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of Section 446,
Florida Statutes, for all contracts in excess of $25,000 excluding roadway, highway or bridge
contracts and the Contractor agrees to insert in any subcontract under this Contract the
requirements of this Article.
1.10
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. MANUFACTURER
1.
All transactions with the manufacturers or Subcontractors shall be through the
Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request and at the County/Professional’s
option, that the manufacturer or Subcontractor communicate directly with the
County/Professional. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the
Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract.
2.
All workmanship and materials shall be of the highest quality. The equipment shall be
01001-6
3.
4.
5.
1.11
the product of manufacturers who are experienced and skilled in the field with an
established record of research and development. No equipment will be considered
unless the manufacturer has designed and manufactured equipment of comparable type
and size and have demonstrated sufficient experience in such design and manufacture.
All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the
inspection, review and acceptance of the County. No material shall be delivered to
the work without prior approval of the County/Professional.
All apparatus, mechanisms, equipment, machinery, and manufactured articles for
incorporation into the Project shall be the new (most current production at time of
bid) and unused standard products of recognized reputable manufacturers.
Manufactured and fabricated products:
a.
Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop
practices.
b.
Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be
interchangeable.
c.
Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or
classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the
same manufacturer.
d.
Products shall be suitable for service conditions as specified and as stated by
manufacturer.
e.
Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be
adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
f.
Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it
is designed or is specified.
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE
A. Where service by the manufacturer is specified to be furnished as part of the cost of the item
of equipment, the Work shall be at the Contractor's expense.
B. The services provided shall be by a qualified manufacturer's service representative to check
and verify the completed installation, place the equipment in operation, and instruct the
County's operators in the operation and maintenance procedures. Such services are to be for
period of time and for the number of trips specified. A working day is defined as a normal 8hour working day on the job and does not include travel time.
C. The services shall further demonstrate to the County/Professional’s complete satisfaction that
the equipment will satisfactorily perform the functions for which it has been installed. See
also Section 01650 "Pump Station Start-up and Testing".
1.12
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. General
1.
If, in the testing of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by the
County/Professional that the material or equipment does not comply with the
Contract, the Contractor shall be notified thereof, and he will be directed to refrain
from delivering said material of equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or
from the Work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the County.
2.
Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in
01001-7
accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEE, except as may
otherwise be stated herein.
B. Cost
1.
2.
3.
4.
County shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to
perform testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the
Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and equipment
tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.
The cost of field leakage and pressure tests and shop tests of materials and equipment
specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor,
and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price.
Notify County employed laboratory a minimum of 48 hours sufficiently in advance
of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse County
for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred.
The Contractor shall pay for all Work required to uncover, remove, replace, retest,
etc any Work not tested due to the Contractor's failure to provide the 48-hours
advance notice or due to failed tests. The Contractor shall also provide compensation
for the County/Professional’s personnel for required re-testing due to failed or
rescheduled testing.
C. Shop Testing
1.
Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency,
performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in the
shop of the manufacturer in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its
characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. No
such equipment shall be shipped to the worksite until the County/Professional
notifies the Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable.
2.
Five copies of the manufacturer's actual shop test data and interpreted results thereof,
accompanied by a certificate of authenticity notarized and signed by a responsible
official of the manufacturing company, shall be furnished to the County/Professional
as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any equipment. The cost of shop tests
(excluding cost of County's representative) and of furnishing manufacturer's
preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the
Contractor and shall be included in the Contract price.
3.
The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the County sufficiently in advance of
his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of materials especially
manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the permanent construction. Such
notice shall contain a request for inspection, the date of commencement and the
expected date of completion of the manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon
receipt of such notice, the County shall arrange to have a representative present at
such times during the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials; or he
will notify the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the
point of manufacture; or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived.
4.
When inspection is waived or when the County/Professional so requires, the
Contractor shall furnish to him authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of
Manufacture that the materials to be used in the Work have been manufactured and
tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be
notarized and shall include five (5) copies of the results of physical tests and
01001-8
5.
chemical analysis, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or
on similar products of the manufacturer.
The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any material.
Such inspections by the County shall not release the Contractor from the
responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
D. Field Testing:
1.
The County shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to
perform testing specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. Employment of the
laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the
Contract. The Contractor shall provide compensation for retesting of all failed tests.
2.
The County may at any time during the progress of the Work, request additional
testing beyond that which is specified in the Contract. This testing will be at the
County's expense. The Contractor shall assist the testing laboratory personnel in all
ways so as to facilitate access to the location of the material or equipment to be
tested. Contractor shall:
a.
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to the Project.
b.
Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative
samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
c.
Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for
concrete, and other material mixes, which require control by the testing
laboratory.
3.
The following schedule summarizes the responsibilities of various tests that may be
required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall notify the County in advance
of work so that arrangements can be made with the testing laboratory.
TEST
Soil Compaction
Low Pressure Air Exfiltration
Hydrostatic Pressure
Hydrostatic Leakage
Bacteriological
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
LBR
Concrete
All Other Testing
NOTES
A. Pipe Work: Every 300 ft. at each lift
of compaction
B. Structures: As a minimum one test per
2000 SF of fill area per lift, or at least
2 tests per structure, per lift. As
specified in material specifications
sections
Each section of gravity sewer pipe between
manholes or lift station
All segments of pressure piping (24-hour test).
All segments of pressure piping (2-hour test).
As required by local and state agencies
As required by County
Each 600 SY of pavement
Slump test each delivery, cylinders every 20 CY
As specified in various sections of the Project
Manual
PAID FOR
County
Contractor
Contractor
Contractor
County
County
County
County
As Indicated
E. Demonstration Tests: Upon completion of the Work and prior to final payment, all
equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance or
demonstration tests as specified or required to provide compliance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, fuel, energy, water and all other
equipment necessary for the demonstration tests at no additional cost to the County.
01001-9
F. Final Inspection: Prior to preparation of the final payment application, a final inspection will
be performed by the County to determine if the Work is properly and satisfactorily
constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. See also
Section 01700 "Project Closeout".
G. Inspection by existing utility owners: The Contractor shall pay for all inspections during the
progress of the Work required and provided by the owner of all existing public utilities
paralleling or crossing the Work, as shown on the Drawings. All such inspection fees shall
be deemed included in the appropriate Contract Item or items, or if no specific item is
provided therefore, as part of the overhead cost of the Work, and no additional payment will
be made therefore.
H. Inspection by Other Agencies: The Florida Department of Transportation, the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection, and other authorized governmental agencies shall
have free access to the site for inspecting materials and Work, and the Contractor shall afford
them all necessary facilities and assistance for doing so. Any instructions to the Contractor
resulting from these inspections shall be given through the County. These rights of
inspections shall not be construed to create any contractual relationship between the
Contractor and these agencies.
1.13
PROJECT SITE AND ACCESS
A. RIGHT-OF-WAY AND EASEMENTS
1.
The use of public streets and alleys shall be such as to provide a minimum of
inconvenience to the public and to other traffic. Any earth or other excavated
material spilled from trucks shall be removed by the Contractor and the streets
cleaned to the satisfaction of the County.
2.
The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, except by
written permission of the property owner.
3.
At the time of the Pre-Construction meetings, the Contractor shall fully acquaint
himself with the status of all easements required for the Work and the possibility of
parcels remaining to be acquired, if any. Should easements not be acquired by the
County in specific areas of the Work, the Contractor shall sequence and reschedule his
work therein so as not to interfere with the progress of work in other areas of the Project.
Such rescheduling of Work shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the County. The County agrees that it will make every effort to acquire all remaining
easements with all speed and diligence possible so as to allow the completion of the
Work within the Contract time.
B. ACCESS
1.
Neither the material excavated nor the materials or equipment used in the
construction of the Work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire
hydrants, valves or manholes.
2.
Access to businesses located adjacent to the project site must be maintained at all
times. Contractor may prearrange the closing of business access with the business
Owner. Such prearranged access closing shall not exceed two (2) hours. Property
drainage and grading shall be restored and all construction debris removed within 48
hours of backfilling trench.
3.
Contractor agrees that representatives of the County and any governmental agents
01001-10
will have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress and that the
Contractor shall provide facilities for such access and inspection.
1.14
UTILITIES
A. UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
1.
Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles,
tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, manholes and all
other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto, whether owned or controlled by
governmental bodies or privately owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used
to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone,
sewerage, drainage or water. Other public or private property, which may be affected
by the Work, shall be deemed included hereunder.
2.
All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary
barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to persons, and
damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and
safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel by pedestrians and
workmen. Bridges provided for access to private property during construction shall
be removed when no longer required.
3.
The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular surrounding conditions,
but shall always be confined to the limits described by the County. If any excavation
becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic at any point, the County may
require special construction procedures. As a minimum, the Contractor shall conform
to the following restoration procedures:
a.
Interim Restoration: All excavations shall be backfilled and compacted as
specified by the end of each working day. For excavations within existing
paved areas; limerock base or soil cement base (match existing) shall be
spread and compacted to provide a relatively smooth surface free of loose
aggregate material. At the end of each workweek, the S-I asphaltic surface
course shall be completed and opened to traffic. Contractor shall coordinate
his construction activity including density tests and inspections to allow
sufficient time to achieve this requirement. All driveway cuts shall be
backfilled, compacted, and limerock base spread and compacted immediately
after installation. Contractor shall coordinate with the individual property
owners prior to removing the driveway section. Any utility crossing an
existing roadway, parking lot or other paved area shall be patched by the end
of the working day.
b.
All pipe and fittings shall be neatly stored in a location, which will cause the
least disturbance to the public. All debris shall be removed and properly
disposed of by the end of each working day.
c.
Final Restoration Overlay: After completing all installations, and after testing
of the pipe (but no sooner than 30 days after applying the S-I asphaltic
surface), final restoration shall be performed. In no event shall final
restoration begin after substantial completion. Final restoration shall provide
a S-III asphaltic overlay as specified in an uninterrupted continuous operation
until completion. Any additional restoration required after testing shall be
repaired in a timely manner at no additional cost to the County.
d.
Maintenance of all restored facilities shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
This maintenance shall be performed on an on-going basis during the course
01001-11
e.
of construction. The Contractor’s Progress Schedule shall reflect the above
restoration requirements.
Additional Restoration for Work in Business or Commercial Districts: The
Contractor shall restore all private property, damaged by construction, to its
original condition. Access to businesses located adjacent to the project site
must be maintained at all times. Contractor may prearrange the closing of
business accesses with the business owner. Such prearranged access closing
shall not exceed two (2) hours. Property drainage and grading shall be
restored within 24 hours of backfilling trench.
B. EXISTING UTILITIES
1.
The locations of all existing underground piping, structures and utilities have been
taken from information received from the respective owner. The locations are shown
without express or implied representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are
complete or correct or that they represent a true picture of underground piping,
conduit and cables to be encountered.
2.
The Contractor shall, at all times in performance of the Work, employ acceptable
methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay,
injury, damage or destruction of existing public utility installations and structures;
and shall, at all times in the performance of the Work, avoid unnecessary interference
with, or interruption of, public utility services; and shall cooperate fully with the
owners thereof to that end.
3.
Pipelines shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the County
reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable
to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons. When the location
of piping is dimensioned on the Drawings, it shall be installed in that location; when
the location of piping is shown on a scaled drawing, without dimensions, the piping
shall be installed in the scaled location unless the County approves an alternate
location for the piping. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for
the Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing
different or additional items where required. The County/Professional may require
detailed pipe laying drawings and schedules for project control.
4.
The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing piping and
utilities. All utilities, which do not interfere with the completed Work, shall be
carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any way by the
Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his expense as directed
by the County. Any existing facilities, which require operation to facilitate repairs,
shall be operated only by the owner of the respective utility.
5.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles, the
stability of which may be endangered by the proximity of excavation, be temporarily
stayed and/or shored in position while Work proceeds in the vicinity of the pole and
that the utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance notice of
any such excavation by the Contractor.
01001-12
C. NOTICES
1.
All governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities, which may
be affected by the Work, will be informed in writing by the Contractor two (2) weeks
after the execution of the Contract or Contracts covering the Work. Such notice will
be sent out in general, and directed to the attention of the governmental utility
departments and other owners of public utilities for such installations and structures
as may be affected by the Work.
2.
The Contractor shall also comply with Florida Statute 553.851 regarding notification
of existing gas and oil pipeline company owners. Evidence of such notice shall be
furnished to the County within two weeks after the execution of the Contract.
3.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to contact utility companies at least 72
hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work so
maintenance personnel can locate and protect facilities, if required by the utility
company.
4.
The Contractor shall give a minimum 5 working day notice prior to utility personnel
interrupting a utility service (water, sewer, etc.) for the purpose of making cut-ins to
the existing lines or for any other purposes, contact the utility owner and make
arrangements for the utility personnel to isolate the existing lines thus providing
interruption which will be satisfactory to the utility owner.
D. EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS
1.
Exploratory excavations shall be conducted by the Contractor for the purpose of
locating underground pipelines or structures in advance of the construction. Test pits
shall be excavated in areas of potential conflicts between existing and proposed
facilities and at piping connections to existing facilities a minimum of 48 hours or
1000 feet in advance of Work. If there is a potential conflict, the Contractor is to
notify the County/Professional immediately. Information on the obstruction to be
furnished by the Contractor shall include: Location, Elevation, Utility Type, Material
and Size. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been
satisfied and the surface restored and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the
County.
E. UTILITY CROSSINGS
1.
It is intended that wherever existing utilities must be crossed, deflection of the pipe
within specified limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the obstruction
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in the opinion of the
County this procedure is not feasible, he may direct the use of fittings for a utility
crossing or conflict transition as detailed on the Drawings.
F. RELOCATIONS
1.
Relocations shown on the Drawings - Public utility installations or structures,
including but not limited to light poles, signs, fences, piping, conduits and drains that
interfere with the positioning of the Work which are shown on the Drawings to be
removed, relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as part
of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the
various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore.
2.
Relocations not shown on the Drawings
a.
Where public utility installations or structures are encountered during the
course of the Work, and are not indicated on the Drawings or in the
01001-13
3.
4.
1.15
Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the County, removal, relocation,
replacement or rebuilding is necessary to complete the Work under this
contract, such Work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction,
or such Work may be ordered, in writing by the County, for the Contractor to
accomplish.
b.
If such Work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, it will be
carried out expeditiously and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to
permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement or
rebuilding as required. If such Work is accomplished by the Contractor, it
will be paid for as a Change Order.
All existing castings, including valve boxes, junction boxes, manholes, hand holes,
pull boxes, inlets and similar structures in the areas of construction that are to remain
in service and in areas of trench restoration and pavement replacement, shall be
adjusted by the Contractor to bring them flush with the surface of the finished Work.
All existing utility systems which conflict with the construction of the Work herein,
which can be temporarily removed and replaced, shall be accomplished at the
expense of the Contractor. Work shall be done by the utility unless the utility
approves in writing that the Work may be done by the Contractor.
RELATED CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE
1.
Maintain public highway traffic within the limits of the Project for the duration of the
construction period, including any temporary suspensions of Work. Work shall also
include construction and maintenance of any necessary detour facilities; furnishing,
installing and maintaining of traffic control and safety devices during construction,
control of dust, or any other special requirements for safe and expeditious movement
of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
2.
Traffic Control shall be provided at the Contractor's expense by the Contractor's
personnel or off-duty uniformed police officer, depending on and as required by the
applicable traffic control requirements jurisdictional to the construction or road.
3.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Maintenance of Traffic plan (MOT) to the
County/Professional and to the County Public Works Department for review and
acceptance prior to commencing any Work on the site. The Traffic Control Plan shall
detail procedures and protective measures proposed by the Contractor to provide for
protection and control of traffic affected by the Work consistent with the following
applicable standards:
a.
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Latest Edition
including all subsequent supplements issued by the Florida Department of
Transportation, (FDOT Spec.).
b.
Manual of Traffic Control and Safe Practices for Street and Highway
Construction, Maintenance and Utility Operations, FDOT.
c.
Right-of-Way Utilization Regulations, Orange County, Florida, latest edition.
All references to the respective agency in the above referenced standards
shall be construed to also include the County for this Work.
4.
Before closing any thoroughfare, the Contractor shall give written notice to, and if
necessary, obtain a permit or permits from the duly constituted public authority
having jurisdiction over the thoroughfare. Notice shall be given no less than 72 hours
in advance of the time when it may be necessary in the process of construction to
01001-14
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
close such thoroughfare, or as may be otherwise provided in the acceptable
Maintenance of Traffic plan(MOT).
The Contractor shall sequence and plan construction operations and shall generally
conduct his Work in such a manner as not to unduly or unnecessarily restrict or
impede existing normal traffic through the streets of the local community.
Insofar as it is practicable, excavated material and spoil banks shall not be located in
such a manner as to obstruct traffic. The traveled way of all streets, roads and alleys
shall be kept clear and unobstructed insofar as is possible and shall not be used for
the storage of construction materials, equipment, supplies, or excavated earth, except
when and where necessary.
If required by duly constituted public authority, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, construct bridges or other temporary crossing structures over trenches so as
not to unduly restrict traffic. Such structures shall be of adequate strength and proper
construction and shall be maintained by the Contractor in such a manner as not to
constitute an undue traffic hazard. Private driveways shall not be closed except when
and where necessary, and then only upon due advance notice to the County and for
the shortest practicable period of time consistent with efficient and expeditious
construction. The Contractor shall be liable for any damages to persons or property
resulting from his work.
The Contractor shall make provisions at all "open cut" street crossings to allow a
minimum of one lane to be open for vehicular traffic at all times. Lane closing shall
be as permitted by the local governing authority and shall be repaired to a smooth,
safe driving surface immediately following the installation of pipe or conduit.
Flagmen shall be required, in addition to barricades, signs and other protective
devices at all lane closings.
The Contractor shall make provisions at cross streets for the free passage of vehicles
and pedestrians, either by bridging or otherwise, and shall not obstruct the sidewalks,
gutters, or streets, nor prevent in any manner the flow of water in the latter, but shall
use all proper and necessary means to permit the free passage of surface water along
the gutters.
The Contractor shall immediately cart away all offensive matter; exercising such
precaution as may be directed by the County. All material excavated shall be so
disposed of as to inconvenience the public and adjacent tenants as little as possible
and to prevent injury to trees, sidewalks, fences and adjacent property of all kinds.
B. BARRIER AND LIGHTS
1.
The Contractor shall exercise extreme care in the conduct of the Work to protect
health and safety of the workmen and the public. The Contractor shall provide all
protective measures and devices necessary, in conformance with applicable local,
state and federal regulations regarding their need and use. Protective measures shall
include but are not limited to barricades, warning lights/flashers and safety ropes.
2.
All equipment and vehicles operating within ten (10) feet of the roadway shall have
flashing strobe lights attached.
C. DEWATERING AND FLOTATION
1.
The Contractor, with his own equipment, shall do all pumping necessary to dewater
any part of the Work area during construction operations to insure dry working
conditions. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for any tanks, wet wells
or similar structures that may become buoyant during the construction and
01001-15
modification operations due to the ground water or floods and before the structure is
put into operation. The proposed final structures have been designed against
buoyancy; however the Contractor may employ methods, means and techniques
during the various stages of construction (or other conditions), which may affect the
buoyancy of structures. Should there be any possibility of buoyancy of a structure,
the Contractor shall take the necessary steps to prevent its buoyancy either by
increasing the structure's weight, by filling it with approved material or other
acceptable methods. Damage to any structures due to floating or flooding shall be
repaired or the structures replaced at the Contractor's expense.
D. DUST AND EROSION CONTROL
1.
The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic by the
use of water and deliquescent salts.
2.
Erosion and Sedimentation Control
a.
Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing,
mulching, netting, watering and reseeding on-site surfaces and soil and
borrow area surfaces and providing interceptor ditches at ends of berms and
at those locations which will ensure that erosion during construction will be
either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the
County, FDEP and any other agency having jurisdiction.
b.
Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams,
traps, barriers, and appurtenances at the foot of sloped surfaces which will
ensure that sedimentation pollution will be either eliminated or maintained
within acceptable limits as established by the County, FDEP and any other
agency having jurisdiction.
c.
The construction of temporary erosion and sedimentation control facilities
shall be in accordance with the technical provision of section 104-6.4 of the
1991 Edition, FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction.
d.
Contractor is responsible for providing effective temporary erosion and
sediment control measures during construction or until final controls become
effective.
E. LINES AND GRADES
1.
All Work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and
grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the County/Professional. The full
responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the Contractor.
2.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, establish all working or construction lines
and grades as required from the project control points set by the County, and shall be
solely responsible for the accuracy thereof.
3.
Water main and forcemain shall have a minimum of 36-inches of cover over the top
of the pipe. Cover shall vary to provide long uniform gradient or slope to pipe to
minimize air pockets and air release valves. The stationing shown on the Drawings
for air and vacuum release valve assemblies are approximate and the Contractor shall
field adjust these locations to locate these valves at the highest point in the pipeline
installed. All locations must be acceptable by the County.
4.
To insure a uniform gradient for gravity pipe and pressure pipe, all lines shall be
installed using the following control techniques as a minimum:
a.
Gravity lines: continuous control, using laser beam technology.
01001-16
b.
Pressure lines; control stakes set at 50 ft intervals using surveyors’ level
instrument.
F. CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.
The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the Work that
may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a manner
satisfactory to the County and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
2.
Preparation:
a.
Inspect the existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to
damage and/or movement during cutting and patching.
b.
Provide adequate temporary support to assure the structural integrity of all
facilities during completion of the Work.
3.
Performance:
a.
Execute cutting and demolition by methods, which will prevent damage to
other existing facilities and will provide proper surfaces to receive
installation of equipment and repair.
b.
Excavation and backfilling shall be performed in a manner, which will
prevent settlement and/or damage to existing facilities.
c.
All pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits and other penetration through surfaces
shall be made airtight.
d.
Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match
adjacent finishes.
G. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
1.
Temporary fences: If, during the course of the Work, it is necessary to remove or
disturb any fencing, the Contractor shall at his own expense, provide a suitable
temporary fence which shall be maintained until the permanent fence is replaced.
The County/Professional will be solely responsible for the determination of the
necessity for providing a temporary fence and the type of temporary fence to be used.
2.
Responsibility for Temporary Structures: In accepting the Contract, the Contractor
assumes full responsibility for the sufficiency and safety of all temporary structures
or work and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper
construction, maintenance or operation and will indemnify and save harmless the
County from all claims, suits or actions and damages or costs of every description
arising by reason of failure to comply with the above provisions.
H. DAILY REPORTS
1.
The Contractor shall submit to the County’s Representative daily reports of
construction activities including non-work days. The reports shall be complete in
detail and shall include the following information:
a.
Days from Notice to Proceed; Days remaining to substantial and final
completion.
b.
Weather information
c.
Work activities with reference to the Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule
activity numbers (including manpower, equipment and daily production
quantities for each individual activity.)
d.
Major deliveries
e.
Visitors to site
f.
Test records
01001-17
2.
3.
4.
g.
New problems, and
h.
Other pertinent information
A similar report shall be submitted for/by each Subcontractor.
The report(s) shall be submitted to the County Representative’s Field Office within
two (2) days of the respective report date. Each report shall be signed by the
Contractor’s Superintendent or Project Manager. Pay request will not be processed
unless daily reports are current.
If a report is incomplete, in error, or contains misinformation, a copy of the report
shall be returned by the County Representative to the Contractor’s Superintendent or
Project Manager with corrections noted. When chronic errors or omissions occur, the
Contractor shall correct the procedures by which the reports are produced.
I. CLEANING
1.
During Construction
a.
During construction of the Work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the
site of the Work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and
rubbish as is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the
site if, in the opinion of the County, such material, debris, or rubbish
constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable.
b.
Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and
rubbish and remove such from the site periodically by disposal at a legal
disposal area away from the site.
c.
Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue
cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished. Use only those
cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and
which will not damage surfaces. Use only those cleaning materials and
methods recommended by the manufacturer of the surface material to be
cleaned. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting
from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces.
d.
The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary
structures when no longer necessary to the Work at the direction of the
County.
2.
Final Cleaning
a.
At the conclusion of the Work, all equipment, tools, temporary structures and
materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and he
shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other
foreign substances. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. Thoroughly
clean all installed equipment and materials to a bright, clean, polished and
new appearing condition. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains,
fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior
and exterior surfaces. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other
surfaces of the grounds.
b.
The Work shall be left in a condition as shown on the Drawings and the
remainder of the site shall be restored to a condition equal or better than what
existed before the Work.
c.
Prior to final completion, or County occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an
inspection of interior and exterior surfaces, and all work areas to verify that
the entire Work is clean. The County will determine if the final cleaning is
acceptable.
01001-18
1.16
CONSTRUCTION NOT PERMITTED
A. USE OF EXPLOSIVES
1.
No blasting shall be done except upon approval by the County and the governmental
agency or political subdivision having jurisdiction. When the use of explosives is
approved by the County as necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor
shall use the utmost care so as not to endanger life or property, and assume
responsibility for any such damage resulting from his blasting operations, and
whenever directed, the number and size of the charges shall be reduced. All
explosives shall be stored in a secure manner and all such storage places shall be
marked clearly, "DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES" and shall be in care of competent
watchmen. All permits required for the use of explosives shall be obtained by the
Contractor at his expense. All requirements of the governmental agency issuing
permit shall be observed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01001-19
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. This Contract is for the Pump Stations R/R Tier 16 - Breezewood Unit 1- PS 3014, Lake
Sparling Heights Unit 1- PS 3028, Lake Sparling Heights Unit 2- PS 3202 Improvement
Project as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The Work consists of furnishing all
labor, equipment, and materials for the construction of the facilities consisting of, but not
limited to the expansion of or improvements to the equipment and structures associated with
the following:
For the BREEZEWOOD UNIT 1 - Pump Station #3014, the work to be done is:
• Construct new wet well with dual pumps and valve vault assembly.
• Provide dewatering as necessary and sewage by-pass pumping, including MOT for
work to be performed.
• Install one new 4 foot diameter manhole.
• Furnish and install ±26 lineal feet of 8-inch PVC gravity main.
• Furnish and install ±48 lineal feet of 4-inch DR18 PVC force main by open cut.
• Convert existing wet well into manhole, which includes installing liner for converted
wet well, cleaning of the wet well prior to liner installation, disposal of all loose
materials, grease/fats, and removal of hydrogen sulfide contamination from the wet
well during cleaning.
• Demolish and remove existing valves and vault.
• Rehabilitate 2 existing manholes.
• Install retaining wall (±128 feet).
• Install liner for ±263 lineal feet of existing 8-inch gravity main.
• Remove existing asphalt and construct access driveway, including provisions for
maintenance of traffic.
• Install water service connection to new PS.
• Perform SCADA and panel and electrical improvements as shown of the plans.
• Work also includes grading, sodding, earthwork, fencing, pavement restoration,
concrete sidewalk, appurtenances and miscellaneous improvements, all in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
For the LAKE SPARLING HEIGHTS UNIT 1 - Pump Station #3028, the work to be
done is:
• Replace the existing pumps at the pump station with two (2) new wastewater
submersible pumps.
• Install liner for the wet well, including cleaning of the wet well prior to liner
installation as indicated in these specifications, disposal of all loose materials,
grease/fats, and removal of hydrogen sulfide contamination from the wet well
during cleaning.
01010-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
Provide sewage by-passing pumping, including MOT for work to be performed.
Demolish existing valve vault and replace with new above ground valves and piping
and emergency connection.
Rehabilitate and line one existing manhole as shown on plans.
Install liner for ±509 lineal feet of existing 8-inch gravity main.
Replace electrical panel and provide all electrical improvements shown on the plans
Work also includes sodding, pavement and sidewalk restoration as necessary,
appurtenances and miscellaneous improvement, all in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
For the LAKE SPARLING HEIGHTS UNIT 2 - Pump Station # 3202, the work to be
done is:
• Construct new wet well with dual pumps and valve vault assembly.
• Provide dewatering as necessary and sewage by-passing pumping, including MOT
for work to be performed.
• Install of ±30 lineal feet of 8” diameter gravity main.
• sewage by-passing, including maintenance of traffic
• Convert existing wet well into a manhole, which includes installing liner for
converted wet well, cleaning of the wet well prior to liner installation, disposal of all
loose materials, grease/fats, and removal of hydrogen sulfide contamination from the
wet well during cleaning.
• Installation of ±40 lineal feet of 4-inch PVC forcemain.
• Install retaining wall (±107’).
• Install liner for ±136 lineal feet of existing 8-inch gravity main
• Install plug valve, and rehabilitate three (3) existing manholes as shown on the plans
• Demolish and remove existing valve and vault.
• Construct new driveway to PS.
• Install water service connection to PS.
• Relocate existing SCADA pole and panel, and provide electrical improvements,
• Work also includes grading, sodding, removal of existing asphalt drive, earthwork,
pavement restoration, concrete sidewalk, fencing, appurtenances and miscellaneous
improvement, all in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, tools, services and incidentals to complete
all Work required by these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings and shall have
experience with water main replacement in an existing subdivision.
C. The Contractor shall perform the Work complete, in place, and ready for continuous service,
and shall include repairs, testing, permits, cleanup, replacements and restoration required as a
result of disruption or damages caused during this Construction.
D. All materials, equipment, skills, tools and labor which is reasonably and properly inferable
compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these Specification or Drawings shall
specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not. The Contractor shall comply with all
Municipal, County, State, Federal, and other codes which are applicable to this Project.
01010-2
E. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, tools, services and incidentals to complete
all Work required by these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. If conflicts arise
between these specifications and the latest OCU Standards and Construction Specification
Manual, then the OCU Standards shall govern.
F. The Contractor shall perform the Work complete, in place, and ready for continuous service,
and shall include repairs, testing, permits, cleanup, replacements and restoration required as a
result of disruption or damages caused during this Construction.
G. All materials, equipment, skills, tools and labor which is reasonably and properly inferable
compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these Specification or Drawings shall
specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not. The Contractor shall comply with all
Municipal, County, State, Federal, and other codes which are applicable to this Project.
1.02
WORKING HOURS
A. Working hours for the County Inspector are an 8-hour period between the hours of 7:00 a.m.
and 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Any work beyond the 8-hour period is to be
requested in writing 48 hours prior and paid for by the Contractor. Any work required on
Saturday, Sunday or Holidays shall be requested in writing 48 hours in advance. All requests
must be submitted to the County and approved by the County in advance. Under emergency
situations, a verbal request may be made with a follow-up written request.
B. The Contractor shall pay the County for County Inspector time outside of normal Working
Hours at a rate of $51.00/hour. The Contractor agrees that the County shall deduct such
charges from the Contract Amount by a deductive Change Order.
1.03
CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES
A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of
products and materials at the job site. If additional storage or work areas are required, they
shall be obtained by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04
SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall establish his work sequence based on the use of crews to facilitate
completion of construction and testing within the specified Contract Time.
B. The sequence of demolition and renovation of the existing facilities will be in accordance
with the approved demolition and removal plan. Below is a basic outline of project sequence
to be used as the basis for Contractor’s detailed sequence of construction:
a. Install temporary bypass pump station so that existing PS can be taken off line to be
worked on by the contractor. Utilize existing manholes for temporary by-pass
pumping by installing the temporary pumping system in existing manhole. The
temporary force mains from each pumping system will discharge to the existing force
mains at each of the pump station sites through a wet-tap connection.
b. Remove pumps, piping, and all appurtenances in the existing wet well.
c. Convert existing wet well to new manhole and clean and line as required.
01010-3
d. Install new electrical controls and relocate SCADA components.
e. Construct CMU screen wall as necessary, access gate, and driveway.
f. Discontinue bypass pumping/place once new pump station has been constructed and
cleared for service by the FDEP.
g. Complete remaining improvements.
1.05
PUBLIC UTILITY INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall give written notice to all governmental utility departments and other
owners of public utilities of the location of the proposed construction operations, at least
seventy-two hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work.
B. Some of the utility contacts are listed on the plans for the Contractor’s convenience.
C. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of the public utility installation
and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be done by
methods approved by the utility involved.
END OF SECTION
01010-4
S E CT I O N 01021
SOILS REPORT AND OTHER INFORMATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Identification of reports of existing conditions.
PART 4 - BIDDER’S/CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR INVESTIGATING AND
WORKING WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS.
1.02
LAND IN-ADDITION TO THE SITE
A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining any lands, areas, properties, facilities and easements,
in addition to those furnished by the County, that the Contractor considers necessary for
temporary facilities, storage, disposal of spoil or waste material or other purposes the
Contractor determines necessary to complete the Work. Contractor shall provide written
documentation from owner to use such land or facilities The County and Geotech do not
assume any responsibility for existing conditions at such lands, areas, properties, facilities
and/or easements obtained by the Contractor.
1.03
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND OTHER PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
A. This Section identifies reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions, and
drawings of physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface structures that have been
used in the preparation of the Contract Documents. Contractor may rely upon any technical
information and data in those reports that are designated as Authorized Technical Data, but
those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents.
B. Any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor based on any Authorized
Technical Data will be at the Contractor’s own risk. Contractor’s reliance on any nontechnical information, data, interpretations or opinions also will also be at Contractor’s own
risk. The County/Professional assume no responsibility for any understanding reached or
representation made about subsurface conditions and physical conditions of existing
structures, except as otherwise expressly shown in or represented by the Authorized
Technical Data provided.
C. The only information or data contained in the geotechnical report and used in the preparation
of the Contract Documents that may be properly considered authorized technical data
concerning subsurface conditions is found in Appendix A "Geotechnical Report". Such
technical data are made available to allow the Contractor to have access to the same
information available to the County. The County/Professional does not warrant the accuracy
or completeness of any such information or that the Contract Documents identify all the
existing relevant reports and/or documents.
01021-1
1.04
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A Information or data about physical conditions of Underground Utilities, which have been
used in the preparation of the Contract Documents, is shown or indicated in the Drawings
and technical specifications. Such information and data is based on information and data
obtained from record documents or furnished to the County by the owners of those
Underground Utilities or by others.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXISTING GROUND SURFACE AND UNDERGROUND CONDITIONS; GENERALLY
A. Where existing ground conditions are shown on the plans hereto attached, the elevations are
believed to be reasonably correct but are not guaranteed to be absolutely so, and, together
with any schedule of quantities, are presented only as an approximation. The Contractor shall
satisfy itself, however, by actual examination of the site of the Work, as to the existing
elevations and the amount of work required under the Contract.
B. Where test pits and borings have been dug, the results supplied to the County/Professional by
the soils Engineer may be given on the plans or are on file in the County/Professional’s
office and available for review . The County does not guarantee the accuracy or correctness
of this information. If the Contractor desires any additional information relating to the soils
investigation, contact the County/Professional to obtain such information. County does not
guarantee the accuracy or correctness of any such information supplied to the Contractor.
C. If, upon notice of a differing subsurface or latent physical condition from the Contractor, the
County determines there was no unforeseen condition and unnecessary tests and
investigations were conducted solely at the Contractor’s request, any unnecessary expenses
may be deducted from the Final Payment for the Contract. No increase in Contract Amount
or Contract Time will be made if the differing site conditions were known or could have
been discovered by the types of examinations that the Contractor, as Bidder, was responsible
for. Claims based on groundwater table conditions will not be considered unforeseen
subsurface conditions and will not be allowed. Any information indicated in the Contract
Documents as to the groundwater table conditions has been provided for general information
purposes only and is not intended to represent that the same conditions will exist during the
execution of the Work. Further, no increase in Contract Amount or Contract Time will be
made for costs incurred prior to the Contractor’s written notice as required by the Contract
Documents. The County will be allowed at least ten (10) days to investigate any alleged
differing site conditions and to take appropriate action, before the Contractor is entitled to
any adjustment in Contract Amount or Contract Time for Delay.
3.02
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. The Contractor will be responsible for the safety and protection of, and providing for the
repair of any damage done to the Work and existing surface and subsurface structures. The
Contractor will be responsible for any damages and injury resulting from the failure to
01021-2
excavate in a careful and prudent manner.
B. Contractor shall have full responsibility for locating all underground pipelines, conduits,
ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments,
and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases,
steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television,
water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control
systems, shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, in advance of construction,
coordinating the Work with the actual locations found and making note of the actual
locations on the record Drawings. Contractor shall exercise extreme caution when locating
underground facilities to minimize the risk of damage from Contractor’s activities. The
Contractor will immediately notify the County and the owner of any Underground Utilities
that are inaccurately identified or located on the Drawings.
C. The Contractor will be responsible for any delay and all costs relating to the obligations set
forth in this Section, except as provided by allowances specific to Underground Utilities.
D. The Contractor will promptly notify the County, in writing, whenever the Contractor
discovers that actual physical conditions of Underground Utilities differ materially from
those indicated by the Contract Documents or Authorized Technical Data provided with the
Contract Documents. Further, the Contractor promptly will notify the County, in writing,
whenever the Contractor encounters Underground Utilities not shown or indicated in/through
the Contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been foreseen.
E. The County and Contractor will follow the provisions of the General Conditions with respect
to any conclusions reached by the County after the County compares the actual underground
utility conditions with those included in the information provided to the Contractor.
3.03
ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. The Contractor will not, at any time, cause or permit any Hazardous Materials to be brought
upon, stored, manufactured, blended, handled, or used in, on, or about the Project or the Site
for any purpose except as lawful and necessary and in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor will not cause or permit Hazardous Materials to be brought on
Site unless they have been specifically pre-identified by the Contractor, and approved in
writing in advance by the County.
B. The Contractor will defend, save, indemnify and hold harmless the County, their agents and
employees from and against all liabilities, claims, damages, losses and expenses including
attorney's fees, which arise at any time during or after completion of the Work as a result of
or in connection with:
1. The Contractor’s breach of any prohibition or requirement set forth in this Section, or
B.2 Any Hazardous Materials discharged, released, deposited or introduced in the soil or
surface or groundwater in, on, under, or about the Work, the Site or other properties as a
result of the activities of the Contractor, the Subcontractors and their respective agents
and employees in connection with the Work.
C. This Contractor’s indemnity obligation includes without limitation, costs incurred in
connection with any investigation of site conditions or any cleanup, remediation, removal, or
restoration required by the County or any federal, State, or local Public Agency because of:
01021-3
1. The occurrence of any Hazardous Materials present in the soil or surface or groundwater
in, on, under, or about the Work or the Site;
2. The diminution in value of the Work or the Site;
3. Damages for the loss or restriction on use of the Work or of any amenity of the Work or
the Property; and/or
4. Amounts paid in settlement of claims, penalties, attorneys fees, court costs, consultant
and laboratory fees and experts’ fees.
D. The Contractor will immediately notify the County in writing of any significant release of
Hazardous Materials at the Project or the Site, specifying the nature and quantity of the
release, the location of the release, and the measures taken to contain and clean up the release
and ensure that future releases do not occur.
E. The Contractor agrees that insulation and any other construction materials containing
asbestos or urea formaldehyde will not be used on the Work, and that all Sub-agreements
will prohibit the use of construction materials (including, but not limited to, insulation)
containing asbestos or urea formaldehyde.
3.04
DIFFERING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CONDITIONS:
A. If the Contractor unexpectedly encounters material reasonably believed to be Hazardous
Material, the Contractor will immediately stop all affected Work, give written notice to the
County and take appropriate health and safety precautions. Unless the Contract Documents
require otherwise, the Contractor will conduct an investigation. If upon due investigation, the
Contractor determines the material a Hazardous Material that may present a danger to
persons or the surroundings, the Contractor will recommend a solution to the County. In any
such case, the affected Work will be considered to have been under a suspension of Work.
B. If the Hazardous Material is not required Work under the Drawings and/or Specifications,
the County will proceed to have the Hazardous Material removed or rendered harmless
through a Change Order or by means of another contract or as the County otherwise deems
expedient. Alternatively, the County will terminate the affected Work or Contract for the
County’s convenience.
C. If the County did not elect termination, once the Hazardous Material has been removed or
rendered harmless, the affected Work will be resumed as directed in writing by the County.
Any determination by the Florida Department of Community Health or the Department of
Environmental Quality that the Hazardous Material has been removed or rendered harmless
will be binding upon the County and Contractor for the purposes of resuming the affected
Work.
D. If the Contractor is responsible for the Hazardous Material, the Contractor will bear its
proportionate share of the delay and costs involved in cleaning up the Site and removing and
rendering it harmless to the satisfaction of the County and all Political Subdivisions with
jurisdiction. The Contractor will be solely responsible if the Hazardous Material was brought
to the Site by the Contractor, or results in whole or in part from any violation by the
Contractor of any applicable Laws.
E. If the Contractor is responsible, but fails to take appropriate action, and the County acts
accordingly, the Contractor will defend, save, indemnify and hold harmless the County from
01021-4
and against all claims arising from the County’s exercise of appropriate action.
F. If the Contractor is not responsible, the County will issue a Change Order with the necessary
changes. The Change Order will adjust Contract Amount and/or Contract Time as made
necessary by the changes and resulting unreasonable delay under the circumstances
attributable to the County /Professional.
3.05
INCIDENTS WITH ARCHAEOLOGICAL FEATURES:
A. The Contractor will immediately notify in writing the County and all Federal, State and local
agencies with jurisdiction of any Archaeological Feature deposits encountered or unearthed.
The Contractor will protect such Archaeological Features in a proper and satisfactory
manner. No further disturbance of the Archaeological Features will take place until work is
allowed to resume in the affected areas.
B. If the County concludes that the Contract Documents require changes because of
Archaeological Feature deposits encountered, the County will issue a Change Order with the
necessary changes in the Work. The Change Order also will adjust Contract Amount and/or
Contract Time as made necessary by those changes and by any resulting unreasonable delay
under the circumstances attributable to the County/Professional.
END OF SECTION
01021-5
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
01021-1
S E CT I O N 01025
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements to define pay items and
determine payable amounts, and includes but is not limited to:
1.
General Provisions
2.
Cash Allowances
3.
Work Not Paid for Separately
4.
Measurement for Payment
5.
Partial Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment
1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. This specification includes standard descriptions for all bid items. This Contract’s specific
bid items are listed in the Bid Schedule.
B. The total Contract Amount shall cover the Work required by the Contract Documents. All
costs in connection with the successful completion of the Work, including furnishing all
materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances; providing all construction, equipment,
and tools; and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the Work,
shall be included in the unit and lump sum prices bid. All Work not specifically set forth as
a pay item in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and
all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the prices bid.
C. If used, all estimated quantities stipulated in the Bid Schedule or other Contract Documents
are approximate and are to be used only (a) for the purpose of comparing the bids submitted
for the Work, and (b) as a basis for determining an initial Contract Amount. The actual
amounts of Work completed and materials furnished under unit price items may differ from
the estimated quantities. The County does not expressly or by implication represent that the
actual quantities involved will correspond exactly to the quantities stated in the Bid
Schedule; nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstanding or deception because of such
estimate or quantities or of the character, location or other conditions pertaining to the Work.
Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of work performed or
material furnished in accordance with the Drawings and other Contract Documents, and it is
understood that the quantities may be increased or decreased as provided in the General
Conditions.
01025 - 1
OCU Master CIP Technical Specifications
rev: November 2012
D. If used, the unit prices listed in the Bid Schedule shall include all services, obligations,
responsibilities, labor, materials, devices, equipment, royalties and license fees, supervision,
temporary facilities, construction equipment, bonds, insurance, taxes, clean up, traffic
control, control surveys, field offices, close out, overhead and profit and all connections,
appurtenances and any other incidental items of any kind or nature, as are necessary to
complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
E. Except for mobilization/demobilization and project record documents, payment for Work
will be based on the percent of completed work of each item in the Schedule of Values,
including stored materials, as determined by the County. Progress of work in each item of
the Schedule of Values will be determined separately by the County. However, the County
will issue a single payment certificate for progress on the Contract.
F. The Contractor agrees that it will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or
otherwise because of any difference between the amounts of work actually performed and
materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts therefore.
G. Where payment by scale weight is specified under certain items, the Contractor shall provide
suitable weighing equipment which shall be kept in accurate adjustment at all times and
certified. The weighing of all material shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence
and under the supervision of the County.
H. All schedules included in the Contract Documents are given for convenience and are not
guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the making of
estimates of the size, kind, and quantity of materials and equipment included in work to be
done under this Contract.
I. Where pipe fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the Contractor's
convenience and does not relieve the Contractor from laying and jointing different or
additional items where required.
1.03
CASH ALLOWANCES – N/A
1.04
WORK NOT PAID FOR SEPARATELY
A. Delivery: Payment for equipment delivery, storage or freight shall be included in the pay
items including their installation and no other separate payment will be made therefore.
B. Bonds: Payment for bonds required by the Contract shall be included in the pay items for the
Work covered by the required bonds and no separate payment will be made.
C. Preparation of Site: Payment for preparation of site shall be included in pay items proposed
for the various items of Work and no separate payment will be made therefore. Preparation
of site includes setting up construction plant, offices, shops, storage areas, sanitary and other
facilities required by the specifications or state law or regulations; providing access to the
site; obtaining necessary permits and licenses; payments of fees; general protection,
temporary heat and utilities including electrical power; providing shop and working
drawings, certificates and schedules; providing required insurance; cleaning up; and all other
01025 - 2
rev: November 2012
work regardless of its nature which may not be specifically referred to in a Bid Item but is
necessary for the complete construction of the project set forth by the Contract.
D. Permitting & Permit Fees.
E. The County reserves the right to delete any item included in the Schedule of Values and
decrease the Contract Price by the scheduled amount for the item deleted.
1.05
MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
A. Methods of Measurement - Generally:
1. Units of measurement shall be defined in general terms as follows:
a. Linear Feet (LF)
b. Square Feet (SF)
c. Square Yards (SY)
d. Cubic Yards (CY)
e. Each (EA)
f. Sacks (SK)
g. Lump Sum (LS)
2. Unit Price Contracts/Items:
a. Linear Feet (LF) shall be measured along the horizontal length of the centerline of
the installed material, unless otherwise specified. Pipe shall be measured along the
length of the completed pipeline, regardless of the type of joint required, without
deduction for the length of valves or fittings. Pipe included within the limits of lump
sum items will not be measured.
b. Square Feet (SF), Square Yards (SY), Cubic Yards (CY), Each (EA) and Sacks (SK)
shall be measured as the amount of the unit of measure installed and compacted
within the limits specified and shown in the Specifications and Drawings. Slope
angles and elevations shall be measured using land-surveying equipment. Contractor
shall provide supporting documentation (i.e. drawings, delivery tickets, invoices,
survey calculations, etc.) to verify actual installed quantities.
B. Lump Sum Contracts/Items - Generally:
1. Quantities provided in the Schedule of Values are for the purpose of estimating the
completion status for progress payments. Payment will be made for each individual
item on a percentage of completion basis as estimated by the Contractor and
approved by the County.
2. Adjustments to costs provided in the accepted Schedule of Values may be made only by
Change Order.
3. The County reserves the right to delete any item included in the Schedule of Values and
decrease the Contract Price by the scheduled amount for the item deleted.
1.06
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ITEMS
A. Only those bid items included in the Bid Schedule are applicable for this Contract. The
County has standardized the measurement and payment items. Currently, there are
approximately 100 measurement and payment items describing approximately 300 bid items.
The bid item numbering system comprises five sections that are divided into 23 subsections.
01025 - 3
rev: November 2012
The sections and subsections are listed below.
10. General Requirements
10.1 General
11. Site Work
11.1 Miscellaneous
11.2 Road Work
11.3 Install/Replace Fence or Wall
11.4 Bypass Pumping
11.5 Abandon or Remove Pipe/Structure
12. Pressure Pipes
12.1 Pressure Pipe and Fittings and Restrained Joints
12.2 Valves
12.3 Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly
12.4 Cut-in Connections to Existing Main
12.5 Piping Appurtenances
12.6 Directional Drill
12.7 Pipe Bursting
13. Wastewater Collection System
13.1 Cleaning Sanitary Sewers
13.2 CCTV Sanitary Sewers
13.3 Install/Replace Sanitary Sewer
13.4 Install/Replace Sanitary Manholes
13.5 Sanitary Manhole Rehabilitation
13.6 Sanitary Service Laterals and Cleanouts
13.7 Cured-in-Place Pipe (CIPP) Liner
13.8 Sanitary Sewer Pipe Bursting
14. Pump Stations
14.1 Wastewater Duplex Pump Station
14.2 Wastewater Triplex Pump Station
All of the subsections have bid item measurement and payment descriptions. Several bid
items in the Project Bid Schedule may be described with the same bid item measurement and
payment description in Table A, "Measurement and Payment Items". The bid items in the
Project Bid Schedule are related to the Section 01025 measurement and payment items as
follows:
1. All of the bid items in the Project Bid Schedule have 8 numerical digits.
2. Table A, “Measurement and Payment Items” for each of the bid items there are five
numerical digits followed by “.xxx”.
3. The first 5 numerical digits of the bid item in the Project Bid Schedule designate the
measurement and payment item found in Table A, "Measurement and Payment Items."
01025 - 4
rev: November 2012
Table A
Orange County Utilities
Pg 1
10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10.1 - General
Bid Item 10.110.xxx
Mobilization, Demobilization, Bonds, and Permits
(not to exceed 5% of the total of all bid items except bid items under
section 10.1 General)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement of various items for Mobilization and Demobilization shall not be made for
payment and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. This lump sum price shall not exceed 5% of
the total of all bid items except bid items under section 10.1 General.
Payment: Payment of 75 percent of the applicable lump sum price for the item shall be full compensation for
the Work consisting of the preparatory Work and operations in mobilizing for beginning Work on the
Contract, including, but not limited to, movement of those personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to
the project site, preparation of submittals, and for the establishment of temporary offices and buildings,
safety equipment and first aid supplies, project signs, field surveys, sanitary and other facilities required by
these specifications, and State and local laws and regulations. The costs of General Requirements (Section
01001), bonds, permits, and any required insurance, project signs, and any other preconstruction expense
necessary for the start of the work, excluding the cost of construction materials, shall also be included. This
Work also consist of the general project management of the Work including, but not limited to, field
supervision and office management, as well as other incidental cost for management of the Work during the
duration of the Contract. This Work also includes maintenance of the field offices for the duration of the
Contract.
Payment of the remaining 25 percent of the applicable lump sum price for this item also consists of
demobilization or the operations normally involved in ending Work on the project including, but not limited
to, termination and removal of temporary utility service and field offices; demolition and removal of
temporary structures and facilities; restoration of Contractor storage areas; disposal of trash and rubbish, and
any other post-construction work necessary for the proper conclusion of the Work.
Bid Item 10.120.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 10.130.xxx
a.
Preconstruction Audio-Video Documentation
Measurement: Measurement shall be based on the satisfactory submittal of a comprehensive pre-construction
video in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 01101).
Payment: Payment of the applicable Contract lump sum price as stated in the proposal will be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to create a comprehensive preconstruction video in accordance with the County requirements and specification.
Indemnification
Payment: In consideration of the Contractor's Indemnity Agreement as set out in the Contract Documents,
the County specifically agrees to give the Contractor a maximum of $100.00 and other good and valuable
consideration, receipt of which is acknowledged upon signing of the Agreement.
Bid Item 10.140.xxx
Project Record Documents
(a minimum of 1% of the total of all bid items except bid items under
section 10.1 General)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on satisfactory progress of the Contractor to provide
Project Record Documents in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 01720).
Various items for Project Record Documents shall not be made for individual payment and all items shall be
included in the lump sum price. This lump sum price shall be a minimum of 1% of the total of all bid items
except bid items under section 10.1 General).
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to create the Project Record
Drawings, including the certified as-built survey, in accordance with the County requirements and
specifications. Payment will be made at the lump sum price divided into equal monthly payments based on
the Contract Time and acceptance by County of the progressive as-builts drawings and tables.
01025 - 5
rev: November 2012
Pg 2
Bid Item 10.150.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 10.160.xxx
a.
b.
Maintenance of Traffic
Measurement: Measurement shall be based on satisfactory Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) in accordance
with County requirements and Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) standards.
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to maintain public roadway and
pedestrian traffic including flag men, uniformed police officers, barricades, warning lights/flashers, and
safety ropes. Also included is furnishing, installing and maintaining a Traffic Control Plan, control and
safety devices, control of dust, temporary crossing structures over trenches, any necessary detour facilities,
and other special requirements for the safe and expeditious movements of traffic.
Public Information Officer
Measurement: Measurement shall be based on satisfactory Public Information/Relations in accordance with
County requirements.
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to provide and maintain
communication with those individuals having a residence, business, or property adjacent to or within 1,000feet of the construction area. Payment shall include the rental of venues, preparation of and conducting all
meetings, and preparation of and disbursement of printed materials.
11 SITE WORK
11.1 - Miscellaneous
Bid Item 11.110.xxx Erosion and Sediment Control
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement shall be based on satisfactory Erosion and Sediment Control in accordance with
the County requirements and specifications (Section 01560).
Payment: Payment of the applicable Contract lump sum price as stated in the proposal will be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment to control and prevent sediment transportation from the Work area to adjacent
properties, including installation, maintenance, and removal of temporary erosion and sediment controls.
Bid Item 11.120.xxx Unsuitable Materials
a.
b.
Measurement: Unsuitable Material shall be measured in actual cubic yards removed and disposed of in accordance
with the County requirements and specifications. Extra volume beyond the limits of construction will not be measured
for payment. The Contractor shall provide survey calculations to verify actual removed quantities.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per cubic yard as stated in the proposal and
shall include all labor, materials and equipment to remove and dispose of unsuitable material including the
removal of overburden.
Bid Item 11.130.xxx Fill Dirt
a.
b.
Measurement: Fill Dirt shall be measured in actual cubic yards of suitable material placed and compacted in
accordance with the County requirements and specifications. Extra volume beyond the limits of construction
will not be measured for payment. The Contractor shall provide survey calculations to verify actual placed
quantities.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit prices bid per cubic yard as stated in the proposal and
shall include all labor, materials and equipment to replace and compact suitable material including the
removal of overburden.
11.2 - Road Work
Bid Item 11.210.xxx Concrete Base (various thickness)
a.
b.
Measurement: Concrete Base shall be measured in actual square yards of high early strength concrete base
with prime and tack coats installed in accordance with the County requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per square yard as stated in the proposal for
Concrete Base and shall include all labor, materials and equipment to install, and spread concrete base. No
separate payment will be made for prime and tack coats.
01025 - 6
rev: November 2012
Pg 3
Bid Item 11.211.xxx Limerock Base (various thickness)
a.
b.
Measurement: Limerock Base shall be measured in actual square yards of limerock base with prime and tack
coats installed in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02571).
Limerock Base and shall include all labor, materials and equipment to install, spread, and compact limerock
base. No separate payment will be made for prime and tack coats.
Bid Item 11.212.xxx Soil Cement Base (various thickness)
a.
b.
Measurement: Soil Cement Base shall be measured in actual square yards of limerock base with prime and
tack coats installed in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02571).
Soil Cement Base and shall include all labor, materials and equipment to install, spread, and compact
limerock base. No separate payment will be made for prime and tack coats.
Bid Item 11.220.xxx Temporary Paving (cold mix overlay) (various thickness)
a.
b.
Measurement: Temporary Paving shall be measured in actual square yards of temporary paving furnished
and installed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
Temporary Paving and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to apply the cold mix overlay in
accordance with County requirements and specifications. The unit price bid shall also include traffic
signalization repair, and temporary striping and markings.
Bid Item 11.230.xxx Milling and Resurfacing
a.
b.
Measurement: Milling and Resurfacing shall be measured in actual square yards over which the milling and
subsequent resurfacing is completed and accepted at the thickness as indicated in the Drawings.
Milling and Resurfacing and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to mill surface; dispose of
milled materials; and apply Type S-III asphalt surface overlay in accordance with County requirements and
specifications. The unit price bid shall also include traffic signalization repair, and permanent striping and
markings.
Bid Item 11.240.xxx Road Crossing Pavement Restoration
a.
b.
Measurement: Road Crossing Pavement Restoration shall be measured in actual square yards of existing
asphalt paving and subgrade removal and replacement furnished and installed in accordance with the County
requirements and specifications. The width measured for payment of asphalt surface repair, as measured
perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, shall be limited to the width shown on the Drawings (maximum
pay width of 8-feet). The length shall be as measured along the centerline of the pipe.
Road Crossing Pavement Restoration and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
provide a safe, smooth driving surface. The Work shall include saw cutting, pavement removal and proper
disposal of exiting pavement, installing high early concrete and asphalt surface into a properly prepared
subgrade, traffic signalization repair, and temporary and permanent striping and markings in accordance with
the County requirements and specifications.
01025 - 7
rev: November 2012
Pg 4
Bid Item 11.241.xxx Asphalt Roadway Replacement (various thickness)
a.
b.
Measurement: Asphalt Roadway Repair shall be measured in actual square yards of existing asphalt paving
and subgrade removal and replacement furnished and installed in accordance with the County requirements
and specifications. The width measured for payment of asphalt surface repair, as measured perpendicular to
the centerline of the pipe, shall be limited to the width shown on the Drawings. The length shall be as
measured along the centerline of the pipe.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per square yard as stated in the proposal for Asphalt
Roadway Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to provide a safe, smooth
driving surface. The Work shall include saw cutting; pavement removal and proper disposal of exiting pavement,
installing prime coat, tack coat, and asphalt, compaction, traffic signalization repair, and temporary striping and
markings in accordance with the County requirements and specifications. Payment will be made once and shall
include both temporary and permanent Asphalt Roadway Replacement.
Bid Item 11.250.xxx Concrete Pavement Replacement (various thickness)
a.
b.
Measurement: Concrete Pavement Replacement shall be measured in actual square yards of concrete
removed and replaced. Width of replaced sidewalk shall match that of existing sidewalk. Replaced portions
of driveways shall conform to the lines and grades of removed portions of driveways. Thickness of
pavement shall be as indicated in the plans and specifications.
Concrete Pavement Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment for saw-cutting,
removal and proper disposal of existing concrete, compaction, form work, concrete replacement, restoration,
and clean-up for a complete installation.
Bid Item 11.260.xxx Driveway Culvert Storm Pipe Replacement (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Culvert Storm Pipe Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet satisfactorily removed
and replaced, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed pipeline.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the proposal for
Culvert Storm Pipe Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to remove and replace
the respective storm pipe including temporary stormwater management, protection of existing utilities and
irrigation, dewatering, excavation, pipe replacement, connection to existing storm pipes utilizing collars
wrapped in 6-feet of filter fabric, replacement of mitered end sections, backfill, compaction, grading, sod
replacement, restoration and clean-up.
Bid Item 11.270.xxx Storm Underdrain Pipe Replacement (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Storm Underdrain Pipe Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet satisfactorily
removed and replaced, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed pipeline.
Storm Underdrain Pipe Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to remove and
replace the respective storm pipe including temporary stormwater management, protection of existing
utilities and irrigation, dewatering, excavation, pipe replacement, connection to existing storm pipes utilizing
collars wrapped in 6-feet of filter fabric, replacement of mitered end sections, backfill, compaction, grading,
sod replacement, restoration and clean-up.
Bid Item 11.280.xxx Concrete Curb and/or Curb and Gutter Replacement
a.
b.
Measurement: Concrete Curb and/or Curb and Gutter Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet
removed and replaced measured along the centerline of the curb within the excavation of the trench to a
maximum width equal to the width of asphalt pavement cut. All additional curb and gutter damaged shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Concrete Curb and Gutter Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment for saw-cutting,
removal and proper disposal of existing concrete curb and gutter, compaction, and concrete curb and gutter
replacement for a complete installation.
01025 - 8
rev: November 2012
Pg 5
Bid Item 11.290.xxx Sod Replacement
a.
b.
Measurement: Sod Replacement shall be measured in actual square yards of sod furnished, laid, fertilized,
watered and maintained for all areas as specified on the Drawings.
Sod Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish, install, fertilize,
water and maintain a healthy stand of grass including any soil amendments or conditioning required to bring
the existing soil to within acceptable pH levels as recommended by the sod grower.
11.3 - Install/Replace Fence or Wall
Bid Item 11.310.xxx Chain Link Fence Install/Replacement (various heights)
a.
b.
Measurement: Chain Link Fence Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet removed and replaced
as measured along the centerline of the fence within the construction excavation. All additional fencing
damaged shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Chain Link Fence Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to remove and properly
dispose of existing chain link fence and concrete and install new chain link fence including replacement
fence, gate, support posts and concrete for a complete installation.
Bid Item 11.320.xxx Wood Fence Install/Replacement (various heights)
a.
b.
Measurement: Wood Fence Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet removed and replaced as
measured along the centerline of the fence within the construction excavation. All additional fencing
Wood Fence Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to remove and properly
dispose of existing wood fence and concrete and install new wood fence including replacement fence, gate,
support posts and concrete for a complete installation.
Bid Item 11.330.xxx Concrete Block Wall Install/Replacement (various heights)
a.
b.
Measurement: Concrete Block Wall Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet removed and
replaced as measured along the centerline of the wall within the construction excavation. Any additional wall
Concrete Block Wall Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to remove and
properly dispose of existing concrete block and construct a new concrete block wall including replacement
concrete block with concrete fill for a complete installation.
Bid Item 11.340.xxx Brick Wall Install/Replacement (various heights)
a.
b.
Measurement: Brick Wall Replacement shall be measured in actual linear feet removed and replaced as
measured along the centerline of the wall within the construction excavation.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the proposal for Brick Wall
Replacement and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to remove and properly dispose of existing brick
and construct a new brick wall including replacement brick and mortar for a complete installation.
11.4 - Bypass Pumping
Bid Item 11.410.xxx Bypass Pumping Sanitary Sewer Mains (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on the complete bypass operation and contingency
plan in accordance with the County requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment of the applicable Contract lump sum price shall be full compensation for furnishing all
labor, materials, equipment as necessary for bypass operations and contingency plan as required, including
pumps, piping, and hoses; tankers; temporary bypass and service piping; hauling and proper disposal of
wastewater; plugging; gasoline/diesel fuel; protection of existing facilities, utilities, and property; traffic
maintenance; signs and barriers; and all incidental work required to satisfactorily complete this item.
01025 - 9
rev: November 2012
Pg 6
Bid Item 11.420.xxx Bypass Pump Station (various flows)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on the complete bypass operation and contingency
plan in accordance with the County requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment of the applicable Contract lump sum price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment as necessary for bypass operations and contingency plan as required, including pumps,
piping, and hoses; tankers; temporary bypass and service piping; hauling and proper disposal of wastewater;
plugging; gasoline/diesel fuel; protection of existing facilities, utilities, and property; traffic maintenance; signs
and barriers; and all incidental work required to satisfactorily complete this item.
11.5 - Abandon or Remove Pipe/Structure
Bid Item 11.510.xxx Abandon-in-Place Pipe
a.
b.
Measurement: Abandon-in-Place Pipe, regardless of size and material, shall be measured in actual linear feet
satisfactorily abandoned-in-place in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02080).
Pipe abandonment shall be measured along the centerline without deduction for valves and fittings.
Abandon-in-Place Pipe and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to excavate, backfill and compact;
sheet, shore, and brace; dewater; completely drain and properly dispose of pipe contents; grout fill, and plug or
cap existing pipes of all services and sizes designated "to be abandoned" on the Drawings. Also included in
this item is the removal of existing valve boxes located on valves connected to piping designated to be retired.
Valve boxes shall be removed, backfilled and compacted with suitable material.
Bid Item 11.520.xxx Abandon-in-Place Manhole
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement of Abandon-in-Place Manhole shall be made per actual number of existing
manholes satisfactorily abandoned-in-place in accordance with the County requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per vertical feet as stated in the proposal for
Abandon-in-Place Manhole and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to sheet, shore, and brace,
dewater, completely drain and properly dispose of manhole contents, remove manhole top riser, grout fill,
and cap existing manhole designated "to be abandoned" on the Drawings. Also included in this item is
backfilling and compaction complete in place to finish grade of road or natural ground (including additional
soil to replace volume of removed manhole).
Bid Item 11.530.xxx Remove Existing Pipe
a.
b.
Measurement: Remove Existing Pipe, regardless of size and material, shall be measured in actual linear feet
satisfactorily excavated, removed, and salvaged in accordance with the County requirements and
specifications (Section 02080). Pipe removal shall be measured along the centerline without deduction for
valves and fittings. Also included in this item is the removal and salvage of items including air release valves
and vaults, and fire hydrant assemblies.
Remove Existing Pipe and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to sheet, shore, and brace;
dewater; excavate; completely drain and properly dispose of pipe contents; plug or cap; restoration, sod,
clean-up; remove and salvage pipe of all services and sizes designated "to be removed" on the Drawings,
backfill and compact. Also included in this item is the removal and salvage of items (as listed in
Specification Section 02080) attached to the piping to be removed.
Bid Item 11.540.xxx Remove Existing Manhole
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Remove Existing Manhole shall be made per actual number of manholes
satisfactorily excavated and removed in accordance with the County requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment for Remove Existing Manhole shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit
price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit prices shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment to sheet, shore, and brace, dewater, completely drain and
properly dispose of manhole contents, remove manhole designated "to be removed" on the Drawings. Also
included in this item is backfilling and compaction complete in place to finish grade of road or natural
ground (including additional soil to replace volume of removed manhole)
01025 - 10
rev: November 2012
Pg 7
12 PRESSURE PIPES
12.1 - Pressure Pipes with Fittings and Restrained Joints
Bid Item 12.110 Water Main with Fittings and Restrained Joints (RJ)
(various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Water Main installation regardless of type and size shall be measured in actual linear feet
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed pipeline,
regardless of the type of joint required, without deduction for the length of valves and fittings. Pipe included
within the limits of lump sum pay items will not be measured for payment under this item.
Water Main w/Fittings and restrained joints and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to construct
the respective pipeline including coordination with existing utilities, protection of existing utilities including
service connections, tree protection, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, groundwater
treatment and disposal, (search for dewatering in document, add this language to any item that references
dewatering) backfill, compaction, and grading, all testing, potable water system protection, disinfection,
restoration, sod and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary fittings, reducers, bends, tees, wyes,
plugs, restraining devices, polyethylene encasement where required, metallic tracer wire, line locator,
identification markers, and removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation
sprinklers and other obstructions.
Bid Item 12.120.xxx Reclaimed Water Main with Fittings and Restrained Joints (RJ)
(various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Reclaimed Water Main installation regardless of type and size shall be measured in actual linear feet
satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed pipeline,
regardless of the type of joint required, without deduction for the length of valves and fittings. Pipe included within
the limits of lump sum pay items will not be measured for payment under this item.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the proposal for Reclaimed
Water Main w/Fittings and RJs and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to construct the respective
pipeline including coordination with existing utilities, protection of existing utilities including service connections,
tree protection, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, groundwater treatment and disposal, backfill,
compaction, and grading, all testing, disinfection, restoration, sod and clean-up. This item also includes all
necessary fittings, reducers, bends, tees, wyes, plugs, restraining devices, polyethylene encasement where required,
metallic tracer wire, line locator, identification markers, and removal and replacement of fences and gates,
mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers and other obstructions.
Bid Item 12.130.xxx Forcemain with Fittings and Restrained Joints (RJ)
(various sizes)
a. Measurement: Forcemain installation regardless of type and size shall be measured in actual linear feet
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed pipeline,
regardless of the type of joint required, without deduction for the length of valves and fittings. Pipe included
within the limits of lump sum pay items will not be measured for payment under this item.
b. Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the proposal for Forcemain
w/Fittings and RJs and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to construct the respective pipeline including
coordination with existing utilities, protection of existing utilities including service connections, tree protection,
excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, groundwater treatment and disposal, backfill, compaction,
and grading, all testing, restoration, sod and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary fittings, reducers, bends,
tees, wyes, plugs, restraining devices, polyethylene encasement where required, metallic tracer wire, line locator,
identification markers, and removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation
sprinklers and other obstructions.
01025 - 11
rev: November 2012
Pg 8
12.2 – Valves
Bid Item 12.210.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 12.220.xxx
a.
b.
b.
Plug Valve with Box (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Plug Valve with Box shall be made per actual number of plug valves with
valve boxes satisfactorily furnished and installed complete with covers and concrete collars.
Payment: Payment for the Plug Valve with Box shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit
price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment to install the valve, valve box, valve box extensions, test station
box and cap, operating nut extensions, valve wrenches, restraining devices, covers, concrete collars,
excavation, dewatering, sheeting, shoring, bracing, backfill, compaction, restoration and all other items
required for a complete, acceptable and operable installation.
Bid Item 12.230.xxx
a.
Gate Valve with Box (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Gate Valve with Box shall be made per actual number of gate valves with
valve boxes satisfactorily furnished and installed complete with covers and concrete collars. Gate valves
included within tapping sleeve and valve, air release valve assembly, and fire hydrant pay items will not be
measured for payment under this item.
Payment: Payment for the Gate Valve with Box shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment to install the valve, valve box, valve box extensions, operating
nut extensions, test station box and cap, valve wrenches, restraining devices, covers, concrete collars,
excavation, sheeting, shoring, bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, restoration, and all other items
Blow-Off Valve Assembly (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Blow-Off Valve Assembly shall be made per actual number of blow-off
valve assemblies satisfactorily furnished and installed to provide a complete and functional unit.
Payment: Payment for the Blow-Off Valve Assembly shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the
unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment to install the blow-off valve, cap, valve sleeve, pipe, fittings,
meter box, excavation, dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading adjustment, restoration, and all other items
12.3 - Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly
Bid Item 12.310.xxx
Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly shall be made per actual number of
tapping sleeves and valves satisfactorily furnished and installed to provide a complete and functional unit.
Payment: Payment for the Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly shall be made based on the authorized
quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to perform a wet tap to an existing
main including excavation, sheeting, shoring, bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading, tapping
sleeve, tapping valve, valve box extensions, operating nut extensions, valve wrenches, restraining devices,
protection of potable water system, disinfection, restoration and all other items required for a complete,
acceptable and operable installation.
01025 - 12
rev: November 2012
Pg 9
12.4 – Cut-in Connections to Existing Mains
Bid Item 12.410.xxx
Cut-in Connection to Existing Water Main (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for cut-in connections to the existing water main shall be made per number of
cut-in connections made complete and in place regardless of the size and type from the constructed water
main to the existing water main as authorized in the Contract Documents regardless of the depth of the
connection.
Payment: Payment for the Cut-in Connection to the Existing Water Main shall be made based on the
authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall
be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment to make a cut-in connection from the
constructed water main to the existing water main including coordination with existing utilities, protection of
existing utilities and service connections, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, cutting
pipe, completely drain and properly dispose of existing pipe contents, connection to existing main, restraint
of existing main in accordance with the County requirements, backfill, compaction, grading, swabbing and
disinfection, potable water protection, restoration and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary
fittings, reducers, bends, tees, and wyes.
Bid Item 12.420.xxx
(various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for cut-in connections to the existing reclaimed water main shall be made per
number of cut-in connections made complete and in place regardless of the type and size from the
constructed reclaimed water main to the existing reclaimed water main as authorized in the Contract
Documents regardless of the depth of the connection.
Payment: Payment for the Cut-in Connection to the Existing Reclaimed Water Main shall be made based on
the authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price
shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment to make a cut-in connection
from the constructed reclaimed water main to the existing reclaimed water main including coordination with
existing utilities, protection of existing utilities and service connections, excavation, sheeting, shoring and
bracing, dewatering, cutting pipe, completely drain and properly dispose of existing pipe contents,
connection to existing reclaimed water main, restraint of existing reclaimed water main in accordance with
the County requirements, backfill, compaction, grading, swabbing, restoration and clean-up. This item also
includes all necessary fittings, reducers, bends, tees, and wyes.
Bid Item 12.430.xxx
a.
b.
Cut-in Connection to Existing Reclaimed Water Main
Cut-in Connection to Existing Forcemain (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for cut-in connections to the existing forcemain shall be made per number of
cut-in connections made complete and in place regardless of the type and size from the constructed
forcemain to the existing forcemain as authorized in the Contract Documents regardless of the depth of the
connection.
Payment: Payment for the Cut-in Connection to the Existing Forcemain shall be made based on the
authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall
be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment to make a cut-in connection from the
constructed forcemain to the existing forcemain including coordination with existing utilities, protection of
existing utilities and service connections, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, cutting
pipe, completely drain and properly dispose of existing pipe contents, connection to existing forcemain,
restraint of existing forcemain in accordance with the County requirements, backfill, compaction, grading,
swabbing, restoration and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary fittings, reducers, bends, tees, and
wyes.
01025 - 13
rev: November 2012
Pg 10
12.5 - Piping Appurtenances
Bid Item 12.510.xxx
Line Stop Assembly (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Line Stopping Assembly shall be made per actual number of line stops
satisfactorily furnished and installed to permanently or temporarily stop the flow within the indicated main at
the locations shown on the Drawings.
Payment: Payment for the Line Stopping Assembly shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to perform a permanent or temporary line stop on an
existing main including excavation, sheeting, shoring, bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading,
tapping sleeve, plug, retraining devices, restraint of existing piping in accordance with the County
requirements, swabbing, restoration and clean-up and all other items required for a complete, acceptable and
operable installation.
Bid Item 12.520.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 12.530.xxx
a.
b.
b.
Offset Air Release Valve Assembly (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Offset Air Release Valve Assemblies shall be made per actual number of
offset air release valves with enclosures satisfactorily furnished and installed to provide a complete and
functional unit.
Payment: Payment for the Offset Air Release Valve Assembly shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install the valve including
saddle, fittings, pipe, concrete pad, pre-cast vault or enclosure, excavation, sheeting, shoring, bracing,
dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading, restoration and all other items required for a complete, acceptable
and operable installation.
Bid Item 12.540.xxx
a.
Air Release Valve Assembly (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Air Release Valve Assembly shall be made per actual number of air release
valves with enclosures satisfactorily furnished and installed to provide a complete and functional unit.
Payment: Payment for the Air Release Valve Assembly shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install the valve including saddle, fittings, pipe,
concrete pad, pre-cast vault or enclosure, excavation, sheeting, shoring, bracing, dewatering, backfill,
compaction, grading, restoration and all other items required for a complete, acceptable and operable
installation.
Fire Hydrant Assembly
Measurement: Measurement for Fire Hydrant Assemblies shall be made per actual number of fire hydrant
assemblies satisfactorily furnished and installed to provide a complete and functional unit. The pipe and
necessary restraint system connecting the fire hydrant assembly to the water main shall be included in the
unit price, regardless of the length necessary to locate the hydrant at the direction of the County
Payment: Payment for the Fire Hydrant Assembly shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install the fire hydrant complete with hydrant tee,
hydrant extension, pipe, fittings, isolation valve and box, thrust anchorage, and shear pad. Also included is
excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading, connection to pipes,
restoration, and all other items required for a complete, acceptable and operable installation.
01025 - 14
rev: November 2012
Pg 11
Bid Item 12.550.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 12.560.xxx
a.
b.
b.
Water Service Connection (short and long)
Measurement: Measurement for Water Service Connection shall be made per actual number of service
connections satisfactorily furnished and installed to provide a complete and functional unit.
Payment: Payment for the Water Service Connection shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install the water service connection including service
saddle, corporation stop, water service piping, curb stops, and installing meter boxes. Payment also includes
excavation sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading, pressure testing,
restoration, sod and all other items required for a complete, acceptable and operable installation.
Bid Item 12.570.xxx
a.
Adjust Existing Valve Box
Measurement: Measurement for Adjust Existing Valve Box shall be made per actual number of existing valve
boxes raised or lowered to the finish grade of the proposed road work.
Payment: Payment for Adjust Existing Valve Box shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to replace, raise or lower and /or adjust the existing
valve boxes to the proposed grade.
RerouteWater Service on Private Property
Measurement: Measurement for the rerouting Water Service on Private Property shall be made per the actual
number of services rerouted to provide a complete and functional unit.
Payment: Payment for rerouting of the Water Service on Private Property shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install the water service including
the house connection, water service piping, and curb stops. Payment also includes excavation sheeting, shoring
and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, grading, pressure testing, restoration, sod and all other items
12.6 - Directional Drill
Bid Item 12.610.xxx
Directional Drill HDPE/PVC Water Main
(various sizes, valve to valve)
a.
b.
Measurement: Directional Drill Water Main installation regardless of type material shall be measured in actual
linear feet satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed
directionally drilled water main in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section
02662).
Directionally Drill Water Main and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a complete
directional drill pipe installation and testing including protection of existing utilities, pipe, fittings, valves, pipe
connection assemblies and appurtances, mechanical restraint, metallic tracer wire, drilling mud, sodding,
testing, disinfection, restoration, and clean-up.
Bid Item 12.620.xxx
Directional Drill HDPE/PVC Reclaimed Water Main
a.
b.
Measurement: Directional Drill Reclaimed Water Main installation regardless of type of material shall be
measured in actual linear feet satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the
centerline of the completed directionally drilled reclaimed water main in accordance with the County
requirements and specifications (Section 02662).
Directionally Drill Reclaimed Water Main and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a
complete directional drill pipe installation and testing including protection of existing utilities, pipe, fittings,
valves, pipe connection assemblies and appurtances, mechanical restraint, metallic tracer wire, drilling mud,
sodding, testing, restoration, and clean-up.
01025 - 15
rev: November 2012
Pg 12
Bid Item 12.630.xxx
Directional Drill HDPE/PVC Forcemain
a.
b.
Measurement: Directional Drill forcemain installation regardless of type of material shall be measured in actual linear
feet satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed directionally
drilled forcemain in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02662).
Directionally Drill Forcemain and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a complete
directional drill pipe installation and testing including protection of existing utilities, pipe, fittings, valves,
pipe connection assemblies and appurtances, mechanical restraint, metallic tracer wire, drilling mud,
sodding, testing, restoration, and clean-up.
12.7 - Pipe Bursting
Bid Item 12.710.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 12.720.xxx
a.
b.
Pipe Burst Water Main (various sizes)
Measurement: Pipe Burst Water Main installation regardless of type and size shall be measured in actual
linear feet satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the
completed pipeline, regardless of the type of joint required, without deduction for the length of valves and
fittings in accordance with the County requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the proposal for Pipe
Burst Water Main and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a complete pipe
installation by pipe bursting and testing including coordination with existing utilities; protection of existing
utilities including service connections; tree protection; excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing;
dewatering; backfill, compaction, and grading; pre- and post-installation video; repair of sags in line; all
testing; potable water system protection, disinfection, restoration, sod and clean-up. This item also includes
all necessary fittings, reducers, bends, tees, wyes, plugs, restraining devices, polyethylene encasement where
required, metallic tracer wire, line locator, identification markers, and removal and replacement of fences
and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers and other obstructions.
Pipe Burst Reclaimed Water Main (various sizes)
Measurement: Pipe Burst Reclaimed Water Main installation regardless of type and size shall be measured in
actual linear feet satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the proposal for Pipe Burst
Reclaimed Water Main and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a complete pipe installation by
pipe bursting and testing including coordination with existing utilities; protection of existing utilities including service
connections; tree protection; excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing; dewatering; backfill, compaction, and grading; pre
and post-installation video; repair of sags in line; all testing; potable water system protection, disinfection, restoration, sod
and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary fittings, reducers, bends, tees, wyes, plugs, restraining devices,
polyethylene encasement where required, metallic tracer wire, line locator, identification markers, and removal and
replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers and other obstructions.
01025 - 16
rev: November 2012
Pg 13
Bid Item 12.730.xxx
a.
b.
Pipe Burst Forcemain (various sizes)
Measurement: Pipe Burst Forcemain installation regardless of type and size shall be measured in actual
linear feet satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the
Burst Forcemain and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a complete pipe
installation by pipe bursting and testing including coordination with existing utilities; protection of existing
utilities including service connections; tree protection; excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing;
dewatering; backfill, compaction, and grading; pre and post-installation video; repair of sags in line; all
testing; potable water system protection, restoration, sod and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary
fittings, reducers, bends, tees, wyes, plugs, restraining devices, polyethylene encasement where required,
metallic tracer wire, line locator, identification markers, and removal and replacement of fences and gates,
mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers and other obstructions.
13 WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEM
13.1 - Cleaning Sanitary Sewers
Bid Item 13.110.xxx
Light Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Light Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals shall be made per actual number of
sanitary sewer laterals satisfactorily cleaned by making 1 pass of the lateral with a cleaning nozzle in
accordance with County requirements and specifications (Section 02761).
Payment: Payment for Light Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to satisfactorily clean a sanitary
sewer lateral to an acceptable condition for CCTV inspection by making a single pass of the main with a
cleaning nozzle including water, hoses, and nozzles, protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
Bid Item 13.111.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.120.xxx
a.
b.
Light Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains (various sizes)
Measurement: Light Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains shall be measured in actual linear feet of sanitary sewer
main satisfactorily cleaned by making a single pass of the main with a cleaning nozzle as measured along the
length of the centerline of sewer, which cleaning was performed, between manholes, measured to the nearest
foot from inside wall of the manhole to the inside wall of the other manhole and not including the manhole
chamber, in accordance with County requirements and specifications (Section 02761).
Light Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
satisfactorily clean a sanitary sewer main to an acceptable condition for CCTV inspection and ready for any
and all repairs by making a single pass of the main with a cleaning nozzle including water, hoses, and
nozzles, protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
Medium Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Medium Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals shall be made per actual number
of sanitary sewer laterals satisfactorily cleaned by making 2 to 4 passes of the lateral with a cleaning nozzle
in accordance with County requirements and specifications (Section 02761).
Payment: Payment for Medium Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals shall be made based on the authorized
sewer lateral to an acceptable condition for CCTV inspection by making 2 to 4 passes of the lateral with a
cleaning nozzle including water, hoses, and nozzles, protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
01025 - 17
rev: November 2012
Pg 14
Bid Item 13.121.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.130.xxx
a.
b.
b.
b.
Heavy Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains (various sizes)
Measurement: Heavy Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains shall be measured in actual linear feet of sanitary
sewer main satisfactorily cleaned by making 5 or more passes of the main with a cleaning nozzle and/or
removing roots from the interior of the main and de-scaling the main. Measurement shall be along the length
of the centerline of sewer, which cleaning was performed, between manholes, measured to the nearest foot
from inside wall of the manhole to the inside wall of the other manhole and not including the manhole
Heavy Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
and all repairs by making 5 or more passes of the main with a cleaning nozzle and/or removing roots from
the interior of the main and de-scaling the main including water, hoses, and nozzles, mechanical methods of
root removal, all herbicides or chemical treatment, protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
Bid Item 13.140.xxx
a.
Heavy Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals (various sizes)
Measurement: Measurement for Heavy Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals shall be made per actual number of
sanitary sewer laterals satisfactorily cleaned by making 5 or more passes of the lateral with a cleaning nozzle
and/or removing roots from the interior of the lateral in accordance with County requirements and
specifications (Section 02761).
Payment: Payment for Heavy Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Laterals shall be made based on the authorized
sewer lateral to an acceptable condition for CCTV inspection by making 5 or more passes of the lateral with
a cleaning nozzle and/or removing roots form the interior of the lateral including water, hoses, and nozzles;
mechanical methods of root removal; all herbicides or chemical treatment, protection of property, restoration
and clean-up.
Bid Item 13.131.xxx
a.
Medium Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains (various sizes)
Measurement: Medium Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains shall be measured in actual linear feet of sanitary sewer
main satisfactorily cleaned by making 2 to 4 passes of the main with a cleaning nozzle as measured along the
length of the centerline of sewer, which cleaning was performed, between manholes, measured to the nearest
foot from inside wall of the manhole to the inside wall of the other manhole and not including the manhole
Medium Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Mains and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
and all repairs by making 2 to 4 passes of the main with a cleaning nozzle including water, hoses, and
nozzles, protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
Mechanical Root or Grease Removal
Measurement: Mechanical Root or Grease Removal shall be measured in actual linear feet of sanitary sewer
mains (< 12-inch diameter) satisfactorily cleaned by removing roots from the interior of the main and descaling the main. Measurement shall be along the length of the centerline of sewer, which cleaning was
performed, between manholes, measured to the nearest foot from inside wall of the manhole to the inside
wall of the other manhole and not including the manhole chamber, in accordance with County requirements
and specifications (Section 02761).
Mechanical Root or Grease Removal and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
satisfactorily remove roots from the interior of the main and de-greasing the main including water, hoses,
and nozzles; mechanical methods of root removal and grease removal, all herbicides or chemical treatment,
protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
01025 - 18
rev: November 2012
Pg 15
Bid Item 13.150.xxx
a.
b.
Mechanical Tuberculation Removal
Measurement: Mechanical Tuberculation Removal shall be measured in actual linear feet of sanitary sewer
mains (< 12-inch diameter) satisfactorily cleaned by mechanically removing tuberculation from the interior
of the main and de-scaling the main. Measurement shall be along the length of the centerline of sewer,
which cleaning was performed, between manholes, measured to the nearest foot from inside wall of the
manhole to the inside wall of the other manhole and not including the manhole chamber, in accordance with
County requirements and specifications (Section 02761)
Mechanical Tuberculation Removal and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
satisfactorily remove tuberculation from the interior of the main including water, hoses, and nozzles,
protection of property, restoration and clean-up.
13.2 - CCTV Sanitary Sewers
Bid Item 13.210.xxx
CCTV Inspection Sanitary Sewer Mains (various sizes)
a.
b.
Measurement: CCTV Inspection Sanitary Sewer shall be measured in actual linear feet of satisfactory visual
inspection completed utilizing closed-circuit television in accordance with the County requirements and
specifications (Section 02762). CCTV inspection shall be measured along the length of the centerline of the
inspected sanitary sewer.
CCTV Inspection Sanitary Sewer and shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, all labor, materials, and
equipment necessary for a complete CCTV visual inspection of the sanitary sewer and subsequent report
including qualified personnel, DVD, and all incidentals related to sewer main inspection.
Bid Item 13.220.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.230.xxx
a.
b.
CCTV Lateral Inspection from Main
Measurement: Measurement for CCTV Lateral Inspection from Main shall be made per actual number of
sanitary sewer laterals satisfactorily visually inspected utilizing closed-circuit television panned and tilted
from the main in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02763).
Payment: Payment for CCTV Lateral Inspection from Main shall be made based on the authorized quantity
at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete CCTV visual
inspection of the sanitary sewer lateral from the main and subsequent report including qualified personnel,
DVD, and all incidentals related to sewer lateral inspection.
CCTV Lateral Inspection from Cleanout
Measurement: Measurement for CCTV Lateral Inspection from Cleanout shall be made per actual number of
sanitary sewer laterals satisfactorily visually inspected utilizing closed-circuit television in accordance with
the County requirements and specifications (Section 02763).
Payment: Payment for CCTV Lateral Inspection from Main shall be made based on the authorized quantity
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete CCTV visual
inspection of the sanitary sewer lateral from the cleanout and subsequent report including qualified
personnel, DVD, and all incidentals related to sewer lateral inspection.
01025 - 19
rev: November 2012
Pg 16
13.3 - Install / Replace Sanitary Sewer Main
Bid Item 13.310.xxx
Sanitary Sewer Main 8-inch Diameter (various depths)
a.
b.
Measurement: The installation and/or replacement of Sanitary Sewer Main shall be measured in actual linear
feet satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed pipeline
without deduction for the length of manholes. The depth shall be calculated from the invert to the top of the
surface. Pipe included within the limits of lump sum pay items will not be measured for payment under this
item.
Sanitary Sewer Main and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment to construct the respective
pipeline including coordination with existing utilities, protection of existing utilities including service
connections, tree protection, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction,
and grading, all testing; restoration and clean-up. This item also includes the removal and replacement of
fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers, sod and other obstructions.
Bid Item 13.320.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.330.xxx
a.
b.
b.
item.
Bid Item 13.340.xxx
a.
item.
Sanitary Sewer Main Point Repair (various depths)
Measurement: Sanitary Sewer Point Repair shall be made per actual number of repairs of sanitary sewer
main for various depths satisfactorily repaired, regardless of size in accordance with the County
requirements and specifications.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract lump sum price bid as stated in the Bid Schedule for Sanitary
Sewer Point Repair, regardless of size and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to repair
the existing sanitary sewer including coordination with existing utilities; protection of existing utilities
including service connections, tree protection, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering,
completely drain and properly dispose of existing pipe contents, removal of existing damaged sanitary sewer,
piping, fittings, backfill, compaction, and grading, post-installation video, repair of sags in line, all testing,
restoration and clean-up. This item also includes removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes,
trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers, sod and other obstructions.
01025 - 20
rev: November 2012
Pg 17
Bid Item 13.350.xxx
a.
b.
Sanitary Sewer Main Connection to Existing Manhole
Measurement: Measurement for Sewer Main Connection to Existing Manhole shall be made per actual
number of core bores and connections to existing manholes satisfactorily furnished and installed.
Payment: Payment for Sewer Main Connection to Existing Manhole shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete connection to an
existing manhole including protection of existing utilities, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing,
dewatering, backfill, compaction, and grading, wall seal, core drilling, and bench adjustment.
13.4 – Install/Replace Sanitary Manholes
Bid Item 13.410.xxx
Sanitary Manhole 4-feet Diameter (various depths)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Sanitary Manhole shall be made per actual number of sanitary manholes of
each type and depth satisfactorily furnished and installed. Depth shall be measured from the center of the
invert to the top of the lid.
Payment: Payment for Sanitary Manhole shall be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit price
indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete sanitary manhole installation including
excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction, and final grading, crushed rock
base, connection of new or existing sanitary sewer, polyolefin sheeting for exterior joint sealing, adjustment
of the manhole rim, interior and exterior surface coatings to provide a complete and operable sanitary
manhole.
Bid Item 13.420.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.450.xxx
a.
b.
manhole.
manhole.
01025 - 21
rev: November 2012
Pg 18
13.5 - Sanitary Manhole Rehabilitation
Bid Item 13.510.xxx
Adjust Existing Manhole Frame and Cover
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Adjust Existing Manhole Frame and Cover shall be made per actual number
of sanitary manhole frames and covers raised or lowered to the finish grade of the pavement.
Payment: Payment for Adjust Existing Manhole Frame and Cover shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to replace, raise or lower and/or
adjust the existing manhole frame and cover to the finish grade of the pavement including excavation,
backfill, compaction, final grading and applicable sodding/pavement restoration.
Bid Item 13.511.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.520.xxx
a.
b.
b.
b.
Line Manhole (Polyethylene or PVC) (various diameters)
Measurement: Line Manhole shall be measured in vertical feet of manhole lined with a polyethylene or PVC
interior liner system. Lining of manhole shall be measured along the center vertical length of the manhole.
Line Manhole and shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment
necessary for a complete installation of an interior liner system including qualified personnel, sewer structure
interior liner system, plugging infiltration, channel reconstruction, pressure cleaning, surface preparation,
leak repair, and crack repair
Bid Item 13.540.xxx
a.
Seal and Recoat Manhole (various diameters)
Measurement: Seal and Recoat Manhole shall be measured in vertical feet of manhole sealed and recoated.
Manhole seal and recoat shall be measured along the center vertical length of the manhole.
Seal and Recoat Manhole and shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, all labor, equipment, services,
supervision and materials for coating existing manholes as shown on the Contract Drawings. The work shall
include all surface preparation, leak repair, crack repair, installation of the coating in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, and inspection of the finished coating system.
Bid Item 13.530.xxx
a.
Replace Existing Manhole Frame and Cover
Measurement: Measurement for Adjust Existing Manhole Frame and Cover shall be made per actual number
of sanitary manhole frames and covers raised or lowered to the finish grade.
Payment: Payment for Adjust Existing Manhole Frame and Cover shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to replace, raise or lower and/or
adjust the existing manhole frame and cover to the finish grade including excavation, backfill, compaction,
and final grading and applicable sodding or pavement restoration.
Fiberglass Manhole Insert
Measurement: Measurement for Fiberglass Manhole Insert shall be made per actual number of fiberglass
manhole insert rehabilitation systems satisfactorily furnished and installed, regardless of depth or diameter of
manhole
Payment: Payment for Furnish and Install Fiberglass Manhole Insert shall be made based on the authorized
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of the complete
rehabilitation system as specified, including qualified personnel, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing,
dewatering, backfill, and compaction, cleaning and debris removal, removal and replacement of existing
manhole corbel and riser section, fiberglass liner installation, benching, grout, pipe connections and stubouts,
frame and cover with brick or adjustment rings, protection of existing utilities and structures, clean-up, and
adjustment of the manhole rim to finished grade.
01025 - 22
rev: November 2012
Pg 19
Bid Item 13.550.xxx
a.
b.
Bid Item 13.560.xxx
a.
b.
Re-Construct Manhole Benching
Measurement: Measurement for Re-Construct Manhole Benching shall be made per actual number of
manhole benching cleaned and re-constructed in accordance with the Drawings and specifications.
Payment: Payment for Re-Construct Manhole Benching shall be made based on the authorized quantity at
the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the cleaning and re-construction of manhole
benching including cleaning and debris removal, placement and finishing of concrete, restoration and cleanup.
Manhole Cone Replacement (various diameters)
Measurement: Measurement for Manhole Cone Replacement shall be made per actual number of sanitary
manhole cone sections satisfactorily removed and replaced.
Payment: Payment for Remove Manhole Cone Replacement shall be made based on the authorized quantity
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to remove and replace the manhole
cone section including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing; dewatering, backfill, and compaction;
removal and replacement of frame and cover with brick or adjustment rings; polyolefin sheeting for exterior
joint sealing; jointing material, and adjustment of the manhole rim to finished grade.
13.6 - Sanitary Service Laterals and Cleanouts
Bid Item 13.610.xxx
Install/Repair/Replace 4-inch Diameter Sanitary Sewer Lateral
(various depths)
a.
b.
Measurement: Repair/Replace Sanitary Sewer Lateral shall be made per actual number of sanitary sewer
laterals satisfactorily repaired or replaced, depending upon sewer lateral depth.
Payment: Payment will be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid
Schedule and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to repair or replace the existing
sanitary sewer lateral connection including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill,
compaction, and grading, removal and disposal of existing service lateral, all incidentals to connect and
reactivate sewer service connections, all pipe, wyes, bends and plugs necessary to provide a watertight
service connection, leakage testing, protection of existing utilities, structures, and property, restoration and
clean-up. This item also includes the removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs,
irrigation sprinklers, sod and other obstructions.
Bid Item 13.620.xxx
(various depths)
a.
b.
Install/Repair/Replace 6-inch Diameter Sanitary Sewer Lateral
Measurement: Repair/Replace Sanitary Sewer Lateral shall be made per actual number of sanitary sewer
laterals satisfactorily repaired or replaced, depending upon sewer lateral depth.
Payment: Payment will be made based on the authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid
Schedule and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to repair or replace the existing
sanitary sewer lateral connection including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill,
compaction, and grading, removal and disposal of existing service lateral, all incidentals to connect and
reactivate sewer service connections, all pipe, wyes, bends and plugs necessary to provide a watertight
service connection, leakage testing, protection of existing utilities, structures, and property, restoration and
clean-up. This item also includes the removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs,
01025 - 23
rev: November 2012
Pg 20
Bid Item 13.630.xxx
(various surfaces)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Repair/Replace Sanitary Sewer Cleanout shall be made per actual number of
sanitary sewer cleanouts satisfactorily repaired or replaced, depending upon cleanout depth.
Payment: Payment for Repair/Replace Sanitary Sewer Cleanout shall be made based on the authorized quantity
at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to repair or replace the sanitary sewer cleanout
including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction and grading, all pipe,
wyes, bends, sleeves, and plugs necessary to provide a watertight access, protection of existing utilities and
property, restoration and clean-up. This item also includes the removal and replacement of fences and gates,
mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers, asphalt, concrete curb, driveway or sidewalk and other
obstructions.
Bid Item 13.640.xxx
a.
b.
b.
Service Lateral Connection to Manhole
Measurement: Measurement for Service Lateral Connection to Manhole shall be made per actual number of
sanitary sewer lateral service connections made to manholes satisfactorily furnished and installed.
Payment: Payment for Service Lateral Connection to Manhole shall be made based on the authorized quantity
at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete connection to an existing manhole
including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction and grading, core drilling
and wall seal, protection of existing utilities and property, restoration and clean-up. This item also includes the
removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers, sod and other
obstructions.
Bid Item 13.650.xxx
a.
Install/Repair/Replace Sanitary Sewer Cleanout
Reroute Sanitary Sewer Lateral on Private Property
Measurement: Measurement for rerouting the Sanitary Sewer Lateral on Private Property shall be made per the
actual number of lateral services rerouted to provide a complete and functional unit.
Payment: Payment for rerouting Sanitary Sewer Lateral on Private Property shall be made based on the
authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable Contract unit price shall be
full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to reroute the sewer lateral
including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, compaction and grading, all pipe,
wyes, bends, sleeves, and plugs necessary to provide a watertight access, protection of existing utilities and
property, restoration and clean-up. This item also includes the removal and replacement of fences and gates,
mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers, asphalt, concrete curb, driveway or sidewalk and other
obstructions.
13.7 - Cured-In-Place Pipe (CIPP) Liner
Bid Item 13.710.xxx
Sanitary Sewer Main CIPP Liner (various diameters)
a.
b.
Measurement: CIPP Liner shall be measured in actual linear feet of furnished and satisfactorily installed curedin-place liner in the sanitary sewer main from center of manhole to center of manhole, regardless of depth, in
accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02771). CIPP liner installation shall be
measured along the length of the centerline of the rehabilitated sanitary sewer.
Payment: Payment will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear feet as stated in the Bid Schedule for
CIPP Liner and shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for
a complete CIPP liner installation including pre and post CCTV inspection, sanitary sewer cleaning, qualified
personnel, providing and processing of liner material, blocking or plugging of incoming lines, grouting, leakage
testing, reinstate service laterals, protection of existing utilities, structures, and property, restoration and cleanup.
01025 - 24
rev: November 2012
Pg 21
Bid Item 13.720.xxx
Brim Type – CIPP Lateral Liner
(various lengths and diameters)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for Brim Type – CIPP Lateral Liner - shall be made per actual number of
satisfactorily installed cured-in-place brim type liners in the existing sanitary sewer laterals measured from
the sewer main to the property clean-out, regardless of depth, in accordance with the County requirement,
drawings, and specifications (Section 02772).
Payment: Payment for Brim Type - CIPP Lateral Liner will be made at the contract unit price indicated in
the Bid Schedule for Brim Type CIPP Lateral Liner and shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, all
labor, materials and equipment necessary to a complete lateral liner installation including pre and post CCTV
inspection, sewer lateral cleaning, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, and
compaction, qualified personnel, providing and processing of liner material, blocking or plugging of lateral,
grouting, leakage testing, protection of existing utilities, structures, and property, restoration and clean-up.
This item also includes all necessary removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs,
Bid Item 13.730.xxx
a.
b.
FCLRL - CIPP Lateral Liner (various lengths and diameters)
Measurement: Measurement for Full Circumference Lateral Reinforced Liner (FCLRL) - CIPP Lateral Liner
shall be made per actual number of satisfactorily installed cured-in-place liners in the existing sanitary sewer
laterals measured from the sewer main to the property clean-out, regardless of depth, to determine if they are
less than or equal or greater than 30’ and in accordance with the County requirement, drawings, and
specifications (Section 02772).
Payment: Payment for Full Circumference Lateral Reinforced Liner (FCLRL) - CIPP Lateral Liner shall be
made based on the authorized quantity at the unit price indicated in the Bid. Payment of the applicable
Contract unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to
satisfactorily install a CIPP lateral liner system including pre- and post-CCTV inspection, sewer lateral
cleaning, excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing, dewatering, backfill, and compaction, qualified
personnel, providing and processing of liner material, blocking or plugging of lateral, grouting, leakage
testing, protection of existing utilities, structures, and property, restoration and clean-up. This item also
includes all necessary removal and replacement of fences and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation
sprinklers, sod and other obstructions.
13.8 - Sanitary Sewer Main Bursting
Bid Item 13.810.xxx
Pipe Burst Gravity Sewer Main (various diameters)
a.
b.
Measurement: Pipe Burst Gravity Sewer Main installation shall be measured in actual linear feet
satisfactorily furnished and installed, as measured along the length of the centerline of the completed
pipeline in accordance with the County requirements and specifications (Section 02776).
Burst Gravity Sewer and shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for a complete sewer
installation by pipe bursting and subsequent testing including excavation, sheeting, shoring and bracing,
dewatering, removal and replacement of manhole cone section, backfill, compaction, and grading, qualified
personnel, blocking or plugging of influent lines, protection of existing utilities including service
connections, repair of sags in line, connection to manholes, connection and reinstatement of service laterals,
all testing, restoration and clean-up. This item also includes all necessary removal and replacement of fences
and gates, mailboxes, trees, shrubs, irrigation sprinklers and other obstructions.
01025 - 25
rev: November 2012
Pg 22
14 PUMP STATION
14.1 – Wastewater Duplex Pump Station
Bid Item 14.110.xxx
Duplex Pump Station (Breezewood Unit 1 #3014)
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on satisfactory construction of the new Pump
Station and adjacent sanitary sewer collection system complete and ready for continuous operation.
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct a pump station as
indicated on the Drawings. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: pump station
improvements including wet well, top slab, valve vault, pumps, new manhole, motors, control panel,
relocated SCADA control panel and SCADA pole, cables, rails, valves, water service connection, pressure
piping, by-pass pumping and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings. All grading, wastewater by-pass
pumping, pumper trucks, erosion and sedimentation prevention and control, rehabilitation of the existing wet well
to a master manhole (including lining system), rehab existing manhole, clearing and grubbing. All demolition,
removal, and disposal of existing facilities as noted in the Drawings including tie-ins, intercepts, conflicts and
abandonment of piping, conduits or electrical services. All coordination with the electric power company,
materials, equipment, tools, labor and fees to install an electrical service connection. Installation of all site
and adjacent improvements noted on drawings including driveways and driveway connections, fencing with
curb and gate, retaining wall, asphalt and concrete paving, rock fill and sodding. All materials, equipment,
tools, and labor to line (CIPP) the adjacent existing sanitary sewer collection system and rehabilitate the
existing manhole(s) indicated on the Drawings. All work required to construct, complete start-up testing and
deliver a complete operational Pump Station without interruption of service.
Payment for General Requirements (Section 01001) shall include bonds, permits, and any required insurance,
project signs, pre-construction audio-video documentation, maintenance of traffic, public information
officer, and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the start of the work shall also be included. This
Contract. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements, will not be made for
payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. This item will be paid upon each payment
request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the pay request invoices to substantiate the
appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor.
Payment for Mobilization/Demobilization shall include Work consisting of the preparatory Work and
operations in mobilizing for beginning Work on the Contract, including, but not limited to, movement of
those personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the project site, preparation of submittals, and for the
establishment of temporary offices and buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, project signs, field
surveys, sanitary and other facilities required by these specifications, and State and local laws and
regulations. The Work specified in this item also consists of demobilization or the operations normally
involved in ending Work on the project including, but not limited to, termination and removal of temporary
utility service and field offices; demolition and removal of temporary structures and facilities; restoration of
Contractor storage areas; disposal of trash and rubbish, and any other post-construction work necessary for
the proper conclusion of the Work. This pay item may not exceed 5% of the Total Base Bid amount.
Payment for Project Record Documents (Section 01720) shall be based on satisfactory progress of the
Contractor to provide Project Record Documents including the certified as-built survey, in accordance with
the County requirements and specifications. This pay item shall be a minimum of 1% of the Total Base Bid
amount.
Payment for Indemnification: In consideration of the Contractor’s Indemnity Agreement as set out in the
Contact Documents, County specifically agrees to give the Contractor $33.33 and other good and valuable
01025 - 26
rev: November 2012
Bid Item 14.120.xxx
Unit 1 #3028)
a.
b.
Duplex Pump Station Rehabilitation (Lake Sparling Heights
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on satisfactory rehabilitation of the existing Pump
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to rehabilitate the existing pump
station and adjacent sanitary sewer collection system as indicated on the Drawings. Work includes but is not
necessarily limited to the following: Construct the proposed above ground valves and pump-out connection,
pumps, motors, control panel, cables, rails, pressure sewer piping and appurtenances as shown on the drawings.
All grading, wastewater by-pass pumping, pumper trucks, erosion and sedimentation prevention and control,
clearing and grubbing. All demolition, removal, and disposal of existing facilities as noted in the Drawings
including tie-ins, intercepts, conflicts and abandonment of piping, conduits or electrical services. All
coordination, materials and equipment, tools, and labor to allow existing SCADA control panel and
SCADA pole to remain as is, water service connection, or extend an existing water service connection. All
coordination with the electric power company, materials, equipment, tools, labor and fees to install an
electrical service connection. Installation of all site and adjacent improvements noted on drawings including
driveways and driveway connections, fencing with curb and gate, asphalt and concrete paving, rock fill and
sodding. All materials, equipment, tools, and labor to line (CIPP) the adjacent existing sanitary sewer
collection system and rehabilitate the existing manhole(s) indicated on the Drawings. All work required to
construct, complete start-up testing, and deliver a complete operational Pump Station and rehabilitate the
adjacent wastewater collection system without interruption of service.
Payment for General Requirements (Section 01001) shall include bonds, permits, and any required
insurance, project signs, pre-construction audio-video documentation, maintenance of traffic, public
information officer, and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the start of the work shall also be
included. This Work also consist of the general project management of the Work including, but not limited
to, field supervision and office management, as well as other incidental cost for management of the Work
during the duration of the Contract. This Work also includes maintenance of the field offices for the
duration of the Contract. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements, will not be
made for payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. This item will be paid upon each
payment request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the pay request invoices to
substantiate the appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor.
those personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the project site, preparation of submittals, and for
the establishment of temporary offices and buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, project signs,
field surveys, sanitary and other facilities required by these specifications, and State and local laws and
amount.
Bid Item 14.110.xxx
Duplex Pump Station (Lake Sparling Heights Unit 1 #3202)
a. Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on satisfactory construction of the new Pump
b. Payment: Payment of the applicable Contract lump sum price as stated in the proposal will be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct a pump station as
01025 - 27
rev: November 2012
indicated on the Drawings. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: pump station
improvements including wet well, top slab, new manhole, valve vault, pumps, motors, control panel,
relocated SCADA control panel and SCADA pole, cables, rails, valves, water service connection, pressure
piping, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings. All grading, wastewater by-pass pumping, pumper
trucks, erosion and sedimentation prevention and control, rehabilitation of the existing wet well to a master
manhole (including lining system), rehab existing manhole, clearing and grubbing. All demolition, removal, and
disposal of existing facilities as noted in the Drawings including tie-ins, intercepts, conflicts and abandonment
of piping, conduits or electrical services. All coordination with the electric power company, materials,
equipment, tools, labor and fees to install an electrical service connection. Installation of all site and
adjacent improvements noted on drawings including driveways and driveway connections, fencing with curb
and gate, retaining wall, asphalt and concrete paving, rock fill and sodding. All materials, equipment, tools,
and labor to line (CIPP) the adjacent existing sanitary sewer collection system and rehabilitate the existing
manhole(s) indicated on the Drawings. All work required to construct, complete start-up testing and deliver a
complete operational Pump Station without interruption of service.
Payment for General Requirements (Section 01001) shall include bonds, permits, and any required insurance,
project signs, pre-construction audio-video documentation, maintenance of traffic, public information
officer, and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the start of the work shall also be included. This
Contract. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements, will not be made for
payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price. This item will be paid upon each payment
request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the pay request invoices to substantiate the
appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor.
those personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the project site, preparation of submittals, and for the
establishment of temporary offices and buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, project signs, field
surveys, sanitary and other facilities required by these specifications, and State and local laws and
amount.
14.2 – Wastewater Triplex Pump Station
Bid Item 14.210.xxx
Triplex Pump Station
a.
b.
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on satisfactory construction of the new Pump
Station complete and ready for continuous operation.
furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct a pump station as indicated on the Drawings.
Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: pump station improvements including wetwell, top slab,
valve vault, pumps, motors, control panel, SCADA control panel, SCADA pole, cables, rails, valves, water service
connection, pressure piping and appurtenances, stand–by generator, fuel tank, and odor control system as shown on
the Drawings. All coordination with the electric power company, materials, equipment, tools, labor and fees to install
an electrical service connection. Installation of all site and adjacent improvements noted on drawings including
driveways and driveway connections, fencing with curb and gate, masonry walls and gates, asphalt and concrete
01025 - 28
rev: November 2012
paving, rock fill and sodding. All work required to construct, complete start-up testing and deliver a complete
operational Pump Station without interruption of service.
Pg 23
Bid Item 14.220.xxx
a.
b.
Triplex Pump Station Rehabilitation
Measurement: Measurement for this item shall be based on satisfactory rehabilitation of the existing Pump
Station complete and ready for continuous operation.
furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to rehabilitate the existing pump station as indicated on the
Drawings. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: Pump Station improvements and
modifications including fencing and gates, masonry walls and gates, rehabilitate and line the existing wetwell,
replacement of the top slab, construct the lined valve vault, pumps, motors, control panel, cables, rails, valves,
pressure piping and appurtenances, stand–by generator, fuel tank, and odor control system as shown on the Drawings.
All demolition, removal and disposal of existing facilities as noted in the Drawings including tie-ins, intercepts,
conflicts and abandonment of piping, conduits or electrical services. All coordination, materials and equipment,
tools, and labor to relocate the existing SCADA control panel, SCADA pole, water service connection, or extend an
existing water service connection. All coordination with the electric power company, materials, equipment, tools,
labor and fees to install an electrical service connection. Installation of all site and adjacent improvements noted on
drawings including driveways and driveway connections, fencing with curb and gate, asphalt and concrete paving,
rock fill and sodding. All work required to construct, complete start-up testing and deliver a complete operational
Pump Station without interruption of service.
END OF SECTION
01025 - 29
rev: November 2012
T H I S PAGE I NT E NT I O NAL L Y L E FT B L ANK
S E CT I O N 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENT
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
B. Prior to submitting a monthly payment application, the Contractor’s progressive As-Built
Drawings and As-Built Asset Attribute Data, Gravity Main, and Pipe Deflection Tables shall
be accepted by the County.
C. Progressive As-Built Drawings shall indicate the horizontal and vertical locations of all
current constructed improvements with sufficient information and notes to easily determine
if the improvements were constructed in conformance with the Contract Documents. The
progressive As-Built Asset Attribute Data, Gravity Main, and Pipe Deflection Tables shall
include a Surveyor’s certified statement regarding the constructed improvements being
within the specified accuracies or if not, indicating the variances as described in specification
Section 01050 "Surveying and Field Engineering", Table 01050-1 Minimum Survey
Accuracies.
1.02
FORMAT
A. Format and Content: Use the accepted Schedule of Values.
1. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Generic name
b. Related Specification Section
c. Name of Subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator
e. Name of supplier
f. Dollar value
2. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar. The total shall equal the Contract
Amount.
1.03
PREPARATION OF APPLICATION
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified and paid for by the County.
1. The initial Application for Payment: The Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: As stated in the General Conditions, Payment applications are
to be submitted monthly on a day of the month to be established by the County at the Pre01027 - 1
rev: November 2012
Construction conference.
C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and
execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor.
Incomplete applications will be returned without action.
1. Submit applications typed on forms provided by the County.
2. Use data on Bid Form and approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each
column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products.
3. List each authorized Change Order and an extension or continuation sheet, listing
Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work.
4. Each item shall have an assigned dollar value for the current pay period and a cumulative
value for the project to-date.
5. Submit stored material log, partial waivers of claims and mechanic liens, and consent of
surety with each application, as further explained below.
PART 5 - SUBMIT A STORED MATERIAL LOG WITH EACH APPLICATION FOR
PAYMENT WHICH IDENTIFIES THE TYPE, QUANTITY AND VALUE OF ALL
STORED MATERIAL, AND THAT TRACKS WHEN THE STORED MATERIALS ARE
INSTALLED AND DEDUCTS THEM FROM STORED QUANTITY AT THAT TIME.
INCLUDE ORIGINAL INVOICES FOR ALL STORED MATERIALS THAT PAYMENT IS
REQUESTED.
PART 6 - WAIVERS OF CLAIMS AND MECHANICS LIEN: WITH EACH APPLICATION
FOR PAYMENT SUBMIT WAIVERS OF CLAIMS AND MECHANICS LIENS FROM
SUBCONTRACTORS OR SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION PERIOD COVERED BY THE PREVIOUS APPLICATIONS.
6. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for
retainage, on each item.
7. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
8. The County reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
9. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of work covered by the application who could lawfully
be entitled to a payment claim or lien.
10. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of claims and lien on forms and executed in a manner
acceptable to the County.
PART 7 - TRANSMITTAL: SUBMIT 4 EXECUTED COPIES OF EACH APPLICATION
FOR PAYMENT TO THE COUNTY BY MEANS ENSURING RECEIPT WITHIN 24
HOURS. ONE COPY SHALL BE COMPLETE, INCLUDING WAIVERS OF LIEN AND
SIMILAR ATTACHMENTS WHEN REQUIRED.
11. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording
appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the County.
12. The Contractor shall include a certification with each application stating that all previous
payments received from the County under the Contract have been applied by the
Contractor to discharge in full all obligations of the Contractor in connection with the
Work by prior applications for payment, and all materials and equipment incorporated
01027 - 2
rev: November 2012
into the Work are free and clear of all liens, claims, security interest and encumbrances.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of Subcontractors
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators
3. Schedule of Values
4. Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule (accepted)
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments
6. Copies of building permits
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the
Work.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance polices
9. Performance and Payment bonds (if required).
10. Data needed to acquire County's insurance.
H Monthly Application for Partial Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with submittal of Monthly Partial Payments include the following:
1. Relevant tests
2. Progressive As-builts
3. Table 01050-2 Asset Attribute Data Form Examples
4. Table 01050-3 Pipe Deflection Table Example
5. Table 01050-4 Gravity Main Table
6. Partial Release of lien
7. Partial consent of surety
8. Site photographs
9. Updated Progress Schedule:
submit one electronic copy and five (5) copies
10. Summary of Values
11. Pay Request
12. On-Site Storage
I. Substantial Completion Application for Payment: Following issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect
any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for County occupancy of
designated portions of the Work.
1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application
include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals
b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements
c. Test/adjust/balance records
d. Maintenance instructions
e. Meter readings.
f. Start-up performance reports
g. Change-over information related to the County's occupancy, use, operation and
maintenance.
h. Final Cleaning
i. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
j. Advice on shifting insurance coverage
01027 - 3
rev: November 2012
k. List of incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to County’s Certificate of
Substantial Completion.
J. Final Completion Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals which
must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment
include the following:
1. Prior to submitting a request for final payment or the County issuing a Certificate of
Completion for the Work, the Contractor shall submit the final Record Documents to the
County for approval. Retainage funds will be withheld at the County’s discretion based
on the quality and accuracy of the final Record Documents.
2. Completion of project close-out requirements.
3. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
4. Assurance that unsettled claims are settled.
5. Assurance that work not complete and accepted is now completed.
6. Transmittal of required project construction records to the County.
7. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid.
8. Removal of temporary facilities and services has been completed.
9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.
10. Change of door locks to County's access.
11. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.
12. Prepare Application for Final Payment as required in General Conditions.
1.04
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit four (4) copies of each Application for Payment at time stipulated in Agreement.
B. Submit under transmittal letter.
1.05
SUBSTANTIATING DATA
A. When the County requires substantiating information, submit data justifying line item
amounts in question.
B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application
number and date, and line item by number and description.
END OF SECTION
01027 - 4
rev: November 2012
S E CT I O N 01050
SURVEYING AND FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Professional Surveyor: Provide professional surveying and mapping work required for the
execution of the contract, including verification of existing survey data, construction layout,
and production of the As-Built Drawings. This Work shall be performed by a Surveyor that
is licensed by the State of Florida as a professional surveyor and mapper pursuant to Chapter
472, F.S.
B. Professional Engineer: The Contractor shall provide the services of a Registered Professional
Engineer currently licensed in the State of Florida for the following specific services as
applicable to the Work.
1.02
REQUIREMENTS
A. Survey Control
1. The Contractor shall retain the services of a registered Surveyor and Mapper licensed in
the State of Florida to provide professional surveying and mapping services, and
maintain both a control survey and an as-built survey during Construction. Project
construction layout shall be established from the existing reference points shown on the
construction Drawings. The method of field staking for the construction of the Work
shall be at the option of Contractor. A copy of all field notes shall be submitted with the
pay request, to the County through the Contractor. The accuracy of any method of
staking shall be the responsibility of Contractor. All engineering, for vertical and
horizontal control, shall be the responsibility of Contractor. All staking shall be done to
provide for easy verification of the work by the County.
B. Engineering Services
1. The Engineer shall be responsible for duties during Construction to include, but not
limited to:
a. Inspections, testing, witnessing requiring a licensed Professional Engineer.
b. Design of temporary shoring, bridging, scaffolding or other temporary construction,
formwork and protection of existing structures.
c. Other requirements as specified herein.
2. Engineering related designs, tests and inspections shall be signed by the licensed
Professional Engineer as required by the County.
C. The site survey will identify control points {monuments and bench marks noted on the
Drawings). The Contractor shall confirm and accept the control points. The Contractor shall
provide all other surveys necessary for the Construction of the Project.
01050-1
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS OF THE SURVEYOR
A. The Surveyor, who is proposed by the Contractor to provide services for the Project, is
subject to the approval of the County. Prior to any services being performed, the Contractor
shall submit the name and address of any proposed Surveyor and a written acknowledgement
from the Surveyor stating that he has the hardware, software and adequate scope of services
in his agreement with the Contractor to fully comply with the requirements of this
specification. These submittals shall be provided to the County prior to Notice to Proceed. It
is recommended that the Surveyor attend the Pre-Construction meeting. Any Surveyor, who
has not previously performed work for the County shall attend the Pre-Construction meeting.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Provide qualifications of the Surveyor or Engineer.
1. A Florida Registered Professional Engineer or Registered Surveyor and Mapper, who is
proposed by the Contractor to provide services to the Project shall be acceptable to the
County prior to field services being performed.
2. A Professional Engineer shall be of the discipline required for the specific service on the
Project.
3. Submit name, address and telephone number of the Surveyor and/or Engineer, as
appropriate to the County for acceptance before starting survey or engineering work.
B. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
C. Surveyor shall certify all elevations and locations included in Table 01050-1, 2, 3, and 4.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
SURVEY DOCUMENTS
A. Survey documents shall comply with the minimum technical standards of Chapter 61G17-6
of the Florida Administrative Code (FAC) and Table 01050-1 Minimum Survey Accuracies,
whichever are more stringent. The Tables 01050-2, 01050-3, and 01050-4 shall be signed,
sealed and dated by the Surveyor with each pay request. All coordinates shall be
geographically registered in the Florida State Plan Coordinate System using the contract
Drawings control points for horizontal and vertical controls.
01050-2
Table 01050-1
Minimum Survey Accuracies
Horizontal
Accuracy
(feet)
0.01
0.01
*
Elevation
Accuracy
(feet)
0.01
N/A
N/A
Mains at 100’ max. intervals
0.1
0.1
PVC pipe >16-inch at every pipe joint
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Fitting
0.1
0.1
0.1
N/A
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Restrained Joint Limits
Pipe
Top of Casing at the Casing Limits
10ft intervals during the directional drill
operation
Operating Nut of Hydrant
Operating Nut
Asset
Bench Marks
Baseline Control Locational Accuracy
Tract and Easement Corners
Fittings, Sleeve, Tapping Saddle, and
end of the pipe if Plugged or Capped.
Restrained Pipe
Connections
Bore & Jack Casing
Directional Drill
Location: Horizontal Center and
Vertical Top, unless otherwise specified
Point
Point
Survey Monuments
Pipe, Pipe at Valves, Pipe at Bore &
Jack Casing
Pipe, Pipe at Valves, Pipe at Bore &
Jack Casing
Hydrants
0.1
N/A
Valves
0.1
0.1
Air Release, Blow off, and Backflow
0.1
N/A
Valve Enclosure
Valves
Master Meters, Deduct Meters &
0.1
N/A
Register
Wastewater Meters
Meter Box
0.1
N/A
Meter Box
Clean out
0.1
N/A
Clean out
Manhole Rim
0.1
0.1
Manhole
Manhole Inverts
N/A
0.01
Pipe Inverts
Pump Station (Public & Private)
0.1
0.01
Wet Well and Pipe Inverts
Production Well or Monitoring Well
0.1
0.1
Well
Grease Interceptor
0.1
0.1
Oil / Water Separators
0.1
0.1
Demolished Pipe (abandoned in place
0.1
0.1
Limits of Abandoned or Removed Pipe
or removed)
Existing Utilities water, wastewater,
reclaimed water, and appurtenant
0.1
0.1
Pipe or Structure
structures **
* Shall conform to the requirements of the "Chapter 5J-17, ‘Minimum Technical Standards’, FAC",
certified by a SURVEYOR.
** Existing utilities including but not limited to water, wastewater, reclaimed water, storm, fiber optic cable,
electric, gas and structures within the limits of construction.
01050-3
TABLE 01050-2
Asset Attribute Data Form Examples
Hydrants Worksheet
Valves Worksheet
Manhole Worksheet
Meter Worksheet
01050-4
Fitting Worksheet
Cleanout Worksheet
Pipes Worksheet
Well Worksheet
01050-5
Easements Worksheet
Existing OC Utility Crossing
Grease Interceptor
For ease of calculating pipe deflections in Table 01050-3, begin by providing a unique asset ID
(top of pipe shots and fittings) for each utility and type, numbered sequentially along the pipe
run (including changes in direction) from start to finish of the pipe in the Table 01050-2. Then
branches and services of the same utility type can be numbered. It is recommended that each
utility (water, wastewater or reclaimed water) numbering format be distinguishable from the
other. This will allow organization and convenient sorting after the individual asset table
worksheet tabs are combined in the spreadsheet program prior to copying and pasting to the
deflection table spreadsheet.
01050-6
TABLE 01050-3 (Brian will send new)
PIPE DEFLECTION TABLE EXAMPLE
01050-7
Table 01050-4 (check with Brian)
Gravity Main Table
Downstream
Manhole
Number
Invert
Elev.
Upstream
Manhole
Number
Invert
Elev.
Length
(ft)
Design
Slope
Constructed
Slope
Constructed
Allowable
Slope
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SURVEY FIELD WORK
A. Locate, reference, and preserve existing horizontal and vertical control points and property
corners shown on the Drawings prior to starting any construction Work. If the Surveyor
performing the Work discovers any discrepancies that will affect the Project, the Contractor
must immediately report these findings to the County. All survey Work shall meet the
requirements as defined in Florida Administrative Code 61G17-6. Reference and preserve all
survey points during Construction. If survey points are disturbed, it is the responsibility of
the Contractor’s Surveyor to reset the points at the Contractor’s expense. Copies of the
Surveyor's field notes and/or electronic files for point replacement shall be provided to the
County.
1. The Surveyor shall locate all improvements for the project As-Built Asset Attribute Data
using State Plane Coordinates as the horizontal datum and the benchmark referenced on
the Drawings as the vertical datum. The County will provide electronic files of the
Drawings to be used by the Surveyor in complying with these specifications.
2. The construction layout shall be established from the reference points shown or listed on
the Drawings. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. All construction layout staking shall be done such as to provide for easy
verification of the Work by the County.
B. Only a Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida shall be employed for this Work. All control
points shall be protected by the Contractor from disturbance. If the monuments are disturbed,
any Work that is governed by these monuments shall be held in abeyance until the
monuments are reestablished by the Contractor and approved by the County. The accuracy of
all the Contractor’s stakes, alignments and grades is the responsibility of the Contractor.
However, the County has the discretionary right to check the Contractor’s stakes,
alignments, and grades at any time.
C. Use survey control points to layout such work tasks including but not limited to:
1. Clearing, grubbing, work limits, right-of-way lines and easements
2. Locations for pipelines and all associated structures and appurtenances
01050-8
D. The Surveyor shall reference and replace any project control points, boundary corners,
benchmarks, section corners, and right-of-way monuments that may be lost or destroyed, at
no additional cost to the County. Establish replacement points based on the original survey
control. Copies of all reference field notes and/or electronic files for point replacement shall
be submitted to the County.
3.02
SURVEYING
A. Locate and protect existing horizontal and vertical control points shown on the construction
Drawings prior to starting any work. If the Surveyor performing the Work finds differences
that will effect the Work, the Contractor must immediately report the findings to the County.
Establish control points, lines and levels by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.
The location of these points should minimize the number of sightings necessary to control
the work and the likelihood of the points being disturbed. Preserve and reference all
permanent reference points during Construction. If permanent reference points are disturbed,
it is the responsibility of the Contractor’s Surveyor to reset the points at the Contractor’s
expense. Copies of the Surveyor’s field notes shall be provided to the County.
1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project As-Built survey.
2. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the County or without
receipt of written approval from the County.
3. Report to the County when any control point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
B. Cover for water, reclaimed water and force mains shall vary to provide long uniform gradient
or slope to pipe to minimize air pockets and air release valves. The locations shown on the
Drawings for air and vacuum release valve assemblies are approximate and the Contractor
shall field adjust these locations to locate these valves at the highest point in the pipeline
installed.
C. To insure a uniform gradient for gravity pipe and pressure pipe, all lines shall be installed
using the following control techniques as a minimum:
1. Gravity lines: Continuous control, using laser beam technology,
2. Pressure lines: Control stakes set at 50 ft. intervals using Surveyor’s level instrument.
END OF SECTION
01050-9
S E CT I O N 01065
PERMITS AND FEES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Upon Notice of Award, obtain and pay for all appropriate and applicable permits and
licenses as provided for in the General Conditions, except as otherwise provided herein.
2. Schedule all inspections and obtain all written approvals of the agencies required by the
permits and licenses.
3. Strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the governmental unit(s) or agency(cies)
having jurisdiction over the Work. Whenever there is a difference in the requirements of
a jurisdictional body and the Contract Documents, the more stringent shall apply.
4. A copy of the permits obtained by the County are furnished in Appendix C "Permits
Obtained by Owner" of these specifications.
5. Unless otherwise specified, the cost of work specified in the various sections of Division
1, will not be paid for separately but the cost therefore shall be considered incidental to
and included in the bid prices of the various Contract items.
B. Building Permit (Orange County)
1. The County will pay the general building permit fee and any related impact fees or
assessments to be paid to Orange County for the issuance of that permit only.
2. The Contractor shall pay all fees associated with obtaining Orange County trade permits
and any and all inspection fees for the Orange County Building Department providing
inspections for this project. The Contractor shall apply for and obtain the building
permits from Orange County and schedule and obtain final approval from the building
inspectors.
3. Information on Orange County Building Department fees is included in the Instructions
to Bidders in Division 0.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling all permit inspections and obtaining
inspection approval from Orange County, as required by the building and sub-discipline
construction permits.
C. Construction Dewatering Permit
The Contractor shall apply and pay for all fees associated with obtaining Florida Department
of Environmental Protection District Office construction dewatering permits, if required. The
Contractor shall provide all materials and equipment to comply with the permit requirements
at no additional cost to the County.
END OF SECTION
01065-1
S E CT I O N 01070
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A. Reference to the following standards of any technical society, organization or body shall be
construed to mean the latest standard, code or specification or tentative specification adopted
and published at the date of advertisement for bids, even though reference has been made to
an earlier standard. Such reference is hereby made a part of the Contract the same as if
herein repeated in full and in the event of any conflict between any of these specifications,
standard codes or tentative specifications and the Contract Documents, the most stringent
shall govern.
AA
AASHTO
ABPA
ACI
AFBMA
AGA
AGMA
AI
AIA
AIEE
AIMA
AISC
AISI
AMCA
ANSI
API
APWA
AREA
ASA
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSCBC
ASTM
AWPA
AWBP
AWS
AWWA
CRSI
CS
Aluminum Association
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
Acoustical and Board Products Association
American Concrete Institute
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association
American Gas Association
American Gear Manufacturers Association
The Asphalt Institute
American Institute of Architects
American Institute of Electrical Engineers
Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
American Moving and Conditioning Association
American National Standards Institute
American Petroleum Institute
American Public Works Association
American Railway Engineering Association
American Standards Association (now ANSI)
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning
Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Standard Safety Code for Building Construction
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wood Preservers Association
American Wood Preservers Board
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standard
01070 - 1
rev: August, 2012
DOT Spec
FDOT
FAC
FS
IEEE
IPCEA
NACE
NASSCO
NBFU
NBS
NEC
NECA
NEMA
NFPA
NPT
NSF
OSHA
PCA
PCI
PS
SAE
SDI
SJI
SMACNA
SSPC
UL
USASI
Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction –
Florida Department of Transportation
Florida Administrative Code
Federal Standard
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
National Association of Sewer Service Companies
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Bureau of Standards
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Contractor's Association
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Pipe Threads
National Science Foundation
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Portland Cement Association
Prestressed Concrete Institute
United States Products Standards
Society of Automotive Engineers
Steel Decks Institute
Steel Joists Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Structural Steel Painting Council
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
United States of American Standards Institute (Now ANSI)
B. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
CU FT
CU IN
CY
DegC
DegF
F
FT
G
GA
GAL
GPH
GPM
GPS
HR
IN
IPS
KG
L
LB
LBF-IN
cubic feet
cubic inch(es)
cubic yard(s)
degree(s) Centigrade
degree(s) Fahrenheit
Fahrenheit
feet, foot
gram(s)
gage
gallon(s)
gallon(s) per hour
gallon(s) per minute
gallon(s) per second
hour(s)
inch(es)
iron pipe size
kilogram(s)
liter(s)
pound(s)
pound (force) inch
01070 - 2
rev: August, 2012
LF
MIN. min.
ml
MO
OZ
QT
RH
SF
SQ IN
YD
YR
linear foot, linear feet
minute(s), minimum
milliliter
month(s)
ounce(s)
quart
relative humidity
square foot, square feet
square inch(es)
yard(s)
year(s)
C. TERMINOLOGY
@
AB
ADJ
ADMIN
AFG
AGGR
AL
ALT
APPX
APX
ART
ASPH
ASSY
AUTO
AUX
AVE
AVG
AWG
BAR
BCCMP
BL
BLDG
BLKG
BM
C to C
CCB
CEM
CIP
CJ
CL
CM
CMP
CO
CONC
CONN
CONST
CONT
CONTR
CU, COP
ORR
CRIT
CTD
CTR
at
anchor bolt
adjust, adjustable
administration
above finished grade
aggregate
aluminum
alternate
appendix
approximate
article
asphalt
assembly
automatic
auxiliary
avenue
average
American Wire Gauge
barrier
bituminous coated corrugated metal pipe
base line
building
blocking
beam
center to center
concrete block, masonry
cement
cast iron pipe, cast in place
construction joint
center line, clearance
Construction Manager
corrugated metal pipe
cleanout
concrete
connection
construction
continuous
contractor
copper
corridor
critical
coated
center
01070 - 3
rev: August, 2012
CULV
d
DBL
DEM
DEPT
DET
DIA, D
DIAG
DIM
DWG
FEM
FUT
FV
FM
FH, HYD
ID
MAS
MATL
MAX
MFD
MFG
MFR
MH
MIN
MISC
MTL
NAT
NATL
NOM
NTS
OD
PP
R
Rd
REIN
REL A
REQD
REV
RR
R/W
RWM
RY
SAN
SCH
SECT
SLV
SQ
SST
ST
STA
STD
SURF
SUSP
SYM
SYS
TEMP
culvert
delta
double
demolition, demolish
department
detail
diameter
diagonal
dimension
drawing
female
future
field verify
force main
fire hydrant
inside diameter
masonry
material
maximum
manufactured
manufacturing
manufacturer
manhole, metal hallide
minimum
miscellaneous
material
natural
national
nominal
not to scale
outside diameter
power pole
radius
road
reinforce
relief air
required
revision
railroad
right-of-way
reclaimed water main
railway
sanitary
schedule
section
sleeve
square
stainless steel
street
station
standard
surface
suspend(ed)
Symbol, symmetrical
system
Temperature, temporary
01070 - 4
rev: August, 2012
TYP
UTIL
W
WLD
WM
W/O
WT
YD
YR
YW
typical
utility
West
welded
water main
without
weight
yard
year
wye
END OF SECTION
01070 - 5
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 01091
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published
specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever
no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the
respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the Work is
advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may
be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set
forth herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of or
omission from said standards or requirements.
B. Assignment of Specialists: In certain instances, specification test requires (or implies) that
specific work is to be assigned to specialist or expert entities who must be engaged for the
performance of the Work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements
over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These requirements shall not be
interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work. They are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction
settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party
or entity involved in a specific unit of Work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated
construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of
the entire set of Contract requirements remains with the Contractor.
1.02
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all Work
specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of such referenced documents
which are not in conflict with the requirements of these Specifications or applicable codes.
B. References herein to "Building Code" shall mean the Florida Building Code. The latest
edition of the code shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda, modifications,
amendments, or other lawful changes thereto.
C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, Drawings, and the other Contract
Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to
the attention of the Engineer for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing
any materials or labor. The Contractor shall bid the most stringent requirements.
D. Applicable Standard Specifications: The Contractor shall construct the Work specified herein
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions
of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications listed.
01091 - 1
rev: August, 2012
END OF SECTION
01091 - 2
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
1.03
Contractor participation in pre-construction conferences, progress meetings and
specially called meetings.
MEETINGS CALLED BY THE COUNTY
A.
The County will schedule and administer a pre-construction conference, periodic
progress meetings and specific topic meetings throughout the progress of the Work.
The County will:
1.
Prepare and distribute a notification of the meeting to required attendees.
2.
Establish, prepare and distribute an agenda with the notification.
3.
Make physical arrangements for the meetings.
4.
Preside at meetings.
5.
Prepare and distribute minutes of meetings including significant proceedings
and decisions, within 15 working days after each meeting. Minutes will be
forwarded to all participants and to parties affected by decisions made at the
meeting.
B.
Representatives of the Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings
shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
C.
The meeting location will generally be a central site, convenient for all parties,
designated by the County.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Attendance:
1.
County
2.
Contractor and superintendent
3.
Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
4.
Representatives of suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate to the agenda
5.
County MBE/WBE representative
6.
Other agency representatives (FDEP, EPA, City, etc.)
7.
Others as requested by the County or Contractor
B.
Suggested Agenda:
1.
Distribution and discussion of:
a.
List of major Subcontractors and suppliers
b.
Construction schedules
c.
Contact information
C.
Organizational arrangement of Contractor’s forces and personnel, and those of
01200-1
Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, and the County.
1.04
D.
Critical work sequencing
E.
Major equipment deliveries
F.
Project coordination
1.
Designation of responsible personnel
2.
Channels and procedures for communication
G.
Procedures and processing of:
1.
Field decisions
2.
Proposal requests
3.
Submittals
4.
Change orders
5.
Applications for payment/Schedule of Values
6.
Contractor quality control
7.
Submittal of Shop Drawings, project data and samples
8.
Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
9.
Procedures for maintaining as built and record documents
10.
Use of premises:
a.
Office, work and storage areas
b.
County’s requirements
c.
Housekeeping
11.
Temporary construction facilities
12.
Temporary utilities
13.
Safety and first aid procedures
14.
Rules and regulations
15.
Security procedures
H.
Place, date and time for regular progress meetings
I.
Completion time for contract and liquidated damages
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
The County will schedule progress meetings every month and as required by
progress of the Work with the first meeting one month after the pre-construction
meeting. The Contractor will prepare and distribute the meeting minutes within 7
calendar days.
B.
Attendance:
1.
County
2.
Contractor
3.
Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
4.
Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
5.
Others as appropriate
01200-2
C.
The Contractor's representative is to attend the project meetings and have the
authority to act on behalf of the entity represented on field related matters.
Contractor’s representative is to study previous meeting minutes and current agenda
items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics and provide specific
information including but not limited to:
1.
Status of submittals and actions necessary to expedite them
2.
Status of activities behind schedule and actions necessary to regain the
approved schedule
3.
Status of materials and equipment deliveries and action necessary to expedite
materials and equipment and maintain the approved schedule
4.
Status of open RFI’s and actions necessary to address them
D.
To the maximum extent practicable, the Contractor is to assign the same personnel to
represent the Contractor at Progress Meetings throughout the progress of the Work.
E.
The Contractor is to provide a current shop drawing submittal log at each progress
meeting.
F.
The Contractor is to provide copies of the updated Progress Schedule at each project
meeting in accordance with the General Conditions.
G.
Suggested Agenda:
1.
Review and approve minutes from previous meeting
2.
Review of Work progress since previous meeting to include current as-builts
3.
Contractor’s/Subcontractor’s workforce and equipment
4.
Progressive As-Built Drawings
5.
Surveyor’s submittals
a.
As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table (see Table 01050-2)
b.
Pipe Deflection Table (see Table 01050-3)
c.
Gravity Main Table (see Table 01050-4)
6.
Field observations, problems and conflicts
7.
Construction progress and problems which impede construction schedule
8.
Shop Drawing submittal status
9.
Requests for Information (RFI) status
10.
Change order status
11.
Review of off site fabrication and delivery schedules
12.
Corrective measures and procedures to regain approved schedule
13.
Revisions to construction schedule
14.
Job progress and schedule for succeeding work period
15.
Coordination of schedules
16.
Maintenance of quality standards
17.
Review submittal schedule; expedite as required
18
Pending requests for information, changes and substitutions
19.
Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and completion
date
20.
Pay application status
21.
Other business
01200-3
H.
Revision to Minutes:
1.
Unless minutes are challenged, in writing, prior to the next regularly
scheduled Progress Meeting, they will be accepted as properly summarizing
the discussions and decisions of the meeting.
2.
Persons challenging minutes shall reproduce and distribute copies of the
challenge to all indicated recipients of the particular set of minutes.
3.
Challenge to minutes shall be settled as priority portion of "old business" at
next regularly scheduled meeting.
END OF SECTION
01200-4
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Work completed without approved Shop Drawings and/or samples shall be considered installed at
the Contractor’s risk.
1.01
1.02
SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA
A.
Shop Drawings defined in the General Conditions, shall complement design and
construction Drawings, and shall contain sufficient detail to clearly define all aspects
of the Construction. These Drawings shall be complete and detailed.
B.
Contractor and Supplier’s catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, illustrations and other
standard descriptive data shall be clearly marked with specification title and numbers
to identify pertinent materials, product or models. Delete information which is not
applicable to the Work by striking or cross-hatching.
C.
If Shop Drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard
shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such variations in the
letter of transmittal. If acceptable, proper adjustment in the Contract shall be
implemented where appropriate. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations,
the Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the Work in
accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been reviewed.
D.
Data on materials and equipment shall include, without limitation, materials and
equipment lists, catalog data sheets, cuts, performance curves, diagrams, verification
of conformance with applicable standards or codes, materials of construction and
similar descriptive material. Materials and equipment list shall, for each item, give
the name and location of the Supplier or manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference,
size, finish and all other pertinent data.
E.
For all equipment furnished, the Contractor shall provide a list including the
equipment name and address and telephone number of the Supplier’s representative
and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained.
F.
The Contractor will obtain an installation list from suppliers and equipment suppliers
who propose to furnish equipment or products for submittal to County/Professional
along with the required Shop Drawings. The installation list shall include at least five
installations where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation
for a period of at least one year.
REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A.
The County /Professional's review of Shop Drawings, Data, and Samples as
submitted by the Contractor will be to determine if the items(s) generally conforms
to the information in the Contract Documents and is compatible with the design
concept. The County/Professional's review and exceptions, if any, will not constitute
an approval of dimensions, connections, quantities, and details of the material,
01300-1
equipment, device, or item shown.
B.
The review of drawings and schedules will be general, and shall not be construed:
1.
As permitting any departure from the Contract Documents.
2.
As relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details,
dimensions, and materials.
3.
As approving departures from details furnished by the County/Professional,
except as otherwise provided herein.
C.
If the drawings or schedules as submitted describe variations and show a departure
from the Contract Documents which the County/Professional finds to be in the
interest of the County and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price
or contract time, the County/Professional may return the reviewed drawings without
noting an exception.
D.
"Approved As Noted" - Contractor shall incorporate County/Professional’s
comments into the submittal before release to manufacturer. The Contractor shall
send a letter to the County/Professional acknowledging the comments and their
incorporation into the Shop Drawing.
E.
"Amend and Resubmit" - Contractor shall resubmit the Shop Drawing to the
County/Professional. The resubmittal shall incorporate the County/Professional's
comments highlighted on the Shop Drawing.
F.
"Rejected" - Contractor shall correct, revise and resubmit Shop Drawing for review
by County/Professional.
G.
Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. For resubmittals
the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings, to revisions other than the corrections requested by County/Professional
on previous submissions. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the
County/Professional.
H.
If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the Drawings to constitute a
change to the Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor shall give written notice
thereof to the County/Professional.
I.
When the Shop Drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the
County/Professional, the Contractor shall carry out the Construction in accordance
therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions
from the County/Professional.
J.
No partial submittals will be reviewed. Submittals not deemed complete will be
stamped "Rejected" and returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. Unless otherwise
specifically permitted by the County/Professional, make all submittals in groups
containing all associated items for:
1.
Systems.
2.
Processes.
3.
As indicated in specific Specifications Sections.
All drawings, schematics, manufacturer's product data, certifications, and other Shop
Drawing submittals required by a system specification shall be submitted at one time
01300-2
as a package to facilitate interfaces checking.
1.03
K.
Only the County/Professional shall utilize the color "red" in marking Shop Drawing
submittals.
L.
Failure to comply with any of the above may result in the rejection of Shop
Drawings.
PRODUCT DATA
A.
1.04
MANUFACTURERS’ INSTRUCTIONS
A.
1.05
Submit not less than six copies, unless approved by the County/Professional. Mark
each copy to identify applicable products, models, options and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to the work.
When required in an individual Specification Section, submit manufacturer’s printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting and
finishing, in quantities specified for product data.
SAMPLES
A.
Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures and patterns for the
County's selection. Submit samples for selection of finishes within 30 days after
Award of Contract. All color and finish selections must be submitted by the
Contractor in a single submission, properly labeled and identified.
B.
Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for
interfacing work.
C.
Submit the number specified in the respective Specification section, but no less than
two. After review one will be retained by the County. Reviewed samples that may be
used in the work are indicated in the Specification Section.
D.
Samples shall be delivered to the County as directed. The Contractor shall prepay
shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required
shall not be used in the Work until approved by the County/Professional.
E.
Samples shall be of sufficient size to clearly illustrate:
1.
Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and
attachments devices.
2.
Full range of color, texture and pattern.
3.
Each sample shall have a label indicating:
a.
Name of Project
b.
Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.
c.
Material or equipment represented.
d.
Place of origin.
e.
Name of product and brand (if any).
f.
Location in Project.
01300-3
g.
Specification title and number.
h.
Submittal number.
Note: Samples of finished materials shall have additional marking that will identify
them under the finished schedules.
1.06
F.
The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter, in triplicate for each shipment of
samples containing the information required in paragraph herein. The Contractor
shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment and send a copy of this letter to
the Professional. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use
named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract
requirements.
G.
Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the County or stored at the
site of the Work. Approved samples of the hardware in good condition may be
incorporated in the work if requested in writing by the Contractor and approved in
writing by the County/Professional. Samples that failed testing or were not approved
will be returned to the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense, if so requested at time
of submission.
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
1.07
Provide field samples of finishes as required by individual Specifications sections.
Install the sample completely and finished. Acceptable samples in place may be
retained in completed Work.
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND CERTIFICATES
A.
Each letter of transmittal shall identify each and every item transmitted by title,
drawing number, revision number and date.
B.
The County generally will not check dimensions, quantities or schedules, except in
cases where the information is lacking in the Specifications.
C.
The following is applicable to submitted drawings, data and certificates:
1.
Show relation to adjacent structures or materials.
2.
Clearly identify field dimensions.
3.
Show required dimensions and clearances.
4.
Performance characteristic and capabilities shall accompany original Shop
Drawing submittals
5.
Wiring diagrams and controls shall accompany original Shop Drawing
submittals.
6.
Installation instructions shall accompany original Shop Drawing submittals.
7.
Each submittal shall identify applicable Standards, such as ASTM number or
Federal Specification number.
8.
All information not pertinent shall be removed from the submittal, or shall be
crossed out.
D.
When resubmission is required, the County/Professional will return only 2 marked up
copies. A third submission from the same manufacturer will not be accepted.
01300-4
1.08
1.09
1.10
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
The substitution requirements of this Section are in addition to the requirements of
the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
B.
When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be
understood that the proposal tendered by the Bidder includes those products in his
Bid. Substitutions will only be considered in cases where original materials are
unavailable or in an instance where substitute can be proven superior in its planned
application
C.
The intent of these specifications is to provide the County with a quality facility
without discouraging competitive bidding. For products specified only by reference
standards, performance and descriptive methods, without naming manufacturer's
products, the Contractor may provide the products of any manufacturer complying
with the Contract Documents, subject to the review of product data by the
County/Professional as specified herein.
D.
The County/Professional’s approval is required for substitutions.
E.
The Contract is based on the materials, equipment and methods described in the
Contract Documents.
F.
The County/Professional will consider proposals for substitution of materials
equipment and methods only when such proposals are accompanied by full and
complete technical data and all other information required by the
County/Professional to evaluate the proposed substitution.
G.
Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods unless such substitution has been
specifically approved for this work by the County/Professional in writing. The
Contractor must provide a submittal per this Section specifically requesting approval
of the substitution. Failure to specifically identify the requested substitution may
invalidate approval of a submittal.
AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS
A.
Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for
installation during Construction for orderly and timely progress of the Work.
B.
In the event that specified items will not be available, notify the County/Professional
prior to receipt of proposals.
OPERATING MANUALS
A.
1.11
Submit all manuals in accordance with requirements of Divisions 2 through 17 of the
Contract Specifications and Section 01700 "Project Closeout".
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES AND BONDS
A.
Provide as required by Technical Sections of the Specifications and Sections 01700
01300-5
"Project Closeout" and Section 01740 "Warranties and Bonds".
1.12
1.13
CADD FILES
A.
The Professional’s CADD files will be available on a limited basis to qualified firms
at the County’s prerogative. The procedure for requesting such files is noted
elsewhere in these documents and there is a cost associated with handling and
reproduction. Recipients are cautioned that these files may not accurately show
actual conditions as constructed. Users are responsible to verify actual field
conditions.
B.
The Professional’s Drawings are to be used only for background information. If the
Professional’s Drawings are just reproduced and resubmitted (e.g. for ductwork
drawings) they will be rejected.
C.
Copies of data furnished by the County/Professional to Contractor or Contractor to
County/Professional that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also
known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or
other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any
conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at
the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard
copies, the hard copies govern.
D.
Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified
inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party
receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures
within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the
data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will
be corrected by the transferring party.
E.
When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party
makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of
documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating
systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator.
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Photographs and digital pictures shall be in color. Provide one (1) copy of each
digital picture on each of three (3) CDs and provide one (1) print of each photograph
in two (2) separate albums.
B.
Photographs shall be from locations to illustrate the condition of Construction and
state of progress adequately.
C.
Provide up to twelve (12) digital photographs of views randomly selected by the
County, taken prior to any construction and prior to each scheduled Application for
Payment.
D.
Deliver electronic images, prints, and negatives to the County.
E.
Each print shall be single weight paper with glossy finish and the overall dimension
01300-6
shall be 7-1/2-inch x 10-inches (19.05 x 25.4 cm). The print shall be clear, sharp and
free of distortion after the enlargement from the negative.
F.
Provide loose-leaf albums for each set of photographs to hold prints with a maximum
of 50 leaves per binder.
G.
Each print shall be protected by flexible, transparent acetate or plastic sheet protector
leaves with metal reinforced holes. Two extra leaves shall be provided in each
binder.
H.
Capture and provide digital, ortho-rectified, true color, aerial photographs of the
complete project site prior to start of Construction and at final completion. A final 6inch or less ground pixel resolution is required. If using traditional photography, the
photos will need to be captured at an appropriate scale and scanned at a high enough
dpi to yield a final ground pixel size of 6-inches or less. If captured digitally, a final
6-inches or less ground sample distance is required. The final ortho-rectified photos
shall use a projection of NAD 27, state plane west and all vertical reference shall be
NAVD 88, US feet. All orthophoto mosaics shall meet a final accuracy of plus or
minus 5 feet.
I.
Provide a total of four (4) true color, color balanced orthophoto mosaic prints. Three
prints each of the pre and post construction (final completion) orthophoto mosaics for
a total of six. Each orthophoto mosaic print shall be on double-weight paper with
glossy finish and shall have overall dimensions of 36-inches x 58-inches. Two copies
of each of the digital orthophoto mosaics shall be supplied in Geotiff format on disk
for each time period (pre and post construction). The final color balanced, true color
orthophoto mosaics will be projected in NAD 27, state plane west and all vertical
reference shall be NAVD 88, US feet and shall meet a final accuracy of plus or
minus 5 feet.
J.
The Contractor shall provide before and after photographs of each portion of the site.
The below ground facilities shall include all equipment, walls, floor, piping, supports
and entrance. At major locations, photographs shall include before, during, and after
prints and all prints shall be placed in binders in ascending date order to show the
Work as it progresses.
K.
Descriptive Information
1.
Each photograph shall have a permanent title block on the back and shall
contain the typed information and arrangement as follows:
a.
ORANGE COUNTY, FLORIDA
b.
(ENTER PROJECT NAME)
c.
BID No. (Enter Bid Number)
d.
CONTRACTOR: (Name of Contractor)
e.
DATE: (When photo was taken)
f.
PHOTO NO.: (Consecutive Numbers)
g.
PHOTO BY: (Firm Name of Photographer)
h.
LOCATION: (Description of Location and View)
2.
The Contractor shall provide the Professional with a written description of
each photograph. This description shall be included in the binders and a copy
shall be submitted with the CDs.
01300-7
1.14
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Project Record Documents shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01720 "Project
Record Documents" of these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Article 9 of the General Conditions contains additional provisions regarding
submittals.
B.
Preliminary Shop Drawing Data: Within 20 days after the Award of the Contract or
before the Pre-Construction Meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the
County/Professional a complete listing of manufacturers for all items for which Shop
Drawings are to be submitted.
C.
Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule: Within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed, the
Contractor shall submit to the County/Professional a complete schedule of Shop
Drawings submittals fixing the respective dates for submission, the beginning of
manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment, nothing
those submittals critical to the progress schedule.
D.
Submittal Log: An accurate updated log of submittals will be maintained by the
Contractor and subject to review by the County/Professional at each scheduled
progress meeting.
E.
If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the Drawings to constitute a
change to the Contract Drawings or specifications, the Contractor shall give written
notice thereof to the County/Professional. This does not constitute a change order
until accepted by the County.
F.
Shop Drawing and submittal data shall be reviewed by the County/Professional for
each original submittal and first resubmittal; thereafter review time for subsequent
resubmittals shall be charged to the Contractor. The Contractor shall reimburse the
County for services rendered by the County/Professional at the rate multiplied by the
County’s Professional multiplier based on the fee schedule provided to the County
for this Project. If a County engineer is performing any portion of the review, this fee
is based upon the hourly rate of the engineer times the County’s multiplier for
overhead, benefits, and expenses. The Contractor agrees that the County shall deduct
such charges from the Contract Amount by a deductive Change Order.
G.
Contractor Shop Drawing and Sample submittals shall include five copies in addition
to any other copies that the Contractor wants returned. The County will retain five
copies of approved submittals.
H.
Identify Project, Project Number, date, dates of previous submittals, Contractor, SubContractors, suppliers with their addresses, pertinent Drawings by sheet and detail
01300-8
number, and Specification Section number, as appropriate. Identify all deviations
from the Contract Documents. Provide space for Contractor and Professional review
stamps.
I.
Contractor’s delivery of Shop Drawings for review shall follow a reasonable
sequence, as is necessary to support the dates on the Progress Schedule and avoid an
overload of Shop Drawings awaiting review at any one time. Coordinate submittal of
related items.
J.
Submit Shop Drawings per the schedule of Shop Drawing submittals, inserted in one
loose leaf binder, with tabs and index to the County/Professional. All individual
submittal sheets inserted in said binder must be clearly marked and referenced to
proper paragraph and subparagraph of specifications. Cross out any items on sheets
which constitute information not pertaining to equipment specified. Clearly mark all
components that are provided as "optional" by manufacturer. Shop Drawings shall be
approved by the Contractor prior to submittal to the County/Professional. Shop
Drawings will be reviewed by the County/Professional. After County/Professional
approval, reproduce and distribute in accordance with requirements herein.
K.
All submissions of Shop Drawings, brochures and catalog cuts shall be accompanied
by a transmittal letter listing the Drawings submitted by number and title.
L.
When engineering calculations and/or professional certification of performance
criteria of materials, systems, and/or equipment are required, the County is entitled to
rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications
submitted by the Contractor. Calculations, when required, shall be submitted in a
neat, clear and in an easy to follow format. Such calculations and/or certifications
shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of
Florida.
M.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct recipients to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
N.
Prior to submission of Shop Drawings and samples, the Contractor shall stamp and
sign the submittals. Any submission which, upon examination by the County, shows
evidence of not having been thoroughly checked, or is not in compliance with the
provisions of this Section will be returned to the Contractor for completion before it
will be considered for review.
O.
Notify the County of the need for making any changes in the arrangement of piping,
connections, wiring, manner of installation, etc., which may be required by the
material or equipment Contactor proposes to supply.
P.
On re-submittals, direct specific attention in writing or on the revised Drawings or
sample to revisions other than the corrections required by County on previous
submissions.
Q.
All drawings, schematics, manufacturer’s product data, certifications and other
drawing submittals required for a system specification shall be submitted at one time
as a package to facilitate interface checking.
01300-9
R.
The County will distribute Shop Drawings as follows for the indicated action taken:
SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL DISTRIBUTION
Representative
Party
No Exception Taken or
Make Correction Noted
Submittal
Transmittal
Shop
Drawing
Engineer
2 Copies
Contractor (see
Note 1)
2 Copies
County
1 Copy
Inspector
2 Copies
Project Record
Data (see Note 2)
1 Copy
File Copy
1 Copy
Each
Submittal
1 Copy
Each
Submittal
1 Copy
Each
Submittal
1 Copy
Each
Submittal
Rejected or Revise & Resubmit
Review
Comment
Sheet
1 Copy
Submittal
Transmittal
Shop
Drawing
Original
File Copy
All Copies
Except
Engineers
Review
Comment
Sheet
1 Copy
1 Copy
1 Copy
1 Copy
1 Copy
1 Copy
None
1 Copy
1 Copy
1 Copy
None
1 Copy
1 Copy
1 Copy
None
1 Copy
NOTES:
1.
Contractor shall distribute additional copies to Subcontractors as required.
2.
Stored by Contractor to be furnished to County upon closeout.
S.
3.02
All Shop Drawings shall be accompanied with a transmittal letter providing the
following information:
1.
Project Title and Contract Number
2.
Date
3.
Contractor’s name and address
4.
The number of each Shop Drawing, project data, and sample required.
5.
Notification of Deviations from Contract Documents
6.
Submittal Log Number conforming to specification section numbers
a.
Submit each specification section separately.
b.
Identify each Shop Drawing item required under respective
specification section.
c.
Identify resubmittal using specification section followed by A (first
resubmittal), B (second resubmittal)…etc.
CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW
A.
Contractor’s Responsibility for Coordination: Where the dimension, size, shape,
location, capacity or other characteristic affects another item, and where the
Contractor selects, fabricates or installs related or adjacent products to be used, the
Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of related items. The Contractor
shall insure that a proper exchange of information takes place prior to or during
preparation of each submittal and that submittals reflect such coordination. The
notation "verify" or "coordinate" on the Drawings indicates the necessity for
Contractor coordination in the particular instances used.
01300-10
3.03
B.
Contractor’s Checking: When submittals of Subcontractors and suppliers, the
Contractor shall mark all sets, indicating his corrections and comments in blue or
green. Copies marked in red may be returned for revision.
C.
The Contractor is responsible to deliver and pick-up all submittals in a timely manner
at the Architect’s designated office. The Contractor is responsible for all related costs
and expenses for the transmittal of such submittals
COUNTY’S / PROFESSIONAL’S REVIEW
A.
Corrections or comments made on Shop Drawings during review do not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with the requirements of Drawings and Specifications.
This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of this
Project and general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Any
substitutions or changes shall be properly noted.
B.
No action will be taken on "rough-in" Shop Drawings for plumbing and electrical
connections when the items of equipment are not included in the same submittal.
C.
Review Time:
1.
On a normal basis, each submittal will be returned to the Contractor within
fifteen (15) working days of the date it is received. Some submittals may
require additional time.
2.
If, for any reason, the above schedule cannot be met, the Contractor will be
so informed within a reasonable period and the Schedule of Submittals
revised. If the specific submittal affects the critical path, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Professional in writing. In the event of separate
submittals of individual components of a system, these submittals may be
held until all components of the system are submitted, and the Contractor will
be so notified.
END OF SECTION
01300-11
S E CT I O N 01301
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. General
1. Base all bids on materials and equipment specified in the Appendix D Orange County
Utilities List of Approved Products.
2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by
means of references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or catalog
numbers.
a. When this method of specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from
consideration other products bearing other manufacturer's or vendor's names, trade
names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are "or-equals," as determined by
County/Professional.
3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable substitutions under
the following conditions:
a. Or-equals are unavailable due to strike, discontinued production of products meeting
specified requirements, or other factors beyond control of Contractor; or,
b. Contractor proposes a cost and/or time reduction incentive to the Owner.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is adequate or superior in
all respects to that specified, and that it will perform the function for which it is intended.
2. Will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified.
3. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently arise.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Product: Manufactured material or equipment.
1.04
PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION
A. Substitution shall be considered only:
1. After award of Contract
2. Under the conditions stated herein
B. Written request through Contractor only.
C. Transmittal Mechanics
1. Follow the transmittal mechanics prescribed for Shop Drawings in Specification Section
01300 "Submittals."
01301 - 1
rev: August, 2012
a. Product substitution will include in the transmittal letter, either directly or as a clearly
marked attachment, the items listed in Paragraph D below.
D. Transmittal Contents
1. Product identification:
a. Manufacturer's name
b. Telephone number and representative contact name
c. Specification Section or Drawing reference of originally specified product, including
discrete name or tag number assigned to original product in the Contract Documents.
2. Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed product with
Contract Documents.
3. Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing product characteristics
including but not necessarily limited to:
a. Size
b. Composition or materials of construction
c. Weight
d. Electrical or mechanical requirements
4. Product experience
a. Location of past projects utilizing product.
b. Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced projects
knowledgeable concerning proposed product.
c. Available field data and reports associated with proposed product.
5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
6. Data relating to changes in cost.
7. Samples
a. At request of County/Professional.
b. Full size if requested by County/Professional.
c. Held until substantial completion.
d. County/Professional is not responsible for loss or damage to samples.
1.05
APPROVAL OR REJECTION
A. Written approval or rejection of substitution to be given by the Engineer.
B. Engineer reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with color and pattern of
specified product if necessary to secure design intent.
C. In the event the substitution is approved, the resulting cost and/or time reduction will be
documented by Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions.
D. Substitution will be rejected if:
1. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval.
2. Request is not made in accordance with this Specification Section.
3. In the County/Professional's opinion, acceptance will require substantial revision of the
original design.
4. In the County/Professional's opinion, substitution will not perform adequately the
function consistent with the design intent.
E. Contractor shall reimburse the County for the cost of the evaluation whether or not
01301 - 2
rev: August, 2012
substitution is approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01301 - 3
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 01310
PROGRESS SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENT
A.
B.
1.02
The Contractor will submit precedence method cost-loaded Critical Path Method
(CPM) Progress Schedules to the County depicting the approach to prosecution and
completion of the Work. This requirement includes, but is not limited to the
Contractor’s approach to Activity cost-loading, recovering schedule and managing
the effect of changes, substitutions and Delays on Work sequencing.
The Progress Schedule shall show how the Contractor’s priorities and sequencing for
the Work (or Work remaining) conform to the Contract requirements and the
sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents; reflect how
the Contractor anticipates foreseeable events, site conditions and all other general,
local and prevailing conditions that may affect cost, progress, schedule, furnishing
and performance of the Work; and show how the Contractor’s Means and Methods
translate into Activities and logic.
C.
The Progress Schedule will consist of the Initial Submittal, Payment Submittals and
Revision Submittals. Upon acceptance by the County, the Initial submittal will
become the As-Planned Schedule for the Work. Revision submittals upon acceptance
will become the As-Planned Schedule for the Work remaining to be completed as of
the submittal date for that Revision.
D.
References to the Critical Path Method (CPM) are to CPM construction industry
standards that are consistent with the requirements of this Section.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A.
The following terms, whether or not already defined elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, have the following intent and meanings within this Section:
1.
Activity Value (Value)  That portion of the Contract Price representing an
appropriate level of payment for the part of the Work designated by the
Activity.
2.
As-Planned Schedule  The first, complete Initial Progress Schedule submitted
by the Contractor with the intent to depict the entire Work as awarded and
accepted by the County or returned as no resubmittal required.
3.
Contract Float  Days between the Contractors anticipated date for completion
of the Work, or of a specified portion of the Work, if any, and the
corresponding Contract Time.
4.
CPM Schedule  The Progress Schedule based on the Critical Path Method
(CPM) of scheduling. The term Critical Path means any continuous sequence
of Activities in the Progress Schedule controlling, because of their sum
duration, the Early Date of a pertinent, specified Contract Time.
5.
Early/Late Dates  Early/late times of performance, based on CPM
01310 - 1
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.03
calculations, for an Activity in the Progress Schedule. Early Dates will be
based on proceeding with all or part of the Work on the date when the
corresponding Contract Time commences to run. Late Dates will be based on
completing all or part of the Work on the corresponding Contract Time, even
if the Contractor plans early completion.
Milestones  Key, pre-determined points of progress in the completion of a
facility, denoting interim targets in support of the Contract Times. Milestones
may pinpoint targets for key excavation and substructure events, significant
deliveries, critical path transition from superstructure to piping and electrical
roughing and building enclosure. Also, hookup of mechanical and electrical
equipment, availability of power for testing, equipment shakedown, training
of County personnel, start-up, Substantial Completion and other events of
like import.
Official Schedule  The Initial or most recent Revision Submittal accepted by
the County or returned as no resubmittal required and the basis for Payment
Submittals until another Revision Submittal is submitted and accepted. The
accepted Initial Submittal is also the As-Planned Schedule.
Payment Submittal  A monthly Progress Schedule update reflecting progress
and minor adjustments on the Activities, sequencing and restraints for Work
remaining.
Total Float  Days by which an activity may slip from its Early Dates without
necessarily extending a pertinent Contract Time. Total Float at least equals
Contract Float. Total Float may also be calculated and reported in working
Days. When an activity is delayed beyond Early Dates by its Total Float it
becomes a Critical Path activity and if delayed further will impact a Contract
Time.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Contractor may self-perform the Work covered by this Section or employ a
Subcontractor, subject to the County's consent. Employment of a scheduling
Subcontractor shall not in any way alter or reduce the Contractor's obligations under
the Contract Documents.
B.
The Contractor will obtain a written interpretation from the County, if the Contractor
believes that the selection of activities, logic ties and/or restraints requires a written
interpretation of the Contract Documents. With each submission, the Contractor will
point out by specific, written notation, any Progress Schedule feature that may reflect
variations from any requirements of the Contract Documents.
C.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain information directly from each
restraints.
D.
Neither Acceptance nor Review of any Progress Schedule will relieve the Contractor
from the obligation to comply with the Contract Times and any sequence of Work
indicated in or required by the Contract Documents and to complete, within the
Contract Times, any Work omitted from that Progress Schedule.
E.
Neither Acceptance nor Review of any Progress Schedule will imply approval of any
01310 - 2
interpretation of or variation from the Contract Documents, unless expressly
approved by the County through a written interpretation or by a separate, written
notation on the returned Progress Schedule Submittal.
1.04
ALLOWANCES – NOT ALLOWED
1.05
MILESTONES AND SCHEDULE RECOVERY
1.06
1.07
A.
The County will select Milestones and Milestone Dates on the basis of the AsPlanned Schedule. As the Official Schedule is revised, Milestone Dates will be
revised accordingly. Milestone Dates will serve as target dates.
B.
Whenever any Activity slips by fourteen (14) or more Days from the Late Date for
an activity in the Official Schedule, Milestone Dates selected by the County, or a
pertinent Contract Time, the Contractor will deliver a Revision Submittal
documenting the Contractor’s schedule recovery plan and/or a properly supported
request for an extension in the Contract Time. The narrative will identify the Delay
and actions taken by the Contractor to recover schedule, whether by adding labor,
Subcontractors or construction equipment, activity re-sequencing, expediting of
submittals and/or deliveries, overtime or shift Work, and so forth. Activity shortening
and overlapping shall be explained as to their basis (and be supported by increases in
resources).
C.
Upon evaluation of that Revision Submittal, if the County determines there is
sufficient cause, the County may withhold liquidated damages or provide a notice of
intent to do so, if schedule is indeed not recovered, and/or may give a notice of
default.
PROGRESS SCHEDULE SOFTWARE
A.
The scheduling software employed by the Contractor to process the Progress
Schedule will be the current version of Primavera P6.0®, or Primavera® Contractor
5.0 CPM scheduling software.
B.
If the Contractor intends to use companion schedule reporting, analysis or graphics
software tools, the Contractor will furnish to the County descriptive materials and
samples describing such software tools.
NON-PERFORMANCE
A.
The County may refuse to recommend all or any part of any payment, if the
Contractor fails, refuses or neglects to provide the required Progress Schedule
information on a timely basis. Partial payments without a properly updated Progress
Schedule shall be returned to the Contractor as non-conforming.
B.
If justified under the circumstances, the County also may prepare alternate Progress
Schedules, as appropriate, and deduct from the Contract Amount all related costs by
Change Order and/or take other action commensurate with the breach.
01310 - 3
1.08
1.09
REPORTS, SCHEDULES AND PLOTS
A.
Schedule Reports will include Activity (ID) code and description, duration, calendar,
Early Dates, Late Dates and Total Float. Separate Schedule Reports will tabulate, for
each Activity, all preceding and succeeding logic types and lead times, whether CPM
Plots displaying logic ties are appended or not.
B.
CPM Schedule Plots will be plotted on a suitable time scale and identify the Contract
Times, Critical Paths, phases and work areas on 24-inch x 36-inch or smaller sheets.
Activities will be shown on the Early Dates with Total Floats noted by Late Date
flags. For Payment and Revision Submittals plot a target comparison based on the
current Official Schedule.
C.
The Activity Value report will tabulate Activity code and description and Activity
Value, percent complete and earned value as calculated by the scheduling software.
Cash flow plots shall be provided showing the monthly and cumulative actual and
planned earned values with curves shown for Early and Late Dates in the schedules.
For Payment and Revision Schedule submittals, the cash flow curves shall also plot
the most current Official Schedule planned earnings curves.
D.
Each submittal shall include listings of all added and deleted activities, logic,
constraints, Activity Value changes and update information vs. the previous Progress
Schedule submittal. This list may be manually prepared or generated by accessory
software that will generate such listings.
NARRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Initial Submittal narrative will describe the Contractor’s approach to prosecution
of the Work and the basis for determination of activity durations, sequence and logic,
including the Contractor's management of the site, e.g., lay down, staging, parking,
etc.; Contractor’s phasing of the Work; use of crewing and construction equipment;
identification of non-work County/Professional’s, shifts, weekend Work and
multiple calendars applied to activities and an explanation of the basis for restraint
dates.
B.
Revision and Payment Submittal narratives will explain any changes to the approach
or planning referred to in Paragraph A above on account of any change, delay,
schedule recovery, substitution and/or Contractor-initiated revision occurring since
the previous submittal.
C.
Each narrative will list the Critical Path Activities and compare Early and Late Dates
against Contract Times and Milestone Dates. Narratives shall also recap progress
and Days gained or lost vs. the current Official Schedule, and identify delays, their
extent and causes.
D.
The Initial Submittal narrative will describe all delays occurring since Contract
Award and all pending and anticipated "or equal" and substitution proposals.
Payment and Revision Submittals narratives will describe any new delays and shall
certify that the Contractor has not been delayed, as of the cut off date, by any acts or
omissions of the County, except as otherwise specifically stated.
01310 - 4
1.10
ACTIVITY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Separate activities will identify permits, design when included in the Work,
construction, Submittal preparation and review (and resubmission and re-review),
deliveries (site or storage), testing, start-up, commissioning and Punch List. Separate
Activities will be used for County-furnished equipment, interfaces with other work
and other responsibilities of the County.
B.
Activities will be detailed to the extent required to show the transition of trade Work.
Activities will delineate the progression of the Work through mass excavation,
substructure, superstructure, equipment installation, start of piping and conduit
rough-in, building enclosure, mechanical and electrical equipment hookup phase,
building mechanical, electrical and plumbing (MEP), interior finishes, training of
County personnel, equipment checkout & testing and start-up.
C.
Submittal Activities will segregate long-lead items, any item requiring structural
access and other procurements that, in the Contractor’s judgment, may bear on the
rate of progress. If the Contract Documents require MEP coordination drawings,
separate MEP coordination drawing Activities will be used for each floor. Allow
time for reviews per Section 01300 "Submittals" and the General Conditions, and
revisions and re-submittals. Also include activities for or provide a separate tabular
schedule of submittal dates for all Shop Drawings, product data, and samples
including County furnished products and the dates reviewed submittals will be
required from the County. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.
D.
Activities will not combine separate or non-concurrent items of Unit Price or lump
sum Work, Work in separate structures and Work in distinct areas, locations or floors
within an area or structure; or rough-in and finish Work.
E.
Activity durations will equal the work Days required to sufficiently complete the
Work designated by the Activity, (i.e., when finish-to-start successors could start,
even if the Activity is not quite 100% complete). Installation Activities will last from
ten (10) to forty (40) workdays. Submittal review activity durations shall conform to
specified timeframes.
F.
Activities will be assigned consistent descriptions and identification codes. Sort
codes will group Activities by building or structure, floor or area, Change Order and
other meaningful schemes.
G.
Activities will be assigned Activity Values as appropriate and needed to reasonably
allocate the Contract Amount to the time periods that they will be earned and eligible
for payment based on the Progress Schedule and Schedule of Values. Separate pay
activities may be used to simplify cost-loading of the Progress Schedule. When
used, pay activities shall be loaded with the cost of Work that is included, at no cost,
in related (generally, concurrent) CPM activities. Pay activities shall not control the
rate of progress; however, their start and finish dates shall be consistent with those of
their related CPM activities to ensure accurate Early Date and Late Date cash-flow
plots.
01310 - 5
1.11
1.12
FLOAT TOLERANCES AND FLOAT OWNERSHIP
A.
Any Progress Schedule with Early Dates after a Contract Time will yield negative
Total and Contract Floats, whether shown/calculated or not. Any Revision Submittal
with less than negative twenty (20) Days of Float will be returned as "Revise and
Resubmit," unless a time extension is requested or the County assesses liquidated
damages or gives notice of intent to do so, in the event schedule is not recovered.
B.
Float calculated from the definitions given in this Section, supersede any conflicting
Float values in any early completion Progress Schedule.
C.
Neither the County nor the Contractor own the Float time, the Project owns the Float
time. Neither the County nor the Contractor use of positive Total Float will impact a
Contract Completion Date or justify an extension of Contract Time.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Each Progress Schedule Submittal will consist of a narrative, five (5) copies of the
required reports and plots and an optical ROM data disk with the Contractor's
corresponding schedule and schedule layout files in Primavera ".XER" format.
B.
The County will review Progress Schedule Submittals and return a review copy
within 14 Days after receipt and the Contractor shall, if required, resubmit within 7
Days after return of the review copy.
C.
Requirements for the Initial Submittal:
1.
Within twenty (20) Days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and prior to
commencing Work on the Project, prepare and submit to the County the
Initial Submittal of the Progress Schedule for the Work. The Initial Submittal
will show the Work as awarded, without delays, Change Orders or
substitutions.
a.
Activity Values will prorate Schedule of Values costs and/or pay
items through to Activities. Provide a cross-reference listing with two
parts; a part that will list each activity with the respective amounts
allocated from each Schedule of Values and Unit Price Item making
up the total value of each activity and a second part that will list the
Schedule of Values and Unit Price Items with the respective amounts
allocated from each activity that make up the total value of each item.
2.
After the As-Planned Schedule is established, the County will select
Milestones and record the Milestone Early and Late Dates. As the Official
Schedule evolves, Milestone Dates will be revised accordingly.
3.
If the County refuses to endorse the Initial Submittal (or a resubmission) as
"Resubmittal Not Required," the As-Planned Schedule will not be
established. In that event, the Contractor will continue to submit Payment and
Revision Submittals reflecting progress and the Contractor's approach to
remaining Work. The County will rely on the available Payment and
Revision Submittals, subject to whatever adjustments it determines
appropriate.
D.
Requirements for Payment Submittals:
01310 - 6
1.
2.
3.
Payment Submittals with progress up to the closing date and updated Early
Dates and Late Dates for progress and remaining Activities will be due with
each Progress Payment. As-built data will consist of actual dates, percent
complete, earned payment, changes, Delays and other significant events
occurring before the closing date.
Activity percent complete and earned value should indicate a level of
completion that corresponds to the Application for Progress Payment for the
same period. The earned value should be calculated by the scheduling
software as Activity Value times percent complete. Explanation should be
provided whenever the cumulative earned value of activities in a Payment
Submittal is not within 10% of the value of work completed as represented in
the corresponding Application for Progress for Payment.
At the Contractor’s option, a Payment Submittal may overlay minor
adjustments on activities and sequencing for Work remaining. This excludes
Activity re-scoping to reflect Delays, changes, schedule recovery or
substitutions.
E.
Requirements for Revision Submittals:
1.
Revision Submittals will be submitted when necessary because of major
changes or delays affecting activities, sequencing or restraints for Work
remaining and/or to put forth a schedule recovery plan. Revision Submittals
may also be required because of Contractor-initiated re-planning, or when
Contractor plans to perform Work ahead or out-of-sequence that will require
additional testing or inspection personnel, or when requested by the County
when Work is performed out-of-sequence from the current Official Schedule
such that the number of Days gained or lost can not be determined or the
scheduled dates of completion of the Work in a Payment Submittal are not
viewed as reliable.
2.
If requesting a time extension, the Revision Submittal should show the
impact of the delay after incorporating reasonable mitigation to minimize the
impact and illustrate how the number of Days requested time extension was
determined. The delay should be determined as the change in the forecast
Contract Completion Date(s) resulting solely from delays that entitle the
Contractor to a time extension as provided in the General Conditions. Any
and all Contractor slippage and delay occurring prior to and concurrent with
the delay potentially entitling the Contractor to a time extension shall be
incorporated in the Revision and explained such that the concurrent and nonconcurrent periods of delay are indicated. If the Contractor does not follow
the procedures contained in this Section or, if the Contractor's analysis is not
verifiable by an independent, objective evaluation by the County using the
electronic files and data furnished by the Contractor, any such extension in
Contract Time will not be granted.
F.
Retrospective Delay Analysis.
1.
If the County/Professional refuses to endorse any Revision Submittal as
"Resubmittal Not Required," the Contractor and County will use the latest
Official Schedule when evaluating the effect of Delays on Contract Time
and/or Contract Price. The procedure to be used will consist of progressively
updating the latest Official Schedule at key closing dates corresponding to
01310 - 7
2.
starting and finishing dates of the delays and/or dates the delays became
critical or dates the Critical Path may have changed for other reasons. For
each Progress Schedule iteration, slippage between actual Milestone Dates
and Initial Milestone Dates will be correlated to Delays occurring solely in
that iteration.
For each iteration, revisions in Activities, logic ties and restraints affecting
Work after the closing date will be included in that Progress Schedule only if
they meet any of the following conditions. First, they are Progress Schedule
revisions that the County consented to contemporaneously (i.e., before the
closing date) in writing. Second, they reflect comments or objections raised
by or on behalf of the County and that were actually confirmed by the asbuilt progress. Lastly, they represent Contractor’s schedule recovery plans or
other Progress Schedule revisions that were actually confirmed by the asbuilt progress.
END OF SECTION
01310 - 8
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DEFINITION
A.
1.02
1.03
Schedule of Values (SOV) – Schedule that divides the Contract Amount into pay
items, such that the sum of all pay items equals the Contract Amount for the Work,
or for any portion of the Work having a separate specified Contract Amount.
REQUIREMENT
A.
The Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions will serve
as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of
Application for Payment acceptable to the County. Progress payments on account of
Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.
B.
No payment will be made for work performed on a lump sum contract or a lump sum
item until the appropriate Schedule of Values is approved by the County.
C.
The equitable value of work deleted from a lump sum contract or lump sum item
shall be determined from the approved Schedule of Values.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit three (3) copies of a Preliminary Schedule of Values within fifteen (15) days
after the recommended award of the Contract.
B.
Submit three (3) copies of a proposed final Schedule of Values within twenty (20)
days after receipt of Notice to Proceed as per the General Conditions.
C.
Submit the Schedule of Values, typed, on EJCDC 1910-8-E form or Orange County
forms or spreadsheets provided by County. The Contractor’s standard form or
electronic media printout will be considered for acceptability by the County.
D.
List installed value of each major item of work and each subcontracted item of work
as a separate line item to serve as a basis for computing values for Progress
Payments. Round off values to nearest dollar.
E.
Coordinate listings with the Progress Schedule.
F.
For items on which payments will be requested for stored materials or equipment, list
sub-values for cost of stored products with taxes paid.
G.
Submit a sub-schedule for each separate stage of work specified in Section 01010
"Summary of Work".
H.
The sum of values listed shall equal the total Contract Amount for the Work or the
01370-1
Contract Amount for a part of the Work with a separate Contract Amount provided
for by the Contract Documents.
I.
When the County requires substantiating information, submit data justifying line
item amounts in question.
1.04 UNIT PRICE CONTRACTS
A.
1.05
For unit price contracts, the Bid Item Prices on the Bid Form shall be used as the
basis for the Schedule of Values. The Contractor shall resubmit the Bid Item Prices
in the format described herein, and may, at its option, or if requested by the County,
divide the items in the Bid Form into sub-items to provide a more detailed basis of
payment.
LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
A.
For lump sum contracts, if the Work involves separate facilities, e.g. multiple pump
stations, the cost of the Work shall be separated by each facility and into schedule of
value items and sub-items as outlined below. Break principal subcontract amounts
down into several items. The lump sum cost for each facility shall be submitted
individually and split into the schedule of values listed in Items 1 through 16.
1. Demolition of existing pump station
2. Bypass pumping
3. Wet well structure, liner, top slab, hatch covers and appurtenances
4. Valve vault structure, hatch covers and appurtenances, drain piping and
appurtenances
5. Wet well (mechanical): 316 stainless steel piping and appurtenances, pumps and
base plates
6. Valve vault (mechanical): piping, valves, and appurtenances
7. Yard piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances (outside of structures), pipe
lining, manholes
8. Site work and access drive
9. Chain link fence and gates
10. Retaining walls
11. Electrical control panel, wiring, and connections and SCADA Improvements
12. Start-up and testing
13. General Requirements
14. Mobilization/Demobilization
15. Project Record Documents
16. Indemnification
END OF SECTION
01370-2
S E CT I O N 01380
AUDIO – VISUAL DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
PURPOSE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.02
The purpose of the audio visual documentation is to provide the County with
regularly documented audio visual records of the Construction process from the
existing conditions through final completion.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION VIDEO REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A.
The Contractor shall employ a professional videographer to take a Pre-Construction
video of the entire site including the areas of adjacent properties within 100 feet of
the limits of Work and shall be made within 30 days of Work beginning. Special
attention shall be made to show the existing paved roads, shoulders, signs, and other
existing features.
B.
The Contractor shall submit a quality audio-video recording documenting PreConstruction field conditions for the entire project. When the Work includes
construction of water, wastewater, reuse, or other line in the vicinity of any street or
road, the Contractor shall take digital audio-video recordings of existing conditions
along both sides of the street or road. The Pre-Construction video shall be submitted
to the County and accepted prior to commencing any Work or using any Contractor
laydown areas.
C.
Electronic digital photography shall also be used as necessary to record and facilitate
resolution of on-site issues through the transmission of electronic photographs by email from the site to the Professional’s and County’s offices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AUDIO-VIDEO RECORDING
A.
Each audio-video recording shall be saved on appropriate DVD media viewable on
standard DVD players or computer.
B.
Each DVD shall contain the following information and arrangement at the beginning
as a title screen:
Orange County, Florida
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NUMBER
CONTRACTOR:
(Name of Contractor)
DATE:
(When photo was taken)
VIDEO BY:
(Firm Name of Videographer)
LOCATION:
(Description of Location(s) and View(s))
01380-1
2.02
C.
Each DVD recording section shall begin with an audio description of the County's
name, Contract name and number, Contractor's name, date and location information
such as street name, direction of travel, viewing side, etc.
D.
Information appearing on the video recording must be continuous and run
simultaneously by computer generated transparent digital information. No editing or
overlaying of information at a later date will be acceptable.
E.
Digital information to appear in the upper left corner shall be as follows:
1.
Name of Contractor
2.
Day, date and time
3.
Name of Project & Specification Number
F.
Time must be accurate and continuously displayed on the video record
G.
Written documentation must coincide with the information on the DVD so as to
make easy retrieval of locations at a later date.
H.
The video system shall have the capability to transfer individual frames of video
electronically into hard copy prints or photographic negatives.
I.
Audio shall be recorded at the same time as the video recording and shall have the
same information as on the viewing screen. Special commentary shall be given for
unusual conditions of buildings, sidewalks and curbing, foundations, trees and
shrubbery, structures, equipment, pavement, etc.
J.
All DVDs and boxes shall bear labels with the following information:
1.
DVD Number
2.
County's Name
3.
Date of Recording
4.
Project Name and Number
5.
Location and Standing Limit of Video
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
The Contractor shall employ a competent photographer to take construction record
photographs periodically during the course of the Work.
B.
Prints: Date imprinted 8-inch x 10-inch high resolution glossy single weight color
print paper; five (5) sets, bound in 3 ring binders to be provided to the County with
each respective Application for Payment and distributed by the County as follows:
1.
County (2 sets)
2.
Engineer (1 set)
3.
Contractor (1 set)
4.
Project Record Data (1 set stored by Contractor to be furnished to County
upon Closeout)
01380-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
VIDEO VIEWS REQUIRED
A.
Complete coverage shall include all surface features within 100' of the Work area to
be used by the Contractor and shall be supported by appropriate audio description
made simultaneously with video coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, all existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, ditches, roadways, landscaping,
trees, culverts, headwalls, and retaining walls, equipment, structures, pavements,
manholes, vaults, handrails, etc. located within the work zone. Video coverage shall
extend to the maximum height of all structures within this zone.
B.
The video recorder shall take special efforts to point out and provide audio
commentary on cracking, breakage, damage, and other defects in existing features.
C.
All video recording shall be done during times of good visibility. No video recording
shall be done during periods of visible precipitation, or when more than ten percent
of the ground area is covered with standing water, unless otherwise authorized by
County.
D.
Prior to commencement of audio video recording, the Contractor shall notify the
County in writing within 48 hours of the audio video recording. The County may
provide a designated representative to accompany and observe all video recording
operations. Audio video recording completed without a County Representative
present will be unacceptable unless specifically authorized by the County.
AUDIO-VIDEO REQUIREMENTS
A.
Major Locations:
1.
The Contractor shall provide color digital video of each major facility and
structures and facilities adjacent to the Construction before construction
starts.
2.
All videos shall be recorded with character generator operating with date,
time, and location on screen. During video recording, the Contractor shall
narrate video explaining what is being shown. All master videos shall be
delivered to the County.
3.
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer
orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and
business addresses shall be used. In areas where the proposed construction
location will not be readily apparent to the video recording viewer, highly
visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to
clearly indicate the proposed center line of Construction. When conventional
wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the
vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10
feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera
during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
4.
All video recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No video
recording shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall
01380-3
5.
3.03
only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the
subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those
subjects.
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be
directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features
within that construction area’s zone of influence. The rate of speed in the
general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed
44 feet per minute.
PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
A minimum of three (3) views (top, upstream, and downstream) each shall generally
be taken prior to backfilling pipelines or structures. Photographs shall be provided
for:
1.
Utility conflicts/relocations
2.
Manholes
3.
Pump stations
4.
Boring and jacking
5.
Directional drilling pipe entrance and exit
6.
Valve installation
7.
Air release valve installation
8.
Fire hydrant assembly
B.
Photo Identification
1.
Name of Project
2.
Name of Structure
3.
Orientation of View
4.
Date & Time of Exposure
5.
Film numbered identification of exposure
END OF SECTION
01380-4
S E CT I O N 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONTROL
A. Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and check field conditions continuously
during construction. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any inaccuracies built into the
Work due to Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement.
B. Contractor shall inspect related and appurtenant Work and report in writing to County any
conditions which will prevent proper completion of the Work. Failure to report any such
conditions shall constitute acceptance of all site conditions, and any required removal, repair,
or replacement caused by unsuitable conditions shall be performed by the Contractor at
Contractor's sole cost and expense.
1.02
INSPECTION OF THE WORK
A. The Work shall be conducted under the general observation of representatives of the County
acting on behalf of the County to ensure strict compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Such inspection may include mill, plant, shop, or field inspection, as
required. The County shall be permitted access to all parts of the Work, including plants
where materials or equipment are manufactured or fabricated. Inspection by the County are
in addition to the inspections required of Contractor by his QC Representatives.
B. The presence of the County, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for the proper execution of the Work in accordance with all requirements of the Contract
Documents. Compliance is a duty of the Contractor, and said duty shall not be avoided by
any act or omission on the part of the County. Further, no requirement of this Contract may
be waived or modified except by change order or formal (written) substitution approval.
C. All materials and articles furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to rigid inspection, and
no materials or articles shall be used in the Work until they have been inspected and accepted
by the County. No Work shall be backfilled, buried, cast in concrete, hidden, or otherwise
covered until it has been inspected. Any Work so covered in the absence of inspection shall
be subject to uncovering. Where uninspected Work cannot be uncovered, such as in concrete
cast over reinforcing steel, all such Work shall be subject to demolition, removal, and
reconstruction under proper inspection and no additional payment will be allowed therefore.
01400 - 1
rev: August, 2012
D. The Contractor is responsible for the Quality of his own work and shall designate a qualified
individual, to be approved by the County, who will ensure that all work is performed in strict
accordance with the Contract Documents. This quality representative shall inspect the work
for the Contractor and provide to the County and the Contractor a report outlining all work
accomplished, all inspections, and all testing performed for all days when work is performed.
The objective of this report is to provide "Objective Evidence of Compliance" by the
Contractor with the requirements of the Contract.
1.03
TIME OF INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Samples and testing required under these Specifications shall be furnished and prepared in
ample time for the completion of the necessary tests and analyses before said articles or
materials are to be used. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
performance of the required tests will be by the Contractor and all costs therefore will be
borne by the Contractor at no cost to the County. Whenever the Contractor is ready to
backfill, bury, cast in concrete, hide, or otherwise cover any Work under this Contract, the
County shall be notified not less than 24-hours in advance to request inspection before
beginning any such Work of covering. Failure of the Contractor to notify the County at least
24-hours in advance of any such inspections shall be reasonable cause for the County to
order a sufficient delay in the Contractor's schedule to allow time for such inspection, any
remedial, or corrective work required, and all costs of such delays, including its impact on
other portions of the Work, shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.04
SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. When not otherwise specified, all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the
methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, as applicable to the class and
nature of the article or materials considered. However, the County reserves the right to use
any generally accepted system of inspection which, in the opinion of the County, will ensure
the County that the quality of the workmanship is in full accord with the Contract
Documents.
B. Any waiver of any specific testing or other quality assurance measures, whether or not such
waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief form the
specified testing or other quality assurance requirements as originally specified, and whether
or not such guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any
necessary corrective or remedial work, shall not be construed as a waiver of any technical or
qualitative requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the County shall reserve the right to make
independent investigations and tests as specified in the following paragraph and, upon failure
of any portion of the Work to meet any of the qualitative requirements of the Contract
Documents, shall be reasonable cause for the County to require the removal or correction and
reconstruction of any such Work.
01400 - 2
rev: August, 2012
D. In addition to any other inspection or quality assurance provisions that may be specified, the
County shall have the right to independently select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the
County, additional test specimens of any or all of the materials to be used. Results of such
tests and analyses shall be considered along with the tests or analyses made by the
Contractor to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so
tested or analyzed provided that wherever any portion of the Work is discovered, as a result
of such independent testing or investigation by the County which fails to meet the
requirements of the Contract Documents, all costs of such independent inspection and
investigation and all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such Work
shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.05
RIGHT OF REJECTION
A. The County shall have the right at all times and places to reject any articles or materials to be
furnished hereunder which, in any respect, fail to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents, regardless of whether the defects in such articles or materials are detected at the
point of manufacture or after completion of the Work at the site. If the County or inspector,
through an oversight or otherwise, has accepted materials or Work which is defective or
which is contrary to the Contract Documents, such material, no matter in what stage or
condition of manufacture, delivery, or erection, may be rejected by County.
B. Contractor shall promptly remove rejected articles or materials from the site of the Work
after notification or rejection.
C. All costs of removal and replacement of rejected articles or materials, as specified herein,
shall be borne by the Contractor.
D. If the Contractor fails to remove or replace defective work after notification to do so, the
County may have the work removed and replaced by others and deduct all costs from the
Contractor's pay requests.
1.06
TESTING LABS
A. All geotechnical testing laboratory services for field testing will be paid by the County. The
lab(s) shall function as independent lab(s) and report independently to the County and the
Contractor. The test lab(s) may not approve or allow any deviation from the Contract
Documents.
END OF SECTION
01400 - 3
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 01410
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work:
1. County will employ, and pay for services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to
perform Testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the
Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and equipment tested for
conformity with the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required
services.
3. Employment of laboratory by County shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to
perform the Work of the Contract.
B. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract.
2. Respective section of Specifications: Certification of products.
3. Each Specification section listed: Laboratory tests required, and standards for testing.
1.02
LABORATORY DUTIES: LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY
A. Submit 5 copies of inspection reports to the County. The reports shall include the following
components:
1. Project title and County’s project number
2. Testing laboratory name and address
3. Date of report issuance
4. Name and signature of field technician
5. Date of inspections, sampling, and/or testing
6. Record of weather conditions
7. Identification of product tested and associated specification section
8. Testing location
9. Description of testing performed
10. Observations made regarding compliance with the Contract Documents
B. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents
2. Approve or reject any portion of Work
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor
1.03
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with County's personnel; provide access to Work and manufacturer's operations.
01410-1
rev: August, 2012
B. Secure and deliver to the County adequate representational samples of materials proposed to
be used and which require testing.
C. Provide to the County the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other
materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.
D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract are subject to
inspection and testing at the point of manufacturer or fabrication. Standard specifications for
quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The County may require
the Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that
the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full
accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the
Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be
a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the County shall be allowed
on account of such testing and certification.
E. Contractor shall not have direct contact with laboratory or laboratory personnel. All testing
shall be coordinated through County.
F. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be
tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For storage and curing of test samples.
G. Notify County sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of
personnel and scheduling of tests. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such
notice, reimburse County for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to
Contractor's negligence.
H. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified independent
testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required for the
Contractor's convenience.
I. If the test results indicate the material or equipment complies with the Contract Documents,
the County shall pay for the cost of the testing laboratory. If the tests and any subsequent
retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall pay for the laboratory costs directly to the County or the
total costs shall be deducted from any payments due to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01410-2
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 01516
COLLECTION SYSTEM BYPASS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.02
The Work covered by this section consists of providing all temporary bypassing to
perform all operations in connection with the flow of wastewater around pipe
segment(s) or pump stations. The purpose of bypassing is to prevent wastewater
overflows and provide continuous service to all wastewater customers. The
Contractor will maintain wastewater flow in the construction area in order to prevent
backup and/or overflow and provide reliable wastewater service to the users of the
wastewater system at all times.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Prior to implementation of any bypass, the Contractor will submit and receive
County acceptance of a bypass plan. The Contractor will submit to the County a
comprehensive written plan for approval and acceptance that describes the intended
bypass for the maintenance of flows during construction. The Contractor will also
provide a sketch showing the location of bypass pumping equipment for each pump
station or line segment(s) around which flows are being bypassed. The plan will
include proposed tanker(s), pump(s), bypass piping, backup plan and equipment,
work schedule, monitoring log for bypass pumping, monitoring plan of the bypass
pumping operation, and maintenance of traffic plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor will provide and maintain adequate equipment, piping, tankers, and
other necessary appurtenances in order to maintain continuous and reliable
wastewater service in all wastewater lines as required for construction. The
Contractor will have tankers, backup pump(s), piping, and appurtenances ready to
deploy immediately.
B.
All piping will be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure
or a minimum of 50 psi, whichever is greater.
C.
When bypassing a pump station, one back-up pump equal to the primary unit will be
provided by the Contractor. Bypass pumps must comply with sound intensity limits
as shown in Section 01100.
01516-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
3.02
TRAFFIC CONSIDERATIONS
A.
3.03
The Contractor shall have all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete
the repair, replacement, or rehabilitation on the job site prior to isolating the gravity
main segment, manhole, or pump station. The Contractor will demonstrate that the
temporary bypass pumping system is in good working order and is sufficiently sized
to successfully handle flows by performing a test run for a period of 24 hours prior to
beginning the work.
The Contractor shall locate bypass pumping suction and discharge lines so as to not
cause undue interference with the use of streets, private driveways, and alleys, to
include the possible temporary trenching of piping at critical intersections.
Additional traffic maintenance requirements are found in Section 01570
"Maintenance of Traffic".
BYPASS OPERATION
A.
The County shall accept the bypass plan prior to implementation of the bypass
operation. Contractor will plug off and pump down the sewer manhole or line
segment in the immediate work area and will maintain the wastewater system so that
surcharging does not occur. A successful three (3) day test period shall be performed
during normal County workdays (no weekend).
B.
Where work requires the line to be blocked after normal working hours and bypass
pumping is being used, the Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring the bypass
operation 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. Any electronic monitoring in lieu of onsite monitoring must be detailed in the comprehensive written plan and approved by
the County.
C.
The Contractor shall ensure that no damage will be caused to private property as a
result of bypass pumping operations. The Contractor will complete the work as
quickly as possible and satisfactorily pass all tests, inspections, repair all deficiencies
prior to discontinuing bypassing operations, and returning flow to the sewer manhole
or line segment.
D
During bypassing, no wastewater will be leaked, dumped, or spilled in or onto, any
area outside of the existing wastewater system.
E.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the County should a sanitary sewer overflow
occur and take the necessary action to clean up and disinfect the spillage to the
satisfaction of the County or other governmental agency. If sewage is spilled onto
public or private property, the Contractor will wash down, clean up and disinfect the
spillage to the satisfaction of the County and or other governmental agencies.
01516-2
3.04
F.
When bypassing a pump station, one (1) back-up pump equal to the primary unit
shall be required. Bypass pumps shall have a maximum rating of 55 decibels for
sound attenuation.
G.
The Contractor shall cease bypass operations and return flows to the new and/or
existing sewer when directed by the County. When bypass operations are complete,
all bypass piping shall be drained into the wastewater system prior to disassembly.
CONTRACTOR LIABILITY
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all required pumping, equipment, piping, and
appurtenances to accomplish the bypass and for any and all damage that results
directly or indirectly from the bypass pumping equipment, piping and/or
appurtenances. The Contractor shall also be liable for all County personnel labor and
equipment costs, penalties and fines resulting from sanitary sewer overflows. It is the
intent of these specifications to require the Contractor to establish adequate bypass
pumping as required regardless of the flow condition.
END OF SECTION
01516-3
S E CT I O N 01560
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The Work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining and
removing temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as necessary to protect the
Work and prevent sedimentation from the Contractor’s activities from entering water
bodies or enter other parts of the County’s or other property owners sites outside the
Construction limits.
B.
Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing, mulching,
netting, watering and reseeding on-site surfaces and soil and borrow area surfaces,
and providing interceptor ditches at end of berms and at those locations which will
ensure that erosion during Construction will be either eliminated or maintained
within acceptable limits as established by the regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
C.
Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams, traps,
barriers, and appurtenances at the foot of sloped surfaces which will ensure that
sedimentation pollution will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable
limits as established by the regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor is responsible for providing effective temporary erosion and sediment
control measures during Construction or until final controls become effective.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for filing Notice of Intent for Construction
Activities with regulatory agencies (SJRWMD, SFWMD, FDEP) as required by law,
if thresholds are expected to be exceeded.
C.
The areas of unstabilized soil cover shall be minimized at all times to limit erosion
and sedimentation.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit an Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan
(Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan) for County review and approval. The Plan
shall be in effect throughout the Construction duration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EROSION CONTROL
A.
Seed: Scarified Argentine Bahia.
01560-1
2.02
B.
Sod: Bermuda grass, Argentine Bahia grass, Pensacola Bahia grass or St. Augustine.
Grassing and Sodding Materials: As specified in Section 981 FDOT Specification for
Road & Bridge Construction.
C.
Netting: Polypropylene mesh netting 5/8-inch x 3/4-inch (16 x 19mm) mesh with
interwoven curlex fibers as manufactured by American Excelsior Company or equal.
Netting: Fabricated of material in conformance with Section 985 FDOT Specification
for Road & Bridge Construction.
SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A.
Bales: Clean, seed-free cereal hay type. Minimum dimensions of 14-inch by 18-inch
by 36-inches at the time of placement.
B.
Netting: Fabricated of material in conformance with Section 985 FDOT Specification
for Road & Bridge Construction.
C.
Sediment Control Fencing (Silt Fencing): As manufactured by American Excelsior
Company or equal.
D.
Filter stone: Crushed stone conforming to Florida Department of Transportation
Specifications.
E.
Concrete block: Hollow, non-load bearing type.
F.
Concrete: Exterior grade not less than 1-inch thick.
G.
Turbidity Barriers: Floating or staked as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL
A.
3.02
See Section 02578 "Solid Sodding".
A.
Install and maintain silt fences and dams, traps, barriers, and appurtenances as shown
on the approved descriptions and working Drawings. Replace deteriorated hay bales
and dislodged filter stone. Repair portions of any devices damaged at no additional
expense to the County.
B.
Install all sediment control devices in a timely manner to ensure the control of
sediment. At sites where exposure to sensitive areas is likely, complete installation of
all sediment control devices before starting earthwork.
C.
Use approved temporary erosion control features to correct conditions that develop
during Construction that were not foreseen when the Erosion and Sedimentation
Control Plan was first approved.
01560-2
3.03
3.04
PERFORMANCE
A.
Should any of the temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the
Contractor fail to produce results that comply with the requirements of the
Regulatory agency having jurisdiction, the County or the Professional, the Contractor
shall immediately take whatever steps necessary to correct the deficiency at its own
expense to protect the Work and any adjacent property to the site, as well as to
prevent contamination of any river, stream, lake, tidal waters, reservoir, canal or
other water impoundments.
B.
The side slope areas with unstabilized or unprotected soil cover shall be minimized at
all times to limit erosion and sedimentation.
C.
Incorporate permanent erosion control features into the Project at the earliest
practical time.
D.
Remove temporary erosion and sedimentation controls when the Work is complete
and in accordance with the Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan (Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan) and the Notice of Intent for Construction Activities filed
with regulatory agencies.
MAINTENANCE OF EROSION AND CONTROL FEATURES
A.
Provide routine maintenance of permanent and temporary erosion control features, at
no expense to the County, until the Project is complete and accepted.
END OF SECTION
01560-3
S E CT I O N 01570
MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
This section includes identifying safety hazards and then furnishing all necessary labor,
materials, tools, and equipment including, but not limited, to signs, barricades, traffic drums,
cones, flashers, construction fencing, flag persons, warning devices, temporary pavement
markings, delineators, etc., to control vehicular and pedestrian traffic through and adjacent to
the project area. These measures and actions shall be taken to safely maintain the
accessibility of public and construction traffic by preventing potential construction hazards.
This Work shall also include all costs associated with the erecting, maintaining, moving,
adjusting, cleaning, relocating, and storing the materials necessary to ensure safe movement
of vehicular and pedestrian traffic throughout the project area. The Contractor may request
that the County approve the detouring of traffic around the Construction area if it is in the
best interest of public safety and the County. Detouring shall be limited to normal
construction hours and two way traffic patterns shall be re-established at the end of each
work day.
1.02
REQUIREMENTS
A.
Traffic planning and control for the maintenance and protection of pedestrian and
vehicular traffic affected by the Contractor’s Work includes, but is not limited to:
1.
Construction and maintenance of any necessary detour equipment and
facilities;
2.
Providing necessary facilities for access to residences and businesses;
3.
Furnishing, installing, and maintenance of traffic control and safety devices
(e.g. signage, barricades, barriers, message boards, etc.), and flag persons as
appropriate during Construction;
4.
Control of water runoff, dust and any other special requirements for safe and
expeditious movement of traffic.
B.
Planning, maintenance and control of traffic shall be provided at the Contractor’s
expense. The Contractor will bear all expense of maintaining the vehicle and
pedestrian traffic throughout the work area.
C.
The Contractor will ensure all personnel involved in traffic control are properly
trained and capable of communicating with the public during closures and detours.
The Contractor may be required to hire off-duty uniformed police officers, in
addition to flag persons, to direct and maintain traffic on heavily traveled
thoroughfares on which traffic is subject to delays or detours caused by the
Contractor’s operations. Locations and conditions requiring such uniformed police
officers shall be as directed by the County.
D.
The Contractor will remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer
required, restore grounds to original, or to specified conditions.
01570-1
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit at Contractor’s own expense a Traffic Control Plan for approval by the
County. Sequence the Work in a manner that will minimize disruption of vehicular
and pedestrian access through and around the construction area.
B.
The Traffic Control Plan will detail procedures and protective measures proposed by
the Contractor to provide for protection and control of traffic affected by the Work
consistent with the following applicable standards:
1.
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition
including all subsequent supplements issued by the Florida Department of
Transportation, (FDOT Spec.).
2.
Manual of Traffic Control and Safe Practices for Street and Highway
Construction, Maintenance and Utility Operations, FDOT.
3.
Right-of-Way Utilization Regulations, Orange County, Florida, latest edition.
C.
All references to the respective agencies in the above referenced standards shall be
construed to also include the municipality as applicable for this Work.
D.
The Traffic Control Plan will be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
registered in the state of Florida and shall include proposed locations and time
durations of the following, as applicable:
1.
Pedestrian and public vehicular traffic routing.
2.
Lane and sidewalk closures, other traffic blockage and lane restrictions and
reductions anticipated to be caused by construction operations. Show and
describe the proposed location, dates, hours and duration of closure,
vehicular and pedestrian traffic routing and management, traffic control
devices for implementing pedestrian and vehicular movement around the
closures, and details of barricades.
3.
Location, type and method of shoring to provide lateral support to the side of
an excavation or embankment parallel to an open travel-way.
4.
Allowable on-street parking within the immediate vicinity of worksite.
5.
Access to buildings immediately adjacent to worksite.
6.
Driveways blocked by construction operations.
7.
Temporary traffic control devices, temporary pavement striping and marking
of streets and sidewalks affected by construction
8.
Temporary commercial and industrial loading and unloading zones.
9.
Construction vehicle reroutes, travel times, staging locations, and number and
size of vehicles involved.
E.
Obtain and submit prior to erection, or otherwise impacting traffic, all required
permits from all authorities having jurisdiction, including Orange County Public
Works, if applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
The Contractor will furnish barricades, warning signs, delineators, pilot cars and
other traffic control materials and equipment in accordance with the Manual of
01570-2
Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways published by the United
States Government Printing Office.
2.02
FLAG PERSONS
A.
All flag persons used on this Project will adhere to the following requirements:
1.
Any person acting as a flag person on this Project will have attended a
training session taught by a Contractor’s qualified trainer before the start date
of this contract.
2.
The Contractor’s qualified trainer will have completed a "Flag person Train
the Trainer Session" in the five years previous or before the start date of this
contract and will be on file as a qualified flag person trainer.
3.
The flag person trainer’s name and Qualification Number will be furnished
by the Contractor at the Pre-Construction meeting. The Contractor will
provide all flag persons with the Flag Person Handbook and will observe the
rules and regulations contained therein. This handbook will be in the
possession of all flag person while flagging on the Project.
4.
Flag persons will not be assigned other duties while working as authorized
flag persons.
5.
Any person replacing flag person for break shall have the same training.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
NOTIFICATIONS
A.
The Contractor will notify individual owners, owner’s agents, and tenants of
buildings adjacent to worksite in writing, with copies to the County, 72 hours in
advance of any disruption to their access to those buildings and/or use of public ways
adjacent to the buildings or prohibiting the stopping and parking of vehicles.
B.
Before closing any vehicle or pedestrian thoroughfare, the Contractor will give
written notice to the County. Notice will be given no less than 72 hours in advance of
the proposed closure, or as may be otherwise provided in the accepted Traffic
Control Plan, so that the final approval of such closings can be obtained at least 48
hours in advance.
C.
The Contractor is responsible for notifying Fire and Ambulance Departments
D.
Whenever roads are impassable.
E.
The Contractor will immediately notify the County of any vehicular or pedestrian
safety or efficiency problems incurred as a result of the construction of the Project.
GENERAL TRAFFIC CONTROL
A.
The Contractor will sequence and plan construction operations and will generally
conduct Work in such a manner as not to unduly or unnecessarily restrict or impede
normal traffic.
B.
Unless otherwise provided, all roads within the limits of the Work will be kept open
01570-3
to all traffic by the Contractor. The Contractor will keep the portion of the project
being used by public traffic, whether it is through or local traffic, in such condition
that traffic will be adequately accommodated.
C.
The Contractor will be responsible for installation and maintenance of all traffic
control devices and requirements for the duration of the construction period.
Necessary precautions for traffic control will include, but not be limited to, warning
signs, signals, lighting devices, markings, barricades, canalizations and hand
signaling devices.
D.
The Contractor will provide and maintain in a safe condition temporary approaches
or crossings and intersections with trails, roads, streets, businesses, parking lots,
residences, garages and farms.
E.
The Contractor will provide emergency access to all residences and businesses at all
times. Residential and business access will be restored and maintained at all times
outside of the Contractor’s normal working hours.
F.
Traffic is to be maintained on one section of existing pavement, proposed pavement,
or a combination thereof. Alternating one way traffic may be utilized and limited to a
maximum length of 500 feet during construction hours. Lane width for alternating
one-way traffic will be kept to a minimum width of 10 feet, or as directed by the
County.
G.
Travel lanes and pedestrian passways will be drained and kept reasonably smooth,
and in a suitable condition at all times in order to provide minimum interference to
traffic consistent with the prosecution of the Work.
H.
The Contractor will make provisions at all "open cut" street crossings to allow for
free passage of vehicles and pedestrians, either by bridging or other temporary
crossing structures. Such structures will be of adequate strength and proper
construction and will be maintained by the Contractor in such a manner as not to
constitute an undue traffic hazard.
I.
The Contractor will keep all signs in proper position, clean, and legible at all times.
Care will be taken so that weeds, shrubbery, construction materials, equipment, and
soil are not allowed to obscure any sign, light, or barricade. Signs that do not apply to
construction conditions should be removed or adjusted so that the legend is not
visible to approaching traffic.
J.
The County may determine the need for, and extent of, additional striping removal
and restriping.
K.
Excavated material, spoil banks, construction materials, equipment and supplies will
not be located in such a manner as to obstruct traffic, as practicable. The Contractor
will immediately remove from the site all demolition material, exercising such
precaution as may be directed by the County. All material excavated shall be
disposed of so as to minimize traffic and pedestrian inconvenience and to prevent
damage to adjacent property.
L.
During any suspension, the Contractor will make passable and open to traffic such
01570-4
portions of the Project and/or temporally roadways as directed by the County for
accommodation of traffic during the anticipated period of suspension. Passable
conditions will be maintained until issuance of an order for the resumption of
construction operations. When Work is resumed, the Contractor will replace or
renew any Work or materials lost or damaged because of such temporary use in
every respect as though its prosecution had been continuous and without
interferences.
3.03
TEMPORARY SHORING
A.
Use shoring to maintain traffic when it is necessary to provide lateral support to the
side of an excavation or embankment parallel to an open travel-way. Provide shoring
when a theoretical 2:1 or steeper slope from the bottom of the excavation or
embankment intersects the existing ground line closer than 5 feet (1.5 m) from the
edge of pavement of the open travel-way.
B.
The Contractor will furnish, install, and remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing
necessary to maintain traffic at locations shown on the Traffic Control Plan and other
locations determined during construction.
END OF SECTION
01570-5
S E CT I O N 01580
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
A.
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain all sign materials including sign
posts, weighted stands, brackets, any required mounting hardware, and miscellaneous
materials required for temporary signs for the purpose of:
1.
Project Identification.
2.
Informational signs to direct traffic.
3.
On-site safety signs as appropriate for the Work.
B.
Remove temporary signs on completion of Construction prior to obtaining Certificate
of Occupancy and Substantial Completion.
C.
Allow no other signs to be displayed without written approval of the County.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit complete Shop Drawings identifying locations, material, layout, sign content,
font type and size, and sample colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly
indicating condensed lettering if used. The sign details will be submitted to the
County for approval prior to fabrication.
B.
Submit method of erection to include materials, fasteners, and other items to assure
compliance with the requirements for wind pressures as required by the authorities
having jurisdiction.
C.
Submit signs in accordance with any details provided in the Drawings.
D.
Prior to erection obtain and submit all required permits from the authorities having
jurisdiction.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A.
Provide one painted sign at the site, or at each end of the Work if a linear project, or
at each of the separate sites of Work, if applicable. The sign will be not less than 32
square feet area, with a minimum dimension of 4 feet and painted graphics with
content to include:
1.
Title of Project.
2.
Orange County Government name and logo.
3.
Names and titles of the Board of County Commissioners, County
Administrator, Director of Orange County Utilities Department, the
Consulting Engineer, and the Contractor.
B.
Erect on the site at a lighted location of high public visibility, adjacent to main
01580-1
entrance to site, as approved by the County. The sign must be located 5 feet from all
rights-of-way and 20 feet from all property lines.
1.04
INFORMATIONAL SIGNS
A.
All signs and other traffic control devices shall conform to the requirements for
shape, color, size, and location as specified in the latest Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control and Safe Streets and Highways and the Florida Manual of Traffic Control
and Safe Practices for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance and Utility
Operations. Information as to the above may be obtained from FDOT Division
engineers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SIGN MATERIALS
A.
Structure and Framing: New construction grade lumber, structurally adequate and
suitable for exterior application and specified finish.
B.
Sign Panels: New A-B Grade, exterior type, APA DF plywood with inset hardwood
edges and mitered corners, standard large sizes to minimize joints.
1.
Thickness: As required by standards to span framing members, to provide
even, smooth surface without waves or buckles, minimum ¾-inch.
C.
Rough Hardware: Galvanized steel, of sizes and types to enable sign assemblies to
resist wind pressures as required by the authorities having jurisdiction but not less
than a wind velocity of 50 mph.
1.
Use minimum ½-inch diameter button head carriage bolts to fasten sign
panels to supporting structures. Bolt heads to be painted to match sign face.
D.
Paint: Exterior quality, as specified in Division 9 or as a minimum as specified
herein.
1.
Primer and finish coat - exterior, semi-gloss, alkyd enamel.
2.
Colors for structure, framing, sign surfaces, and graphics: As shown on the
Drawings or as selected by the County.
E.
Safety Sign Number Tags.
1.
Removable aluminum or galvanized steel, with 4-inch high, blue numerals
and steel tag hooks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A,
Install project identification signs within 10 days of the Notice to Proceed date.
Failure to erect the signs may be reason to delay approval of the initial Application
for Payment.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces of supports, framing, and surface material; one coat of primer
01580-2
and two coats of finish paint.
3.02
3.03
C.
Set signs plumb and level and solidly brace as required to prevent displacement
during the Construction period. If mounted on posts, sink posts 3 feet to 4 feet below
grade, leaving a minimum of 8 feet of each post above grade for mounting the sign.
D.
Install informational signs at a height for optimum visibility, on ground mounted
poles or attached to temporary structural surfaces.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair damages to structure,
framing, or sign.
B.
Relocate informational signs as required by the progress of the Work.
C.
Poorly maintained, defaced, damaged, or dirty signs shall be replaced, repaired, or
cleaned without delay.
D.
Special care must be taken to ensure that construction materials and dust are not
allowed to obscure the face of a sign.
E.
Signs not in effect shall be covered or removed.
REMOVAL
A.
Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at Substantial Completion of the
Work.
B.
Leave areas clean and patch as required to remove any traces of temporary signs.
END OF SECTION
01580-3
S E CT I O N 01590
CONSTRUCTION FIELD OFFICE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Contractor provision of temporary utilities to include electricity, lighting, internet
connectivity, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities.
B. Contractor provision of temporary controls to include barriers, enclosures and fencing, and
water control.
C. Contractor provision of temporary facilities to include access roads, parking, and temporary
buildings.
D. Contractor provision of field offices for the County.
E. Restrictions on the use of existing adjacent facilities.
1.02
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Provide and pay for power service required for Construction and testing from local utility
source.
B. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing electrical service at location as directed by
utility company. Power consumption will not disrupt the County’s need for continuous
service. Coordinate with the County before making taps or disturbing existing service.
C. Provide separate metering and pay for cost of energy used until substantial completion. If
electric service is turned over to and paid for by the County prior to substantial completion,
reimburse the County for energy used up to substantial completion.
D. Provide power outlets for Construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes
located as required. Provide OSHA approved flexible power cords as required.
E. Contractor-installed permanent convenience receptacles may be used during Construction.
1.03
TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide and maintain adequate lighting for Construction operations to achieve a minimum
lighting level of one (1) watt/sq ft.
B. Provide and maintain two (2) foot-candle lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after
dark for security purposes.
C. Provide and maintain 0.25-watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior Work areas after dark for
security purposes.
01590-1
D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,
pigtails, and lamps as required.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
F. Permanent building lighting may be used during Construction.
1.04
TEMPORARY HEAT AND COOLING
A. Provide and pay for heating and cooling as required to maintain specified conditions for
Construction operations or as required for proper conduct of operations included in the Work.
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary purposes, verify that installation is
approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and temporary filters are in place. Provide and pay
for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50°F and maximum relative humidity of 50% in
areas where Construction is closed in and final finishes are to be placed, unless indicated
otherwise in specifications.
1.05
TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.06
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for suitable quality water service required for Construction
operations. Coordinate with the County if water supply is not separately metered. Pay all
costs and expenses associated with such use.
B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded
connections.
1.07
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures on-site. Maintain daily in clean and
sanitary condition. Adjacent County office building toilet facilities are not to be used by
Contractor.
1.08
BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to Construction areas and to protect existing
facilities and adjacent properties from damage from Construction operations.
B. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way.
C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.
01590-2
1.09
FENCING
A. Unless directed otherwise in other sections of the Contract Documents, provide a 6-foot high fence
completely around Construction site; provided with hinged vehicular and pedestrian gates with
locks. Fencing will be galvanized, 2-inch mesh, chain link with solid top rail. Provide line posts
and end posts as needed to maintain stretched and uniform fencing with no sags.
B. Fencing plan will be approved by the County for each phase of the project. Submit fencing
layout diagram prior to the Pre-Construction meeting.
C. Provide visual fabric barrier at least 6-foot high on all fencing separating parking areas from
Construction activities. Submit barrier fabric for approval before starting fencing. Barrier fabric
will be capable of retaining physical integrity and color during the entire Construction period.
1.10
ACCESS ROADS
A. Provide and maintain uninterrupted public access to existing buildings. Construction
activities will not interfere with access. If Contractor fails to maintain public access after 2
written notices within a 24-hour period, the County reserves the right to correct such
situation and back charge the Contractor.
B. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve
Construction area.
C. Extend and relocate access roads as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for
unimpeded traffic flow.
D. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
E. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for Construction traffic. Repair or restore any
damaged areas caused as a result of Construction activity. Such repair will be to a like-new
condition.
1.11
PARKING
A. Provide temporary surface parking areas to accommodate Construction personnel.
B. Do not allow Construction vehicle parking on existing pavement unless approved by County.
1.12
FIELD OFFICES (FOR UTILITIES DEPARTMENT)
A. Promptly after starting Work, the Contractor will provide and maintain 1 field office for the
use of the County until Substantial Completion.
B. The field offices will be an appropriate size required for the use of the County, as well as
contain two offices and three desks. The field office structure will be a minimum of 10-feet x
40-feet. The layout of the County’s field office will include adequate space to hold project
meetings (minimum seating for 15).
C. Installation of the field offices will meet all local codes and ordinances. The Contractor will
as a minimum install the structures on a level, well-drained area. Structures will be designed
01590-3
and installed to resist 130-mph winds or applicable State of Florida code, whichever is more
stringent.
D. The field offices will be provided with structurally sound and safe steps and landings for
each door. The doors will have secure locks. Construct appropriate walkway and landings.
Construct covers over each door that extends 3-feet from the building and the full width of
the landing.
E. The field offices will be designated as a "No Smoking Area."
F. The windows will be arranged for cross ventilation with screens.
G. Provide air conditioning and heating systems with thermostat control.
H. Provide electric power for the duration of the Work.
I. The Contractor will provide the following with the field office, at a minimum:
1.
Electric lights (fifty (50) foot-candles at desktop height) and power supply outlets.
2.
When available, provide high-speed Internet access to all desks for the duration of
the Work.
3.
Acceptable toilet facilities with appropriate signage that meet all of the local and
State health codes and regulations.
4.
Fire extinguisher (Halon type, minimum 4 lb. capacity).
5.
Water coolers, bottled water and paper cups.
6.
Tables for viewing the Project Drawings.
7.
Standard office supplies.
8.
Weekly janitorial services.
1.13
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE FIELD OFFICES
Provide the following for the exclusive use of the County: (Unless otherwise noted, the quantity
should be sufficient for the duration of the Work.)
A. Office Furnishings: The furniture will be delivered and placed as directed by the County.
B. Desks: Flat top, double pedestal, with one box and one file drawer in each pedestal, 60inches by 30-inches. Total quantity will be three (3).
C. Chairs: Three (3) office-type chairs, adjustable heights, on rollers, with armrests.
D. Conference Table and Chairs: One (1) table (3-feet by 8-feet minimum), scratch and stain
resistant and 15 meeting-type chairs.
E. Drawing Table: Two (2) plywood or standard drawing tables, 3-feet by 6-feet, with all required
appurtenances and 2 extended height stools suitable for use at the drawing tables.
F. Printer: One(1) - All in one color inkjet printer capable of printing, scanning and coping
Ledger, Legal and Letter sizes. Standard interfaces shall include Hi-Speed USB 2.0,
Wireless (802.11b/g/n), Ethernet. Minimum requirements include: 35 page automatic
document feeder, printing 20 color copies per minute at 6000 x 1200 dpi resolution, scan
resolution 2400 x 2400 dpi, flat bed document glass size Ledger (11" x 17") with standalone
copy features, minimum of 250 sheet input capacity cassettes and 2 additional complete set
01590-4
of ink cartridges. Brother MFC-J6710DW or equal. Printers to be retained by the County..
All warranties, maintenance, servicing and sufficient appropriate ink/toner cartridges and
paper for the duration of the Work.
G. One (1) each refrigerator, microwave, coffee machine, and toaster oven.
1.
Provide Internet connection in each of the four offices in the field trailer. The
connection shall be at least 5.0 Mbps of download speed or greater. Provide office
with a wireless network 802.11 n with minimum of 8 concurrent users in addition to
the network requirements. Wireless network shall allow additional portable
computers to gain internet access within the office.
H. File Cabinets, Storage, Bookcases:
1.
Three (3) Lateral Files: HON 600 Series, or equal, 42-inch wide, four-drawer.
2.
Two (2) steel vertical, hanging mobile plan stands, with approximately 12-hanging
clamps. Provide all required clamps, of sufficient length to hold the Contract
Drawings.
3.
Storage: Two (2) industrial grade steel cabinets, locking handles, 36-inches wide by
18-inches deep by 72-inches high.
4.
Bookcases: Three (3) HON metal bookcases, or equal, 34-1/2-inches wide by 12-5/8inches deep by 71-inches high, color to be selected by the Engineer.
I. Miscellaneous Field Supplies:
1.
One (1) minimum/maximum digital thermometer, with batteries for the duration of
the Work.
2.
One (1) rain gauge.
1.14
REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove all temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials prior to submitting Final
Application for Payment.
B. Remove temporary underground installations to minimum depth of 2-feet and re-grade site.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary Work.
D. Restore any existing facilities used during Construction to original condition, unless
otherwise directed in other sections of Contract Documents. Restore existing landscaping,
drainage, paving, etc. to an "as-was" condition, unless otherwise directed in other sections of
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
01590-5
S E CT I O N 01610
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery, handling, storage
and protection for all items required in the construction of the Work.
B.
Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and by methods and means that will prevent damage, deterioration,
and loss including theft and protect against damage from climatic conditions. Control
delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at the site and
overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, provide delivery/installation
coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for products recognized to
be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and
other sources of loss. Damaged or defective items, in the opinion of the County, will
be replaced at no cost to the County.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor is responsible for all material, equipment and supplies sold and
delivered to the County under this Contract until final inspection of the Work and
acceptance thereof by the County.
B.
All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work will be handled and
stored by the Contractor before, during and after shipment in a manner to prevent
warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft or
damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.
C.
All materials and equipment, which in the opinion of the County, have become so
damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified, will be promptly removed
from the site of the Work, and the Contractor will receive no compensation for the
damaged materials or equipment or for its removal.
D.
In the event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged or
destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor will replace same
without additional cost to the County.
DELIVERY
A.
Transport and handle items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
The County and the Contractor’s project superintendent must be on-site to accept all
deliveries shipped directly to the job site. If the project superintendent is not present
for a delivery, that delivery may be rejected by the County. If any delivery is rejected
due to non-availability of the Contractor’s project superintendent, delivery shall be
01610-1
rescheduled at no additional cost to the County.
1.04
C.
Schedule delivery to reduce long term on-site storage prior to installation and/or
operation. Under no circumstances will materials or equipment be delivered to the
site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the
County.
D.
Coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the
Work.
E.
Schedule deliveries to the site not more than one month prior to scheduled
installation without written authorization from the County.
F.
Coordinate delivery with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are hazardous, flammable, easily damaged or sensitive to deterioration.
G.
All items delivered to the site will be unloaded and placed in a manner that will not
hamper the Contractor's normal construction operation or those of Subcontractors
and other Contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic.
H.
Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original containers or
packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. Maintain packaged materials
with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.
I.
Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments with the County to ensure compliance
with requirements of Contract Documents and accepted submittals, and that products
are properly protected and undamaged. If the Contractor does not notify the County
regarding the delivery and the County rejects any part of the delivery, there will be
no additional cost to the County for the material to be returned. For items furnished
by others (i.e. County), perform inspection in the presence of the County. Provide
written notification to the County of any problems.
J.
Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job site, and
promptly replace with material meeting the specified requirements, at no additional
cost to the County.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods recommended by
the manufacturer to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging, with seals
and labels intact and legible.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for securing a location for on-site storage of all
material and equipment necessary for completion of the Work. The location and
storage layout will be submitted to the County at the Pre-Construction conference.
C.
Manufacturer’s storage instructions will be carefully studied by the Contractor and
reviewed with the County. These instructions will be carefully followed and a written
record of this kept by the Contractor.
D.
All material delivered to the job site will be protected from dirt, dust, dampness,
01610-2
delivery to the time of installation of the material and acceptance by the County.
1.05
E.
When required or recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor will furnish a
covered, weather protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive
environment for all mechanical equipment valves, architectural items, electrical and
instrumentation equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this
Project.
F.
Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic
inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified
conditions and free from damage or deterioration.
G.
Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to do
so has been given, the County retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in
previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these
corrections from the Contract Amount. These costs may be comprised of
expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering, and
any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections.
SPECIFIC STORAGE AND HANDLING
(Additional specific storage and handling requirements may be found in the specification
sections addressing the material requirements.)
A.
All mechanical and electrical equipment and instruments subject to corrosive damage
by the atmosphere if stored outdoors (even though covered by canvas) will be stored
in a weather tight building to prevent damage. The building may be a temporary
structure on the site or elsewhere, but it must be satisfactory to the County. The
building will be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent condensation.
Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer.
1.
All equipment will be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease and other
lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. Mechanical
equipment to be used in the Work, if stored for longer than ninety (90) days,
will have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and
startup, at no extra cost to the County.
2.
Moving parts will be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper
lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal "welding". Upon installation of the
equipment, the Contractor will start the equipment, at least half load, once
weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not
deteriorate from lack of use.
3.
Lubricants will be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently
as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance.
New lubricants will be put into the equipment at the time of acceptance. Prior
to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor will have the manufacturer
inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally
affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer
will be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to
be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed,
tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer
01610-3
4.
will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification
is not given, the equipment will be judged to be defective. It will be removed
and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Electric motors provided with heaters will be temporarily wired for
continuous heating during storage. Upon installation of the equipment, the
Contractor will start the equipment, at least half load, and once weekly for an
adequate period of time to insure that the equipment does not deteriorate
from lack of use.
B.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
C.
Cement and lime will be stored under a roof and off the ground and will be kept
completely dry at all times.
D.
Brick, block and similar masonry products will be handled and stored in a manner to
minimize breakage, chipping, cracking and spilling to a minimum.
E.
Precast Concrete will be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of
dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking.
F.
All structural and miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel will be stored off the
ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to
prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams will be
stored with the webs vertical.
G.
Metals will be stored dry, all under cover and vented to prevent build-up of humidity,
all off ground to provide air circulation.
H.
Lumber will be stacked to provide air circulation. Store materials for which a
maximum moisture content is specified in an area where a moisture content can be
maintained.
I.
Gypsum wallboard systems will be stored to protect all metal studs, furring,
insulation boards, batts, accessories and gypsum board to prevent any type of damage
to these materials. Rusted material components, damp or wet insulation or gypsum
boards will not be accepted.
J.
Acoustical materials will be delivered to the job site in unbroken containers labeled
and clearly marked. Materials will not be removed from containers until ready to
install, but will be stored in dry area with cartons neatly stacked. Before installation,
acoustical board will be stored for not less than 24 hours in the Work area at the
same temperature and relative humidity.
K.
Linear items will be stored in dry area with spacers to provide ventilation. Stack
linear items to prevent warping, complying with manufacturer’s instructions.
L.
Paints and other volatile materials will be stored within approved safety containers.
No glass jugs will be permitted. Storage areas will be equipped with not less than two
(2) fire extinguishers (C02 type) sufficient to discharge a distance of 25-feet when
fully charged and have current tags. No other building materials will be stored in this
01610-4
area. Used rags will be removed daily. Clean rags will be stored in metal closed
containers.
END OF SECTION
01610-5
S E CT I O N 01650
PUMP STATION START-UP AND TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The Contractor will conduct preliminary testing of pump station facilities, products
and equipment. If the preliminary field tests disclose any items furnished under this
Contract which do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall make all changes, adjustments and replacements required prior to
Start-up Demonstration and Acceptance Testing.
B.
The Contractor shall arrange qualified instruction by the manufacturer’s
representative for the County’s designated operating and maintenance personnel in
operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, fuel, energy, lubrication, water, and all other
materials, equipment, tools and instruments necessary for the Start-up Demonstration
and Acceptance Testing unless otherwise specified.
D.
The startup and final check out shall demonstrate and ensure to the County the
complete operating pump station system. The Contractor shall provide
documentation certifying proper installation, testing and operation of all prescribed
equipment and systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PUMP STATION START-UP TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
The Contractor shall notify the County at least ten (10) normal working days prior to
start-up.
B.
The following shall have been successfully met prior to pump station start-up:
1.
A walk through letter of acceptance received;
2.
All wire checks conducted;
3.
Video of gravity main inspections completed;
4.
FDEP Clearances received;
5.
FDEP placard for fuel tank if applicable;
6.
Completed Appendix B “Pump Station Start-Up Report” form;
7
Certified Boundary Survey and As-Built Survey;
8.
The Contractor shall conduct preliminary testing of equipment prior to startup testing and make all changes, adjustments and replacements required; and
9.
The liner(s) shall meet the testing requirements of the Contract Documents
and a letter or form signed by the County that testing was witnessed and
01650-1
approved.
C.
The intent of the start-up testing is for the Contractor to demonstrate to the County
that the Work will function as a complete and operable system under normal as well
as emergency operating conditions and the pump station is ready for acceptance.
D.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, fuel, energy, lubrication, water and all other
materials, equipment, tools, and instruments necessary for pump station start-up
testing and inspection. All material used shall be listed on the Appendix D “List of
Approved Products”. All required certification letters, spare parts and supplies shall
be provided to the County. Listed below is a partial checklist of requirements to be
met.
1.
The Contractor shall coordinate startup activities with the County, the
manufacturer’s representatives and Subcontractors. A factory representative
knowledgeable in the mechanical and electrical equipment furnished shall
inspect and supervise a start-up of their respective equipment. A minimum of
one full business day shall be provided for the testing. Additional time may
be necessary due to faulty or incomplete Work. Upon satisfactory completion
of the equipment testing and inspection, the factory representative(s) shall
issue the required manufacturer's warranty certificates.
2.
Initiate startup of each system in accordance with the operation and
maintenance manual. Demonstrate that all of the components of a system are
operating under their own controls as designated without overheating or
overloading any parts and without objectionable vibration as determined by
the County.
3.
Observe the system operation and make adjustments as necessary to optimize
the system performance. Coordinate with County for any adjustments desired
or operational problems requiring debugging.
4.
All functions of the pump station mechanical and electrical equipment shall
be tested and inspected for operation and workmanship. All equipment shall
be properly installed and meet the design performance requirements.
5.
The pumps shall be flow tested at the pump station startup to verify their
performance meets the design requirements and the manufacturer’s pump
curve.
6.
Furnish two printed copies and three electronic copies in Acrobat “pdf”
format of the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the pump station to the
County.
7.
A pump station start-up report shall be completed. See Appendix B “Pump
Station Start-Up Report Form”.
8.
The Contractor shall bear the entire expense of rectifying Work installed.
9.
The Contractor shall furnish the County with a written certification signed by
the Manufacturer’s representative that the equipment has been properly
installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from undue stress
imposed by piping or mounting bolts, and has been operated under full load
conditions and that satisfactory operation has been obtained.
E.
Re-testing:
If the start-up testing does not meet the requirements, the deficiencies shall be
corrected and the testing procedure will be rescheduled again.
01650-2
F.
FDEP fuel tank placard:
When a generator fuel tank is required the Contractor shall submit documentation
that the facility has passed a FDEP fuel tank compliance inspection and that a
properly completed "Storage Tank Facility Registration Form" has been submitted to
the Florida Departmental of Environmental Protection including all applicable fees.
The placard shall be provided to the County.
G.
Acceptance:
1.
The pump station shall be accepted based on the pump station functioning as
a complete and operable system under normal as well as emergency
operating conditions, the approved construction documents have been met
and any deficiencies that were observed and noted have been corrected.
2.
The Contractor shall ensure all fuel, lubrication, and all other materials for
operation are replenished.
END OF SECTION
01650-3
S E CT I O N 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
The term "Project Closeout" is defined to include requirements near the end of the Contract
Time, in preparation for Substantial Completion acceptance, occupancy by the County,
release of retainage, final acceptance, final payment, and similar actions evidencing
completion of the Work. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion";
therefore, the time of closeout may be either a single period for the entire Work or a series of
time periods for individual elements of work that has been certified as substantially complete
at different dates. This time variation, if any, will be applicable to the other provisions of this
section.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.03
1.03
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project
closeout, including but not limited to:
1.
Final Cleaning
2.
Substantial Completion.
3.
Final Acceptance.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the
appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
C.
Section 01720 "Project Record Documents"
D.
Section 01740 "Warranties and Bonds"
PREREQUISITES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.
When the Contractor considers the Work as substantially complete, submit to the County a
written notice stating so and requesting an inspection to determine the status of completion.
The Contractor will be attach to the notice a list of items known to be incomplete or yet to be
corrected. Complete the following before requesting the County’s inspection for certification
of substantial completion.
A.
In the progress payment request that coincides with or is the first request following,
the date substantial completion is claimed, show 100% completion or list incomplete
items, the value of incomplete work, and reasons for the Work being incomplete.
01700-1
Inspection procedures include supporting documentation for completion as indicated
in these Contract Documents.
1.04
B.
Submit a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
C.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance
agreements, final certifications and similar documents in accordance with Section
01740 "Warranties and Bonds".
D.
Obtain and submit lien releases enabling the County’s full, unrestricted use of the
Work and access to services and utilities.
E.
Consult with County before submitting Record Documents in accordance with
Section 01720 "Project Record Documents".
F.
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
G.
Make final changeover of permanent locks. Submit keys and keying schedule.
H.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
I.
Complete final cleaning requirements necessary for Substantial Completion.
FINAL CLEANING.
Complete the following cleaning operations prior to Substantial Completion or Owner
occupancy.
A.
Remove from job site all tools, surplus materials, construction equipment, storage
sheds, debris, waste and temporary services.
B.
Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other
foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other
foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth eventextured surface.
C.
Structures:
1.
Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste
materials, smudges and other foreign matter.
2.
Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces.
3.
Ensure exterior surfaces have a uniform degree of cleanliness.
4.
Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste
materials, smudges and other foreign matter.
5.
Remove paint droppings, spots, stains and dirt from finished surfaces.
6.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
7.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are
noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and
other damaged transparent materials.
8.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free
condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Leave concrete
01700-2
9.
10.
1.05
floors broom clean.
Wipe surface of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess
lubrication and other substances. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
Clean permanent filters of ventilating systems and replace disposable filters if
units were operated during construction. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if
units were operated without filters during construction.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
The Contractor will submit the proposed format, content and tab structure for all
Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the County’s review and approval. The tab
structure for Operating and Maintenance Manuals will follow specification division
format as accepted by the Construction Specification Institute. After the County
approves the proposed format, content, and tab structure for the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals, the Contractor will create and deliver five (5) complete sets.
B.
Operation and Maintenance documentation is required for each piece of mechanical,
electrical, communications, instrumentation and controls, pneumatic, hydraulic,
conveyance, and special construction. If required by the technical specifications,
provide Operation and Maintenance documentation for any other product not listed
in the foregoing.
C.
The requirements of this Section are separate, distinct and in addition to product
submittal requirements that may be established by other Sections of the
Specifications. Owner's manuals, manufacturer's printed instructions, parts lists, test
data and other submittals required by other Sections of the Specifications may be
included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals provided that they are approved
and are formatted in a manner consistent with the requirements of this Section.
D.
Deliver Operation and Maintenance Manuals directly to the County.
E.
Operating and Maintenance Manual documents must include, but are not limited to,
table of contents, approved submittals, manufacturer’s operating and maintenance
instructions, brochures, shop drawings, performance curves and data sheets annotated
to indicate equipment actually furnished (e.g. identifying impeller size, model,
horsepower, etc), procedures, wiring and control diagrams, records of factory and
field tests and device/controller settings and calibration, program lists or data
compact discs, maintenance and warranty terms and contact information, spare parts
listings, inspection procedures, emergency instructions, and other Operating and
Maintenance documentation that may be useful to the County. The material and
equipment data required by this Section must include all data necessary for the
proper installation, removal, normal operation, emergency operation, startup,
shutdown, maintenance, cleaning, adjustment, calibration, lubrication, assembly,
disassembly, repair, inspection, trouble-shooting, and warranty service of the
equipment or materials.
F.
The Contractor must bind the Operating and Maintenance Manual documents in
heavy-duty, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders including pocket folders for folded sheet
information. Mark binder identification on both the front and spine of each binder.
Binder information must list the project title, identify separate structures or locations
01700-3
as applicable, identify the general subject matter covered in the manual and must
include the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
1.
The Contractor must submit the Operating and Maintenance documents on
three-hole punch 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch sheets or on three-hole punch sheets
that are foldable in multiples of 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch. The three-hole punched
edge will be the left 11-inch edge.
2.
The Contractor may request waivers to the size requirement for specific
instances. The Contractor’s waiver request must be in writing to the County.
The Contractor’s waiver request must include a justification for seeking the
waiver.
G.
1.06
1.07
The Contractor must provide an electronic version of the complete and final
Operating and Maintenance Manuals in original electronic file format on compact
disc or DVD. The Contractor must also provide one electronic pdf file of each bound
Operating and Maintenance Manual that represents each Manual’s content. The
electronic pdf file must match the Operating and Maintenance Manual content and
organizational structure.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION PROCEDURES
A.
Upon receipt of the Contractor’s request for inspection, the County will either
proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of incomplete prerequisites.
B.
Following the initial inspection, the County will either prepare the certificate of
Substantial Completion, or advise the Contractor of work which must be performed
before the certificate will be issued. The County will repeat the inspection when
requested in writing and when assured that the Work has been substantially
completed.
C.
Results of the completed inspection will form the initial "punch list" for final
acceptance.
PREREQUISITES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE.
Complete the following before requesting the County’s final inspection for certification of
final acceptance, and final payment. List known exceptions, if any, in the request.
A.
Submit the final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation
not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates for insurance for products
and completed operations where required.
B.
Submit written certification that:
1.
The County’s final punch list of itemized work to be completed or corrected,
stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
2.
The Contract Documents have been reviewed and Work has been completed
in accordance with Contract Documents.
3.
Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the County and
are operational.
4.
Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
01700-4
1.08
C.
Submit consent of surety.
D.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION PROCEDURES
A.
The County will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice
that the Work, including punch list items resulting from earlier inspections, has been
completed, except for those items for which completion has been delayed because of
circumstances that are acceptable to the County.
B.
Upon completion of re-inspection, the County will either prepare a certificate of final
acceptance or advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that
have not been fulfilled, which are required for final acceptance.
C.
If necessary, the re-inspection procedure will be repeated.
END OF SECTION
01700-5
S E CT I O N 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
The purpose of the Project Record Documents is to provide the County with factual
information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable
future location, identification and modification of the Work without lengthy and
expensive site measurement, investigation or examination.
B.
These standards and procedures are for integration of digital engineering CAD
drawings and attribute data into the database environments, while maintaining the
integrity and positional accuracy of the data. The requirement for digital submittal of
approved construction plans is to provide the County GIS with a parcel and utility
base for field maintenance and operations.
C.
The location of the constructed improvements as depicted in the contract Drawings is
required. To verify the As-Built Drawing accuracies and to insure the Work was
constructed in conformance with the contract Drawings, the following survey
documents are required to be certified by the Surveyor.
1.
As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table (see Table 01050-2)
2.
Pipe Deflection Table (see Table 01050-3)
3.
Gravity Main Table (see Table 01050-4)
4.
Boundary Survey and Survey Map Report for pump stations and any
easements that have constructed pipes within and monuments that were
replaced.
DEFINITIONS
Except where specific definitions are used within a specific section, the following terms,
phrases, words and their derivation shall have the meaning given herein when consistent with
the context in which they are used. Words used in the present tense include the future tense,
words in the plural number include the singular number and words in the singular number
include the plural number.
A.
As-Built Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor’s Surveyor shall depict the
actual location of installed utilities for the completed Work in a full size hard copy
and an electronic AutoCAD file (dwg) format.
B.
Record Documents: All documents as required in subsections 1.04 and 2.02 in this
section.
01720-1
1.03
1.04
C.
Record Drawings: Drawings, prepared and certified by the County’s Consultant
Engineer, shall be a compiled representation of the constructed project, a listing of
the sources and the basis of information used in the preparation of the "RECORD
DRAWINGS", the constructed project meets the County’s design intent and note the
material deviations from the design documents, and the accuracy of the location
information is based upon the Contractor’s surveyor data supplied in the tables (AsBuilt Asset Attribute Data, Gravity Main, and Pipe Deflection).
D.
Boundary Survey: Boundary survey, map and report certified by a Surveyor shall be
provided that meets the requirements of Chapter 5J-17 ‘Minimum Technical
Standards’, FAC.
E.
Surveyor: Contractor’s Surveyor that is licensed by the State of Florida as a
professional surveyor and mapper pursuant to Chapter 472, F.S.
F.
Survey Map Report: As a minimum the Survey Map Report shall identify any
corners that had to be reset, measurements and computations made, pump station and
easement boundary issues, and accuracies obtained.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of the Record Documents to one person
on the Contractor’s staff as approved by the County.
B.
Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and
proper entries on each page of specifications and each sheet of drawings and other
documents where such entry is required to show progress and changes properly.
C.
Make entries within 24-hours after receipt of information has occurred.
RECORD DOCUMENTS AT SITE
A.
Maintain at the site and always available for County’s use one record copy of:
1.
Construction Contract, Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions,
Supplemental Conditions, Bid Proposal, Instruction to Bidders, Addenda, and
all other Contract Documents.
2.
Change Orders, Verbal Orders, and other modifications to Contract.
3.
Written instructions by the County as well as correspondence related to
Requests for Information (RFIs).
4.
Accepted Shop Drawings, Samples, product data, substitution and "or-equal"
requests.
5.
Field test records, inspection certificates, manufacturer certificates and
construction photographs.
6.
Progressive As-Built Drawings.
7.
Current Surveyor’s tables for the As-Built Assets Attribute Data, Pipe
Deflection Data, and Gravity Main Data.
B.
Maintain the documents in an organized, clean, dry, legible condition and completely
protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work,
transfer of all record data to the final As-built Drawings for submittal to the County.
01720-2
C.
Store As-Built Documents and samples in Contractor's office apart from documents
used for construction. Do not use As-Built document for construction purposes.
Label each document "AS-BUILT" in neat large printed letters. File documents and
samples in accordance with CSI/CSC format.
D.
Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any
work until required information is recorded.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
Maintain the electronic As-Built Drawings to accurately record progress of Work and
change orders throughout the duration of the Contract.
B.
Date all entries. Enter RFI No., Change Order No., etc. when applicable.
C.
Call attention to the entry by highlighting with a "cloud" drawn around the area
affected.
D.
In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for entries of the
overlapping changes.
E.
Design call-outs shall have a thin strike line through the design call-out and all AsBuilt information must be labeled (or abbreviated "AB") and be shown in a bolder
text that is completely legible.
F.
Make entries in the pertinent other documents while coordinating with the County for
validity.
G.
Entries shall consist of graphical representations, plan view and profiles, written
comments, dimensions, State Plane Coordinates, details and any other information as
required to document field and other changes of the actual Work completed. As a
minimum, make entries to also record:
1.
Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish floor datum and
State Plane Coordinates and elevations.
2.
As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table shall be completed in the Drawings.
3.
When electrical boxes, or underground conduits and plumbing are involved
as part of the Work, record true elevations and locations, dimensions between
boxes.
4.
Actually installed pipe or other Work materials, class, pressure rating,
diameter, size, specifications, etc. Similar information for other encountered
underground utilities, not installed by Contractor, their owner and actual
location if different than shown in the Contract Documents.
5,
Details, not on original contract Drawings, as needed to show the actual
location of the Work completed in a manner that allows the County to find it
in the future.
6.
The Contractor shall mark all arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping,
ducts and similar items shown schematically on the construction documents
and show on the As-Built Drawings the actual horizontal and vertical
01720-3
7.
2.02
alignments and locations.
Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors,
windows, etc. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor’s
records and shop drawings.
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Three (3) hard copy sets and three (3) digital media sets of the final Record
Documents and shall include all of the documents described below under this
subsection 2.02.
B.
The following documents shall be signed and sealed by the Surveyor:
1.
As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table (see Specification Section 01050
"Surveying and Field Engineering", Table 01050-2 for an example).
2.
Boundary Survey of pump station and Survey Map Report
3.
Survey and Survey Map Report for the location of constructed pipes within
any easements and right-of-way. As a minimum the Survey Map Report shall
identify or describe the locations where the pipe centerline was constructed
within three feet of the easement or right-of-way boundary, where the pipe
was constructed outside the easement or right-of-way boundary, any corners
that had to be reset, measurements and computations made, pump station
boundary issues, and accuracies obtained. Survey map report shall be dated
after the Work within the right-of-ways or easements have been completed.
4.
Gravity Main Table (see Specification Section 01050 "Surveying and Field
Engineering", Table 01050-4 for an example)
5.
Pipe Deflection Table (see Specification Section 01050 "Surveying and Field
Engineering" Table 01050-3 for an example). An electronic blank table will
be supplied by the County.
C.
Digital sets of the final Record Documents including but not limited to:
1.
Scanned digital copies of the final As-Built Drawings.
2.
Electronic Survey documents electronically sealed by the Surveyor.
3.
Final Record Documents information.
4.
Digital As-Built Drawing in the Engineer’s current version of AutoCAD file
(dwg) format for the Contract Drawings, updated to match the final Record
Drawing information.
D.
Pump station site Boundary Survey and Map Report.
E.
New Boundary Survey to re-establish easement corners, right-of-way monuments, or
pump station site corners with monuments if destroyed by the Work.
F.
Scanned Documents: Scan the Survey Documents and other Record Documents
reflecting changes from the Bid Documents.
01720-4
G.
The scanned As-Built drawing sets shall be complete and include the title sheet,
plan/profile sheets, cross-sections, and details. Each individual sheet contained in the
printed set of the As-Built Drawings shall be included in the electronic drawings,
with each sheet being converted into an individual tif (tagged image file). The plan
sheets shall be scanned in tif format Group 4 at minimum of 400 dpi resolution to
maintain legibility of each drawing. Then, the tif images shall be embedded into a
single pdf (Adobe Acrobat) file representing the complete plan set. Review all
Record Documents to ensure a complete record of the Project.
H.
Provide an encompassing digital AutoCAD file that includes all the information of
the As-Built Drawings and any other graphical information in the As-Built Drawings.
It shall include the overall Work, utility system layout and associated parcel
boundaries and easements. Feature point, line and polygon information for new or
altered Work and all accompanying geodetic control and survey data shall be
included. The surveyor’s certified As-Built Asset Attribute Data shall be added to the
As-Built Drawings and Surveyor shall electronically seal the data in a commadelineated ASCII format (txt).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
3.02
Pre-construction Meeting: It is recommended that the Surveyor attend the Preconstruction meeting. At the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall be
provided with a blank electronic version of the spreadsheet for the tables: Asset
Attribute Data and Pipe Deflection. The Contractor’s surveyor shall use these tables
to input the data and shall not alter the table format or formulas.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Contractor shall provide progressive Record Documents described below.
1.
Construction Contract, As-Built Drawings, Specifications, General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Bid Proposal, Instruction to Bidders,
Addenda, and all other Contract Documents.
2.
Specifications and Addenda: Record manufacturer, trade name, catalog
number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed
as well as any changes made by Field Order, Change Order or other.
3.
Change orders, verbal orders, and other modifications to Contract.
4.
Written instructions by the County as well as correspondence related to
Requests for Information (RFIs).
5.
Accepted Shop Drawings, samples, product data, substitution and "or-equal"
requests.
6.
Field test records, inspection certificates, manufacturer certificates and
construction photographs.
01720-5
7.
8.
9.
3.03
FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL
A.
3.04
As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table: Surveyor shall obtain field
measurements of vertical and horizontal dimensions of constructed
improvements. The monthly submittal shall include the Surveyor’s certified
statement regarding the constructed improvements being within the specified
accuracies as described in Specification Section 01050 "Surveying and Field
Engineering", Table 01050-1 Minimum Survey Accuracies or if not,
indicating the variances.
Gravity Main Table: Surveyor shall prepare and update a Gravity Main Table
to include as a minimum the pipe segment identification, pipe lengths,
manhole inverts and tops, and slopes for gravity mains. Surveyor shall
certify the data entered are correct and indicate if the minimum slopes have
not been met.
Pipe Deflection Table: Surveyor shall input the type of pipe, pipe
manufacturer, PVC manufacturer deflection allowance, allowable angle of
offset and radius of curvature, laying length of pipe, and coordinates.
Surveyor shall certify the data entered are correct and indicate if the
deflection allowance, offset or radius of curvature exceeds the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Submit the Final Record Documents within 20 days after Substantial Completion.
1.
Participate in review meetings as required and make required changes and
promptly deliver the Final Record Documents to the County.
STORAGE AND PRESERVATION
A.
Store Record Documents and samples at a protected location in the project field
office apart from documents used for construction.
1.
Provide files and racks for storage of documents
2.
Provide locked cabinet or secure space for storage of samples.
B.
File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format with section numbers
matching those in the Contract Documents.
C.
In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data to
the County’s approval.
1.
Such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the County, removal
and replacement of concealing materials.
2.
In such cases, provide replacements of the concealing materials to the
standards originally required by the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
01720-6
S E CT I O N 01730
PUMP STATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A. Section includes the submittal process for the operation and maintenance manual and the
manual shall contain the technical information required for proper installation, operation and
maintenance of process, electrical and mechanical equipment and systems.
1.02
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Schedule
1. Initial submittal within 60-days after date Shop Drawings are approved.
1.03
PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Materials are provided for County's use, reproduction and distribution as training and
reference materials within County's organization.
2. Applicable to hard copy or electronic media.
3. Applicable to materials containing copyright notice as well as those with no copyright
notice.
4. Notify manufacturer of this intended use of materials provided under the Contract.
5. Number each Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal with the original root
number of the associated Shop Drawing.
6. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter starting with "A."
7. Submittal format:
a. Interim submittals: Submit two (2) paper copies until manual is approved.
b. Final submittals:
(1) Within 30-days of receipt of approval, submit one (1) additional paper copy and
two (2) electronic copies on Compact Disc (CD-ROM) in Portable Document
Format (PDF).
8. Compact discs to be secured in jewel cases.
9. Electronic copies will be reviewed for conformance with the approved paper copy and
the electronic copy (PDF) requirements of this Specification.
10. Non-conforming CDs will be returned with comments.
11. Provide final CDs within 30-days of receipt of comments.
12. Paper copy submittals:
a. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch size
heavy first quality paper with standard three-hole punching and bound in
appropriately sized three-ring (or post) vinyl view binders with clear overlays front,
spine and back.
b. Provide binders with titles inserted under clear overlay on front and on spine of each
01730-1
rev: August, 2012
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
binder.
As space allows, binder titles shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:
(1) Project Name
(2) Related Specification Number
(3) Equipment Name(s) and
(4) Project Equipment Tag Numbers
Provide a Cover Page for each manual with the following information:
(1) Manufacturer(s)
(2) Date
(3) Project Owner and Project Name
(4) Specification Section
(5) Project Equipment Tag Numbers
(6) Model Numbers
(7) Engineer
(8) Contractor
Provide a Table of Contents or Index for each manual.
Use plastic-coated dividers to tab each section of each manual per the manual's Table
of Contents/Index for easy reference.
Provide plastic sheet lifters prior to first page and following last page.
Reduce Drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 11
inch x 17 inch size.
Where reduction is not practical to ensure readability, fold larger Drawings
separately and place in vinyl envelopes which are bound into the binder.
Identify vinyl envelopes with Drawing numbers.
Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts and data
applicable to the installation for the Project.
Delete or cross out information that does not specifically apply to the Project.
B. Electronic copy submittals:
1. Electronic copies of the approved paper copy Operation and Maintenance Manuals are to
be produced in Adobe Acrobat's Portable Document Format (PDF) Version {5.0} or
higher.
2. Do not password protect and/or lock the PDF document.
3. Drawings or other graphics must be converted to PDF format and made part of the PDF
document.
4. Scanning to be used only where actual file conversion is not possible.
5. Rotate pages that must be viewed in landscape to the appropriate position for easy
reading.
6. Images only shall be scanned at a resolution of 300 dpi or greater.
7. Perform Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture on all images.
8. Achieve OCR with the "original image with hidden text" option.
9. Word searches of the PDF document must operate successfully to demonstrate OCR
compliance.
10. Create bookmarks in the navigation frame, for each entry in the Table of Contents/Index.
11. Normally three levels deep (i.e., "Chapter," "Section," "Sub-section").
12. Thumbnails must be generated for each PDF file.
13. Set the opening view for PDF files as follows:
a. Initial view: Bookmarks and Page.
b. Magnification: Fit in Window.
01730-2
rev: August, 2012
c. Page layout: Single page.
d. Set the file to open to the cover page of the manual with bookmarks to the left, and
the first bookmark linked to the cover page.
e. All PDF documents shall be set with the option "Fast Web View" to open the first
pages of the document for the viewer while the rest of the document continues to
load.
14. File naming conventions
a. File names shall use a "ten dot three" convention (XXXXX-YY-Z.PDF) where
XXXXX is the Specification Section number, YY is the Shop Drawing Root number
and Z is an ID number used to designate the associated volume.
Example 1:
Two (2) pumps submitted as separate Shop Drawings under the same Specification Section:
Pump 1 = 11061-01-1.pdf.
Pump 2 = 11061-02-1.pdf.
Example 2:
Control system submitted as one (1) Shop Drawing but separated into two (2) O&M volumes:
Volume 1 = 13440-01-1.pdf.
Volume 2 = 13440-01-2.pdf.
15. As a minimum, include the following labeling on all CD-ROM discs and jewel cases:
a. Project Name
b. Equipment Name and Project Tag Number
c. Project Specification Section
d. Manufacturer Name
e. Vendor Name
f. Binding
(1) Include labeled CD(s) in labeled jewel case(s).
(2) Bind jewel cases in standard three-ring binder Jewel Case Page(s), inserted at the
front of the Final paper copy submittal.
(3) Jewel Case Page(s) to have means for securing Jewel Case(s) to prevent loss
(e.g., flap and strap).
1.04
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and systems is applicable
but not necessarily limited to:
1. Major equipment
2. Equipment powered by electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic systems
3. Specialized equipment and systems including instrumentation and control systems and
system components for HVAC process system control
4. Valves and water control gates
5. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations
6. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions
7. Operating instructions for start-up, normal operation, control, shutdown, and emergency
conditions
8. Lubrication and maintenance instructions
9. Troubleshooting guide
10. Parts lists
a. Comprehensive parts and parts price lists.
01730-3
rev: August, 2012
b. List of spare parts provided as specified in the associated Specification Section.
11. Outline, cross-section, and assembly Drawings; engineering data; and electrical
diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word
description of wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams.
12. Test data and performance curves.
13. As-constructed fabrication or layout Drawings and wiring diagrams.
14. Instrumentation or tag numbers assigned to the equipment by the Contract Documents
are to be used to identify equipment and system components.
15. Additional information as specified in the associated equipment or system Specification
Section.
1.05
COUNTY/PROFESSIONAL’S REVIEW ACTION
A. County/Professional will review and indicate one of the following review actions:
1. ACCEPTABLE
2. REVISE AND RESUBMIT
B. Acceptable paper copy submittals will be retained with the transmittal form returned with a
request for one (1) additional paper copy and two (2) electronic copies on CD-ROM.
C. Deficient submittals (paper copy and/or electronic copy) will be returned along with the
transmittal form which will be marked to indicate deficient areas.
END OF SECTION
01730-4
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and
bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on
products and special warranties.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Conditions of Contract for the general requirements relating to warranties and
bonds.
B. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 "Project Closeout."
C. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are
specified to be warranted are included in the individual Sections of Division 2 through 16.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual
manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
the County.
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater
rights for the County.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the County prior to requesting a Substantial Completion
Inspection as outlined in Section 01700 "Project Closeout." If the Certificate of Substantial
Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of
Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written
warranties upon request of the County.
B. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the County, by
separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly
executed warranties to the County within 15-days of completion of that designated portion of
the Work.
01740 - 1
rev: August, 2012
C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a
Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a
draft to the County for approval prior to final execution.
D. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for specific content requirements, and
particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.
E. Prior to Substantial Completion Inspection, submit to the County two (2) copies of each
required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor,
Subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly
sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl
covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to
receive 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch three-hole punched paper.
2. Table of Contents will be neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the
Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification
Section in which specified and the name of the product or work item.
3. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty.
Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the
product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and
telephone number of the installer, supplier and manufacturer.
4. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or name and the name, address and
telephone number of the Contractor.
5. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction,
provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each
required manual.
1.05
WARRANTY REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor will warrant all equipment in the Contractor's one-year warranty period even
though certificates of warranty may not be required. For all major pieces of equipment, the
Contractor shall submit a warranty from the equipment manufacturer. "Major" equipment is
defined as a device having a 5 HP or larger motor or which lists for more than $1,000.00.
B. In the event that an equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide a one-year
warranty commencing at Substantial Completion, the Contractor will obtain from the
manufacturer a warranty of sufficient length commencing at the time of equipment delivery
to the job site, such that the warranty will extend to at least 1-year past substantial
completion.
C. If an individual specification section requires a particular warranty more stringent than that
required by this Section or the General Conditions, the more stringent requirements will
govern for the applicable portion of the Work.
D. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and
replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed
and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
01740 - 2
rev: August, 2012
E. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty will be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
F. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace
or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective
Work regardless of whether the County has benefited from use of the Work through a
portion of its anticipated useful service life.
G. County's Recourse: Written warranties made to the County are in addition to implied
warranties, and will not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available
under the law, nor will warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the
County can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
H. Rejection of Warranties: The County reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
I. The County reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the project where a special
warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such work or part of the Work,
until evidence is presented that entities required to counter-sign such commitments are
willing to do so.
J. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the
products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors required to
countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
DELIVERABLES
A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the
respective manufacturers, suppliers, and Subcontractors, and bind into a commercial quality
standard 3-ring binder; submit 5 copies of the warranties and bonds to the County for review.
1. The warranties and bonds shall include:
a. Equipment or product description
b. Manufacturer's name, principal, address and telephone number
c. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number
d. Local supplier's or representatives name and address
e. Scope of warranty or bond
f. Proper procedure in case of failure
g. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond
h. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract
i. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract
01740 - 3
rev: August, 2012
B. Warranties
1. Furnish an extended warranty for sanitary sewer main liner certified by the manufacturer
for specified material properties for a particular job. The manufacturer warrants the liner
to be free from defects in raw materials for 1-year from the date of acceptance. During
the warranty period, any defects which affect the integrity or strength of the pipe shall be
repaired at the Contractor's expense in a manner acceptable to the County.
2. Furnish an extended warranty for sanitary lateral liner certified by the manufacturer for
specified material properties for a particular job. The manufacturer warrants the liner to
be free from defects in raw materials for 1-year from the date of acceptance. During the
warranty period, any defects which affect the integrity or strength of the pipe shall be
repaired at the Contractor's expense in a manner acceptable to the County.
END OF SECTION
01740 - 4
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 02050
DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work
1. This Section specifies the labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the
demolition, relocation, and/or disposal of all structures, building materials, equipment,
and accessories to be removed as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
2. There may be existing and active stormwater, wastewater, water, and other facilities on
site as indicated on the Drawings. It is essential that these facilities, when encountered,
remain intact and in service during the proposed demolition. Consequently, the
Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of these facilities and shall diligently
direct all his activities toward maintaining continuous operation of the existing facilities
and minimizing operational inconvenience.
3. Demolition generally includes:
a. Complete demolition and removal of manholes, valve vaults, wetwells, piping, and
mechanical and electrical equipment related to the Work as shown on the Drawings
and specified herein.
b. Complete demolition and removal of all above and below ground structures, concrete
slabs and foundations, vaults, and underground utilities (water, wastewater,
electrical, etc.) as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
c. All material, equipment, rubble, debris, and other products of the demolition shall
become the property of the Contractor for his disposal off-site in accordance with all
applicable laws and ordinances at the Contractor's expense. The sale of salvageable
materials by the Contractor shall only be conducted off-site. The sale of removed
items on the site is prohibited by the County.
4. The Contractor shall examine the various Drawings, visit the site, determine the extent of
the Work, the extent of work affected therein, and all conditions under which he is
required to perform the various operations.
5. The Contractor shall fill and compact all voids left by the removal of pipe, structures, etc.
with materials described herein to a grade that will provide for positive drainage of the
disturbed area to drain run-off in direction consistent with the surrounding area. The
Contractor shall provide all fill materials to the site as needed. Compaction of fill shall
match the compaction of adjacent undisturbed material.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Permits and Licenses: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and licenses for
performing the Work and shall furnish a copy of same to the County prior to commencing
the Work. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the permits.
B. Notices: Contractor shall issue written notices of planned demolition to companies or local
authorities owning utility conduit, wires, or pipes running to or through the project site.
Copies of said notices shall be submitted to the County.
02050 - 1
rev: August, 2012
C. Utility Services: Contractor shall notify utility companies or local authorities furnishing gas,
water, electrical, telephone, or sewer service to remove any equipment in the structures to be
demolished and to remove, disconnect, cap, or plug their services to facilitate demolition.
D. Contractor shall notify the Orange County Risk Management Department in writing prior to
beginning any demolition work.
1.03
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be submitted to the County for review and acceptance prior to construction
in accordance with the General Conditions and specifications Section 01300 "Submittals."
B. Submit to the County for their approval, 2 copies of proposed methods and operations of
demolition or relocation of the structures specified below prior to the start of Work. Include
in the schedule the coordination of shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility service as
required.
C. Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure the uninterrupted
progress of the County's operations.
D. Before commencing demolition work, all structure relocation, bypassing, capping, or
modifications necessary will be completed. Actual work will not begin until the County has
inspected and approved the prerequisite work and authorized commencement of the
demolition work.
E. The above procedure must be followed for each individual demolition operation.
1.04
SITE CONDITIONS
A. Prior to demolition, the Contractor shall obtain written verification from the utility owner(s)
that the existing utilities, including stormwater, wastewater, and/or water facilities, are not
operational and are ready for demolition.
B. The County assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of the structures to be
demolished or relocated.
C. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the
County insofar as practicable. However, variations within each site may occur prior to the
start of demolition work.
D. No additional payment will be made for pumping or other difficulties encountered due to
water.
E. Certain information regarding the reputed presence, size, character and location of existing
underground structures, pipes and conduit has been shown on the Drawings. There is no
certainty of the accuracy of this information, and the location of underground structures
shown may be inaccurate and other obstructions than those shown may be encountered. The
Contractor hereby distinctly agrees that the County is not responsible for the correctness or
sufficiency of the information given; that in no event is this information to be considered as a
part of the Contract; that he shall have no claim for delay or extra compensation on account
02050 - 2
rev: August, 2012
of incorrectness of information regarding obstructions either revealed or not revealed by the
Drawings; and that he shall have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility
under this Contract in case the location, size, or character of any pipe or other underground
structure is not as indicated on the Drawings, or in case any pipe or other underground
structure is encountered that is not shown on the Drawings.
1.05
RESTRICTIONS
A. No building, tank or structure, or any part thereof, shall be demolished until an application
has been filed by the Contractor with the Building Department Inspector and a permit issued
if a permit is required. The fee for this permit shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
Demolition shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of the Building Code of the
State of Florida.
B. No explosives shall be used at any time during the demolition. No burning of combustible
material will be allowed.
C. Contractor shall notify the Orange County Risk Management Department prior to beginning
any demolition work.
1.06
DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
A. All salvageable or useable material or equipment to be retained by the County shall be
shown on Drawings, and shall be moved to a designated area by Contractor for pick up by
County. The Contractor shall promptly remove all other materials from the site as indicated
or shown on the Drawings.
B. All materials not retained by the County shall become the Contractor's property and shall be
removed off-site.
C. The on-site storage of removed items is prohibited by the County. Off-site sale of
salvageable material by the Contractor is acceptable.
1.07
TRAFFIC AND ACCESS
A. Conduct work to ensure minimum interference with on-site and off-site roads, streets,
sidewalks, and occupied or used facilities.
B. Special attention is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access to the existing
facilities remaining in operation by plant personnel and plant associated vehicles, including
trucks and delivery vehicles.
C. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from the County. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic in
access ways.
1.08
PROTECTION
A. Conduct operations to minimize damage by falling debris or other causes to adjacent
02050 - 3
rev: August, 2012
buildings, structures, roadways, other facilities, and persons. Provide interior and exterior
shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement or settlement or collapse of structures to be
demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
1.09
DAMAGE
A. Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations as directed by
the County at no cost to the County.
1.10
UTILITIES
A. Maintain existing utilities as directed by the County to remain in service and protect against
damage during demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operational facilities, except when
authorized by County. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as
acceptable to the County.
C. The Contractor shall cooperate with the County to shut off utilities serving structures of the
existing facilities as required by demolition operations.
D. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all necessary arrangements and for
performing any necessary work involved in connection with the interruption of all public and
private utilities or services.
E. All utilities being abandoned shall be terminated at the service mains in conformance with
the requirement of the utility companies or the municipality owning or controlling them.
1.11
EXTERMINATION
A. If required, before starting demolition, the Contractor shall employ a certified rodent and
vermin exterminator and treat the facilities in accordance with governing health laws and
regulations. Any rodents, insects, or other vermin appearing before or during the demolition
shall be killed or otherwise prevented from leaving the immediate vicinity of the demolition
work.
1.12
POLLUTION CONTROL
A. For pollution control, use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods
as necessary to limit the amount of dust rising and scattering in the air to the lowest level of
air pollution practical for the conditions of work. The Contractor shall comply with the
governing regulations.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of all dust and debris caused by demolition
operations as directed by the County. Return areas to conditions existing prior to the start of
Work.
02050 - 4
rev: August, 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SEQUENCE OF WORK
A. The sequence of demolition and relocation of existing facilities shall be in accordance with
the approved critical path schedule as specified in paragraph 1.03 above.
3.02
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND APPURTENANCES
A. Equipment to be retained by the County will be designated for retention by the County prior
to bidding as specified in Paragraph 1.06 above. Subject to the constraints of maintaining
existing facilities in operation as shown on the Drawings, all other process equipment, nonburied valving and piping, and appurtenances shall be removed from the site.
3.03
DEMOLITION PROCEDURES
The Contractor shall adhere to the following demolition procedures as referenced on the
Drawings:
A. TO BE DEMOLISHED: Demolition shall be the breaking up, cutting, filling of any holes
resulting, final grading of the area, performing any other operations required, and the
removal from the site of all structures and equipment (structures, substructures, floor slabs,
equipment, tanks, pipes, fittings, electrical systems, light poles, wiring, underground
conduits and wiring, isolated slabs, and sidewalks) as indicated on the Drawings. All pieces
of concrete, metal, and any other demolished material shall be removed to a depth of at least
5-feet below existing grade. Broken pieces of concrete may be size reduced by an on-site
crusher, but in any event must be removed from the project site.
Before commencing structural demolition, remove all mechanical, electrical, piping, and
miscellaneous appurtenances. Completely remove the structure by thoroughly breaking up
concrete into pieces no more than 2-feet across the largest dimension.
B. TO BE REMOVED: Where indicated on the Drawings, the structures and equipment shall be
completely removed from the site with all associated connecting piping or electrical service.
The item shall be taken whole or in parts to be salvaged or disposed of by the Contractor.
C. TO BE ABANDONED: Where indicated on the Drawings, the structures and equipment
shall be left in place, drained, and the contents properly disposed. The upper 4-feet of the
structure shall be cut and removed, including the cover slab and access port, frame, and
cover. All structures to be abandoned with bottom slabs shall be drilled (2 holes minimum,
2.0-inch diameter each) or hole punched to prevent flotation and filled with common fill.
D. PIPING TO BE REMOVED: Where indicated on the Drawings, pipe (and conduit) shall be
drained and the contents properly disposed. The pipe (or conduit) shall then be completely
removed from the site, including fittings, valves, and other in-line devices. Connections to
existing piping to remain shall be plugged by mechanical means (M.J. plugs, tie-rods, or
thrust blocks). Piping shall be removed in accordance with Specification Section 02080
"Abandonment, Removal and Salvage or Disposal of Existing Pipe."
02050 - 5
rev: August, 2012
E. PIPING TO BE ABANDONED: Where indicated on the Drawings, piping (or conduit) shall
be left in place. All such piping shall be drained and the contents properly disposed. The
pipe (or conduit) shall then be filled with grout (flowable fill) and each end of the pipe (or
conduit) shall be plugged using a concrete plug in a manner acceptable to the County.
Piping shall be abandoned in accordance with Specification Section 02080 "Abandonment,
Removal and Salvage or Disposal of Existing Pipe."
F. TO BE PROTECTED: Where indicated on the Drawings, the utility service, fence, structure,
tree, or device so designated shall be temporarily protected during the prosecution of the
demolition work as specified in Division 1.
G. TO REMAIN: Where indicated on the Drawings, the designated facilities shall remain intact
and in service during the prosecution of the demolition work.
3.04
DEWATERING OF EXISTING PROCESS UNITS AND DISPOSAL OF RESIDUE
The Contractor shall notify the County prior to beginning the dewatering work on any existing
process units which contain wastewater, grit, or sludge. The Contractor, at his own expense,
shall remove the entire contents of each structure and dispose off site. The proper transport and
disposal of all residues shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
02050 - 6
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 02080
ABANDONMENT, REMOVAL, AND SALVAGE OR DISPOSAL OF EXISTING PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: This section specifies the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and
incidentals required to abandon, remove, salvage, and/or dispose of existing pipelines and
appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Permits and Licenses: Contractor shall obtain and pay respective fees for all necessary
permits and licenses for performing the Work and shall furnish a copy of same to the County
prior to commencing the Work. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the
permits. All removal or abandonment of asbestos pipe material shall be performed by a
licensed asbestos abatement Contractor or Subcontractor registered in the State of Florida.
B. Notices: Contractor shall issue written notices of planned Work to companies or local
authorities owning utility conduit, wires, or pipes running to or through the project site.
Copies of said notices shall be submitted to the County.
C. Standards:
1. Florida Administrative Code, Chapter 62-204.800
2. National Emission Standards Hazardous Air Pollution (NESHAP), 40 CFR Part 61,
Subpart M, latest revision
3. Occupational Safety and Health Act, 29 CFR
4. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Asbestos Abatement Worker Protection
Rule
5. Florida Statute 455.300
6. Asbestos pipe handling best management practices provided at the end of this section
D. Quality Control
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide supervision and inspections to
ensure that the existing piping is removed and disposed, salvaged, or abandoned as
designated in the Drawings and as specified herein.
2. Asbestos Pipe
a. All removal or abandonment of pipe material containing asbestos shall be performed
by a licensed asbestos abatement Contractor or Subcontractor.
b. The asbestos abatement Contractor or Subcontractor shall contact the Orange County
Environmental Protection Division (407-836-1400) prior to removal or abandonment
of any asbestos material and shall obtain all required permits and licenses and issue
all required notices as required by the Orange County Environmental Protection
Division. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fees associated with permits,
licenses, and notices to the governing regulatory agencies.
c. The asbestos abatement Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all
02080 - 1
rev: August, 2012
applicable standards referenced in paragraph 1.02.C of this section.
d. The asbestos abatement Contractor shall have experience performing asbestos
removal similar to this Project.
1.03
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submittals shall be submitted to the County for review and acceptance prior to
construction in accordance with the General Conditions and specifications Section 01300
"Submittals."
2. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the County for review and acceptance prior to
construction in accordance with these specifications for the following:
a. Grout
b. Caps and plugs
c. Credentials of licensed asbestos abatement Contractor including current certification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
REMOVAL, ABANDONMENT, SALVAGE, AND DISPOSAL
A. General: Existing piping designated on the Drawings to be removed shall be exposed and
removed by the Contractor.
B. Removal and Disposal
1. Pipe designated to be removed shall be completely drained and the contents properly
disposed. The piping system including fittings and valves shall then be completely
removed from the site.
2. Existing services and/or connections not shown on the Drawings shall be removed in
accordance with this section at no additional cost. Existing live services encountered
shall be maintained.
3. Asbestos: Pipe material containing asbestos shall be removed and disposed by a licensed
asbestos abatement Contractor or Subcontractor.
4. Structures shall be removed in accordance with Section 02050 "Demolition of Existing
Structures."
C. Removal of material to be salvaged
1. Pipe designated on the Drawings to be removed and salvaged shall be completely
drained and the contents properly disposed. The pipe shall then be thoroughly pressure
washed, palletized on wooden skids to a dimension not exceeding the recommendation
of the manufacturer, and conveyed to the County at the location designated by the
County.
2. Items to be salvaged:
a. Air release valves
b. Sanitary manhole rings and covers
c. Isolation valves
d. Valve boxes
02080 - 2
rev: August, 2012
e. Fire hydrant and valve assemblies
D. Abandonment
1. Pipe designated on the Drawings to be abandoned (or retired in place) shall be left in
place, drained, and its contents properly disposed. Pipe requires end caps or plugs. All
air release valves and vaults, valve boxes, fire hydrants, manholes, and manhole rings
and covers shall be removed and disposed of or salvaged as specified above.
2. All pipe 4-inches or larger to be abandoned in place shall be completely filled with grout
and each end of the pipe shall be plugged in a manner acceptable to the County.
3. Grout: Where designated on the Drawings, pipe to be abandoned shall be filled with
grout in accordance with Section 03600 "Grouting."
4. Plugs: Pipe to be abandoned shall be capped or plugged with a mechanical joint fitting
that will prevent soil or other deposits form entering the pipe.
E. Asbestos Pipe Handling Best Management Practices
1. Projects will require worker documentation before entering the regulated Work area. A
copy of: their current training certificate (workers and their supervisor); current medical
condition showing the doctor approved their working with asbestos and wearing a
respirator; signed acknowledgment forms; and current record (6-months) of each workers
respirator fit test will be required from all workers.
2. Projects also require air monitoring. OSHA will accept historic data on air monitoring
within 12-months of the Project, provided the data is from a project of like material and
conditions with a crew of the same experience, supervision, and training. Otherwise,
monitoring is required throughout the Project. OSHA requires two (2) types of personnel
air monitoring, full shift and 30-minute excursion level (when highest levels are
anticipated).
3. Some provisions should be made for worker showering or otherwise washing following
work before removing respirators, etc. Even if direct exposure is not anticipated, and at a
minimum, a source of water to rinse the respirators, wash workers faces and hands, and
(in the event of unanticipated direct exposure) some place to shower is required. The
workers will also need a change room and some place to keep their street clothes and
personal possessions.
4. Proposals to remove asbestos pipe sections by cutting must address how the cutting
debris will be captured and kept from becoming airborne. Soil that could be considered
contaminated may also have to be removed.
5. Licensed asbestos abatement Contractors or Subcontractors should have a pollution
endorsement in their liability insurance in case of asbestos fiber release. A contingency
plan, in case the project does not run as smoothly as expected, should be developed and
include emergency phone numbers kept on site during the Project.
6. Daily logs of the asbestos removal work should be kept, and should include sign in
sheets for the workers and whatever air monitoring was done. Accident reports and other
reports or correspondence if something unusual happened should also be included.
7. Waste receipts must be kept through all stages of transport from the site to, and
including, the acceptance at the dumpsite where the material will be abandoned. Amount
of material removed must be equal to the amount of material to be turned into to the
dump.
8. The primary Contractor will give "approval for tear down" at project completion,
indicating that all asbestos removal operations are complete and whether there is a need
for any air monitoring. Air monitoring, if not required by any governing agency or
02080 - 3
rev: August, 2012
approved permit as discussed previously, may also be required by the County if
documentation to the general public pertaining to contamination is deemed necessary.
This air monitoring is normally done by collecting area samples downwind of the project
at the barrier tape or just inside it. It requires a source of electricity to run the pumps,
which is often provided by a generator.
END OF SECTION
02080 - 4
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 02100
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work
1. The Work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining and
removing temporary erosion, sedimentation and turbidity controls as necessary.
2. Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing, mulching, setting,
watering and reseeding on-site surfaces and soil and borrow area surfaces and providing
interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will ensure that erosion
during construction will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as
established by federal, state and local requirements and by the County.
3. Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to; silt fence, silt dams,
traps, barriers, and appurtenances at the foot of sloped surfaces which will ensure that
sedimentation pollution will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits
as established by federal, state and local requirements and by the County.
4. Temporary turbidity controls include, but are not limited to, floating or staked turbidity
barriers which will ensure that turbidity pollution will be either eliminated or maintained
within acceptable limits as established by Federal, state, and local requirements and by
the County.
5. Contractor is responsible for providing effective temporary erosion, sediment, and turbidity
control measures during construction or until permanent controls become effective.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: South Florida Building Code and Standard Building Code,
FDOT Standard Specifications for road and bridge construction and FDOT Design Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EROSION CONTROL
A. Netting Fence: fabricated of material acceptable to the County.
B. Sod is specified in Section 02578, "Solid Sodding."
2.02
A. Bales: clean, seed-free cereal hay type.
B. Netting: fabricated of material acceptable to the County.
C. Filter stone: crushed stone conforming to Florida Department of Transportation
specifications.
D. Concrete block: hollow, non-load bearing type.
02100 - 1
rev: August, 2012
E. Concrete: exterior grade not less than 1-inch thick.
F. Rock Bags: conforming to FDOT Specifications.
2.03
TURBIDITY CONTROL
A. Conforming to FDOT Design Standards Index 103 - Turbidity Barriers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EROSION CONTROL
A. Minimum Procedures for Grassing Are:
1. Scarify slopes to a depth of not less than 6-inches and remove large clods, rock, stumps
and roots larger than 1/2-inch in diameter and debris.
2. Sow seed within 24-hours after the ground is scarified with either mechanical seed drills
or rotary hand seeders.
3. Apply mulch loosely and to a thickness of between 3/4-inch and 1-1/2-inches.
4. Apply netting over mulched areas on sloped surfaces.
5. Roll and water seeded areas in a manner which will encourage sprouting of seeds and
growing of grass. Reseed areas which exhibit unsatisfactory growth. Backfill and seed
eroded areas.
3.02
A. Install and maintain silt fence, silt dams, traps, barriers and appurtenances as shown on the
approved descriptions and working Drawings. Hay bales which deteriorate and filter stone
which is dislodged shall be replaced.
3.03
TURBIDITY CONTROL
A. Install and maintain turbidity barriers daily and as described in FDOT Index #103.
3.04
PERFORMANCE
A. Should any of the temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the
Contractor fail to produce results which comply with the requirements of the State of
Florida, the Contractor shall immediately take whatever steps are necessary to correct the
deficiency at his own expense.
END OF SECTION
02100 - 2
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 02140
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: This Section specifies the furnishing of equipment; labor and materials
necessary to remove storm or subsurface waters from excavation areas in accordance with
the requirements set forth, as shown on the Drawings, and/or geotechnical report.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: The Contractor shall engage a Geotechnical Engineer registered in the State
of Florida, to design the temporary dewatering system. The Contractor shall submit
conceptual plan for the dewatering system prior to commencing work. The dewatering
system installed shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan and certification of
this shall be provided by the Geotechnical Engineer. The dewatering system shall be
designed by a firm who regularly engages in the design of dewatering systems and who is
fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the design of such dewatering systems.
B. The dewatering of any excavation areas and the disposal of the water shall be in strict
accordance with the latest revision of all local and state government rules and regulations.
C. Permits: The Contractor shall obtain and pay respective fees for all local, state, and federal
permits (including the Orange County, St. Johns River Water Management District, and/or
South Florida Management District discharge permits) required for the withdrawal, treatment
and disposal/discharge of water from the dewatering operation, prior to start of work.
D. Comply with Florida Administrative Code, Chapter 62-621.300 (2).
1.03
B. In accordance with FAC 62-621.300(2), submit analytical test results from a certified
laboratory for the parameters listed in the FDEP "Generic Permit for the Discharge of
Produced Ground Water from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity" to the FDEP and the
County. The submitted information shall show the location of the work, where the water
will be going to, as well as an estimate for the amount, rate and duration of discharge being
proposed.
02140 - 1
rev: August, 2012
C. Provide notification to all jurisdictional permitting agencies in accordance with the
requirements of the respective agency.
D. Provide a detailed plan and operation schedule for dewatering of excavations.
1 Provide descriptive literature of the dewatering system.
2. Provide a plan for erosion and sedimentation control during dewatering.
3. Provide copies of all permits/approvals for disposal/discharge of water during
dewatering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall have on-site and available the analytical test results performed in
accordance with the FDEP "Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water
from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity" (FAC 62-621.300(2)).
B. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of storm or subsurface
waters which may accumulate within the excavation.
C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the water surface elevations discussed in the
report(s) on subsurface investigations. Water levels will normally vary from season to
season.
D. The Contractor shall be required to monitor the performance of the dewatering system during
the progress of the Work and make such modifications as may be required to assure that the
systems will perform satisfactorily. The dewatering system shall be designed in such a
manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the sub-grade soils at the bottom
of the trench or excavation.
E. Prior to excavation, the Contractor shall submit his proposed method of dewatering and
maintaining dry conditions to the County. Approval of the dewatering plan shall not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility for the satisfactory performance of the system. The
Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any disturbance of natural bearing soils or
damage to structures caused by an inadequate dewatering system or by interruption of the
continuous operation of the system as specified.
F. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable equipment to
adequately dewater the excavation. A wellpoint system or other County acceptable
dewatering method shall be utilized if necessary to maintain the excavation in a dry
condition for preparation of the trench bottom and for pipe laying. Within and adjacent to
residential areas and other areas as required by the County, engines driving dewatering
pumps shall be equipped with residential type mufflers and the noise shall not exceed 55
decibels within 50-feet.
3.02
DEWATERING AND DISPOSAL
02140 - 2
rev: August, 2012
A. The Contractor shall construct and place all pipelines, structures, concrete work, structural
fill, backfill and bedding material in-the-dry. In addition, the Contractor shall make the final
24-inches of excavation in-the-dry and not until the water level is a minimum of 2-foot
below proposed bottom of excavation. For purposes of this Contract, in-the-dry is defined as
±2% of the optimum moisture content of the soil.
B. The Contractor shall, at all times during construction, provide and maintain proper
equipment and facilities to remove promptly and dispose of all water entering excavations.
Contractor shall keep excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade
foundation condition until the fill, structure, or pipes have been completed to such extent that
they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural
elevations.
C. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the natural
undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of excavation.
D. It is expected that dewatering will be required for pre-drainage of the soils prior to final
excavation for most of the in-ground structures or piping and for maintaining the lowered
groundwater level until construction has been completed so that the structure, pipeline or fill
will not be floated or otherwise damaged.
E. If wellpoints are used, Contractor shall adequately space wellpoints to maintain the
necessary dewatering. Provide suitable filter sand and/or other means to prevent pumping of
fine sands and silts. A continual check shall be maintained by the Contractor to ensure that
the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operations. Pumping from
wellpoints shall be continuous and standby pumps shall be provided.
F. The Contractor's proposed method of dewatering shall include groundwater observation
wells to determine the water level during construction. Observation wells shall be installed
along pipelines as required to verify depth to water level and at locations approved by the
County.
G. At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted from
excavations. Water entering the excavation from the surface shall be collected in shallow
ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped or drained by
gravity to maintain an excavation bottom free from standing water.
H. Flotation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous
removal of water. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all damages which may
result from failure to adequately keep excavations dewatered.
I. The Contractor shall dispose of water from the Work in a suitable manner without damage to
adjacent properties or facilities. No water shall be discharged without appropriate treatment
for adverse contaminants. No water shall be drained in work built or under construction
without prior consent from the County. Water shall be filtered to remove sand and fine soil
particles before disposal into any drainage system.
J. Dewatering of excavations shall be considered incidental to the construction of the Work and
all costs shall be included in the various Contract prices in the Bid Form, unless a separate
bid item has been established for dewatering.
02140 - 3
rev: August, 2012
3.03
GROUNDWATER TREATMENT (IF REQUIRED)
A. If concentrations of tested groundwater quality parameters exceed those allowable in the
FDEP Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from any NonContaminated Site Activity (62-621.300(2), F.A.C.), the Contractor shall treat the effluent.
B. The Contractor shall immediately notify the County and discuss the parameters that exceed
allowable limits.
C. The Contractor shall meet with the FDEP to determine alternatives that are acceptable to the
FDEP.
D. The Contractor shall apply for and obtain any and all permits and/or treatment approvals that
FDEP requires including but not limited too:
1. Generic Permit for Discharges from Petroleum Contaminated Sites (62-621.300(1)).
Allows discharges from sites with automotive gasoline, aviation gasoline, jet fuel, or
diesel fuel contamination; or
2. Permit for all Other Contaminated Sites (62-04; 62-302; 62-620 & 62-660). The
coverage is available only through the individual NPDES permit issued by FDEP, allows
discharges from sites with general contaminant issues i.e. ground water and/or soil
contamination other than petroleum fuel contamination; or
3. Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any NonContaminated Site Activity (62-621.300(2), F.A.C.); or
4. Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large or Small Construction Activities
(62-621.300(4)(a), F.A.C.); or
5. An Individual Wastewater Permit (62-604.300(8) (a)
E. The Contractor shall implement the appropriate treatment that is acceptable to FDEP and
County to attain compliance for all excess limits encountered during dewatering activities.
Treatment may include, but is not limited to: Chemical, Biological, Electrolysis or any
combination of the three.
F. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the spread of contamination into
uncontaminated areas. Provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and
make provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any
potentially hazardous conditions. Ensure provision adhere to all applicable laws, rules or
regulations covering hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate with the
level of severity of the conditions.
G. If necessary, provide contamination assessment and remediation personnel to handle site
assessment, determine the course of action necessary for site security and perform the
necessary steps under applicable laws, rules and regulations for additional assessment and/or
remediation work to resolve the contaminations issue.
H. Delineate the contamination area(s) and any staging or holding area required and develop a
work plan that will provide the schedule of projected completion dates for the final
resolution of the contamination issue.
I. Maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any delineated contamination areas and any
associated staging or holding areas. Be responsible for the health and safety of workers
02140 - 4
rev: August, 2012
within the delineated areas. Provide continuous access to representatives of regulatory or
enforcement agencies having jurisdiction.
3.04
REMOVAL
Immediately upon completion of the dewatering system, the Contractor shall remove all of his
equipment, materials, and supplies from the site of the Work, remove all surplus materials and
debris, fill in all holes or excavations, and grade the site to elevations of the surface levels which
existed before work started. The site shall be thoroughly cleaned and approved by the County.
END OF SECTION
02140 - 5
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 02210
SITE ROUGH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
Work Specified Herein and Elsewhere
A.
Work under this Section includes:
Rough grading for berms, site drainage, and the site.
B.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
Site Preparation - Section 02230.
2.
Compaction Control and Testing - Section 02250.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
Unless otherwise indicated, material for fills shall be surplus excavated soil and borrow
material meeting the appropriate, requirements for backfill as specified in other sections and
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
Provide all rough grading and filling to achieve the lines and grades indicated on the
Drawings, with an allowance for the thickness of paving, surfacing, or top soil. Material not
suitable for the required fills shall be spread uniformly in designated spoil areas and
compacted as specified in Section 02250 to achieve a smooth and firm surface. All
earthwork shall be done in a manner that provides drainage and prevents surface drainage
from entering excavations.
3.02
PREPARATION FOR FILLS, BERMS, AND EMBANKMENTS
A.
Upon completion of site preparation work, remove any additional organic material or
debris where fill is to be placed. Ground surfaces sloped steeper than one vertical to
four horizontal shall be plowed, stepped or benched, or broken up as directed by the
Engineer so the fill material will bond with the existing surface. Level surfaces shall
be disked, wetted or dried as required, and re-compacted. Backfill all holes made by
demolition, clearing, grubbing, and other site preparation work.
02210-1
B.
Lift thicknesses and compaction requirements are specified in Section 02250.
C.
Compacted material that has been flooded and no longer meets the density specified
shall be removed and replaced.
END OF SECTION
02210-2
S E CT I O N 02215
FINISH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: Provide finish grading to all areas within the limits of construction.
B. Grade sub-soil. Cut out areas to receive stabilizing base course materials for paving and
sidewalks. Place, finish grade, and compact topsoil.
1.02
PROTECTION
A. Prevent damage to existing fencing, trees, landscaping, natural features, benchmarks,
pavement, and utility lines. Correct damage at no cost to the County.
1.03
A. Submittals shall be submitted to the County for review and acceptance prior to construction in
accordance with the General Conditions and specifications Section 01300 "Submittals."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. All material supplied shall be one of the products specified in Appendix D "List of Approved
Products" appended to these technical specifications.
B. Topsoil: Friable loam free from subsoil, roots, grass, excessive amount of weeds, stones, and
foreign matter; acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5; containing a minimum of 4% and a
maximum of 25% organic matter. The topsoil shall be suitable for the proposed plant growth
shown on the Drawings and specified. Use topsoil stockpiles on site if conforming to these
requirements. If there is not sufficient topsoil available at the project site, the Contractor
shall furnish additional topsoil as required to complete the Work at no additional cost to the
County.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SUB SOIL PREPARATION
A. Rough grade sub-soil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and
compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, etc.
Remove sub-soil that has been contaminated with petroleum products.
02215 - 1
rev: August, 2012
B. Cut out areas to subgrade elevation which are to receive stabilizing base for paving and
sidewalks.
C. Bring sub soil to required levels, profiles, and contours. Make changes in grade gradual.
Blend slopes into level areas.
D. Slope grade away from building a minimum of 2-inches in 10-feet unless indicated otherwise
on the Drawings.
E. Cultivate subgrade to a depth of 3-inches where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in
areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted sub-soil.
3.02
PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding, and planting is to be performed. Place to the
following minimum depths, up to finished grade elevations.
1. 6-inches for seeded areas
2. 4-1/2-inches for sodded areas
3. 24-inches for shrub beds
4. 18-inches for flower beds
B. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
C. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain
levels, profiles, and contours of subgrades.
D. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris, and other foreign material while spreading.
E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants, and buildings to prevent damage which may be
caused by grading equipment.
F. Lightly compact placed topsoil.
3.03
SURPLUS MATERIAL
A. Remove surplus sub soil and topsoil from site.
B. Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
END OF SECTION
02215 - 2
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 02220
EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: Excavate, backfill, and compact as required for the construction of the utility
system consisting of piping and appurtenances, and structural construction as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment,
and incidentals necessary to perform all excavation, backfill, compaction, grading, and slope
protection to complete the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined
to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, all under ground utilities locations and
appurtenances shown on the construction Drawings.
B. Definitions:
1. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific material as
determined by AASHTO T-180 (ASTM D155).
2. Optimum Moisture: Percentage of water in a specific material at maximum density.
3. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which requires the use of
explosives and/or special impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels, or similar
devices specifically designed for use in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench
excavating machinery.
4. Suitable: Suitable materials for fills shall be non-cohesive, non-plastic granular local
sand and shall be free from vegetation, organic material, marl, silt, or muck. The
Contractor shall furnish all additional fill material required.
5. Unsuitable: Unsuitable materials are highly organic soil (peat or muck) classified as A-8
in accordance with AASHTO Designation M 145.
C. Plan For Earthwork: The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his
satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the ground, the character
and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of materials to be encountered, the
nature of the groundwater conditions, the prosecution of the Work, the general and local
conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work under this Contract.
Prior to commencing the excavation, the Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed
operations, including maintenance of traffic, to the County for review. The Contractor shall
consider, and his plan for excavation shall reflect, the equipment and methods to be
employed in the excavation. The prices established in the Proposal for the Work to be done
will reflect all costs pertaining to the Work.
02220 - 1
rev: August, 2012
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing laboratory employed by the County will make such tests as are deemed advisable.
The Contractor shall schedule his work to permit a reasonable time for testing before placing
succeeding lifts and shall keep the laboratory informed of his progress. Costs for initial
testing shall be paid by the County; however, tests which have to be repeated because of the
failure of the tested material to meet specification shall be paid for by the Contractor and the
cost of re-testing shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor.
B. Standards
1. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
3. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers
4. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
5. AWWA: American Water Works Association
6. OSHA 29 CFR Subpart P – Excavations and Trenches a) 1926.650, 1926.651, 1926.652
7. OSHA 29 CFR Subpart J - a) 1910.146 for Confined Space Entry
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities
1. The Contractor is responsible for subsurface verification of existing utilities prior to
construction. Locate existing utilities in the area of work in accordance with Sunshine
State One Call regulations, Chapter 556, "Underground Facility Damage Prevention and
Safety Act", FS.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utility be encountered during
excavation, notify the County. Keep all facilities in operation and repair damaged
utilities to the satisfaction of the County.
3. Damage and repair costs to such piping or utilities are the Contractor's responsibility.
4. If utilities are to remain in place, the Contractor shall provide adequate means of
protection.
B. Test borings and the sub-surface exploration data if previously done on the site will be made
available upon request and are for the Contractor's information only.
1.04
PROTECTION
A. Sheeting and Bracing
1. Requirements of the Trench Safety Act shall be adhered to at all times.
02220 - 2
rev: August, 2012
2. Furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting and bracing as may be required to
support the sides of excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any way
diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction, to
protect adjacent structures and power poles from undermining, and to protect workers
from hazardous conditions or other damage. Such support shall consist of braced steel
sheet piling, braced wood lagging and soldier beams or other acceptable methods. If the
County is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been
provided, the County may order additional supports put in at the expense of the
Contractor, and compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor
from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to
prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately
filled and compacted. Where soil cannot be properly compacted to fill a void, lean
concrete shall be used as backfill at no additional expense to the County.
3. The Contractor shall construct the sheeting outside the neat lines of the foundation unless
indicated otherwise for the method of operation. Sheeting shall be plumb and securely
braced and tied in position. Sheeting and bracing shall be adequate to withstand all
pressure to which the structure or trench will be subjected. Any movement or bulging
which may occur shall be corrected by the Contractor at their own expense so as to
provide the necessary clearances and dimensions.
4. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of excavations for structures,
the Contractor shall engage a Professional Geotechnical Engineer, registered in the State
of Florida, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and bracing installed shall
be in conformity with the design, and the Professional Engineer shall provide
certification of this.
5. The installation of sheeting, particularly by driving or vibrating, may cause distress to
existing structures. The Contractor shall evaluate the potential for such distress and, if
necessary, take all precautions to prevent distress of existing structures because of
sheeting installation.
6. The Contractor shall leave in place to be embedded in the backfill all sheeting and
bracing not shown on the Drawings but which the County may direct him in writing to
leave in place at any time during the progress of the Work for the purpose of preventing
damage to structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. The County may
direct that timber used for sheeting and bracing be cut off at any specified elevation.
7. All sheeting and bracing not left in place shall be carefully removed in such manner as
not to endanger the construction or other structures, utilities, or property. All voids left
or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by ramming
with tools especially adapted to that purpose, or otherwise as may be directed by the
County.
8. The right of the County to order sheeting and bracing left in place shall not be construed
as creating any obligation on the County’s part to issue such orders, and their failure to
exercise this right shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons
or property occurring from or upon the Work occasioned by negligence or otherwise,
growing out of a failure on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting
and bracing to prevent any caving or moving of the ground.
02220 - 3
rev: August, 2012
9. No wood sheeting is to be withdrawn if driven below mid-diameter of any pipe, and
under no circumstances shall any wood sheeting be cut off at a level lower than 1-foot
above the top of any pipe.
B. Pumping and Drainage:
1. The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper
equipment and facilities to remove all water entering excavations, and shall keep such
excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition
until the fills, structures, or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent
that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing the water level to return
to the natural level as stipulated in Section 02140 "Dewatering." The Contractor shall
engage a Professional Geotechnical Engineer registered in the State of Florida to design
the dewatering systems. The Contractor shall submit to the County for a plan for
dewatering systems prior to commencing work. The dewatering system installed shall be
in conformity with the overall construction plan, and the Professional Engineer shall
provide certification of this. The Professional Engineer shall be required to monitor the
performance of the dewatering systems during the progress of the Work and require such
modifications as may be required to assure that the systems are performing satisfactorily.
2. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the
undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom of excavation
and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures. Dewatering by trench pumping will
not be permitted if migration of fine grained natural material from bottom, sidewalls, or
bedding material will occur.
3. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches
around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped from the
excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water.
4. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any structure
during construction.
5. Permission to use any storm sewers or drains for water disposal purposes shall be
obtained from the authority having jurisdiction. Any requirements and costs for such use
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the Contractor shall not cause
flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow in the drainage facilities, and he shall
leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean as originally found. Any damage to facilities
shall be repaired or restored as directed by the County or the authority having
jurisdiction, at no cost to the County.
6. The Contractor shall prevent flotation by maintaining a positive and continuous
operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable
for all damages which may result from failure of this system.
7. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after compaction/density
testing has been completed and the system is no longer required. The Contractor shall
remove the material and equipment constituting the system.
8. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to preclude the accidental discharge
of fuel, oil, or other contaminates in order to prevent adverse effects on groundwater
quality.
1.05
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE
A. The County will provide a geotechnical testing and inspection service. The services include
02220 - 4
rev: August, 2012
testing soil materials and quality control testing during filling and backfilling operations.
Samples of soil materials shall be furnished to the testing service by the Contractor. The
County shall pay costs of initial geotechnical testing. The Contractor shall pay for any
subsequent testing required due to failure and laboratory stand-by charges incurred.
B. The Contractor shall provide monthly density testing reports to the County during backfilling
activities. Density testing reports not submitted in a timely manner shall result in rejection of
the pipe installed and rejection of the density testing reports until such time that density retesting is coordinated and repeated at the Contractors expense.
C. Density testing scheduled subsequent to backfilling activities shall be coordinated with, and
witnessed by the County. Failure by the Contractor to coordinate or have the County present
shall result in rejection of the submitted density testing reports and re-testing at the
Contractor’s expense.
D. Dewatering systems shall not be removed until compaction/density testing has been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All fill material shall be subject to the review and acceptance of the County.
2. All fill material shall be free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material.
The Contractor shall remove excess or unsuitable material from the job site.
B. Common Fill Material: Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, substantially free of clay,
organic material, muck, loam, wood, trash, and other objectionable material which may be
compressible or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain stones
larger than 3-1/2-inches in any dimension in the top 12-inches or 6-inches in any dimension
in the balance of fill area. Common fill shall not contain asphalt, broken concrete, masonry,
rubble or other similar materials. It shall have physical properties that allow it to be easily
spread and compacted during filling. Additional common fill shall be no more than 12 % by
weight finer than the No. 200 mesh sieve, unless finer material is approved for use in a
specific location by the County. Select Common Fill shall be as specified as above from
common fill, except that the material shall contain no stones larger than 1/2-inches in largest
dimension, and shall be no more than 5 % by weight finer than the No. 200 mesh sieve.
C. Structural Fill: Structural fill shall be reasonably well graded sand to gravelly sand having
the following gradation:
US Sieve Size
No. 1
No. 4
No. 40
No. 100
No. 200
Percent Passing By Weight
100
75 - 100
15 - 80
0 - 30
0 - 12
02220 - 5
rev: August, 2012
D. Class 1 Soils*: Manufactured angular, granular material, 1/4 to 1-1/2-inches (6 to 4 mm)
size, including materials having significance such as crushed stone or rock, broken coral,
crushed slag, cinders, or crushed shells. Sieve analysis for crushed stone is given below
separately.
Crushed Stone: Crushed stone shall consist of clean mineral aggregate free from clay, loam
or organic matter, conforming to ASTM C33 stone size No. 89 and with particle size limits
as follows:
U.S. Sieve Size
½
3/8
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 50
% Passing By Weight
100
100
20 – 25
5 – 30
0 - 10
0-2
E. Class II Soils**:
1. GW: Well graded gravels and gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty percent or
more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 % retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean.
2. GP: Poorly graded gravels and gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty percent or
more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 % retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean.
3. SW: Well graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than passes No. 4
sieve. More than 95 % retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean.
4. SP: Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than 50 % passes
No. 4 sieve. More than 95 % retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean.
*Soils defined as Class I materials are not defined in ASTM D2487.
**In accordance with ASTM D2487, less than 5 % pass No. 200 sieve.
F. Coarse Sand: Sand shall consist of clean mineral aggregate with particle size limits as
follows:
U.S. Sieve Size
3/8
No. 10
No. 40
No. 200
Percent Passing By Weight
100
85 – 100
20 – 40
0 - 12
G. Other Material: All other material, not specifically described, but required for proper
completion of the Work shall be selected by the Contractor and acceptable by the County.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Clearing:
1. The construction areas shall be cleared of all obstructions and vegetation including large
roots and undergrowth within 10-feet of the lines of the excavation.
2. Strip and stockpile topsoil on the site at the location to be determined by the County.
02220 - 6
rev: August, 2012
3.02
EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavations for roadways, structures, and utilities must be carefully executed in
order to avoid interruption of utility service.
B. Excavating for Roadways/Structures/Utilities:
1. Excavation shall be made to such dimensions as will give suitable room for building the
foundations and the structures, for bracing and supporting, for pumping and draining, and for
all other work required.
a. Excavation for precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an elevation 2feet lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to provide space for the
select backfill material. Prior to placing the select backfill, the excavation shall be
measured by the County to verify that the excavation has been carried to the proper
depth and is reasonably uniform over the area to be occupied by the structure.
b. Excavation for structures constructed or cast in place in dewatered excavations shall
be carried down to the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are such
that a dry excavation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material at this
elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed below the
founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with Class B concrete.
c. Footings: Cast-in-place concrete footing sides shall be formed immediately after
excavation.
2. Immediately document the location, elevation, size, material type and function of all new
subsurface installations, and utilities encountered during the course of construction.
3. Excavation equipment operators and other concerned parties shall be familiar with
subsurface obstructions as shown on the Drawings and should anticipate the encounter of
unknown obstructions during the course of the Work.
4. Encounters with subsurface obstructions shall be hand excavated.
5. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods that preserve the
undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick" or
otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of inadequate dewatering or
other construction methods shall be removed and replaced by crushed stone as required
by the County at the Contractor's expense.
6. The bottom of excavations shall be rendered firm and dry before placing any piping or
structure.
7. All pavements shall be cut with saws or approved power tools prior to removal.
8. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance
conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered. Excavated material not suitable for
backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor.
3.03
DRAINAGE
A. The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper equipment
and facilities to remove promptly and dispose of properly all water entering excavations, and
keep such excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation
condition. The dewatering method used shall prevent disturbance of earth below grade.
B. All water pumped or drained from the Work shall be disposed of in a suitable manner
without undue interference with other work, without damage to surrounding property, and in
02220 - 7
rev: August, 2012
accordance with pertinent rules and regulations.
C. No construction, including pipe laying, shall be allowed in water. No water shall be allowed
to contact masonry or concrete within 24-hours after being placed. The Contractor shall
constantly guard against damage due to water and take full responsibility for all damage
resulting from his failure to do so.
D. The Contractor will be required at his expense to excavate below grade and refill with
crushed stone (gradation 57 or 89) or other acceptable fill material if the County determines
that adequate dewatering has not been provided.
3.04
UNDERCUT
A. If the bottom of any excavation is below that shown on the Drawings or specified because of
Contractor error, convenience, or unsuitable subgrade due the Contractor's excavation
methods, he shall refill to normal grade with fill at his own cost. Fill material and
compaction method shall be approved by the County.
3.05
FILL AND COMPACTION
A. Compact and backfill excavations and construct embankment according to the following
schedule. (Modified Proctor standard shall be ASTM D-1557):
STRUCTURES AND ROADWORK
Area
Beneath
Structures
Material
Structural Fill
Around
Structures
Structural Fill
Beneath Paved
Surfaces
Open Areas
Common Fill
Common Fill
Compaction
12-inch lifts, compacted to 98% maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T-180.
Fill Should not be placed over any in-place soils until those deposits
have been compacted to 98% Modified Proctor.
12-inch lifts, 95% of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T180.
Rubber Tire or vibratory plate compactors shall be used
12-inch lifts, 98% by maximum density as determined by AASHTO T180 or as required by the FDOT Standards.
12-inch lifts, 95% by maximum density as determined by AASHTO T180.
B. Pipe shall be laid in open trenches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere
in the Contract Documents.
C. Excavations shall be backfilled to the original grade or as indicated on the Drawings.
Deviation from this grade because of settling shall be corrected. The backfill operation shall
be performed to comply with all rules and regulations and in such a manner that it does not
create a nuisance or safety hazard.
D. Embankments shall be constructed true to lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the
plans or ordered by the County. Embankments shall be placed in successive layers of not
more than 8-inches in thickness, loose measure, for the full width of the embankment. As far
as practicable, traffic over the Work during the construction phase shall be distributed so as
to cover the maximum surface area of each layer.
02220 - 8
rev: August, 2012
E. If the Contractor requests approval to backfill material utilizing lifts and/or methods other
than those specified herein, such request shall be in writing to the County. Acceptance will
be considered only after the Contractor has performed tests, at the Contractor's expense, to
identify the material used and density achieved throughout the backfill area utilizing the
method of backfill requested. The County's acceptance shall be in writing.
F. One compaction test location shall be required for each 300 linear feet of pipe and for every
100 square feet of backfill around structures as a minimum. The County may determine that
more compaction tests are required to certify the installation depending on field conditions.
The locations of the compaction tests within the trench shall be in conformance with the
following schedule:
1. At least one test at the spring line of the pipe.
2. At least one test for each 12-inch layer of backfill within the pipe bedding zone for pipes
24-inches and larger.
3. One test at an elevation of 1-foot above the top of pipe.
4. One test for each 2-feet of backfill placed from 1-foot above the top of the pipe to
finished grade elevation.
5. Density testing is required for sanitary sewer manholes. Tests shall be staggered around
the manhole within 3-feet of the structure’s outside diameter.
a. First test shall be 1-foot above the structure base.
b. Second test shall be 2-feet above the first test and subsequent tests every 2-feet up
the finished grade.
6. The Contractor shall provide additional compaction and testing prior to commencing
further construction if the County’s testing reports and inspection indicate that the fill has
been placed below specified density.
7. The Contractor shall coordinate testing with the County approved testing laboratory and
shall provide monthly test results to the County in a timely manner during construction
activities. Density testing scheduled subsequent to backfilling activities shall be
coordinated with the County and witnessed by the County representative. Failure by the
Contractor to coordinate or have the County representative present shall result in
rejection of the submitted density testing reports and re-testing at the Contractor's
expense. Density testing reports not submitted in a timely manner shall result in
rejection of the pipe installed and rejection of the density testing reports until such time
that density re-testing is coordinated and repeated at the Contractor's expense as deemed
necessary by the County’s representative.
8. Dewatering systems shall not be removed until compaction/density testing has been
completed.
END OF SECTION
02220 - 9
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 02230
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Layout of work and protection of bench marks.
B.
Protection of structures, trees, or vegetation to remain.
C.
Clearing and grubbing.
D.
Stripping and storing topsoil.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02320 - Trenching, Bedding and Backfilling
B.
Section 02370 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Notify the following utility owners which may have utilities in the project area and
coordinate with them to avoid service interruptions and/or safety hazards:
1.
Bell South
2.
Broadwing
3.
TECO/Peoples Gas
4.
MCI/WorldCom
5.
Brighthouse Networks
6.
Contact Orange County Utilities (OCU) to determine if there are other utilities in the
area and if so, their location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS
Maintain all existing benchmarks, monuments and other reference points; if destroyed,
replacement costs will be deducted from payments due the Contractor.
02230-1
3.02
3.03
LAYING OUT WORK
A.
Base lines, property lines, and easement lines, are shown on the Drawings.
Benchmarks utilized are also shown on the drawings. If the bench marks are
disturbed as a result of construction activities, reestablish such items by utilizing a
Florida licensed surveyor.
B.
Stake out the construction, establish lines and levels, temporary bench marks, batter
boards, centerlines and reference points for the work, and verify all dimensions
relating to interconnection with existing features.
A.
Report any inconsistencies in the proposed grades, lines and levels, dimensions and
locations to the Engineer before commencing work.
D.
Unless otherwise directed by the Owner or Engineer, the Contractor is expected to
contain all construction activities within the right of way, easements, and property
secured by the Owner, as shown on the drawings. At no time shall the Contractor
disturb surrounding properties or travel on surrounding properties without written
consent from the property Owner. Any repair or reconstruction of damaged areas in
surrounding properties shall be repaired by the Contractor on an immediate basis.
All costs for repairs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and no extra
compensation shall be provided.
BURNING
Burning is not allowed.
3.04
3.05
PROTECTION OF TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Existing decorative trees and shrubs within the right-of-way and easements along the
work zones shall remain unless specifically required to be removed as indicated on
the Drawings.
B.
Protect branches, trunks, and roots of trees and shrubs that are to remain. Trees to
remain in the construction area shall be boxed, fenced or otherwise protected before
any work is started; remove boxing when directed by the Engineer. Do not permit
heavy equipment or stockpiles within branch spread. Remove interfering branches
without injury to trunks and cover scars with tree paint.
C.
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all trees and
shrubs. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to follow any ordinance pertaining
to Orange County’s regulations.
RELOCATION OF UTILITIES
A.
Active utilities which do not interfere with the work shall be supported and protected
from damage. After obtaining the Engineer's approval, relocate or remove active
utilities which will interfere with work as indicated. Pay for all damage to active
utilities and for relocation or removal of all interfering utilities which are
02230-2
ascertainable from Drawings, surveys, site inspection or encountered during
construction.
B.
3.06
3.07
Inactive or abandoned utilities and appurtenant structures encountered shall be
removed to avoid interference as directed by the Engineer. Exposed ends of
abandoned lines shall be plugged or capped in a water-tight manner.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Areas to receive clearing and grubbing shall include all areas to be occupied by the
proposed improvements, areas for fill and site grading, and borrow sites. Remove
trees outside of these areas only as indicated on the Drawings or as approved in
writing by the Engineer.
B.
Clearing shall consist of removing trees and brush and disposal of other materials
that encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the work.
C.
Exercise extreme care during the clearing and grubbing operations to not damage
existing structures, pipes or utilities.
D.
Grubbing shall consist of removing and disposing of stumps, roots larger than 2” in
diameter, and matted roots. Remove to a depth of not less than 18” below the original
surface level of the ground.
E.
All combustible debris and refuse from site preparation operations shall be removed
to legal off-site disposal areas.
F.
All necessary pruning to properly complete this project shall be conducted by a
certified arborist.
TOPSOIL REMOVAL
A.
All areas to be occupied by proposed improvements, and borrow sites shall be
stripped of all brush, weeds, grass, roots and other material.
B.
Remove all loamy, organic topsoil suitable for seeding and planting to whatever
depth encountered and store separately from other excavated material. Stockpile in
designated areas and provide for proper drainage. Cover storage piles as required to
prevent windblown dust.
C.
In the event that inadequate space within the site or work area is available for
stock-piling topsoil without interfering with other construction operations, contact
Owner for determination of another storage location.
D.
Dispose of unsuitable topsoil as specified under disposal of debris. Excess topsoil
shall be removed from site unless specifically noted on Contract Drawings.
02230-3
3.08
DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS
All debris (not including acceptable fill material) resulting from site preparation operations
shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to legal off-site disposal
areas.
END OF SECTION
02230-4
SECTION 02250
COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
1.02
A.
Work under this Section includes placement, compaction control, and field density
testing requirements for all earthwork, including pavement sub-grade.
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.
Site Preparation - Section 02230.
2.
Trenching, Bedding and Backfilling - Section 02320.
TESTING
A testing laboratory employed by the Owner shall make such tests as are deemed advisable.
The Contractor shall schedule his work so as to permit a reasonable time for testing before
placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the laboratory informed of his progress. Costs for all
testing shall be paid by the Owner. However, any and all tests which have to be repeated
because of the failure of the tested material shall be paid for by the Contractor and the cost of
any tests shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
All materials and products shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. All fill material
shall be free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material. Excess or unsuitable
material shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FILL PLACEMENT
A.
Compacted material that has been flooded and no longer meets the density specified
shall be removed, replaced and re-compacted.
B.
If the in-place surface has dried, sprinkle with water before placing the next lift. The
surface of smooth lifts shall be scarified before the next lift is placed.
02250-1
3.02
C.
Where fill is required on both sides of structures, fill and compact simultaneously on
opposite sides in even layers. Other filling sequences shall be as specifically
indicated on the Drawings.
D.
Fill shall be spread in uniform horizontal lifts. The material shall be thoroughly
mixed to insure uniform moisture content slightly wetter than optimum but not
greater than five (5) percent above optimum water content as determined by the
Modified Proctor Test, ASTM D1557.
E.
Where cohesive structural fill is used, the moisture content when compacted shall be
within three (3) percent of the optimum moisture content. If the fill does not have a
natural water content which falls within the acceptable range, the Contractor shall
mix, dry, or moisten as necessary.
F.
Place and compact each lift over an entire area prior to placing successive lifts,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
G.
All materials shall be placed in loose lift thicknesses indicated hereafter.
COMPACTION
A.
B.
3.03
General
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, the type of equipment and number of passes
required to obtain the specified degree of compaction shall be determined at
the site, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.
Provide mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory
compaction for granular materials, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
Noncohesive soils shall be compacted with vibrating roller or equivalent; cohesive
soils shall be compacted with sheeps-foot roller, pneumatic tamping, or approved
equivalent, unless otherwise indicated.
FILL LIFT THICKNESSES AND COMPACTION DENSITIES
Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer, place fills in the loose lift
thicknesses indicated hereafter, except when water jetting, and compact to a dry density not
less than the following percentage of maximum dry density, determined by the Modified
Proctor Test, ASTM D1557, unless otherwise noted.
3.04
TESTING
A.
The Contractor shall assist in providing samples for the following field density tests
to insure required densities are being obtained for soil compaction:
1.
One test for each 300 lineal feet or fraction thereof per lift of general
backfilling for pipe work.
02250-2
2.
For Structures, as a minimum, one test per 100 square feet of fill area per lift,
or at least two (2) per structure, per lift.
3.
4.
Two tests for each 10,000 square feet or fraction thereof per lift of
structural fill under slabs, foundations, and pavements.
Testing for each 600 square yard of pavement, for lime rock base layer.
5.
One test per lift for each other type of fill, if so directed by the Engineer.
B.
Tests shall be in accordance with ASTM D1557 or other tests suitable for the
materials being tested.
C.
The Owner will pay for initial field density tests. Subsequent tests and associated
costs necessitated as a result of the initial tests failing to meet specified requirements
will be at the expense of the Contractor.
D.
For bedding and trenching details, see detail sheets of Drawings.
E.
Compact and Backfill excavations and construct embankment according to the
following schedule.
TYPE OF FILL
Trenched Pipe
Bedding
Trenched Pipe
Cover
Utilities Trench
Backfill
Structural Fill
Impermeable Fill
Granular Fill
Granular Bedding
Granular Drainage
Blanket
Granular Filter
Structural Backfill
General Grading
USAGE
LIFT
THICKNES
S
Beneath piping 6"
6”
REQUIRED %
OF MODIFIED
PROCTOR
TEST
95% D1557
Over and/or around piping
6"
95% D1557
"Influence area" beneath
other piping or utility lines
All locations
All locations
Below concrete slab
bedding, foundations, rigid
paving, and excavated areas
adjacent to structures
All other uses
Beneath concrete slabs
Below concrete slabs,
paving, or piping
All other uses
Around open joint or
perforated drain pipes and at
pressure relief valves
See Utilities Trench Backfill
Fill for abandoned or
8”
95% D1557
6”
6"
8”
98% D1557
98% D1557
98% D1557
12"
6”
9”
95% D1557
95% D1557
95% D2049
12"
9"
95% D2049
95% D1557
02250-3
12”
95% D1557
TYPE OF FILL
USAGE
demolished structures
Fill in other locations not
covered herein
Topsoil placement
F.
LIFT
THICKNES
S
REQUIRED %
OF MODIFIED
PROCTOR
TEST
12"
95% D1557
12”
95% D1557
"Influence area" shall be considered the area within lines sloped downward at 45
degrees from the outer edges of paving, foundations, and utility lines.
END OF SECTION
02250-4
SECTION 02320
TRENCHING, BEDDING, AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Trenching for piping and electrical work.
B.
Excavation for demolition of valve vault and associated appurtenances.
C.
Sheeting, shoring and bracing
D.
Bedding, backfilling, and compaction.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02230 - Site Preparation
B.
Section 02240 - Dewatering
C.
Section 02250 - Compaction Control and Testing
D.
Section 02310 - Finish Grading
E.
Section 02370 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.04
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
latest edition:
1.
AASHTO M145 - Classification of Soils
2.
AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Soil Sampling and Testing
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition:
1.
ASTM D1557 - Moisture-Density Soil Sampling and Testing
2.
ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils
DEFINITIONS
A.
Bedding:
Area from bottom of trench to centerline of pipe
B.
Backfill:
Material above the top of pipe to the topsoil, paving sub-grade, or
foundation level.
02320-1
C.
1.05
Influence Area:
the area within lines sloped downward at 45° from the outer
edges of paving, foundations, and utility lines.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Field density testing frequencies:
1.06
A.
One test for each 300 lineal feet or fraction thereof per lift of general backfilling in
the pipeline trench.
B.
One test for each 100 square feet or fraction thereof of backfill around and under
structures.
C.
One test per lift per each change in type of fill.
PRECONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Precondition surveys and vibration monitoring are required for those areas where residential
structures are within 100 feet of the proposed construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
It is intended that previously excavated materials conforming to the following requirements
be utilized wherever possible.
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS
A.
Suitable materials: AASHTO M145 classification A-1, A-3, A-2-4; ASTM D2487
classification GW, GP, SW, SP, SP-SM; unless otherwise disapproved within the
Soil and Subsurface investigation reports. No more than 10% of acceptable materials
shall pass the number 200 sieve.
B.
Unsuitable materials: All materials other than those listed above.
C.
Controlled low strength material ("flowable fill”) shall meet the requirements of
FDOT specification sections 121-1, 121-2, 121-3, 121-4, 121-5, and 121-6, except
the range of acceptable 28-day compressive strength (as defined in 121-3) shall be
revised to 75-100 psi.
SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING
A.
The structural strength and safety of all sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor. Repair any damage resulting from failure to
provide adequate supports.
02320-2
B.
Provide timber work, shoring, bracing, sheeting, and sheet piling where necessary to
retain banks of excavations, prevent cave-in of adjacent ground, prevent
displacement of utilities and structures, and to protect public safety.
C.
Contractor is solely responsible for the design, installation, and operation of
dewatering systems and their safety and conformity with local codes and regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide suitable temporary drainage channels for any water that may flow along or
across the work.
B.
Provide barriers, warning lights and other protective devices at all excavations.
C.
Sidewalks, roads, streets, and pavements shall not be blocked or obstructed by
excavated materials, except as authorized by the Engineer, in which case adequate
temporary provisions must be made for satisfactory temporary passage of
pedestrians, and vehicles. Minimize inconvenience to public travel or to tenants
occupying adjoining property.
D.
Where necessary to place excavated material adjacent to buildings, erect barriers to
keep earth at least 4 feet from such buildings. Earth deposited on lawns shall be
promptly and carefully removed to preserve the turf. All trees, shrubs, etc., shall be
protected. Boring and jacking shall be used, if necessary, except where Engineer
permission is granted to remove trees and shrubs.
E.
If open excavations cross existing rigid surfacing, the surfacing shall be removed for
a width one foot beyond the anticipated edge of the excavation. The pavement break
shall be sawed to insure a straight joint. Surface replacement shall match existing
surfacing except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Where open excavation is
allowed along or across public roadways, excavation, backfill, and surface
replacement shall conform to the requirements of all permits applicable thereto. In
no case shall surface replacement edges bear on less than 12 inches of undisturbed
soil.
PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B.
Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage.
C.
Notify utility companies to remove or relocate utilities that are in conflict with
proposed improvements.
D.
Protect plant life, lawns, fences, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs
from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
02320-3
E.
3.03
3.04
Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or
displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land
surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same.
SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING
A.
Furnish, install, and maintain, without additional compensation, sheeting, bracing,
and shoring support required to keep excavations within the easement provided, to
support the sides of the excavation, and to prevent any movement which may
damage adjacent pavements or structures, damage or delay the work, or endanger life
and health. Voids outside the supports shall be immediately filled and compacted.
B.
Sheeting, where required, shall be driven below the bottom of excavation so the
lowest set of wales and struts are above the bottom of the excavation to allow
necessary working room.
C.
The Engineer may direct in writing that supports in trenches be cut off at any
specified elevation, in which case the Contractor shall be paid for the supports left in
place.
D.
Contractor may leave in place, to be embedded in the backfill of the excavation, any
or all supports for the purpose of preventing injury to persons or property, whether
public or private. However, no supports which are within four (4) feet of the ground
or pavement surface may be left in place without written permission of the Engineer.
No extra payment will be made for supports left in place at the Contractor's option.
E.
All supports not left in place shall be removed in such manner as to avoid
endangering the piping, structures, utilities or property, whether public or private.
All voids left by the withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately filled and
compacted.
F.
The right of the Engineer to order supports left in place shall not be construed as
creating an obligation on his part to issue such orders. Failure by the Engineer to
exercise this right shall not relieve the Contractor from total liability for damages to
persons or property resulting from the failure of the Contractor to leave in place
sufficient supports to prevent any caving or moving of the ground adjacent to the
excavation.
TRENCHING
A.
All excavations shall be made by open cut unless otherwise indicated. Sides of
trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible from the trench bottom to a level
of one foot above the top of the pipe.
B.
Excavation of trenches shall not advance more than 50 feet ahead of completed pipe
installation except as approved by the Engineer.
02320-4
3.05
C.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for indicated flow lines and invert
elevations.
D.
Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below scheduled elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
E.
For pipes or conduit five (5) inches or less, excavate to indicated depths. Hand
excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on
undisturbed soil.
F.
For pipes or conduit six (6) inches or larger, and other work indicated to receive subbase, excavate to sub-base depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to six (6)
inches below bottom of work to be supported.
G.
Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for pressure piping so top of piping is
minimum three (3) feet below finished grade.
H.
Unsuitable excavated materials shall be removed from the site and disposed, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
I.
Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid
bearing for entire body of pipe.
J.
Trench bottoms shall be kept dry, compacted, and stable to a depth two feet below
the bottom of the trench.
K.
Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 9 -12 inch clearance on
each side of pipe or conduit.
L.
If more than one pipe is to be installed in a trench, the pipes shall be spaced a
minimum of one foot apart for pipes 4 inches and larger.
M.
If portions of the bottom of trenches consist of material unstable to such a degree
that, in the opinion of the Engineer, it cannot adequately support the pipe or
structure, the bottom shall be over-excavated and stabilized with approved coarse
granular stabilization material. Depth of stabilization shall be as directed by the
Engineer. The initial 10 tons of stabilization shall be incidental to the Contract.
Compensation will be allowed only for such additional quantities as the Engineer
shall direct in writing to be placed.
N.
Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made.
TRENCH BACKFILLING
A.
Following placement of pipe and inspection of joints, install tamped bedding
material. Place bedding fill materials in layers of 6-inch loose depth.
02320-5
3.06
B.
All bedding and backfill material shall be suitable soils or flowable fill. Backfill
material within 1 foot of pipe and appurtenances shall not contain rock or stone
larger than 2-inch diameter. If a sufficient quantity of suitable material is not
available from the trench or other excavations within the site, provide additional
suitable material or flowable fill.
C.
After completion of bedding and preliminary approval of piping and testing, the pipe
shall be covered to a point one foot above the top of the pipe for the full trench
width, placed in layers of 6-inch loose depth.
D.
Place backfill over pipe. Where trench is within the influence area of roadways,
structures, foundations, or slabs, place backfill in layers of 6-inch loose depth. In all
other areas, place backfill in layers of 8-inch loose depth.
E.
Take necessary precautions not to cause settlement or damage to adjacent slabs,
walls, structures, or foundations. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to
structures, without wedging against structures or displacement of piping or conduit.
MINOR STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A.
Minor structures are defined as manholes, junction boxes, inlets, valve vaults, and
meter vaults. Do not excavate for any structure until that structure is scheduled for
construction. Excavate only to the depth and dimensions necessary for the
construction.
B.
The bottom of all excavations shall be undisturbed earth unless otherwise indicated,
and shall be approved by the Engineer before any subsequent work is started.
C.
Excavations carried below depths indicated on the Drawings without the previous
approval of the Engineer shall be filled with 2500-psi concrete or flowable fill to the
correct level at the expense of the Contractor.
D.
Maintain excavations in good order. If the bearing capacity of the foundation soils is
reduced because the excavation is allowed to remain open prior to commencing
work, the weathered soil shall be removed and replaced with 2500 psi concrete or
flowable fill at the expense of the Contractor.
E.
Do not backfill until new concrete has properly cured, coatings have been approved,
and any required tests have been accepted.
F.
Exercise care during backfilling operations to avoid any puncture, break or other
damage to waterproofing systems, if any. Backfill adjacent to waterproofing shall be
performed in the presence of the Engineer.
G.
Where backfilling is required on both sides of structures, backfill and compact
simultaneously on opposite sides in even layers. Other backfilling sequences shall be
as specifically noted.
02320-6
3.07
3.08
3.09
COMPACTION
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, the type of equipment and number of passes required to
obtain the specified degree of compaction shall be determined at the site, subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
B.
Provide mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory compaction for
granular materials, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Vibratory
compaction is not allowed within 100 feet of existing structures. In these areas,
compaction shall be accomplished by static means only. If compaction difficulties
arise, the Engineer shall be consulted to review and possibly modify compaction
procedures.
C.
Noncohesive soils shall be compacted with vibrating roller or equivalent; cohesive
soils shall be compacted with sheeps-foot roller, pneumatic tamping, or approved
equivalent, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum
moisture content. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,
frozen, or contain frost or ice.
TESTING AND CLEANUP
A.
Provide for testing and cleanup as soon as practicable, so these operations do not lag
far behind pipe installation. Perform preliminary cleanup and grading operations
immediately after backfilling.
B.
All surplus excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Minimum Density Requirement (ASTM D1557) per Section 02250 or AASHTO T180.
END OF SECTION
02320-7
SECTION 02370
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
Designing, providing, maintaining, and removing temporary erosion and sedimentation
controls.
1.02
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
Section 02320 - Trenching, Bedding, and Backfilling
REFERENCES
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction and Roadway and Traffic Design Standards, latest editions:
1.04
A.
Index No. 102 - Baled Hay or Straw Barriers and Silt Fences
B.
Index No. 103 - Turbidity Barriers
C.
Specification 300 - Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses
SUBMITTALS
Provide erosion control plan. Show types of erosion and sedimentation control, locations,
inspection and maintenance plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
EROSION CONTROL
A.
Seeding and Mulching
B.
Sodding
C.
Hydro-seeding
D.
Coarse Aggregate
E.
Prime Coat - Per FDOT Specification 300
02370-1
2.02
A.
Silt Fence - Per FDOT Index No. 102
B.
Floating Turbidity Barriers - Per FDOT Index No. 103
C.
Hay Bales - Per FDOT Index No. 102
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
EROSION CONTROL
A.
Establish erosion control measures within 48 hours of the completion of any clearing
and grading activities.
B.
Erosion control of areas to be paved shall meet the following:
1.
Install sub-grade and base course materials within 48 hours of the completion
of grading activities.
2.
Areas to receive asphalt shall receive erosion control measures no later than
48 hours after acceptance of base course. Temporary erosion control consists
of placement of a bituminous prime coat and sanding the surface. Permanent
erosion control consists of placement of the structural course.
3.
Areas to receive concrete paving shall be either protected with a layer of
FDOT coarse aggregate material or shall be paved within 48 hours of
acceptance of the sub-grade.
A.
Install prior to construction.
B.
Inspect every two weeks during construction.
C.
Remove any sediment build-up.
D.
Repair and reinstall any damaged or missing sediment control measures. Install
additional measures if inspection reveals additional sedimentation control is
necessary.
E.
Rough excavate and grade any proposed stormwater ponds at the start of site grading
activities. Direct site runoff to the ponds to minimize runoff to offsite areas.
END OF SECTION
02370-2
SECTION 02501
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
The work under this Section includes:
1.
Sub-base stabilization and compaction.
2.
Compaction requirements and testing.
3.
Repairs to existing pavement damaged as a result of construction.
4.
Concrete pavement.
Concrete - Division 3
1.02
REGULATORY AGENCIES
All paving products and operations shall comply with Federal, State, and Local Codes and
Regulations.
1.03
SITE COORDINATION
Weather Limitations
Construct concrete surface course only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F,
and the weather is not rainy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
Unless otherwise noted, base material for soil stabilization shall be in place materials
meeting the requirements of FDOT Standard Specifications, 1986.
2.02
SOIL STABILIZATION MATERIALS
A.
Stabilization materials for sub-base stabilization shall meet the requirements of
FDOT Standard Specifications, 1986, Sections 160 and 914.
02501-1
B.
2.03
Stabilization shall be Type C as noted in FDOT Standard Specifications, 160-7.
CONCRETE PAVING
A.
All concrete paving materials shall be in accordance with Division 3 and shall be a
minimum of 4,000 psi with "Fibermesh" added.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150; Normal - Type I.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONCRETE PAVING
A.
Concrete pavements, driveways, walks, curbs and gutters, and other concrete work
for site improvements shall be constructed in accordance with the lines, grades, cross
sections, and details indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Joints
1.
Construction and expansion joints shall conform to details and locations
indicated on the Drawings and specified. Joints shall be straight and
perpendicular to the pavement surface. Transverse joints shall be at right
angles to edges. All joints, except joints made by sawing, shall be made with
an edger having a radius of 1/8-inch maximum.
2.
When an entire section cannot be completed in one day, or when the work
must be interrupted for more than 30 minutes, stop at a transverse point and
form the joint as a keyed joint.
3.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, install 1-inch preformed expansion
joints where concrete abuts buildings. Install 3/4" preformed expansion
joints at maximum 4-foot intervals along concrete walks and where walks
abut buildings or other construction and as shown on the Drawings. Premolded joints which are not to be sealed shall be set 1/8-inch below the
pavement top. Joints indicated to be sealed shall be set 1-inch below the top
of concrete. Joint material for slabs is specified in Division 3, and sealant in
Section 07900.
4.
Joints shall be continuous across the pavement width.
5.
As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without
excessive raveling and before uncontrolled cracking occurs, the Contractor
shall construct expansion joints (to a depth of 1/4 of the slab thickness) at 45foot intervals and at critical locations such as narrow areas, interior corners,
catch basins and other fixed objects within the concrete paving. The
Contractor shall then return and place intervening control joints at spacing
not exceeding 15-feet. Joint construction shall be completed 4-18 hours after
02501-2
paving has been placed. The Contractor shall clean all construction joints
thoroughly.
C.
D.
6.
Joint alignment may be sewed or warped from the normal grid pattern where
necessary to reach points of stress concentration not on normal pattern.
7.
Form offsets by Contractors at radius points to provide continuity in paving
operations must be at least 1'-0" to avoid slivers of concrete that may be
easily broken off.
8.
No joint angle less than 45 degrees shall be constructed between intersecting
joints. Joint dog legs or fillets at radius points shall be at least 1" long.
9.
At the end of each day's pour, the Contractor shall install tie bars (34) at 2' on
center across the slab.
Finishing
1.
Finishing operations shall be performed with a minimum of manipulation
from initial placing to final finishing. Concrete shall be floated and straightedged to true surfaces as shown on the Drawings. Final surface finish shall
be achieved by a burlap drag or by brooming.
2.
Concrete curbs and gutters shall be finished smooth and even while the
concrete is still green. When permitted by the Engineer, patch minor defects
with mortar composed of one part Portland Cement to 2 parts sand. Round
edges of cement curbs with approved finishing tools.
Curing
If the surface of the finished fresh cement becomes dry before curing operations are
started, it shall be wetted with a fine spray. Avoid wash or any marring or injury of
the surface. Protect the tops and edges of the slabs at all times until curing is
completed.
E.
Sealing Joints in Concrete
Upon completion of curing, all joints shown on the Drawings to be sealed shall be
dried and thoroughly cleaned before sealant is applied.
F.
Tolerances in Concrete Surfaces
Upon completion of curing, the surfaces shall be swept clean and then tested for
smoothness. Tests will be done with a 10-foot straightedge along test lines
established by the Engineer. All surface high points exceeding 1/4-inch in 10-feet
shall be ground off to within the specified tolerance. Surfaces containing depressions
which cannot be corrected by grinding adjacent high points shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
02501-3
G.
Protection for Concrete
All traffic shall be banned for a period of at least 7 days from the time the concrete is
placed and until the Engineer has approved the pavement for traffic.
3.02
TESTING
A.
General
Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and will be performed by a
Florida Licensed Soils Testing Laboratory. Submittals of testing data are to be made
by the testing laboratory to the Engineer and to the Contractor in accordance with
Division 1 of this document.
B.
C.
Locations and Frequency of Testing
1.
Compressive Strength Tests: Conform to ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. One
set of four cylinders for each 100 Cubic Yards, or a fraction thereof, of each
strength concrete placed in any one day. Test one specimen at seven days;
test two specimens at 28 days. One specimen shall be retained for 56 days
and tested only at the direction of the Architect.
2.
Slump Tests: Conform to ASTM C143. Perform one test for each load point
of discharge and one for each set of compressive strength test specimen.
3.
Density and compaction of the sub-grade shall be tested in accordance with
Section 02000.
Density and Compaction Requirements
Sub-grade shall be compacted to 98% of the AASHTO T-180 maximum density.
3.03
EXISTING PAVEMENTS AND WALKS REPAIRS AND/OR REPLACEMENT
All repairs and/or replacement of existing pavement damaged as a result of construction
activities shall conform to all applicable provisions of this document. Minimum pavement
repair shall consist of compacted sub-base, 6-inches of 3000 psi concrete and 1-1/2"
asphaltic concrete paving.
END OF SECTION
02501-4
SECTION 02530
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping (non-pressurized sewer systems)
B.
Leakage and Deflection Testing
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
Section 02605 - Precast Structures and Appurtenances
REFERENCES
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) latest edition:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.04
ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3212 - Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F679 - Polyvinyl Chloride Large Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM F1417 - Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using
Low-Pressure Air
AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
AWWA C605 - Underground Installation of PVC Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA C900 - PVC Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 Inch Through
12 Inch, for Water Distribution
AWWA C905 - PVC Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14 Inch Through
48 Inch
SUBMITTALS
A.
Details of joints for all piping 6 inches and larger.
B.
Product data for gaskets for all piping
C.
Product data for all pipe 6 inches in diameter and larger
02530-1
D.
1.05
Piping specialties and installation details.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Exercise care in transporting and handling pipe in order to avoid damage to materials or
coatings. Lifting shall be by hoist or on skids when hand lifting is not feasible. Dropping
shall not be permitted. Store pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. Damaged pipe
shall be replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) SEWER PIPE, JOINTS, AND FITTINGS
A.
PVC sewer pipe shall be Type PSM PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D3034 and
shall be SDR 35 for 4-inch through 15-inch diameter, and ASTM F 679, wall
thickness T-1, for pipe 18-inch through 27-inch diameter.
B.
Joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3212 using rubber gaskets conforming
to ASTM F477.
C.
Fittings shall conform to the same requirements as the pipe. Provide adapters as
required to join PVC pipe to pipe, fittings and equipment of other materials.
D.
Solvent cement shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer
E.
PVC pipe shall be color-coded green, stenciled "Sewer Line" (2-inch lettering on two
sides of the pipe in at least three areas per pipe section).
PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION TAPE
A.
Identification tape shall be an inert plastic film specifically formulated for prolonged
underground use. Minimum thickness 4 mils, width 6 inches, letter size 1 inch.
Lettering shall be continuous.
B.
Tape shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the supply
of this tape. Provide tape with adhesive backing for attachment to pipe.
C.
Identification tape color and lettering shall be "SEWER LINE", black printing on
green background.
PIPELINE WARNING TAPE
Warning tape shall be 6-inch wide vinyl continuous tape, for identification and warning
purposes. It shall be colored green with black lettering coded and worded “CAUTION:
SEWER BURIED BELOW”
02530-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
All lengths of pipe shall be dimensioned accurately to measurements established at
the site, and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing.
B.
Cut all pipe as necessary. Cut sections of pipe shall be reamed or filed to remove all
burrs. The pipe interior and joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before being installed
and kept clean during construction.
C.
Trenching, bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02320.
D.
Establish survey control. Line and grade of pipe shall be checked continuously on a
joint by joint basis.
E.
Pipe shall be laid progressively up grade, with bell upstream, in a manner to form
close, concentric joints with smooth bottom inverts.
F.
Installed piping systems shall be temporarily plugged at the end of each day's work,
or other interruption to progress on a given line. Plugging shall be adequate to
prevent entry of small animals or persons into the pipe or the entrance or insertion of
deleterious materials.
G.
Connections to existing sewer shall be conducted in such a manner that the existing
sewer remains in operation. Provide by pass pumping of existing flows or collect
and legally dispose of existing sewer flow as needed to accommodate construction
while keeping existing sewer in service.
O-RING TYPE PUSH-ON JOINTS FOR PVC PIPE
A.
Before making joint, clean the pipe end and the bell thoroughly. Insert the O-Ring
gasket, making certain it is properly oriented. Lubricate the spigot well with an
approved lubricant; do not lubricate the bell or O-ring. Insert the spigot end of the
pipe carefully into the bell until the reference mark on the spigot is flush with the
bell.
B.
Field cut pipe shall be beveled, have all burrs removed, and shall have a reference
mark applied the correct distance from the end.
C.
On field cut pipe, provide homing mark in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
D.
All pipe laid shall be retained in position to maintain alignment and joint closure
until backfill has been placed.
SEPARATION OF SANITARY SEWER LINES AND POTABLE WATER MAINS
A.
The outside of gravity type sanitary sewer lines shall be separated horizontally a
minimum of six feet from the outside of any existing or proposed water main. The
02530-3
minimum horizontal separation distance between the outside of gravity sanitary
sewer and the outside of water mains can be reduced to three feet where the bottom
of the water main is at least six inches above the top of the sewer.
3.04
B.
Wherever possible, gravity sanitary sewer shall cross under existing or proposed
water mains, so the outside of the sewer is at least six inches below the outside of the
water main. Where it is not possible for the sewer to cross under existing or
proposed water mains, then the sewer can cross over the water main provided the
outside of the sewer is at least 12 inches above the outside of the water main. At the
crossing, the proposed pipe joints shall be arranged so that all water main joints are at
least six feet from gravity sanitary sewer joints.
C.
No water main shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sanitary
sewer manhole.
INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING TAPE
A.
Install identification tape on all pipelines. Place tape as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.05
2-inch through 8-inch diameter pipe - center along top half of pipe
10-inch through 18-inch diameter pipe - place along both sides of the top half
of pipe
20-inch diameter and larger pipe - place on both sides of top half of pipe with
a third strip centered along top half of pipe
B.
Place tape from joint to joint on every section of pipe.
C.
Install warning tape along all pipelines. Install 2 feet above pipe, minimum of 1 foot
below grade.
TESTING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Test procedures shall be approved by the Engineer. All tests shall be made in the
presence of the Engineer and utility. Preliminary tests made by the Contractor
without being observed by the Engineer will not be accepted. Notify the Engineer
and the utility companies at least 48 hours before any work is to be inspected or
tested.
B.
All defects in piping systems shall be repaired and/or replaced and retested until
acceptable. Repairs shall be made to the standard of quality specified for the entire
system.
C.
Sections of the system may be tested separately, but any defect which may develop
in a section previously tested and accepted shall be promptly corrected and retested.
D.
Provide all equipment for testing. Increments on gages used for low pressure air
testing shall be of scaled to the nearest 0.1 psi. Gages, pumps, and hoses shall be in
good working order with no noticeable leaks.
E.
Tests for any exposed piping shall be made before covering and insulation is placed.
02530-4
3.06
F.
Lines tested before backfill is in place shall be retested after compacted backfill is
placed.
G.
All service laterals shall be completed prior to testing, and are subject to the same
testing requirements as the main line.
H.
Sections of piping may be isolated for testing. If shorter sections are tested, test
plugs or bulkheads required at the ends of the test section shall be furnished and
installed by Contractor, together with all anchors, braces, and other devices required
to withstand the pressure without imposing any thrust on the pipe line. Contractor
shall be solely responsible for any damage which may result from the failure of test
plugs or supports.
VISUAL INSPECTIONS AND LEAKAGE TESTING
A.
Prior to inspections and testing, clean all installed lines and manholes.
B.
After backfill has been placed, the Engineer will visually inspect all gravity flow
lines to check alignment and grade. All obstructions shall be removed.
C.
Provide light source and mirrors for lamping of sewer. Any sewer in which the
direct light of a lamp cannot be viewed in either direction, full circle, between
adjacent manholes shall be considered unsatisfactory, unless the line is designed with
horizontal deflections, and shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional
compensation.
D.
Conduct low pressure air testing (4.0 psi initial pressure) of installed sewer piping in
accordance with ASTM F1417. Maximum allowable leakage is 0.0015 cubic feet
per minute per square foot internal surface area being tested. Allowable air pressure
drop during the test is 0.5 psig. Minimum required test time (duration) is:
E.
Pipe
Diameter
(In)
4
6
8
10
12
15
18
24
27
30
Minimum Required Test Duration
1 min 53 sec
2 min 50 sec, or 0.427 x length of pipe tested, whichever is greater
11 min 20 sec, or 6.837 x length of pipe tested, whichever is
greater
greater
greater
02530-5
E.
3.07
Conduct leakage testing of manholes. Plug inverts and fill manhole with water.
Allowable water drop in manhole to be field determined by utility and engineer.
Minimum test duration is 1 hour.
DEFLECTION TESTING
A.
Conduct pipeline deflection testing after the final backfill has been in place at least
30 days.
B.
Maximum allowable pipe deflection is 5%. Measure deflection by manually pulling
a mandrel through the pipe. The minimum mandrel diameter shall be in accordance
with the following:
Sewer Pipe
Nominal Size
(In)
6
8
10
12
15
18
21
24
27
C.
Base Inside Diameter (In)
(ASTM D3034 SDR 35 for Pipe
6” to 15”, ASTM F679 T-1 for
Pipe 18” to 27”)
5.742
7.665
9.563
11.361
13.898
16.976
20.004
22.480
25.327
Minimum Mandrel
Outer Diameter (In)
for 5% Deflection
Test
5.45
7.28
9.08
10.79
13.20
16.13
19.00
21.36
24.06
Deflection testing is considered satisfactory if the mandrel can be pulled by hand
through the pipe being tested. If the mandrel cannot be pulled through the pipe,
replace or correct the pipe and retest until testing is satisfactory. Any pipe removed
or corrected due to failing deflection testing shall also be re-tested for leakage.
END OF SECTION
02530-6
SECTION 02535
SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping and Fittings
B.
Valves and appurtenances
C.
Testing
RELATED SECTIONS
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.04
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber Gasket Joints for D.I. Pipe and
Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 - Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 - Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - Centrifugally Cast Ductile Iron Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 - Compact Ductile Iron Fittings
AWWA C500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewer Systems
AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
AWWA C900 - PVC Pressure Pipe, 4" - 12"
AWWA C905 - PVC Pressure Pipe, 14" - 36"
AWWA C906 - Polyethylene Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA M23 - PVC Pipe Design and Installation Manual
ASTM A307 - Carbon steel nuts and bolts
ASTM A536 - Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM D1248 - Polyethylene Plastics
ASTM D1784 - PVC Compounds
ASTM F1674 - Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with
PVC pipe.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Detailed layout drawings for all pipelines 6 inches and larger.
02535-1
1.05
B.
Details of joints for all piping 6 inches and larger.
C.
Product data for gaskets for all piping.
D.
Product data for all pipe over 6 inches in diameter.
E.
Piping specialties and installation details.
F.
Product data and installation procedures for joint and pipe restraint
G.
Certification of pipe and fittings coatings
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Exercise care in transporting and handling pipe and fittings in order to avoid damage to
materials or coatings. Lifting shall be by hoist or on skids when hand lifting is not feasible.
Dropping shall not be permitted. Store pipe as recommended by the manufacturer.
Damaged pipe and fittings shall be replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
DUCTILE IRON PIPE – N/A
2.02
FITTINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON AND PVC PIPE
A.
Fittings shall be restrained mechanical joint ductile iron, conforming to
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53.
B.
All full body (C110/A21.10) fittings shall be pressure rated to 250 psi, minimum.
All compact fittings (C153/A21.53) shall be pressure rated to 350 psi, minimum.
C.
Fitting joints shall be compatible with the type of pipe in use or specified, e.g.,
flange fittings for flange pipe and mechanical joint for mechanical joint pipe and
push-on joint pipe.
D.
Interior and exterior coatings of ductile iron pipe fittings shall be as specified in
accordance with the latest edition of “Orange County Utilities Standards and
Construction Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of Approved Products”.
2.03
LININGS AND COATINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS – N/A
2.04
JOINTS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS – N/A
2.05
RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS – N/A
2.06
PVC PRESSURE PIPE
A.
Pipe 4 inch through 12 inch diameter shall conform to AWWA C900.
02535-2
2.07
2.08
B.
Pipe 14 inch through 36 inch diameter shall conform to AWWA C905.
C.
Pipe shall conform to ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade I, 4000 psi design stress, and
shall be National Sanitation Federation (NSF) approved.
D.
Pipe shall be class 100 (DR 25) with markings on each section showing conformance
to the above specifications.
E.
Pipe shall be color coded and stenciled (2 inch lettering on two sides of the pipe in at
least three areas per pipe section). Pipe color to be green, stenciled letters to be
black, “Sewer Force Main”.
F.
Pipe Marking: Pipes shall have a manufacturer’s home-mark on the spigot. On field
cut pipe, the CONTRACTOR shall provide home-mark on the spigot in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
PVC PRESSURE PIPE JOINTS
A.
Joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to AWWA C900 or C905
B.
The bell shall be integral with the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating,
conforming to ASTM D3139. The bell of pipe and fittings using push-on joints shall
have an integral groove to retain the gasket in place.
C.
Provide adapters as required to join PVC pipe to pipe, fittings and equipment of other
materials.
RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE
A.
Restrained Joints: Restrained joint devices shall be made specifically for PVC pipe
and meet or exceed the requirements in ASTM F-1674.
B.
Mechanical devices shall be full circumferential contact compression type consisting
of two rings connected across the pipe joint with restraining rods and associated
hardware.
C.
The pipe bell ring shall be a single piece ductile iron retainer ring that slides over the
pipe lain end up to the pipe bell. The pipe plain end ring shall be a two piece ductile
iron restrainer with a serrated-face to contact the pipe.
D.
The restrainer shall be assembled on the pipe with side clamping bolts and nuts. The
design tolerances to which the restrainer is machined will prevent over-tightening
which would weaken or damage the pipe.
E.
Ductile iron rings shall be ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Connecting bolts shall be
in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.
The restraining devices shall be rated for a working pressure equivalent to the
02535-3
devices shall be as listed in of the “Orange County Utilities Standards and
Construction Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of Approved Products”.
2.09
POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT – N/A
2.10
GENERAL VALVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Where required for satisfactory operation of valves, provide valve operators,
extension stems, stem guides, cast iron valve boxes, floor boxes, handwheels,
operator stands, position indicators, and other valve appurtenances. Extension stems
shall be complete with guide bearings, wrench nut, and tee handle wrench. All
machinery stuffing boxes shall be packed with material selected for the service
intended. Maintain all packing until final acceptance by the OWNER.
B.
Manufacturer's name, size, and pressure marking shall be cast into the body.
C.
Valve operators shall be sized for operation at the pressure and flow conditions
required for proper operation.
D.
Manual operators for exterior buried valves shall conform to AWWA C504.
E
Valve shafts shall be one piece extended completely through the disc or stub shafts
extending 1½ times the shaft diameter into the disc. Valve shaft diameter shall be as
required by AWWA C504. Valve shafts shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel. Disc to
stem connections or turned down portions of shafts shall be designed to transmit
shaft torque equivalent to 75% of the required shaft diameter. Bushings shall be of
reinforced Teflon, luberized bronze, or stainless steel. Seals may be preloaded by
packing gland mechanism.
F.
Manual valve operators shall be designed to hold the valve disc in any intermediate
position between fully opened and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. The
operator shall be capable of transmitting sufficient torque to open or close each valve
under the most adverse operating conditions. An indicating arrow shall be provided
to give full closed, full open, or intermediate disc position indicators.
G.
Extension stems shall be provided for all valves in buried locations and in other
locations where indicated on the Drawings.
H.
Extension stems shall be fabricated from solid steel shafting not smaller in diameter
than the stem of the valve or from galvanized steel pipe having an internal diameter
not smaller than the diameter of the valve stem. Stem couplings shall be both
threaded and keyed to the coupled stems and shall be of standard design and
construction. Pipe couplings will not be acceptable.
I.
Stems for buried valves shall extend to within 6 inches of the surface of the ground.
Each extension stem shall be connected to the valve operator with a suitable
universal joint type coupling. All connections shall be pinned. Each extension stem
shall be provided with spacers which will center the stem in a valve box having an
inside diameter of approximately 5 inches, and shall be equipped with a standard
02535-4
AWWA wrench nut as described in AWWA C500, except where handwheels are
indicated.
2.11
LININGS AND COATINGS FOR VALVES
A.
Valves 4 inches and larger shall be lined and coated.
B.
Interior lining for pipes and fittings shall be as listed on the latest “Orange County
Utilities Standards and Construction Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of
Approved Products”.
C.
Exterior coating on buried valves shall be rust inhibiting epoxy primer, followed by a
coal tar epoxy, total minimum dry film thickness of 16 mils, applied at the factory.
D.
Exterior coating of exposed valves, including valves in wetwells and valve vaults
shall be coated in accordance with System 5 of Section 09900. All surface
preparation and coating shall be performed in the field. Paint color to be green.
2.12
SWING CHECK VALVES – N/A
2.13
PLUG VALVES
A.
Standard plug valves shall be of the eccentric design with operating hand wheels,
extension stems, operator, operating nuts or wrenches required for normal operation.
B.
Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or
molded onto the valve body. A permanent plate shall be attached to the valve or
operator indicating serial number, order number, accessories, operator model and
manufacturer, etc.
C.
Eccentric plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated type with 80-percent port areas.
The port area for valves 4 to 20 inches shall have a minimum of 80-percent nominal
pipe diameter. Valves 24 inches and larger shall have a minimum port area of 70percent of nominal pipe diameter.
D.
Minimum pressure rating of valves 4 to 12 inches shall be 175 psi; valves 14 to 72
inches shall be 150 psi. Valve bodies shall be cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B.
Valve ends shall be screwed, flanged or mechanical joint as indicated on the
drawings. Plugs shall be cast iron or ductile iron with neoprene facing and shall be
of the single piece design. The plug shall be of the same configuration for all valves
and shall require no stiffening member opposite the plug for balance or support.
Valve body seats shall have a welded in overlay of not less than 90 percent nickel.
Packing shall be adjustable and safely replaceable. Brushing shall be 316 stainless
steel in both upper and lower journals. The valve should be capable of drip tight shut
off with flow in either direction at the full pressure of the valve. All exposed nuts,
bolts, springs and washers on buried service valves shall be stainless steel.
E.
Valves shall be furnished with replaceable chevron packing, capable of being
repacked with the line under pressure.
02535-5
2.14
2.15
F.
Valves 4 inches in diameter and smaller shall be lever or wrench nut operated.
Valves larger than 4 inches shall be worm gear operated, except where automatic
operation is specified.
G.
Standard plug valves shall be as listed in the latest edition of “Orange County
Utilities Standards and Construction Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of
H.
Valve Testing: Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504. Each
valve shall meet the performance leakage and hydrostatic tests described in AWWA
C504. The leakage test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the
valve. The manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of
design testing as described in AWWA C504.
AIR RELEASE VALVES
A.
Combination air release valves: Valves shall permit automatic release of large
quantities of air from an empty pipe during filling and to permit air to enter the
pipeline when the line is being emptied. The valve shall be capable of discharging
accumulated air in the line while the line is operating under a pressure of 150 psi.
Float material shall be stainless steel. Attachment shall be by means of threaded pipe
connections. Valves shall be vented to the atmosphere by means of threaded piping
and shall discharge into drainage areas.
B.
Air Release Valve: Valves shall be designed to permit manual release of air from an
empty pipe during filling and shall be capable of discharging accumulated air in the
line while the line is in operation and under pressure. Valves shall be capable of
withstanding operating pressures of 150 psi. Valves shall be vented to the
atmosphere. Float material shall be stainless steel. Attachment shall be by means of
threaded pipe connections. Valves shall be equipped with back flushing hose, quick
disconnect coupling, 2-inch shut off valve, ½-inch vent shut off valve and 1- inch
blow off valve.
C.
Wastewater Air/Vacuum Air Release Valve: The valve body shall be conical in
shape and shall be either fusion bonded epoxy coated steel (inside and out) or
stainless steel with a funnel shape lower body to automatically drain sewage back
into the system. All internal parts shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel or nonmetallic plastic materials.
D.
The valves shall be as listed in the latest edition of “Orange County Utilities
Standards and Construction Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of Approved
Products”.
VALVE BOXES
A.
Mains 12 inches and smaller and less than 6 feet in depth shall have cast-iron threepiece valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and
shall extend to such elevation at or slightly above the finished grade surface as
02535-6
directed by Orange County.
2.16
B.
An operating nut extension box shall be used for mains 16 inches and larger or when
any size main has a buried valve with an operating nut 6 feet below finished grade.
Valve boxes shall be one complete assembled unit composed of the valve box and
extension stem. All moving parts of the extension stem shall be enclosed in a
housing to prevent contact with the soil. Valve box assembly shall be adjustable to
accommodate variable trench depths 6 feet and greater.
C.
The stem assembly shall be of a telescoping design that allows for variable
adjustment length. The material shall be galvanized square steel tubing. The stem
assembly shall have a built-in device that prevents the stem assembly from
disengaging at its fully extended length. The extension stem must be capable of
surviving a torque test to 1,000 ft-lb without failure. The barrel shall be screw type
only, having 5-1/4-inch shaft. The upper section shall have a flange at the bottom
having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling and shall be complete with cast iron
covers.
D.
Valve boxes shall have locking lids.
E.
All valve boxes in non-paved areas shall be installed with a valve collar as shown in
the details.
F.
Each valve collar shall utilize a test station box made into the valve collar for
placement of locating wire as shown in the details.
G.
Accessories include valves, collars, tracing wire and valve markers.
H.
All valve box covers shall be painted in an approved manner with the primer paint
rust primer and the finish paint shall be two coats of enamel to color as required
by Orange County.
PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION/WARNING TAPE
A.
Pipe Identification: Each length of pipe shall bear the name or trademark of the
manufacturer, the location of the manufacturing plant and the class or strength
classification of the pipe. The marking shall be plainly visible on the pipe barrel.
Pipe that is not clearly marked is subject to rejection. The CONTRACTOR shall
remove all rejected pipe from the project site within five NORMAL WORKING
DAYS.
B.
Identification/Warning tape shall be an inert plastic film specifically formulated for
prolonged underground use. Minimum thickness 4 mils, width 6 inches, letter size 1
inch. Lettering shall be continuous.
C.
Tape shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the supply
of this tape.
D.
Identification tape color and lettering shall be "SEWER FORCE MAIN", black
02535-7
printing on green background.
2.17
LOCATING WIRE
Locating wire shall be color-coded 10 gauge continuous insulated wire. Color coding shall
be similar to warning tape colors – green for force main.
2.18
ELECTRONIC MARKER BALLS
Electronic marker balls shall be installed on all force mains. Marker balls shall consist of a
passive device capable of reflecting a specifically designated repulse frequency tuned to the
utility being installed. Balls shall be four inches (4") in diameter with a green, high density
polyethylene shell. Marker balls shall be in accordance with the latest edition of “Orange
County Utilities Standards and Construction Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pipe manufacturer shall provide training for Contractor’s personnel on the proper
methods of handling, installing, joining and backfilling of the force main pipe.
B.
All lengths of pipe shall be dimensioned accurately to measurements established at
the site, and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing.
C.
Cut all pipe and drill all holes that may be necessary. Cut sections of pipe shall be
reamed or filed to remove all burrs. The pipe interior and joints shall be thoroughly
cleaned before being installed and kept clean during construction.
D.
All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. Bending of pipe, except copper
and polyethylene, is prohibited. Joint deflection is not permitted.
E.
Any transition from one pipe size to another shall be made with a reducing fitting.
Reducing bushings are prohibited except where specifically indicated on the
Drawings or approved by the ENGINEER.
F.
Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of piping.
G.
Trenching, bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02320.
H.
Valves shall be installed in all pipe ahead of appliances and equipment not furnished
with stops, and elsewhere as required for proper control and isolation of sections of
systems for maintenance purposes.
CONCRETE CRADLES AND ENCASEMENT
Concrete cradles and encasement shall be as indicated on the drawings, or as directed by the
ENGINEER. All concrete cradles and anchors shall be of Class B concrete.
02535-8
3.03
SEPARATION OF FORCE MAINS AND WATER MAINS
A.
Horizontal Separation
Existing and proposed water and sewer force mains shall be separated at least 10 feet
horizontally. Horizontal separation between water mains and sewer force mains
must always be a minimum of 10 feet unless a closer than 10 foot separation has
been specifically detailed on construction drawings which have been approved under
the FDEP permit.
B.
3.04
Crossings
1.
Whenever potable lines cross non-potable lines, the lines shall be installed to
provide a minimum vertical distance of 18 inches measured from the outside
of the potable line to the outside of the non-potable line. The potable line
may be either above or below the non-potable line at crossings. The
constructed pipeline shall be installed so that the pipeline joints are as far
from the crossing as possible.
2.
Reduction in the separation between water mains and force mains is not
allowed unless it has been specifically detailed on construction drawings
which have been approved under the FDEP permit.
PLUGS
A.
Installed piping systems shall be temporarily plugged at the end of each day's work,
or other interruption to progress on a given line. Plugging shall be adequate to
prevent entry of small animals or persons into the pipe or the entrance or insertion of
deleterious materials.
B.
Standard plugs shall be inserted into all dead-end pipes, tees, or crosses; spigot ends
shall be capped; flanged and mechanical joint ends shall have blind flanges of metal.
C.
Plugs installed for pressure testing shall be blind flanges fully secured and blocked to
withstand the test pressure.
D.
Where plugging is required because of contract division or phasing for later
connection, the ends of such lines shall be equipped with a permanent type plug or
blind flange. Installation or removal of such plugging shall be considered incidental
to the work.
3.05
DUCTILE IRON PIPE – N/A
3.06
POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT INSTALLATION – N/A
3.07
BURIED AND EXPOSED VALVES
A.
Buried valves 6 inch diameter and larger shall be set on a foundation of solid
02535-9
concrete or stone not less than 8 inches thick nor less than one cubic foot in volume.
Foundations shall be set on firmly compacted ground.
3.08
B.
The height of the valve and its supporting foundation shall conform to the height of
the connecting pipe. Valves shall be set in a vertical position unless otherwise
C.
Exposed valves shall be installed in a vertical position wherever possible. Unless
otherwise indicated or directed by the ENGINEER, valve stems shall never be below
a horizontal position.
D.
Open and close each valve observing full operation prior to installing successive
lengths of pipe.
AIR RELEASE VALVES
Air release valves shall be installed in the tops of pipes as indicated on the Drawings. The
valve size, location and method of installation shall be indicated on the Drawings or as
directed by the ENGINEER.
3.09
INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING TAPE
A.
Install identification tape on all pipelines. Place tape as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
2" - 8" pipe - center along top half of pipe
10" - 18" pipe - place along both sides of the top half of pipe
20" pipe and larger - place on both sides of top half of pipe with a third strip
centered along top half of pipe
B.
Place tape from joint to joint on every section of pipe.
C.
Install warning tape along all pipelines. Install 2 feet above pipe, minimum of 1 foot
below grade.
LOCATOR WIRE
Install locator wire along all pressurized pipelines 2" and larger. Loop wire into all valve
boxes. Check wire for electrical continuity.
3.11
LOCATOR BALLS
Electronic markers shall be furnished and installed so that a marker will be located at one
hundred foot (100') intervals along the pipeline length. Markers shall also be placed at
changes in direction, tees, or other points of connection and as directed by the Engineer
3.12
TESTING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Test procedures and method of disposal of water shall be approved by the
ENGINEER. All tests shall be made in the presence of the ENGINEER and utility.
02535-10
Preliminary tests made by the CONTRACTOR without being observed by the
ENGINEER will not be accepted. Notify the ENGINEER and the utility companies
at least 48 hours before any work is to be inspected or tested.
B.
All defects in piping systems shall be repaired and/or replaced and retested until
acceptable. Repairs shall be made to the standard of quality specified for the entire
system.
C.
Sections of the system may be tested separately, but any defect which may develop
in a section previously tested and accepted shall be promptly corrected and retested.
Pressure tests shall be made between valves to demonstrate ability of valves to
sustain pressure.
D.
Provide all necessary test equipment. Increments on gages used for pressure pipe
testing shall be of scaled to the nearest 1 psi. Gages and pumps shall be in good
working order with no noticeable leaks.
E.
Tests for any exposed piping shall be made before covering and insulation is placed.
F.
The pressure and leakage test for buried piping shall be made after all jointing
operations are completed and restraints have been in place at least seven days. Lines
tested before backfill is in place shall be retested after compacted backfill is placed.
G.
Sections of piping between valves and other short sections of line may be isolated for
testing. If shorter sections are tested, test plugs or bulkheads required at the ends of
the test section shall be furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR, together with all
anchors, braces, and other devices required to withstand the hydrostatic pressure
without imposing any thrust on the pipe line. CONTRACTOR shall be solely
responsible for any damage which may result from the failure of test plugs or
supports.
H.
All items including valves and controls shall be given a thorough test. The entire
system shall be operated for two days to prove compatibility of equipment and to
achieve proper adjustment for operation. Valves, pipes, tanks, and other items that
are non-operating or occasional- operating shall be tested for ability to meet design
criteria.
I.
If requested by Orange County, a sample of pipe to be tested shall be selected at
random by Orange County or the testing laboratory hired by Orange County.
J.
When the samples tested conform to applicable standards, all pipe represented by
such samples shall be considered acceptable based on the test parameters measured.
Copies of test reports shall be available before the pipe is installed on the project.
K.
In the event that any of the test samples fail to meet the applicable standards, all pipe
represented by such tests shall be subjected to rejection. The CONTRACTOR may
furnish two additional test samples from the same shipment or delivery, for each
sample that failed and the pipe will be considered acceptable if all of these additional
samples meet the requirements of the applicable standards. All such retesting shall
02535-11
be at the CONTRACTOR’S expense.
L
3.13
Pipe that has been rejected by Orange County shall be removed from the site of the
work by the CONTRACTOR and replaced with pipe that meets these specifications.
PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING (PVC AND DI MAINS)
A.
Piping shall be slowly filled with water and all air expelled. Care shall be taken that
all air valves are installed and open in the section being filled, and that the rate of
filling does not exceed the venting capacity of the air valves.
B.
Apply hydrostatic test pressure of 100 psi for 10 minutes and for such additional
period necessary for the ENGINEER to complete the inspection of the line under
test. Do not exceed pipe manufacturer's suggested time duration at the test pressure.
If defects are noted, repairs shall be made and the test repeated until all parts of the
line withstand the test pressure.
C.
Apply leakage test pressure of 100 psi. Maintain pressure at a maximum variation of
5% during the entire leakage test. The duration of the leakage test shall be two hours
minimum, and for such additional time necessary for the ENGINEER to complete
inspection of the section of line under test. Leakage measurements shall not be
started until a constant test pressure has been established. The line leakage shall be
measured by means of a water meter installed on the supply side of the pressure
pump.
D.
No leakage is allowed in exposed piping, buried piping with flanged, threaded, or
welded joints or buried non-potable piping in conflict with potable water lines.
E.
Tested sections of buried piping with slip-type or mechanical joints will not be
accepted if it has a leakage rate in excess of that rate determined by the formula:
1.
AWWA C-600 Ductile Iron Mains
L=
SDP
133,200
2.
AWWA Manual No. M-23 - PVC Main
L=
NDP
7,400
L=
Maximum permissible leakage rate, in gallons per hour, throughout
the entire length of line being tested.
S=
Length of line tested (in feet).
D=
Nominal internal diameter (in inches) of the pipe.
P=
The square root of the actual pressure in psig on all joints in the tested
portion of the line. This actual pressure shall be determined by
finding the difference between the average elevation of all tested pipe
joints and the elevation of the pressure gauge and adding the
difference in elevation head to the authorized test pressure.
02535-12
F.
All apparent leaks discovered within one year from the date of final acceptance of the
work by the OWNER shall be located and repaired by CONTRACTOR, regardless
of the total line leakage rate.
END OF SECTION
02535-13
SECTION 02605
PRECAST STRUCTURES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Precast sanitary and storm structures
B.
Pump Station Wet Wells and Vaults
C.
Precast structure grates, access covers, and accessories
D.
Precast structure linings and coatings
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02320 - Trenching, Bedding, and Backfilling
B.
Section 09871 - Interior Protective Lining for Concrete Structures
REFERENCES
1.04
A.
A48 - Gray Iron Castings
B.
A185 - Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
C.
C216 - Facing Brick
D.
C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry
E.
C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
F.
D3753 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wet wells
SUBMITTALS
A.
All gratings and castings
B.
Precast structures
C.
Coatings and Linings for precast structures
D.
Connections to precast structures
02605-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
GENERAL
A.
Concrete shall have minimum 4000 psi compressive strength.
B.
A crystalline waterproofing admixture shall be added during the mixing cycle of
concrete for the wet well, valve vault and manhole pre-cast structures in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendation. The admixture shall be Xypex Admix C1000-R with red dye, Kryton KIM or an acceptable equal.
C.
Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. Use 4 x 4 - W4 x W4 welded
wire fabric unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Integrally cast steps within precast structures are not allowed.
E.
The date of manufacture and the name or trademark of manufacturer shall be clearly
marked on each precast section.
BASES
A.
Bases shall be one-piece precast base sections consisting of integrally cast slab,
bottom ring section and concrete flow channels. Base sections shall have integral
inverts with gaskets to match the pipe. The Contractor shall be responsible for
determining all invert angles. Provide outlet stubs with joints to match the pipe.
B.
If angles are such that a one-piece base section is not feasible, separate base, ring and
flow channel may be used if approved by the Engineer.
RISERS
A.
Risers shall be precast reinforced concrete per ASTM C478, manufactured using
sulfate resistant cement (ASTM C150, Type II).
B.
Risers shall be 48 inch diameter unless otherwise indicated and shall have a
minimum wall thickness of 5 inches.
C.
Gaskets for seating precast sections shall be cold adhesive preformed plastic gaskets
conforming to FDOT Specification 942-2.
CONES AND TOPS
Unless otherwise indicated, cone top sections shall be precast, eccentric type with 24 inch
diameter top opening conforming to ASTM C478. Provide 8-inch minimum thickness flat
slab tops with eccentric 24 inch diameter opening, unless otherwise indicated.
02605-2
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
2.09
PUMP STATION WET WELL
A.
Base, riser, and top shall be in accordance with details on the Drawings.
B.
All precast construction shall be in accordance with ASTM C-478, minimum wall
thickness of 6 inches.
C.
Wet well liners shall be as specified in Section 09871 - Interior Protective Lining for
Concrete Structures.
D.
Gaskets shall be Ram-Nek type and to be used at all joints on wet well riser.
PUMP STATION VALVE VAULT
A.
Valve vaults shall be precast with concrete and reinforcement conforming to ASTM
C478.
B.
Interior of valve vault shall be lined as specified in Section 09871 - Interior
Protective Lining for Concrete Structures.
MANHOLE FRAMES AND LIDS
A.
Frames and covers shall be gray iron per ASTM A48, Class 30B and shall be US
Foundry Type 227AS, traffic bearing (AASHTO H-20 loading), unless otherwise
noted in the Drawings. Raised lettering on covers shall be “SEWER”, or as detailed
on the drawings.
B.
Castings shall be smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage.
CATCH BASIN INLETS, FRAMES, AND GRATES
A.
Provide cast iron inlets, frames, and grates in accordance with details on the
Drawings.
B.
All frames and inlet grates shall be products of U.S. Foundry & Manufacturing
Corporation, or equal.
C.
All inlet grates shall be secured by chain and eyebolt to the top of the structure.
SANITARY MANHOLE COATINGS AND FINISHES
A.
Interior of manholes which receive force main discharge - integrally attached interior
liner, full height, as specified in Section 09871 - Interior Protective Lining for
Concrete Structures and “Orange County Utilities Standards and Construction
Specifications Manual, Appendix D – List of Approved Products”.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
MANHOLE, INLET AND WET WELL INSTALLATION
02605-3
3.02
3.03
A.
Install required bedding.
B.
Install base to proper elevation and alignment. Handle precast sections by lift rings
only. Remove lift rings and fill all holes with non-shrink grout after erection.
C.
Pour invert immediately after setting first section of barrel.
D.
Prior to setting subsequent barrel sections, apply primer to tongue and groove ends
and allow to set in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Add
additional material on exterior joint if necessary for watertight joint.
E.
Apply coatings and liners as required.
F.
Backfill in accordance with Section 02320.
INSTALLATION OF CASTINGS
A.
Manhole castings to be fully embedded in mortar with adjustment brick courses
placed between the frame and manhole, minimum of 2 courses, maximum of 4
courses. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, type M, brick to conform to ASTM
C216, grade SW, size 3 ½” (w) x 8” 9L) x 2 ¼” (h).
B.
Top of manhole castings in paved areas, including driveways and sidewalks to be
flush with grade. Top of manhole castings outside paved areas to be 2 inches above
grade, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
CHANNELS
Manhole flow channels shall be smooth with carefully shaped bottoms, built up sides and
benching constructed using cement and brick with no voids. Channels shall conform to the
dimension of the adjacent pipe and provide changes in size, grade, and alignment evenly.
Cement shall be Portland Cement Type II only.
3.04
PIPE CONNECTIONS
Special care shall be taken to see that the openings through which pipes enter the structure
are provided with watertight connections. For ductile iron and PVC pipe, connections shall
conform with ASTM C 923, “Standard Specifications for Resilient Connectors between
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes.”
3.05
CLEANING
All newly constructed manholes shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or
foreign matter of any kind shall be free from such accumulations at the time of final
inspection.
END OF SECTION
02605-4
SECTION 02650
RETIREMENT, REMOVAL, SALVAGE, AND DISPOSAL OF
EXISTING PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
Scope of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to abandon,
remove, grout, salvage and/or dispose of existing pipelines as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
1.02
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01550 - Maintenance of Traffic
B.
Section 02220 – Site Demolition
C.
REFERENCES
A.
1.
2.
B.
All work associated with asbestos material shall be performed in accordance with the
standards listed below and all other applicable local, State, or Federal standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.04
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 - Compact Ductile Iron Fittings
Florida Administrative Code, Chapter 17-251, “Asbestos”
National Emission Standards Hazardous Air Pollution (NESHAP), 40 CFR
61, subpart M.
U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), 29 CFR, Part
1926, Subpart Z
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Asbestos Abatement Worker
Protection Rule
Florida Statutes Chapters 255.551 - 255.565 and 469.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Pipeline Abandonment - isolate from active pipelines, remove from service, dispose
of pipeline contents, plug pipeline ends, fully grout and leave pipe in place.
B.
Pipeline Removal - isolate from active pipelines, remove from service, dispose of
pipeline contents, remove pipe, valves, fittings, dispose or stockpile removed
02650-1
materials as required.
1.05
C.
Take Out of Service - see “pipeline abandonment”.
D.
Asbestos Abatement - the removal, encapsulation, enclosure, or disposal of asbestos.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Permits and Licenses: Contractor shall obtain and pay respective fees for all
necessary permits and licensed for performing the Work and shall furnish a copy of
same to the Owner/Engineer prior to commencing the Work. The Contractor shall
comply with the requirements of the permits. A licensed asbestos abatement
contractor or subcontractor registered in the State of Florida shall perform all
removal or retirement of asbestos pipe material.
B.
Notices: Contractor shall issue written notices of planned work to companies or
local authorities owning utility conduit, wires or pipes running to or through the
project site. Copies of said notices shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer.
C.
Quality Control
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide supervision and inspections
to ensure that the existing piping is removed and disposed, salvaged or retired as
designated in the Drawings and as specified herein.
D.
Asbestos Pipe
1.
All removal or retirement of pipe material containing asbestos shall be
performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor or subcontractor.
2.
The asbestos abatement contactor or subcontractor shall contact the Orange
County Environmental Protection Division prior to removal or retirement of
any asbestos material and shall obtain all required permits and licenses and
issue all required notices as required by the Orange County Environmental
Protection Division. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fees
associated with permits, licenses and notices to the governing regulatory
agencies.
3.
The asbestos abatement contractor or subcontractor shall contact the
Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) in Tallahassee and Orange
County, prior to removal or retirement of any asbestos material and shall
obtain all required permits and licenses and issue all required notices as
required by DEP. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fees associated
with permits, licenses and notices to the governing regulatory agencies.
4.
The asbestos abatement contractor shall perform all work in accordance with
all applicable standards in paragraph 1.03.B of this section.
02650-2
1.06
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A.
Grout mixture data
B.
Asbestos abatement contractor/subcontractor licensing (if required).
C.
Asbestos abatement contractor/subcontractor. Provide at least three (3) references for
asbestos abatement work including the name of the project, description of asbestos
abatement work, contact person name, organization, and phone number.
D.
Pipeline grouting contractor/subcontractor licensing and qualifications.
E.
Provide documentation that the contractor or subcontractor performing the asbestos
abatement work has liability insurance with a pollution endorsement against claims
or claim expenses arising from any asbestos abatement project.
QUALIFICATIONS
All work associated with the removal or taking out of service of existing asbestos cement
pipelines shall be performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor or subcontractor
registered in the State of Florida. Licensure as an asbestos consultant or contractor is not
required for the repair, maintenance, removal, or disposal of asbestos-containing pipe or
conduit, if:
A.
The pipe or conduit is used for electrical, electronic, communications, sewer, or
water service;
B.
The pipe or conduit is not located in a building;
C.
The pipe or conduit is made of Category I or Category II nonfriable material as
defined in NESHAP; and
D.
All such activities are performed according to all applicable regulations, including
work practices and training, per OSHA 29 CFR, part 1926.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
FITTINGS
A.
Fittings shall be manufactured of ductile iron, conforming to ANSI/AWWA
C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53.
B.
All fittings shall be Class 250.
CONCRETE GROUT
Provide grout with minimum 28 day compressive strength of 1000 psi, minimum slump of 5
inches, maximum slump of 9 inches. The grout mixture per cubic yard shall be:
02650-3
A.
Cement - 500 pounds
B.
Fly Ash - 500 pounds
C.
Water - 350 pounds (42 gallons)
D.
Sand - 2248 pounds
E.
Air entrainment admixture (Darex or equal) - 3 ounces
F.
Bentonite - 6 pounds (to be mixed with sufficient water to form colloidal mixture,
added at the job site)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
Implement traffic control measures prior to construction activities.
3.02
3.03
PIPE ISOLATION
A.
Where indicated on the Drawings, line stops shall be utilized to isolate portions of
pressurized mains.
B.
In lieu of line stops, the use of existing valves may be used to isolate portions of the
pipeline. Provide a written proposal showing existing valves to be closed to provide
isolation. Review of proposal will be conducted by Engineer and Utility to
determine affected area. In no case will service to residences and businesses affected
by the isolation be allowed to be interrupted by more than 1 hour.
C.
Line stops shall be completed while the pipelines are pressurized.
D.
Line stops shall consist of a line stop fitting, stopping valve, blind flange for
installation after stop is completed, and 1-inch equalization/purge fitting.
E.
Provide additional pipe restraining in the vicinity of the line stop for preventing pipe
movement due to any unbalanced forces created by the line stop and subsequent
cutting and removal of existing pipe adjacent to any line stop.
F.
In the event a pressurized potable water pipeline that will remain in service loses
pressure to less than 20 psi, disinfect the water main and submit bacteriological test
results to the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Satisfactory test
results are required to be submitted for tests conducted on two consecutive days.
PIPE CUTTING AND PLUGGING
A.
Cut all pipe as necessary. Cut sections of pipe shall be reamed or filed to remove all
burrs. The contents of the pipe are to be removed and disposed as allowed by local
rules and regulations.
02650-4
B.
3.04
3.05
Plug ends of pipe to remain in accordance with the following:
1.
Remaining pressurized pipe - install ductile iron plug fitting. Pour concrete
thrust restraint block or implement other restraining measures to prevent pipe
movement.
2.
Remaining non-pressurized pipe - grout ends of pipe or install ductile iron
cap fitting.
3.
Remaining asbestos pipe - grout ends of pipe.
REMOVAL OF EXISTING NON-ASBESTOS PIPE
A.
Uncover and remove existing pipe as shown on the Drawings. Do not remove pipe
until the new pipe is installed and placed in operation.
B.
All buried pipe uncovered and removed from the trench shall be properly disposed
unless the Drawings or this specification section require the pipe to be salvaged to the
Owner.
ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPE REMOVAL / ABANDONMENT
A.
Wherever possible, asbestos cement pipe is to remain undisturbed and abandoned. In
order to abandon pipe, if there are portions that require pipe cutting or breaking, then
the Contractor is to provide a list of proposed cuts and breaks and is to be able to
demonstrate that pipe abandonment is not feasible without performing the proposed
pipe cutting and breaking. Do not proceed with the proposed pipe cutting or
breaking until authorized by the Owner and all required permits have been secured.
B.
Post warning signs around the perimeter of all asbestos work area enclosures and
support areas. Warning signs shall conform to OSHA requirements for size and
wording.
C.
All workers that perform tasks that result in asbestos exposure shall wear respirators
in accordance with OSHA requirements.
D.
Preventing dust dispersion is the primary means of controlling the spread of asbestos.
Whenever practical, the point of pipe cutting and or removal shall be isolated,
enclosed, covered, or shielded from the workers in the area.
E.
Wet methods, or wetting agents, to control employee exposures during asbestos
handling, mixing, removal, cutting, application, and cleanup is required.
F.
Where asbestos containing material is to be removed, the material shall be
thoroughly wetted prior to and during its removal. The material shall be removed
in an intact state unless the Contractor demonstrates that intact removal is not
possible.
02650-5
3.06
G.
Prompt clean-up and disposal of wastes and debris contaminated with asbestos in
leak-tight containers is required. Waste asbestos containing materials shall be
bagged using two layers of 6 mil plastic bags and is to be sealed. The material must
remain saturated until the waste container is sealed.
H.
Removed asbestos containing materials shall be disposed of offsite, and the disposal
is to meet all local and state requirements.
PIPELINE ABANDONMENT SCHEDULE (SCHEDULE OF PIPE TAKEN OUT OF
SERVICE)
Remove or abandon (take out of service) in accordance with information shown on the
Drawings. Abandonment (taking out of service) shall be in accordance with the following
schedule:
Pipes Under Roadways or Less than 5-ft from Edge of Pavement
2 Inch and Larger Pipe
Fully Grout along entire length
Pipe Smaller than 2 Inches
Cap or grout the ends of the pipe
Pipes Outside Roadways (5-Ft or More from Edge of Pavement)
Ductile Iron Pipe (All Sizes)
Asbestos Cement Pipe (All Sizes)
Grout ends of pipe
2 Inch and Larger Size (Other Than Fully grout pipe along entire
Ductile Iron, Asbestos Cement)
length
Pipe Smaller than 2 Inches
3.07
PIPELINE GROUTING
A.
The grouting program shall consist of pumping sand cement grout at pressures
necessary to fill pipe sections.
B.
Introduce grout to lowest end of pipeline in order to displace air and entrapped
material within the pipeline.
C.
Grouting of pipe shall be completed in sections not exceeding 400 feet in length and
shall not be completed in more than 3 stages, with the final stage containing at least
50 percent of the volume to be grouted for the section.
D.
One set of three 3 inch x 6 inch sample test cylinders shall be made for each grout
mix preparation.
E.
The pump used for grouting shall be a continuous flow positive displacement model
with a pugmill type mixing vat having a minimum shaft speed of 60 rpm and
incorporated as an integral part of the equipment. Alternate equipment may be used
subject to the approval of the Engineer. The rate of pumping shall not exceed 6
cubic feet per minute.
F.
Grout shall not be allowed to set up until the line being filled is full and there is still
free flowing grout from the far end of each section.
02650-6
G.
3.08
Provide records at the end of each day’s grouting operations that document the grout
quantity pumped.
RESTORATION
Restore all areas disturbed as a result of pipeline removal and abandonment to equal or better
condition than the existing condition.
END OF SECTION
02650-7
SECTION 02710
STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
Stabilized subgrade for asphalt pavement
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
latest edition:
AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and
18-in Drop
B.
Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition:
Section 914 - Materials for Subgrade Stabilization
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Field compaction density, stability, and thickness testing frequencies of the subgrade shall be
tested once every 300 linear feet of paving per 24-ft wide strip, staggered left, center and
right of centerline. Where less than 300 linear feet of asphalt is placed in one day, provide
minimum of one test for each per day’s construction at a location designated by the
Engineer.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Stabilize the roadbed below the proposed base to provide a firm and unyielding
subgrade.
B.
Provide a finished roadbed section meet the bearing value requirements, regardless of
the quantity of stabilizing materials necessary to be added.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor may choose the type of stabilizing material, Commercial or Local.
B.
Materials may be either shell rock, cemented coquina or shell base sources approved
by FDOT.
02710-1
2.02
2.03
CRUSHED SHELL
A.
Crushed shell for this use shall be mollusk shell (i.e., oysters, mussels, clams,
cemented coquina). Steamed shell will not be permitted.
B.
Material having a plasticity index of more than ten or a liquid limit greater than 40
shall not be used as a stabilizer.
C.
At least 97% by weight of the total material shall pass a 3” inch [90 mm] sieve and at
least 50% by weight of the total material shall be retained on the No. 4 [4.75 µm]
sieve.
D.
Not more than 20% by weight of the total material shall pass the No. 200 [75 µm]
sieve. The determination of the percentage passing the No. 200 [75 µm] sieve shall
be by washing only.
LOCAL MATERIALS
A.
Local materials used for this stabilizing may be soils or recyclable materials such as
crushed concrete, roof tiles and asphalt coated base or reclaimed pavement.
However, no materials that deteriorate over time, cause excessive deformations,
contain hazardous substances, contaminates, or do not improve the bearing capacity
of the stabilized material may be used in accordance with FDOT Specification
Section 914. .
B.
At least 97% by weight of the total material shall pass a 3” inch [90 mm] sieve.
Material having a plasticity index greater than ten or a liquid limit greater than 40
shall not be used as a stabilizer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Prior to the beginning of stabilizing operations, construct the area to be stabilized to
an elevation such that, upon completion of stabilizing operations, the completed
stabilized subgrade will conform to the lines, grades, and cross-section shown in the
plans. Prior to spreading any additive stabilizing material, bring the surface of the
roadbed to a plane approximately parallel to the plane of the proposed finished
surface.
B.
Process the subgrade to be stabilized in one course, unless the equipment and
methods being used do not provide the required uniformity, particle size limitation,
compaction, and other desired results, in which case, the Engineer will direct that the
processing be done in more than one course.
02710-2
3.02
3.03
3.04
APPLICATION OF STABILIZING MATERIAL
A.
When additive stabilizing materials are required, spread the designated quantity
uniformly over the area to be stabilized.
B.
When materials from an existing base are to be used in the stabilizing at a particular
location, place and spread all of such materials prior to the addition of other
stabilizing additives
C.
Spread commercial stabilizing material by the use of mechanical material spreaders,
except that where use of such equipment is not practicable, use other means of
spreading, but only upon written approval of the proposed alternate method.
MIXING
A.
Perform mixing using rotary tillers or other equipment meeting the approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor may mix the materials in a plant of an approved type
suitable for this work. Thoroughly mix the area to be stabilized throughout the entire
depth and width of the stabilizing limits.
B.
Perform the mixing operations, as specified, (either in place or in a plant) regardless
of whether the existing soil, or any select soils placed within the limits of the
stabilized sections, have the required bearing value without the addition of stabilizing
materials.
MAXIMUM PARTICLE SIZE OF MIXED MATERIALS
At the completion of the mixing, ensure that the gradation of the material within the limits of
the area being stabilized is such that 97% will pass a 3½ inch sieve and that the material
does not have a plasticity index greater than eight or liquid limit greater than 30. Note that
clay balls or lumps of clay size particles (2 microns or less) and therefore cannot be
considered as individual particle sizes. Remove any materials not meeting the plasticity
requirements from the stabilized area. The Contractor may break down or remove from the
stabilized area materials not meeting the gradation requirements.
3.05
COMPACTION
Compact the materials at a moisture content permitting the specified compaction. If the
moisture content of the material is improper for attaining the specified density, either add
water or allow the material to dry until reaching the proper moisture content for the specified
compaction.
3.06
FINISH GRADING
Shape the completed stabilized subgrade to conform with the finished lines, grades, and
cross-section indicated in the plans. Check the subgrade using elevation stakes or other
means approved by the Engineer.
02710-3
3.07
3.08
CONDITION OF COMPLETED SUBGRADE
A.
After completing the stabilizing and compacting operations, ensure that the subgrade
is firm and substantially unyielding to the extent that it will support construction
equipment and will have the bearing value required by the plans.
B.
Remove all soft and yielding material, and any other portions of the subgrade which
will not compact readily, and replace it with suitable material so that the whole
subgrade is brought to line and grade, with proper allowance for subsequent
compaction.
MAINTENANCE OF COMPLETED SUBGRADE
After completing the subgrade, maintain it free from ruts, depressions, and any damage
resulting from the hauling or handling of materials, equipment, tools, etc. The Contractor is
responsible for maintaining the required density until the subsequent base or pavement is in
place including any repairs, replacement, etc., of curb and gutter, sidewalk, etc., which might
become necessary in order to recompact the subgrade in the event of underwash or other
damage occurring to the previously compacted subgrade. Perform any such recompaction at
no expense to the Owner. Construct and maintain ditches and drains along the completed
subgrade section.
3.09
When proper moisture conditions are attained, compact the material to not less than 98% of
maximum density determined by AASHTO T180, and a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio
of 40.
END OF SECTION
02710-4
SECTION 02717
SOIL CEMENT BASE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
Base course using a combination of soil, Portland cement, water
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
latest edition:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, latest implemented edition:
1.
2.
C.
1.03
AASHTO T 88 - Particle Size Analysis of Soils
AASHTO T 89 - Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T 90 - Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
AASHTO T 135 - Wetting and Drying Test of Compacted Soil-Cement
Mixtures
AASHTO T 267 - Determination of Organic Content in Soils by Loss On
Ignition
Specification Section 916 - Bituminous Materials
Specification Section 921 - Portland Cement and Blended Cement
FDOT Florida Method of Test for Laboratory Design of Soil-Cement Mixtures, FM
5 – 520.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
For density and thickness determination, a LOT is defined as 2500 square yards of
base plus any small section of base at the end of a day's operation or small irregular
areas as part of the preceding LOT. Areas such as an intersection, crossover, ramp,
etc., will be considered as a separate LOT. The Engineer may include small irregular
areas as part of another LOT. No LOT shall include more than 3500 square yards of
base.
B.
Perform five density tests at locations randomly selected by the Engineer within each
LOT.
C.
For thickness evaluation, perform five thickness measurements at locations randomly
selected by the Engineer within each LOT. Three inch minimum diameter test holes
are required to determine the thickness.
02717-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Cement shall be Portland Cement, Type I, II, III, or Type IP or Type IS per FDOT
Specification Section 921.
B.
Use water that is free from substances deleterious to hardening of the soil-cement
mixture.
C.
Curing Material shall be per FDOT Specification Section 916.
D.
Emulsified Asphalt shall be Grade SS, RS, or MS as approved by the Engineer.
Dilute as recommended by the manufacturer.
E.
Soils for base course construction shall meet the following requirements:
Physical Characteristic
Organic Material
Total Clay and Silt Content
(Minus No. 200 Sieve)
Plastic Index
Liquid Limit
Acceptance Level
Maximum 5%
Maximum 25%
Testing Standard
AASHTO T 267
AASHTO T 88
Maximum 10%
Maximum 25%
AASHTO T 90
AASHTO T 89
Soil Gradation Requirements (Per AASHTO T 88)
Passing 2 inch sieve
Minimum 100%
Passing No. 4 sieve
Minimum 55%
Passing No. 10 sieve
Minimum 37%
2.02
PROPORTIONING OF MIX
A.
Submit for approval a design mix for the soil proposed for use in soil-cement
construction prepared by a testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. With the
design mix submittal, include the results of tests run to verify that the soil meets the
requirements, results of tests used to establish the cement content, and a final design
laboratory sample. Submit the design mix to the Engineer for approval a minimum
of 60 calendar days prior to beginning of soil-cement construction for Brush Loss
Design Method or 15 calendar days prior to beginning of soil-cement construction
for Strength Design Method. Express the cement as a percentage of the dry unit
weight of the soil. For mixed-in-place construction, the use a rate of application of
cement based on the maximum density of the soil, determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 99 and rounded up to the nearest pound per cubic yard.
B.
When proportioning the soil-cement mixture in accordance with strength design,
determine the minimum cement content using FM 5-520. Achieve the design
compressive strength specified in seven days. Ensure that the cement content is not
less than 5% by weight, except as noted below.
02717-2
C.
When proportioning the soil-cement mixture in accordance with Brush Loss Design
criteria, determine the minimum cement content in accordance with AASHTO T 135.
Ensure that the cement content is not less than 5% by weight, except as noted below.
Ensure that the soil-cement loss at the completion of 12 cycles of testing conforms
to the following limits:
Soil Group
AASHTO Soils Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3
AASHTO Soils Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, and A-5
AASHTO Soils Groups A-6 and A-7
Limits
Not over 14%
Not over 10%
Not over 7%
D.
When proportioning of soil-cement mixture by the Brush Loss Design Criteria
Method and processing by Central-Plant-Mixing where the requirements noted below
are met, the Engineer will not require strength testing of field specimens. Verify the
properties of the parent material during the processing, on a random frequency, to
ensure that the final mix has not changed from the original design. Provide the
Engineer a printout of each day's production that shows proportioning of the mixture
meets the approved Brush Loss Design, including cement.
E.
Do not apply the minimum 5% cement content specified above if obtaining the soil
material used in producing a soil-cement mixture from a commercial source (not to
exclude recycled materials) where soil properties are consistently uniform, and if
processing the mixture in a central mix plant that automatically weighs components
and automatically records the weight of each component on a printed ticket, tape, or
other digital record.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
Use any machine, combination of machines, or equipment that is in good, safe working
condition and that will produce results meeting the requirements for cement application, soil
pulverization, mixing water application, compaction, finishing, and curing, as required
herein. Use compaction equipment that will produce the required density.
3.02
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.
Before beginning base construction operations, complete the subgrade. Ensure that
the subgrade is firm enough to support the equipment used in the soil-cement base
operations without appreciable distortion or displacement. Remove any unsuitable
material, and replace it with suitable material.
B.
When constructing the base with central-plant-mixed soil-cement, grade and shape
the subgrade to the lines, grades, and typical cross-section shown in the plans.
Ensure that the subgrade is moist but not ponded at the time of placing the mixed
base course material.
02717-3
3.03
BASE SOIL FOR MIXED-IN-PLACE PROCESSING
Grade and shape the area over which the base is to be constructed to an elevation which will
provide a base in conformance with the grades, lines, thickness, and typical cross-sections
shown on the plans. Remove all roots, sticks, and other deleterious matter during processing.
3.04
3.05
PROCESSING OF SOIL-CEMENT MIXTURE
A.
Mix the soil, cement, and water either by mixed-in-place or central-plant-mix
methods.
B.
Do not allow the percentage of moisture in the soil at the time of cement application
to exceed the quantity that will permit a uniform and intimate mixture of soil and
cement during mixing operations.
C.
During seasons of freezing temperature, do not spread any cement or soil-cement
mixture unless the ambient temperature is at least 40 degrees F in the shade.
D.
At the completion of moist-mixing, pulverize the soil so that 100% passes a 1.5 inch
sieve, 95 to 100% passes the 1 inch sieve and a minimum of 80% passes a No. 4
sieve, exclusive of gravel, shell, or stone.
E.
Complete operations within a period of four hours starting at the time mixing
commences.
MIXED-IN-PLACE METHOD
A.
Where feasible, process the entire width of the base in a single operation. Uniformly
spread the design quantity of cement on the soil at the required rate of application, by
means of an approved method. Replace spread cement that becomes displaced
before starting mixing. Check the uniformity of spread rate by:
1.
2.
Weight of cement spread/square yards covered for a short trial section that is
between 100 and 300 feet in length or
Use of a square yard cloth/box.
B.
After applying the cement, begin mixing within 60 minutes. Initially mix the soil and
cement until the cement has sufficiently blended with the soil to prevent formation of
cement balls when applying additional water; then add water if necessary, and re-mix
the soil-cement mixture. Do not perform windrow mixing.
C.
Process up to the full depth in one course, provided the distribution of cement and
water and the specified density are satisfactory to the Engineer. If not, construct
courses of such thickness to obtain satisfactory results. Make provisions to achieve
adequate bonding between courses.
D.
Immediately after mixing of the soil and cement, add any additional water that is
necessary. If the moisture content exceeds that specified, manipulate the soil-cement
mixture by re-mixing or blading as required to reduce the moisture content to within
02717-4
the specified range. Avoid excessive concentrations of water. Continue mixing
during and after applying water until obtaining a uniform and intimate mixture of
soil, cement, and water.
E.
3.06
3.07
As an alternative to the above described procedure, the use an approved machine that
will blend the cement and the soil and then add and mix-in any additional water that
is necessary.
CENTRAL-PLANT-MIXED METHOD
A.
Mix the soil, cement, and water in a pugmill of either the batch or continuous-flow
type. Equip the plant with feeding and metering devices that will accurately
proportion the soil, cement, and water in the quantities specified. Mix soil and
cement sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when adding additional
water. Continue mixing until obtaining a uniform and intimate mixture of soil,
cement, and water.
B.
Haul the mixture to the roadway in trucks equipped with protective covers. Place
the mixture on the moistened subgrade in a uniform layer with suitable equipment.
Do not allow more than 60 minutes to elapse between placing of soil-cement in
adjacent passes of the spreader at any location, except at construction joints. Ensure
that the layer of soil-cement is uniform in thickness and surface contour, and in such
quantity that the completed base will conform to the required grade and crosssection. Do not perform windrow mixing.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Prior to joining any previously constructed section of base, form a vertical construction joint
by cutting back into the completed work to form a true vertical face of acceptable soilcement to the full depth of the base course. Moisten the vertical face, if directed, prior to
placing new material against it.
3.08
SHAPING AND FINISHING
A.
Prior to final compaction, shape the surface of the soil-cement to the required lines,
grades, and cross-section. In all cases where adding soil-cement mixture to any
portion of the surface, lightly scarify the surface with a spring tooth harrow, spike
drag, or other approved device to uniformly loosen the surface prior to adding
material and prior to the initial set of the soil-cement mixture. Compact the resulting
surface to the specified density. Continue rolling until all rutting ceases and until the
base conforms to the density requirements.
B.
Ensure that the surface material is moist but not ponded, and maintained at not less
than 2% below its specified optimum moisture content, during finishing operations.
Perform surface compaction and finishing in such a manner as to produce a smooth
dense surface, free of compaction planes, construction cracks, ridges, and loose
material.
02717-5
C.
3.09
3.10
3.11
If the time limits specified above are exceeded, either remove and replace the base or
leave the base undisturbed for a period of seven days, after which, the Engineer will
examine it to determine its suitability. If found unsuitable, remove and replace the
base at no additional cost to Owner.
COMPACTION
A.
Begin compacting the soil-cement mixture immediately after mixing or placing. Do
not allow more than 30 minutes to elapse between the last pass of moist-mixing or
spreading and the start of compaction of the soil-cement mixture at a particular
location.
B.
Determine the optimum moisture content and the maximum density in the field by
the methods prescribed in AASHTO T 134 on representative samples of the soilcement mixture obtained immediately after the initial mixing. Determine the density
for each day's run or change of material.
C.
Uniformly compact the loose material to meet the density requirements specified
below. During compaction operations, the reshape the material to obtain required
grade and cross-section.
PROTECTION AGAINST DRYING
A.
While finishing and correcting the surface, keep the surface of the base continuously
moist by sprinkling it as necessary until applying the emulsified asphalt curing
material. As soon as practicable, protect the base from drying for seven days by
applying the emulsified asphalt at the rate of 0.20 to 0.25 gallon of the diluted
mixture per square yard. Provide complete coverage without excessive runoff.
While applying the bituminous material, ensure that the soil-cement surface is dense,
free of all loose and extraneous material, and contains sufficient moisture to prevent
excessive penetration of the bituminous materials.
B.
If it is necessary to allow construction equipment or other traffic to use the completed
base before the bituminous material has cured sufficiently to prevent pickup or
displacement, sand the bituminous material, using approximately 10 lbs of clean sand
per square yard. Do not use cover material containing organic acids or other
compounds detrimental to the soil-cement base.
C.
Maintain the curing material during the seven day protection period.
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
Do not allow traffic on the base subsequent to completion of the finishing operations for a
minimum period of 72 hours. As an exception to this requirement, allow equipment
necessary for correction of surface irregularities, application of water, and application of
curing materials on the base, provided that the tire contact pressures of such equipment do
not exceed 45 psi. Under special conditions (i.e. low speed limit, low traffic volume, urban
conditions), the Engineer may waive the 72-hour period.
02717-6
3.12
3.13
3.14
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain the base to a true and satisfactory surface until the wearing surface is
constructed. If the Engineer requires any repairing or patching, extend the repair or
patch to the full depth of the base, and make them in a manner that will ensure
restoration of a uniform base course in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications. Do not repair the base by adding a thin layer of soil-cement or
concrete to the completed work. Make full depth repairs to small or minor areas,
such as at manholes, inlets, or the like, with Class I concrete.
B.
For patching of deficient areas less than 100 square feet and less than 1 inch in depth,
correct the areas using Type S-III Asphalt Concrete. For patching of deficient areas
less than 100 square feet and greater than 1 inch in depth, remove the areas to full
depth, and replace them using Asphalt Base Course Type 3, Type S Asphalt
Concrete, or soil-cement.
DENSITY TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
As soon as possible after completing compaction, the perform field density testing to
ensure that the required density is 98% of the maximum density as determined by
methods prescribed in AASHTO T 134.
B.
If an individual test value within a LOT is less than 94% of the maximum density,
determine the extent of this deficiency by performing density tests using a 5 foot grid
pattern until a test value of 95% or greater is located in all directions. Remove the
delineated area of base, and replace it with base meeting all requirements of this
section, at no cost to the Owner.
C.
As an exception to the foregoing, if three or more of the original five individual test
values within a LOT are less than 94% of the maximum density, the Engineer will
reject the entire LOT, and the Contractor shall remove all base within the LOT and
replace it with base meeting all requirements of this Section, at no expense to the
Owner.
SURFACE FINISH ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
After compacting and finishing, and not later than the beginning of the next calendar day
after constructing of any section of base, measure the surface with a template cut to the
required cross-section and with a 15 foot straightedge laid parallel to the centerline of the
road. Correct all irregularities greater than 1/4 inch to the satisfaction of the Engineer with a
blade adjusted to the lightest cut which will ensure a surface that does not contain
depressions greater than 1/4 inch under the template or the straightedge. The Engineer may
approve other suitable methods for measurement. In the testing of the surface, do not take
the measurements in small holes caused by the blades pulling out individual rocks. Dispose
the material removed.
3.15
THICKNESS ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Construction tolerances for thickness are as follows:
02717-7
Central-Plant-Mixed Processing
Mixed-in-Place Processing
3.16
Allowable Deviation From Plan Thickness
-1 inch
+/- 1 inch
B.
When any thickness measurement is outside the construction tolerance, the Engineer
will take additional thickness measurements at 10 foot intervals parallel to the
centerline in each direction from the measurement which is outside the construction
tolerance until a measurement in each direction is within the construction tolerance.
C.
The Engineer will evaluate an area of base found to have a thickness outside the
construction tolerance and, at its discretion will require the Contractor to remove and
replace it with acceptable base of the thickness shown in the plans, at no expense to
the Owner.
STRENGTH TESTING OF FIELD SPECIMENS
A.
Check the adequacy of cement content and uniformity of distribution of cement
within the base by sampling and testing the completed mix.
B.
Take samples at the project site just prior to final compaction and determine a
minimum of two Strength Test Values (STV) each day, with at least one STV per
each 2,500 square yards mixed.
C.
Ensure that each STV is the average strength value of a minimum of three individual
specimens, and for discarding any obvious outliers.
D.
Take representative samples of the mixed soil-cement material for determining an
STV just prior to final compaction, recording the sample location, and ensuring that
the samples are large enough to mold three or more compressive strength test
specimens as prescribed in FM 5-520.
E.
Mold these test specimens at the field moisture content and cast the individual test
specimens as close to identical as possible
F.
Rest the molds, during compaction of strength test specimens, on a 200 pound
concrete block, or the equivalent thereto, that the Contractor provides
G.
Gently extrude these test specimens from the compaction mold, and carefully placing
them in a moist curing environment (not in direct contact with ponded or moving
water) such as a tightly closed container under wet cloth or burlap at locations where
they will not be disturbed.
H.
Continue the initial field cure for at least 24 hours, and if after 24 hours it is
determined that the specimens have not gained sufficient strength to be moved
without probable damage, continue field curing until the Engineer determines that
each specimen can be safely moved without probable damage occurring. When the
Engineer determines that the specimens can be safely moved, transport them to the
laboratory where they will be cured, as described in the design procedure (FM 502717-8
520), to seven days of age. At seven days of age, test the individual specimen for
determination of compressive stress and ensure that the loading procedure and rates
are the same, as described in FM 5-520.
I.
If an STV is less than 60% of the Laboratory Design Strength, remove and replace
the material represented by the STV, at no expense to the Department.
J.
When the LOT average thickness of soil-cement base is deficient by more than 1
inch and the judgment of the Engineer is that the area of such deficiency should not
be removed and replaced, payment for the area retained will be at 50%.
K.
When multiple deficiencies occur, the applicable percent payment schedule will be
applied to the LOT of base that is identified with each deficiency. The penalty for
each deficiency will be applied separately to the unit price.
END OF SECTION
02717-9
SECTION 02740
PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Asphalt pavement, including binder and surface course.
B.
Repair and restoration of existing paving, curbing, driveways, and sidewalks.
C.
Paving and temporary paving timing requirements.
REFERENCES
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, 2000 and 2004 editions.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.03
Section 320 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - Plant, Methods, and Equipment (2000 and
2004 Editions)
Section 330 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - General Construction Requirements (2000
and 2004 Editions)
Section 331 - Type S Asphalt Concrete (2000 Edition)
Section 334 - Superpave Asphalt Concrete (2004 Edition)
Section 901 - Coarse Aggregate (2000 and 2004 Editions)
Section 902 - Fine Aggregate (2000 and 2004 Editions)
Section 916 - Bituminous Materials (2000 and 2004 Editions)
Section 917 - Mineral Filler (2000 and 2004 Editions)
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit proposed design mix for review and approval. Submit for each proposed
mix the following: Gradation analysis; Grade of asphalt cement used; Marshall
Stability in pounds flow.
B.
Provide a single percentage of asphalt by weight of total mix intended to be
incorporated in the completed mixture, shown to the nearest 0.1%. For structural
mixes (S-1, S-3) establish the optimum asphalt content at a level corresponding to a
minimum of 4.5% air voids. For FC-3 mixes, establish optimum asphalt content at a
level corresponding to a minimum of 5.0% air voids.
C.
Provide the laboratory density of the asphalt mixture for all mixes except OpenGraded Friction Courses.
D.
Identify source and description of the materials to be used.
E.
Provide certification that the mix design conforms to specification requirements.
02740-1
1.04
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Field compaction density and thickness testing frequencies of the asphalt shall be
tested once every 300 linear feet of paving per 24-ft wide strip, staggered left, center
and right of centerline. Where less than 300 linear feet of asphalt is placed in one
day, provide minimum of one test for each per day’s construction at a location
designated by the Engineer.
B.
Asphalt extraction gradation shall be tested from grab samples collected once every
1800 square yards of asphalt delivered to the site, or a minimum of once per day.
Obtain the results in a timely manner (no later than the end of the day) so that
adjustments can be made if necessary.
C.
On initial use of a Type S or FC-3 mix design at a particular plant, as a minimum,
run an additional extraction gradation analysis if more than 500 tons [450 metric
tons] of mixture are produced on the first day of production.
D.
Tolerances for Quality Control Tests (Extraction Gradation Analysis) shall be in
accordance with FDOT Specification Section 331.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply prime and tack coats when ambient or base surface temperature is above 40oF,
and when temperature has been above 35oF for 12 hours immediately prior to
application. Do not apply when base is wet, contains excess moisture, or during rain.
B.
Construct asphaltic concrete paving when ambient temperature is above 45oF.
C.
Do not spread the mixture when the wind is blowing to such an extent that proper
and adequate compaction cannot be maintained or when sand, dust, etc., are being
deposited on the surface being paved to the extent that the bond between layers will
be diminished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
This project requires Type S Asphalt Concrete (Type S-1 or S-3). The equivalent
fine Type SP (Superpave) Asphalt Concrete mixture (Traffic Level C) meeting the
requirements of FDOT Specification Section 334 may be selected as an alternate at
no additional cost to the Owner. The equivalent mixes are as follows:
1.
2.
Type S-1:
Type S-3:
Type SP-12.5
Type SP-9.5
Asphalt plant and equipment shall meet the requirements in FDOT
Specification Section 320.
02740-2
2.02
AGGREGATE
A.
Coarse Aggregate, Stone, Slag or Crushed Gravel shall meet the requirements in
FDOT Specification Section 901.
B.
Fine Aggregate shall meet the requirements in FDOT Specification Section 902.
C.
Aggregate gradation shall meet the following:
Type
Bituminous Concrete Mixtures
(Gradation Design Range)
Total Aggregate Passing Sieves1
No. 10
No. 40 No. 80 No. 200
3/4 inch 1/2 inch 3/8 inch No. 4
[19.0 [12.5 mm] [9.5 [4.75 mm] [2.0 mm] [425 µm] [180 [75 µm]
µm]
mm]
mm]
100
88-98
75-93
47-75
31-53
19-35
7-21
2-6
100
88-98
60-90
40-70
20-45
10-30
2-6
100
0-12
100
55-90
0-12
70-100
30-70
20-60
10-40
2-10
S-14
S-34
ABC-1
ABC-2
ABC32
FC-23
100
85-100
10-40
4-12
2-5
4
FC-3
100
88-98
60-90
40-70
20-45
10-30
2-6
1
In inches [mm] or sieves [µm].
2
100% passing 1 1/2 inch [37.5 mm] sieve.
3
The Engineer may increase the design range for the No. 10 [2.00 mm] sieve for lightweight
aggregates.
4
The Engineer may retain up to 1% on the maximum sieve size.
D.
Use clean aggregate containing no deleterious substances. Do not use coarse or fine
aggregate which contains more than 0.5% of phosphate.
E.
In laboratory tests, and for the purpose of proportioning the paving mixture, consider
all material passing the No. 10 [2.00 mm] sieve and retained on the No. 200 [75 µm]
sieve as fine aggregate, and the material passing the No. 200 [75 µm] sieve as
mineral filler.
F.
Do not use any screenings in the combination of aggregates containing more than
15% of material passing the No. 200 [75 µm] sieve. When two screenings are
blended to produce the screening component of the aggregate, one of such screenings
may contain up to 18% of material passing the No. 200 [75 µm] sieve, as long as the
combination of the two does not contain over 15% material passing the No. 200 [75
µm] sieve. Screenings may be washed to meet these requirements.
02740-3
2.03
ASPHALT CEMENT
A.
Superpave PG Asphalt Binder or Recycling Agent shall meet the requirements in
FDOT Specification Section 916.
B.
Mineral Filler shall meet the requirements in FDOT Specification Section 917.
C.
Marshall design mix shall be in accordance with the following:
Marshall Design Properties For Bituminous Concrete Mixes
Minimum Flow* Minimum Air
VFA Voids
Minimum
Mix
Marshall
(0.01
VMA
Voids Effective Asphalt Filled with
Type
Stability (lbs.) in)
(%)
(%)
Content (%)
Asphalt (%)
S-1
1,500
8-13
14.5
4-5
**
65-75
S-3
1,500
8-13
15.5
4-6
**
65-75
ABC-1
500
7-15
15
5-16
6.0
ABC-2
750
7-15
15
5-14
5.5
ABC-3
1,000
8-13
14
4-7
**
65-78
FC-2
FC-3
1,500
8-13
15.5
4-6
**
65-75
*The maximum Flow value during production shall not exceed one point more than
shown in the Table.
**The ratio of the percentage by weight of total aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve to
the effective asphalt content expressed as a percentage by weight of total mix shall be in
the range of 0.6 to 1.2.
2.04
BITUMINOUS MIXTURE
Use a bituminous mixture composed of a combination of aggregate (coarse, fine or mixtures
thereof), mineral filler, if required, and bituminous material. Ensure that not more than 20%
by weight of the total aggregate used is silica sand or local materials as defined in FDOT
Specification Section 902. Size, grade and combine the several aggregate fractions in such
proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading and physical properties of the
verified mix design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Meet the general construction requirements specified in FDOT Specification Section
330.
B.
Spread the mixture only when the surface upon which it is to be laid has been
previously prepared, is intact, firm, and properly cured, and is dry. Do not spread
mixture that cannot be finished and compacted during daylight hours.
C.
Deliver the asphalt cement to the asphalt plant at a temperature not to exceed 350F
and equip the transport tanks with sampling and temperature sensing devices
02740-4
meeting the requirements of FDOT. Maintain the asphalt cement in storage within a
range of 230 to 350F in advance of mixing operations. Maintain constant heating
within these limits, and do not allow wide fluctuations of temperature during a day's
production.
D.
3.02
3.03
Produce a homogeneous mixture, free from moisture and with no segregated
materials, that meets all specification requirements for the mixture, including
compliance with the Marshall Properties. Also apply these requirements to all mixes
produced by the drum mixer process and all mixes processed through a hot storage
or surge bin, both before and after storage.
PREPARATION OF APPLICATION SURFACES
A.
Prior to the laying of the mixture, clean the surface of the base or pavement to be
covered of all loose and deleterious material by the use of power brooms or blowers,
supplemented by hand brooming where necessary.
B.
Where an asphalt mix is to be placed on an existing pavement or old base which is
irregular, and wherever the plans indicate, bring the existing surface to proper grade
and cross-section by the application of patching or leveling courses.
C.
Where an asphalt mix is to be placed over a newly constructed surface treatment,
sweep and dispose of all loose material from the paving area.
D.
Paint all structures which will be in actual contact with the asphalt mixture, with the
exception of the vertical faces of existing pavements and curbs or curb and gutter,
with a uniform coating of asphalt cement to provide a closely bonded, watertight
joint.
E.
Apply a tack coat, as specified in FDOT Specification Section 300, on existing
pavement structures that are to be overlaid with an asphalt mix and between
successive layers of all asphalt mixes.
PLACING MIXTURE
A.
Lay all asphaltic concrete mixtures, including leveling courses, other than adjacent to
curb and gutter or other true edges, by the stringline method to obtain an accurate,
uniform alignment of the pavement edge.
B.
For each paving machine operated, use a separate crew, each crew operating as a full
unit. The Contractor's Certified Paving Technician in charge of the paving operations
may be responsible for more than one crew but must be physically accessible to the
Engineer at all times when placing mix.
C.
Check the depth of each layer at frequent intervals, and make adjustments when the
thickness exceeds the allowable tolerance. When making an adjustment, allow the
paving machine to travel a minimum distance of 32 feet to stabilize before the second
check is made to determine the effects of the adjustment.
02740-5
3.04
3.05
D.
In limited areas where the use of the spreader is impossible or impracticable, the
Contractor may spread and finish the mixture by hand.
E.
Straightedge and back-patch after obtaining initial compaction and while the material
is still hot.
F.
Upon arrival, dump the mixture in the approved mechanical spreader, and
immediately spread and strike-off the mixture to the full width required, and to such
loose depth for each course that, when the work is completed, the required weight of
mixture per square yard [square meter], or the specified thickness, is secured. Carry
an excess amount of mixture ahead of the screed at all times. Hand rake behind the
machine as required.
G.
Construct each course in layers of the thickness shown on Roadway and Traffic
Design Standards, Index No. 513.
H.
Before starting any rolling, check the surface; correct any irregularities; remove all
drippings, fat sandy accumulations from the screed, and fat spots from any source;
and replace them with satisfactory material. Do not skin patch. When correcting a
depression while the mixture is hot, scarify the surface and add fresh mixture.
APPLICATION OF LEVELING COURSES
A.
Before spreading any leveling course, fill all depressions in the existing surface more
than 1 inch deep by spot patching with leveling course mixture, and then compact
them thoroughly.
B.
Place all courses of leveling by the use of two motor graders, equip one with a
spreader box. Use other types of leveling devices after they have been approved by
the Engineer.
C.
When the total asphalt mix provided for leveling exceeds 50 lb/yd2 [27 kg/m2], place
the mix in two or more layers, with the average spread of any layer not to exceed
50 lb/yd2 [27 kg/m2]. When using Type S-3 Asphaltic Concrete for leveling, do not
allow the average spread of a layer to be less than 50 lb/yd2 [27 kg/m2] or more than
75 lb/yd2 [40 kg/m2]. The quantity of mix for leveling shown in the plans represents
the average for the entire project; however, the Contractor may vary the rate of
application throughout the project as directed by the Engineer. When leveling in
connection with base widening, the Engineer may require placing all the leveling mix
prior to the widening operation.
COMPACTING MIXTURE
A.
The coverage is the number of times the roller passes over a given area of pavement.
Regardless of the rolling procedure used, complete the final rolling before the
surface temperature of the pavement drops below 160F.
B.
Seal Rolling: Provide two coverages with a tandem steel-wheeled roller (either
vibratory or static), weighing 5 to 12 tons, following as close behind the spreader as
02740-6
possible without pick-up, undue displacement, or blistering of the material. Use
vibratory rollers in the static mode for layers of 1 inch or less in thickness.
C.
Intermediate Rolling: Provide five coverages with a self-propelled pneumatic-tired
roller, following as close behind the seal rolling operation as the mix will permit.
D.
Final Rolling: Provide one coverage with a tandum steel-wheeled roller (static mode
only), weighing 5 to 12 tons, after completing the seal rolling and intermediate
rolling, but before the surface pavement temperature drops below 160F.
E.
Operate the self-propelled, pneumatic-tired roller at a speed of 6 to 10 mph. For
each roller, do not exceed an area of coverage of 4,000 yd2/h if rolling Type S
Asphaltic Concrete, do not exceed an area of coverage of 3,000 yd2/h.
F.
Use a sufficient number of self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers to ensure that the
rolling of the surface for the required number of passes does not delay any other
phase of the laying operation and does not result in excessive cooling of the mixture
before completing the rolling. In the event that the rolling falls behind, discontinue
the laying operation until the rolling operations are sufficiently caught up.
G.
Use hand tamps or other satisfactory means to compact areas which are inaccessible
to a roller, such as areas adjacent to curbs, headers, gutters, manholes, etc.
H.
Use self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers to roll all patching and leveling courses.
Where placing the initial leveling course over broken concrete pavement, use a
pneumatic-tired roller that weighs at least 15 tons. For Type S-3 Asphaltic Concrete
leveling courses, use a steel-wheeled roller to supplement the traffic rollers. On other
leveling courses, use a steel-wheeled roller to supplement the traffic rollers on all
passes after the first pass.
I.
Do not allow the rollers to deposit gasoline, oil, or grease onto the pavement.
Remove and replace any areas damaged by such deposits as directed by the
Engineer. While rolling is in progress, test the surface continuously, and correct all
discrepancies to comply with the surface requirements. Remove and replace all
drippings, fat or lean areas, and defective construction of any description. Remedy
depressions that develop before completing the rolling by loosening the mixture and
adding new mixture to bring the depressions to a true surface. Should any depression
remain after obtaining the final compaction, remove the full depth of the mixture,
and replace it with sufficient new mixture to form a true and even surface. Correct
all high spots, high joints, and honeycombing as directed by the Engineer. Remove
and replace any mixture remaining unbonded after rolling. Correct all defects prior
to laying the subsequent course.
J.
Use a self-propelled pneumatic-tired roller on the first structural layer placed on a
milled surface. Compact with a minimum of three passes.
02740-7
3.06
3.07
3.08
JOINTS
A.
Place the mixture as continuously as possible. Do not pass the roller over the
unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture except when discontinuing the laying
operation long enough to permit the mixture to become chilled. When thus
interrupting the laying operation, construct a transverse joint by cutting back on the
previous run to expose the full depth of the mat.
B.
For all layers of pavement except the leveling course, place each layer so that
longitudinal construction joints are offset 6 to 12 inches laterally between successive
layers.
C.
When laying fresh mixture against the exposed edges of joints (trimmed or formed
as provided above), place it in close contact with the exposed edge to produce an
even, well-compacted joint after rolling.
SURFACE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Obtain a smooth surface on all pavement courses placed, and then straightedge all
intermediate and final courses with a 15 foot rolling straightedge. Furnish a 15 foot
[4.572 m] manual straightedge, and make it available at the job site at all times
during the paving operation for checking joints and surface irregularities.
B.
Produce a finished surface of uniform texture and compaction with no pulled, torn, or
loosened portions and free of segregation, sand streaks, sand spots, or ripples.
ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Upon completion of the final surface or friction course, the Engineer will test the
finished surface with a 15 foot rolling straightedge. Correct all deficiencies in excess
of 3/16 inch.
B.
If correction is made by removing and replacing the pavement, remove the full depth
of the course and extend at least 50 feet on either side of the defective area for the
full width of the paving lane.
C.
If correction is made by overlaying, cover the length of the defective area and taper
uniformly to a featheredge thickness at a minimum distance of 50 feet on either side
of the defective area. Extend the overlay the full width of the roadway. Maintain the
specified cross slope. The Engineer may adjust, as necessary, the mix used for the
overlay for this purpose.
D.
The maximum deficiency from the specified thickness as follows:
1.
2.
E.
For pavement of a specified thickness of 2½ inches or more: ½ inch
For pavement of a specified thickness less than 2 ½ inches: ¼ inch
Where the deficiency in thickness is: (1) in excess of 3/8 inch for pavement of less
than 2½ inches in specified thickness, or (2) in excess of ¾ inch for pavement of
02740-8
specified thickness of 2 ½ inches or more, correct the deficiency either by replacing
the full thickness for a length extending at least 50 feet from each end of the deficient
area.
F.
3.09
For any case of excess deficiency of the pavement, if approved by the Engineer for
each particular location, correct the deficient thickness by adding new surface
material, and compact it to the same density as the adjacent surface. The Engineer
will determine the area to be corrected and the thickness of new material added.
REPAIR AND RESTORATION
Replace pavement or roadway surfaces cut or damaged to equal or better condition than the
original, including stabilization, base course, surface course, curb and gutter, and other
appurtenances.
3.10
3.11
SEQUENCING AND TEMPORARY PAVING
A.
Install subgrade and base course materials within 48 hours of the removal/open
cutting of existing pavement consisting of streets, driveways, or sidewalk. Install
final surface courses within 14 days after removal of existing pavement.
B.
Areas to receive asphalt shall receive erosion control measures no later than 48 hours
after installation of base course. Temporary erosion control consists of placement of
a bituminous prime coat and sanding the surface. Permanent erosion control consists
of placement of the structural course.
C.
Areas to receive concrete paving shall be either protected with a layer of FDOT
coarse aggregate material or shall be paved within 48 hours of installation of the
subgrade.
Test density of bituminous concrete mixes. Type S-1 and S-3 asphalt are to be a minimum
density of 96% of the laboratory density.
END OF SECTION
02740-9
S E CT I O N 02771
CURE-IN-PLACE PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER RENEWAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REQUIREMENTS
A. The Work within this Section consists of the installation and testing cured-in-place pipe
(CIPP) lining by installation of a resin impregnated flexible felt tube into the existing
sanitary sewer pipe utilizing a vertical inversion standpipe and hydrostatic head, pulled in
place, or other approved method and curing by circulating hot water or other approved means
to produce a hard, impermeable pipe.
B. The finished liner shall extend over the installation length in a continuous, tight fitting,
watertight pipe-within-a-pipe and shall be fabricated from materials which, when installed,
will be chemically resistant to withstand internal exposure to domestic sewage. The
Contractor shall confirm through field measurements the actual length, diameter and depth of
the sewer pipe to be rehabilitated prior to fabricating the liner.
1.02
INSTALLER EXPERIENCE
A. The installer must have sufficient experience in the commercial installation of the liner and
must have installed a minimum of 500,000 lineal feet. The inability to document such
experience may be grounds for rejecting the proposed installer.
1. Supervisor: The Contractor shall submit the Superintendent qualification information
within 1-week prior to Pre-Construction conference. The information shall include the
Superintendent's resume of projects. Each reference project shall include the pipe
dimensions, length of installation, size/type of flow control required to perform the
Work, description of the actual work performed including installation method, owner's
name, telephone number and contact person, date of installation. The Contractor shall
submit the name(s) and qualifications for each scheduled superintendent for this project.
It is required that the Superintendent(s) named are the Superintendent(s) assigned to this
project and on site during construction. The Contractor is required to have at least 1
qualified Superintendent on site at all times during the construction activities. All
referenced experience shall be for projects completed within the United States or Canada
and shall have used the same installation method, CIPP liner and resin combination
proposed for this project. References will be checked.
2. The proposed Superintendent must have a minimum of 3-years of CIPP lining
supervisory field experience on projects totaling a minimum of 50,000 LF of 8-inch or
greater CIPP liner installation using the methods and materials proposed for this Work,
as documented by verifiable references.
3. Installation Crew: At least 1 person other than the Superintendent from the CIPP
installation crew shall have a minimum of 1-year of CIPP experience totaling at least
20,000 lineal feet of 8-inch or greater installed liner. The crewmember with listed
qualifications must be on the project site during all installation activities.
4. Boiler Technician: Contractor shall provide the name and information for the boiler
02771 - 1
rev: August, 2012
technician who will perform the actual Work. The boiler technician must have a
minimum of 2 projects totaling at least 10,000 lineal feet of CIPP lining in which a
similar position was held.
5. Lateral Cutter Technician: Contractor shall provide the name and information for the
technician who will perform the actual Work. The lateral cutter technician must have a
minimum of 2 projects totaling at least 10,000 lineal feet of CIPP lining in which a
similar position was held.
6. The final decision to accept or reject the product, manufacturer, and/or installer lies
solely with the County. The named Manufacturer, Field Superintendent, CIPP Installer,
Lateral Cutter, and Boiler Technician must be employed to perform the Work, unless
changes are specifically authorized by the County.
1.03
REFERENCES
A. Codes, Specifications, and Standards
1. Codes, specifications, and standards referred to by number or title shall form a part of
this specification to the extent required by the references thereto. Latest revisions shall
apply, unless otherwise shown or specified.
2. All pipe materials incorporated in the project shall be approved by the Florida
Environmental Protection Division for the application to be used, prior to receipt of bids.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards
a. D 638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
b. D 790 - Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Un-reinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
c. D 1222 - Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
d. D 2837 - Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
e. F 1216-98 - Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by Inversion and
Curing of a Resin-impregnated Tube
f. F 1743-96 - Rehabilitation of existing pipelines and conduits by pulled-in-place
installation of cured-in-place thermo setting resin pipe
1.04
RESPONSIBILITY FOR OVERFLOWS AND SPILLS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule and perform his work so as to
result in no overflows or spills of sewage or combined sewage from the system. If sewage
flows are such that they interfere with the Contractor's ability to perform work, the
Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling his work during low flow periods or provide
bypass pumping. Bypass pumping shall be provided only with the specific written approval
of the County.
B. In the event of overflows caused by the Contractor's work activities, the Contractor shall
immediately take appropriate action to contain and stop the overflow, clean up the spillage,
disinfect the area affected by the spill, and notify the County in a timely manner.
C. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the County for any fines or third-party claims
for personal or property damage arising out of a spill or overflow that is fully or partially the
responsibility of the Contractor. Should fines subsequently be imposed as a result of any
overflow for which the Contractor is fully or partially responsible, the Contractor shall pay
02771 - 2
rev: August, 2012
all such fines and all of the County's legal, engineering, and administrative costs in defending
such fines and claims associated with the overflow.
1.05
B. Submittals shall be provided to the County for review and acceptance prior to construction in
accordance with the following:
1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance certifying compliance with the applicable
specifications and standards, a minimum of 500,000 linear feet of liner installed in U.S.
2. Contractor's individual certification of actual documented installations of proposed
material liner of 500,000 linear feet in the U.S. including references.
3. Certified copies of test reports of factory tests required by the applicable standards and
this Section.
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions and procedures.
5. Contractor's procedures and materials for service renewal including time and duration of
sewer service unavailability.
6. Data, measurements, assumptions and calculations for sizing liners, signed and sealed by
a Professional Engineer registered in the state of Florida and certified by the
manufacturer as to the compliance of his materials to the values used in the calculations.
7. Sampling procedures and locations for obtaining representative samples of the finished
liner.
8. List of primary and backup equipment to be utilized on the job.
9. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's detailed procedures for repairing liners that have
been installed incorrectly or that have failed during installation.
10. The Contractor shall submit a wastewater pre-treatment plan including data,
measurements, assumptions, calculations and procedures for the pre-treatment of CIPP
process wastewater containing regulated chemicals.
C. A final certificate of compliance with this specification shall be provided by the
manufacturer for all lining material furnished. Tests for compliance by an independent
laboratory shall be made according to the applicable ASTM specification and the
manufacturer's quality control program.
D. As part of the design calculation submittal, the liner manufacturer shall submit a tabulation
of time versus temperature. This tabulation shall show the lengths of time that exposed
portions of the liner will endure without self-initiated cure or other deterioration beginning.
This tabulation shall be at 5°F (degrees Fahrenheit) increments ranging from 70°F to 100°F.
The manufacturer shall also submit his analysis of the progressive effects of such "pre-cure"
on the insertion and cured properties of the liner. This information shall be submitted in a
timely fashion prior to construction. The minimum liner thickness is for materials with
characteristics as shown. Bidders with materials with other characteristics must supply
complete information in their bids of the values as listed for ascertaining minimum thickness.
E. Approval of Products
1. A product will be considered for approval if a minimum of 1,000,000 lineal feet of the
proposed pipe liner has been installed in sewer collection pipes in the United States. An
02771 - 3
rev: August, 2012
acceptable third party testing facility shall perform all tests. These tests shall be based on
the following standards:
a. Materials tested shall be identical to those proposed for installation from samples of
materials in final resting place after the trauma of installation and/or reforming of the
product. Testing shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM standards.
Laboratory samples will not be acceptable.
b. Short-term tests can be extrapolated using actual short-term test data and applicable
ASTM standards for plastic pipe.
c. An independent third party qualified in these testing procedures shall validate all test
data (whether theoretically extrapolated or actual).
d. The manufacturer shall submit all ASTM standards for installation and/or materials
on their product. Foreign standards will not be accepted.
e. Manufacturer shall submit an engineering design guide and quality control
procedures for product manufacturer and for product installation, including detailed
inspection, testing of physical properties, retention of product samples, taking of and
testing of field samples.
f. Manufacturer shall submit statements as to country of manufacturer of all major
components used to produce the final installed product.
g. Manufacturer and installer shall submit evidence of installer training, testing and/or
certification of being trained to install the product by the manufacturer.
h. Manufacturer shall provide detailed installation procedures, detailed procedures for
reconstruction of existing laterals and for new service connections. This shall
include an itemized list of the tasks to be performed and the estimated times for each
task. Manufacturer shall include the estimated number of excavations, if any,
required for each line segment to be installed.
i. Manufacturer shall submit detailed procedures of repairing its own product in the
event of failure.
j. In the event change in the product (material) occurred within the past 3-years, the
manufacturer shall disclose in writing, the date each change occurred, what change
occurred, the reason for the change, the number of lineal feet installed within each
change period, the last date since a change occurred, and the number of lineal feet
installed since the last change. The County reserves the right to require additional
detailed information on the product (material) in the event changes have occurred.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery, storage, and handling of products. No
products shall be shipped to the job site without the approval of the County.
B. Keep products safe from damage. Promptly remove damaged products from the job site.
Replace damaged products with undamaged products.
1.07
LINE OBSTRUCTIONS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clear the line of obstructions such as solids
and roots that will prevent the insertion of CIPP. If pre-installation inspection reveals an
obstruction such as protruding service connection, dropped joint, or a collapse that will
prevent the inversion process, that was not evident on the video and it cannot be removed by
02771 - 4
rev: August, 2012
conventional sewer cleaning equipment, the County will be notified immediately.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
B. Pipe lining products pre-approved by the County include: Insituform (CIPP Liner), National
Liner (CIPP Liner), LMK Enterprises (Performance Liner), Steven's Technologies (CIPP
Liner 2 part 100% epoxy), Inner Cure Technologies (Reichold/Dion CIPP Liner), Lanzo
Lining (Lanzo CIPP Lining System), and Premier Pipe (Premier Pipe CIPP Lining System).
All other products must meet the specification herein and will require approval, as specified
prior to installation.
C. The materials used shall be designed, manufactured, and intended for sanitary sewer pipe
relining and the specific application in which they are used. The materials shall have a
proven history of performance in sewer relining and rehabilitation. All materials shall be
stored and handled in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. All materials
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
D. The finished pipe liner in place shall be fabricated from materials which when complete are
chemically resistant to and will withstand internal exposure to domestic sewage having a pH
range of 5 to 11 and temperatures up to 150ºF.
E. Take all necessary field measurements of the existing pipe (including diameter, ovality and
length) prior to manufacturing liners.
F. The minimum length shall be that deemed necessary by the Contractor to effectively span the
distance from the inlet to the outlet of the respective manholes unless otherwise specified.
The Contractor shall verify the lengths in the field before manufacturing.
G. The liner thickness shall be sized for a minimum hydrostatic and earth load of 8.0-feet. The
earth load and hydrostatic load shall be increased to the manhole depth for bury depths in
excess of 8.0-feet unless otherwise noted as shown on the plans.
H. Minimum allowable liner thickness for 8-inch gravity sewer shall be 6-mm.
I. Unless specified otherwise, the liner shall be structurally designed for a minimum service life
of 50-years; fully deteriorated host pipe/direct bury condition; prism loading; soil loading of
120 pcf; factor of safety of 2.0 (two); 2% ovality; maximum deflection of 5%; soil modulus
of 1,000-psi; lining enhancement factor of 7 maximum; H-20 live loading; 50% long-term
modulus reduction factor; and hydrostatic load at 100% of depth to invert.
J. The Contractor shall submit the structural design of the liner for sewers and laterals, signed
and sealed by a Professional Engineer in the state of Florida, subject to review by the
County.
1. Design may be based on material properties of the liner that exceed the minimum values
02771 - 5
rev: August, 2012
specified in ASTM F1216. However, the initial flexural modulus used in structural
design calculations shall not exceed 400,000-psi.
2. All other design criteria, loads, and conditions shall remain as specified in this Section.
K. CURED-IN-PLACE LINER
L. All cured-in-place lining products shall comply with ASTM F-1216 or intent thereof as
determined by the County.
M. The flexible tube shall be fabricated to a size that when installed will neatly fit (minimum
99.75%) the internal circumference of the existing sanitary sewer lines (including services).
Allowance shall be made for circumferential stretching during insertion so that the final
cured product is snug against the wall of the host pipe.
N. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor will use a polyester filter felt tube and a resin and
catalyst system compatible with the inversion process and having the physical properties for
the cured pipe identified in Table 02771 - 1 Physical Properties.
Table 02771 - 1
Physical Properties
Property
Tensile Strength
Flexural Strength
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity
Modulus of Elasticity
Minimum Long-Term is 50-years
Standard
ASTM D638
ASTM D790
ASTM D790
ASTM D2990
PSI
4,000
5,000
400,000
150,000
O. CIPP liner systems using resins containing styrene or other regulated chemicals that will be
discharged into the wastewater system shall require a pre-treatment plan to remove the
regulated chemicals to acceptable levels prior to discharge.
P. The Contractor shall submit the pre-treatment plan including design calculations to the
County for approval prior to discharge. The information required shall include:
1.
MSDS for all chemicals used in the process and that will be discharged into the
wastewater system.
2.
Representative analytical data that was performed in the past for the proposed
process, as collected from the wastewater stream.
3.
The addresses and mapped locations of the discharge.
4.
The total duration of discharge request.
5.
The anticipated discharge temperature. Discharges in excess of 140°F are not
permitted.
6.
The Contractor shall submit for approval a summary table of pre-treatment design
calculations in Excel containing the following information:
a. Dates of discharge of each section
b. Lining section numbers using the OCUD numbering system
c. Length and diameter of each section
d. Volume (in gallons) of inversion water of each section
e. Volume (in gallons) of cool down water of each section
f. Total volume (in gallons) of inversion and cooling water of each section
g. Regulated chemical (in pounds) in discharge volume of each section
02771 - 6
rev: August, 2012
h.
i.
j.
k.
Reduction chemical (in pounds) to meet post-treatment concentration limit
Reaction time period (in hours) to achieve post-treatment concentration limit
Cool down time period (in hours)
Regulated chemical post-treatment concentration limit (in PPM)
7.
The Contractor shall provide pre-treatment and post-treatment sampling and
laboratory analysis of the process wastewater and submit the results to the County for
verification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. The following installation procedures shall be adhered to unless otherwise approved by the
County.
B. Prior to any lining of a pipe so designated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
remove all internal debris and clean the existing sewer line and/or lateral in accordance with
the recommendations of the liner manufacturer prior to installation of the liner in accordance
with Section 02761 "Cleaning Sanitary Sewer Systems." Both mainline and lateral line shall
be cleaned.
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to remove all internal debris and clean the
existing sewer line and/or lateral in accordance with the recommendations of the liner
manufacturer prior to installation of the liner.
a. Preparation of the interior surface shall be accomplished by a thorough high-pressure
water-jet cleaning. The pipe shall be left free of all loose sand, rock, or other
deleterious materials. Any roots in the pipe shall be either removed or cut off flush
with the interior.
b. If conditions such as broken pipe and major blockages are found that will prevent
proper cleaning or where additional damage would result if cleaning is attempted or
continued, the Contractor shall notify the County immediately. The County will
determine what course of action will be taken to complete the project.
c. Precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure that no damage or flooding of
public or private property is caused by the cleaning operation.
d. The County shall inspect the prepared pipe for cleanliness and smoothness before the
Contractor is authorized to proceed with pipe lining operations.
2. Experienced personnel trained in locating breaks, obstacles and service connections by
closed circuit television shall perform inspection of existing sewer lines. The interior of
the line shall be carefully inspected to determine the location of any conditions that may
prevent proper installation of the liner pipe into the lines, and such conditions shall be
noted so they can be corrected. A digital data video and a suitable log shall be prepared
by the Contractor during the Work and provided to the County.
3. The Contractor shall provide for the flow of sewage around the section or sections of
pipe designated for lining as specified in Section 01516 "Collection System Bypass."
a. Flow control shall be exercised as required to ensure that no flowing sewage comes
into contact with sections of the sewer under repair.
b. A sewer line plug shall be inserted into the sewer upstream from the section to be
repaired. The plug shall be so designed that all or any portion of the sewage flows
can be released. During the review, testing and installation portion of the operation,
02771 - 7
rev: August, 2012
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.02
flows shall be shut off in order to properly install the cured-in-place pipe lining. The
upstream manholes shall be constantly monitored for degree of surcharging. After
the installation is complete, flows shall be restored to normal level.
c. Wherever lines are blocked off and the possibility of backing up the sewage and
causing harm to public and private property is foreseen, it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to bypass flow from manhole to manhole.
d. Bypassing shall be accomplished using sewer plugs with pump connections, by
pumping down surcharged manholes, or by other methods acceptable to the County.
All bypassed flow must be discharged to a sanitary sewer. Bypassed flow shall not
be allowed to enter any storm line, drainage ditch or street gutter.
e. During a bypass operation, the pump shall be manned continuously; the Contractor
shall maintain the pump and bypass equipment; and shall be responsible for any
damages to public or private property due to the malfunction of same.
The Contractor shall clear the line of obstructions such as solids, dropped joints,
protruding service connections or collapsed pipe that will prevent the insertion of the
liner pipe. If inspection reveals an obstruction that cannot be removed by conventional
sewer cleaning equipment, then the County shall be notified immediately.
Do not install liner if ground water temperatures and/or ambient temperatures are
excessive for the product installation procedures.
Notification of Public or Customers: Customers shall be notified by the Contractor with
door hanger advising the customers of when the Work will begin, expected date of
completion, the type of work and contact person for any questions.
Traffic Control: The Contractor shall provide all traffic control measures required for the
safety of the public, workers and equipment during the Work and in accordance with
FDOT and the County.
The contractor shall provide critical backup equipment to insure that the lining operation
progresses without interruption. Required backup equipment shall include at a minimum
1 additional lateral cutter system and 1 additional CCTV camera system.
PRE-TREATMENT OF REGULATED CHEMICALS TO DISCHARGE INTO
SEWER
A. CIPP liner systems using resins containing styrene or other regulated chemicals that will be
discharged into the wastewater system shall require a pre-treatment plan to remove the
regulated chemicals to acceptable levels prior to discharge. The Contractor shall submit the
pre-treatment plan to the County for approval prior to discharge. The information required
shall include:
1. MSDS for all chemicals used in the process and that will be discharged into the
wastewater system
2. Representative analytical data that was performed in the past for the proposed process, as
collected from the wastewater stream
3. The addresses and mapped locations of the discharge
4. The total duration of discharge request
5. The anticipated discharge temperature. Discharges in excess of 140°F are not permitted
6. The Contractor shall submit for approval a summary table of pre-treatment design
calculations in Excel containing the following information:
a. Dates of discharge of each section
b. Lining section numbers using the OCUD numbering system
02771 - 8
rev: August, 2012
c. Length and diameter of each section
d. Volume (in gallons) of inversion water of each section
e. Volume (in gallons) of cool down water of each section
f. Total volume (in gallons) of inversion and cooling water of each section
g. Regulated chemical (in pounds) in discharge volume of each section
h. Reduction chemical (in pounds) to meet post-treatment concentration limit
i. Reaction time period (in hours) to achieve post-treatment concentration limit
j. Cool down time period (in hours)
k. Regulated chemical post-treatment concentration limit (in PPM)
7. The Contractor shall provide pre-treatment and post-treatment sampling and laboratory
analysis of the process wastewater and submit the results to the County for verification.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Alternative methods of liner insertion, pressurization, and processing may be used for
products and processes approved by the County, and when the final liner product meets
the intent of ASTM installation procedures as determined by the County. Installation
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, which shall be available
for verification by the inspector. Should there be any difference between the
requirements, the more stringent shall govern. Prior to construction, the Contractor shall
submit to the County such written information which shall include, but not be limited to,
storage and handling of liner before installation, preparing liner for installation, installing
the liner in the sewer pipe, temperature and pressure requirements for inverting and
setting the liner, curing and cool down procedures, end seals and service connections.
The Contractor shall also submit to the County, a description of his methods for avoiding
liner stoppage due to conflict and friction at such locations as the manhole entrance and
the bend into the pipe entrance. The Contractor shall also present plans for dealing with
a liner stopped by snagging within the pipe.
2. Seal the area where the line enters or leaves each manhole. Finish the inside of the
manhole with a quick set cement grout to raise the invert to the grade of the liner pipe.
Also use this grout to dress up around the end of the liner. This space may be sealed
with a mechanical seal, chemical seal, or combination of both. The Contractor shall seal
the liner at all manhole reconnections with an approved product, compatible with the
liner, to completely seal any annular space present.
3. If the pipe liner fails to make a tight seal due to broken or misaligned pipe at the manhole
wall or other reason, the Contractor shall apply a seal at that point.
4. The temperature of water discharged to the sewer system from processing liners shall not
exceed 100°F maximum or the level allowed by State or Local standards. When draining
water, care shall be exercised not to create a vacuum in the line.
5. After the liner has been installed, all active, existing services shall be temporarily
reinstated to 100% of the original opening. This shall be done without excavation in
pavement areas, and in the case of non-man-entry pipes, from the interior of the pipeline
by means of a 360° (degree) television camera and a cutting device that re-establishes the
service connection. When a remote cutting device is used and a cleanout is available,
then a mini-camera down the service may also be used to assist the operator in cutting or
trimming. All coupons shall be recovered at the downstream manhole and removed.
6. The Contractor shall immediately notify the County of any construction delays taking
02771 - 9
rev: August, 2012
place during the insertion operation. Such delays shall possibly require sampling and
testing by an independent laboratory of portions of the cured liner at the County's
discretion. The cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor and no extra
compensation will be allowed. Any failure of sample tests or a lack of immediate
notification of delay shall be automatic cause for rejection of that part of the Work at the
County's discretion.
7. The cost for maintaining sanitary sewer service for the property owners during
construction shall be included in the prices bid and no additional compensation will be
allowed. Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit to the County for review a
complete description of the methods he intends to use to reconnect the existing laterals.
B. Cured-In-Place Liner
1. The Contractor shall designate a location where the reconstruction tube will be vacuum
impregnated prior to installation. The Contractor shall allow the County to inspect the
materials and "wet out" procedure. A catalyst system compatible with the resin and
reconstruction tube shall be used. Sufficient excess resin will be provided to insure
excretion into cracked pipe and or joints of the hot pipe after curing.
2. The wet out reconstruction tube shall be inserted through an existing manhole or other
approved access by means of an inversion process, pulled in place process, or other
approved method, and the application of a hydrostatic head, or equivalent pressure
sufficient to fully extend it to the next designated manhole or termination point. The
reconstruction tube shall be inserted into the vertical inversion standpipe with the
impermeable plastic membrane side out. At the lower end of the inversion standpipe, the
reconstruction tube shall be turned inside out and attached to the standpipe so that a leak
proof seal is created. The inversion head will be adjusted to be of sufficient height to
cause the impregnated tube to invert from manhole to manhole and hold the tube tight to
the pipe wall, produce dimples at side connections and flared ends at the manholes. The
use of a lubricant is recommended. Care shall be taken during the elevated curing
temperature so as not to overstress the felt fiber.
3. After inversion is completed the Contractor shall supply suitable heat source and
recirculation equipment. The equipment shall be capable of delivering the heat source
throughout the section uniformly to raise the temperature above the temperature required
to affect a cure of the resin. This temperature shall be determined by the resin/catalyst
system employed. The system, together with the manufacturer's approval, shall be
submitted to the County for review prior to lining operations. Temperatures shall be
monitored and recorded throughout the installation process to ensure that each phase of
the process is achieved at the manufacturer's recommended temperature levels. Copies
of these records shall be given to the County at the completion of each installation.
4. The heat source shall be fitted with suitable monitors to gauge the temperature of the
incoming and outgoing heat source. Another such gauge shall be placed between the
impregnated reconstruction tube and the pipe invert at the remote manhole to determine
the temperatures during cure. The resin manufacturer shall recommend temperature in
the line during the cure period.
5. Initial cure shall be deemed to be completed when inspection of the exposed portions of
cured pipe appear to be hard and sound and the remote temperature sensor indicates that
the temperature is of a magnitude to realize an exotherm. The cure period shall be of a
duration recommended by the resin manufacturer, as modified for the cured-in-place
inversion process, during which time the recirculation of the heat source and cycling of
02771 - 10
rev: August, 2012
the heat exchanger to maintain the temperature continues. Contractor shall retain a resinimpregnated sample (wick) to provide verification of the curing process taking place in
the host pipe.
6. The Contractor shall cool the hardened pipe to a temperature below 100°F before
relieving the static head in the inversion standpipe. Cool-down may be accomplished by
the introduction of cool water into the inversion standpipe to replace water being drained
and disposed per the approved pre-treatment plan. Care shall be taken in the release of
the static head so that a vacuum will not be developed that could damage the newly
installed pipe.
C. Service Lateral Renewal
1. The exact location and number of service connections or side sewers shall be verified
during the initial television inspection. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
accurately field locate all existing service connections or side sewers and establish means
for access for flow control. The Contractor shall reconnect all service connections or
side sewers to the liner pipe as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for restoring/correcting, without any delay, all
missed or faulty reconnections, as well as any damage caused to property owners for not
reconnecting the services soon enough or for not giving notice to the property owners.
3. Any lateral not initially reinstated by the Contractor that proves to be active shall be
reinstated by the Contractor at no additional cost to the County and the Contractor shall
be responsible for any resulting property damage of floods.
4. All existing service connections shall be reconnected by a remote controlled cutting
device directed internally by a television camera or by internal manual cutting. Cuts
shall be made by experienced operators so that no blind attempts or holes are made in the
liner pipe. Locations shall be verified carefully to match earlier tapes for accurate lateral
location, especially where dimples are not well defined. The County reserves the right to
require service connection by excavation at the Contractor's expense at any location if
the quality or workmanship of the cut is not satisfactory.
5. A 2-pass process of utilizing a cutter to open the lateral followed by wire brush (or
similar) attachment to complete the cutting flush with the lateral walls should be utilized,
or approved alternate. It shall be properly aligned, invert to invert, to the existing
connection with no obstructions to the flow. Resin slugs shall be removed as necessary
from reinstated service connections. Any mis-cuts shall be repaired at no cost to the
County and shall be performed utilizing an additional thinner liner to prevent water from
entering behind the liner to the full satisfaction of the County. All coupons cut from the
liner for reopening of lateral connections shall be retrieved from the sewer, accounted for
by the Contractor, and turned over to the County.
6. All service connections and side sewers to be reconnected to the main sewer, shall be
cleaned up to a length of 1-foot from the inside face of the existing wall of the main pipe.
All deposits within the first foot of the service connection or side sewer in the service
connections shall be removed and laterals reinstated.
02771 - 11
rev: August, 2012
7. Contractor shall provide a sound, smooth transition from laterals/side sewers to the main
sewer. Any gaps between the liner and face of lateral/side sewer connections shall be
completely filled and sealed with epoxy material compatible with the liner and host pipe.
After installation of the liner and reinstatement of the lateral/side sewer, all repaired
lateral/side sewer connections shall be sealed with 1/4-inch thickness epoxy material
compatible with the liner and repair material from the liner connection to 1-foot from the
inside face of the main sewer.
8. For PVC laterals or laterals that have been previously lined with cured-in-place pipe the
Contractor shall take care during the reinstatement to avoid damage to the lateral pipe. A
2 pass process of utilizing a cutter to open the lateral followed by wire brush (or similar)
attachment to complete the cutting flush with the lateral walls should be utilized, or
approved alternate.
3.04
POST INSTALLATION
A. Where liners of any type are installed in 2 or more continuous manhole segments, the liner
invert through the intermediate manholes shall be left intact. Final finishing of the
installation in those intermediate manholes shall require removal of the top of the exposed
liner and neat trimming of the liner edge where it touches the lip of the manhole bench.
B. Portions of any piece of liner material removed during installation shall be available for
inspection and retention by the County.
C. Reinstate openings for all drop assemblies after relining mainline sewer. Everywhere
possible, outside drop assemblies shall be lined with a cured-in-place liner compatible with
the mainline liner, for the full length of the drop assembly and bend. The vertical pipe shall
be lined, at a minimum. Drop assemblies inside of manholes are not required to be relined,
unless directed by the County.
D. Each line segment lined shall be TV inspected as soon as practical after processing to assure
complete curing. The liner shall be continuous and free of all visual and material defects
except those resulting from pre-lined conditions (such conditions shall be brought to the
attention of the County prior to lining). There shall be no damage, deflection, holes,
delaminating, uncured resin or other visual defects in the liner. The liner surface shall be
smooth and free of waviness throughout the pipe. No visible leakage through the liner or at
manhole or service lateral connections will be allowed. Any defects located during the
inspection shall be corrected by the Contractor to conform to the requirements of the
specifications and to the satisfaction of the County. The Contractor shall not reactivate any
section of lined sewer pipe until authorized to do so by the County. Segments not fully
conforming to these Specifications must be immediately brought to the County's attention
with a proposed method of correction.
02771 - 12
rev: August, 2012
3.05
TESTING
A. After completing the lining, service renewals where required, and manhole
rehabilitation/replacement, every liner and manhole shall be CCTV inspected as per Section
02762 "Televising Sanitary Sewer Systems."
B. The Contractor shall have an independent testing lab analyze finished liner samples taken
from manhole cutoffs, service coupons, etc.
1. A minimum of 1 sample shall be taken of the first segment installed, or as directed by the
County.
2. A minimum of 2 samples shall be taken for each 2,500 lineal feet of liner material
installed or for each manufacturing lot, if less, or as directed by the County.
3. A minimum of 6 samples per project shall be taken for each type of liner furnished, or as
directed by the County.
4. Tests in accordance with ASTM standards for Tensile Properties, Flexural Modulus and
wall thickness shall be conducted.
5. The Contractor shall determine sampling location and procedures to ensure
representative samples are obtained from the finished liner, subject to approval by the
County.
6. The Contractor shall furnish removable sizing sleeves, when possible, to collect liner
samples, which accurately replicate the host pipe diameter.
3.06
ACCEPTANCE
A. It is the intent of these specifications that the completed liner with all appurtenances shall be
essentially equivalent in final quality and appearance to new sewer installation.
B. The finished liner shall be continuous over the entire segment between manholes and
homogenous throughout.
C. The finished liner shall be fully rounded and as free as commercially practicable from visible
defects, including but not limited to damage, deflection, holes, delamination, ridges, cracks,
uncured resin, foreign inclusions or other objectionable defects.
D. There shall be no visible infiltration through the liner, around the liner at manhole
connections, at lined service connections or in lined services. Contractor shall repair any
visible leaks.
E. Where a defect in the liner requires removal of a section of the liner in the County's opinion,
the Contractor shall make all repairs as required by the County and shall install a segmental
liner, compatible with the liner, to accomplish a continuous finished liner. No separate
payment will be made for such defect repair or for the post-repair segmental liner.
F. The pipe shall be neatly and smoothly cut off at each manhole. The manhole trough shall be
raised to the invert of the liner to preclude snagging and shoaling of debris.
G. Service Connections
1. The CIPP lateral lining shall not inhibit the CCTV post video inspection of the mainline
or service lateral pipes.
02771 - 13
rev: August, 2012
2. Reinstatement of all building sewer connections shall be done neatly and smoothly.
3. The Contractor shall install any missing clean outs at the road right-of-way.
3.07
CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION
A. The Contractor shall not allow the site of the Work to become littered with trash and waste
material, but shall maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition throughout the
construction period.
B. On or before completion, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the Work all
surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures, stumps and portions of trees, and
debris of any kind. He shall leave the site of work in a neat and orderly condition, similar or
equal to that prior to construction.
C. All private and public property along or adjacent to the Work disturbed by construction
operations shall be restored to a condition similar or equal to that existing prior to
construction.
D. Before final acceptance by the County, the Contractor shall replace and/or restore any water,
sewer, drain, and gas lines and appurtenances; electrical, telephone, telegraph conduits and
wires, both underground and aboveground, and appurtenances; traffic signals, fire and police
alarm systems and appurtenances; sidewalks, curbs, gutter, drainage ditches and pavements
and all other public utility facilities and appurtenances along or adjacent to the Work that
may have been disturbed by construction operations.
E. Conditions permitting, property cleanup and restoration shall begin and be prosecuted to
completion on a timely basis as set forth herein.
3.08
PRIVATE SEWER LATERAL SHUTDOWN
A. When it is necessary to shutdown a private sewer lateral while work is in progress and before
the laterals are reconnected, the residents are to be notified by the Contractor at least 1-day
prior to the shutdown. No sewer or water service is to remain shutdown for more than a
period of 8-hours unless the Contractor provides substitute services for the residents.
Commercial sewer services shall be maintained at all times that the business is open. No
sewage from the services or main line shall be discharged on the ground or in waterways.
Holding pits or tanks are not allowed unless permitted by the State. Contractor shall
coordinate pump stations, force main and sanitary sewer operation, bypass and shutdown
control with the County.
3.09
PROSECUTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor is cautioned that only those sewer services that are live and active shall be
repaired or reinstated after the sewer main has been lined or replaced.
B. The Contractor shall note that not all sewer lines segments have been televised in their
entirety due to obstructions blocking further entry, etc. These obstructions shall be cleared to
allow TV viewing of the entire segment length before lining is commenced.
02771 - 14
rev: August, 2012
C. The number of service connections on some sewer segments may exceed the number of
buildings actually served. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine through dye
testing, or other acceptable methods, the services that are live and require reinstatement prior
to commencing lining of the sewer main. Services that are confirmed to be inactive shall not
be reconnected. Services that are inactive, but reinstated, shall be plugged at the Contractor's
expense.
D. Inactive services to vacant parcels shall be renewed, unless otherwise directed by the County.
3.10
WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer for specified material properties for a particular job shall certify the liner.
The manufacturer shall warrant the liner to be free from defects in materials and installation
for an extended 5-years from the date of Final Completion.
B. The County shall conduct the warranty television inspection within 1-year after the date of
acceptance. Any defective sections of liner located during the inspection shall be promptly
repaired or replaced by the Contractor as directed by the County. In the event that a sewer
liner or service connection is found to be leaking during the inspection, the Contractor shall
be required to promptly replace it with a new section of pipe or liner or, if approved by the
County, to eliminate the leak(s) by other means of repair.
C. For liners installed incorrectly or that have failed during installation, Contractor and
Manufacturer shall furnish an extended warranty for liner materials and repairs for a total of
5-years from date of Final Completion.
END OF SECTION
02771 - 15
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 02775
WASTEWATER MANHOLE REHABILITATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: Sanitary sewer manhole rehabilitation including:
1. Rehabilitation and leak proofing of manholes by lining with spray applied or
centrifugally cast light-weight structural reinforced concrete, spray applied epoxy resin
systems, or equal as determined by County.
2. The repair and sealing of the manhole base, invert, walls, corbel/cone, and chimney of
brick, block, or precast manholes, including the removal of any unsound material.
3. The inspection and testing of the various types of work to insure compliance.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. Codes, Specifications, and Standards (Not Used)
B. Testing and Materials Standards
1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C. Related Sections
1. Section 01516 "Collection System Bypass"
2. Section 02774 "Wastewater Gravity Collection Systems"
1.03
DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.04
RESPONSIBILITY FOR OVERFLOWS AND SPILLS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule and perform his work so as to
result in no overflows or spills of sewage from the system. If sewage flows are such that
they interfere with the Contractor’s ability to perform work, the Contractor shall be
responsible for scheduling his work during low flow periods or provide bypass pumping.
Bypass pumping shall be provided only with the specific written approval of the County.
B. In the event of overflows caused by the Contractor’s work activities, the Contractor shall
immediately take appropriate action to contain and stop the overflow, clean up the spillage,
disinfect the area affected by the spill, and notify County in a timely manner.
02775 - 1
rev: August, 2012
C. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the County for any fines or third-party claims
for personal or property damage arising out of a spill or overflow that is fully or partially the
responsibility of the Contractor. Should fines subsequently be imposed as a result of any
overflow for which the Contractor is fully or partially responsible, the Contractor shall pay
all such fines and all of the County’s legal, engineering, and administrative costs in
defending such fines and claims associated with the overflow.
1.05
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the County for review and acceptance prior to starting
construction in accordance with the General Conditions and 01300 "Submittals" for the
following:
1. Manhole Liner
B. Submittals shall be submitted to the County for review and acceptance at least 14-days prior
to starting manhole rehabilitation in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1
for the following:
1. Manufacturers’ Certificate of Compliance certifying compliance with the applicable
Specifications and Standards. The certifications shall list all materials furnished under
this Section.
2. Certified copies of factory tests required by the applicable Standards, the Manufacturer,
and this Section.
3. Manufacturer’s handling, storage, and installation instructions and procedures.
4. Recommended lining thickness design to withstand groundwater pressure as specified in
Part 3 of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Materials
1. All materials furnished for this work shall be in accordance with the "List of Materials
and Approved Manufacturers" as appended to these Specifications.
2. The materials used shall be designed, manufactured, and intended for sewer manhole
rehabilitation and the specific application in which they are used. The materials shall
have a proven history of performance in sewer manhole rehabilitation. The materials
shall be delivered to the job site in original unopened packages clearly labeled with the
manufacturer’s identification and printed instructions. All materials shall be stored and
handled in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. All materials shall be
mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
3. The Contractor shall warrant and hold harmless the County against all claims for patent
infringement and any loss thereof.
4. Handle and store all materials and dispose of all wastes in accordance with applicable
regulations.
02775 - 2
rev: August, 2012
5. Each lining system shall be designed for application over wet surfaces (but not active
running water) without degradation of the final product and/or the bond between the
product and the manhole surfaces.
B. The following shall be used for stopping active leaks in concrete and masonry manholes:
1. A premixed fast-setting, volume-stable waterproof cement plug consisting of hydraulic
cement, graded silica aggregates, special plasticizing, and accelerating agents. It shall
not contain chlorides, gypsum’s, plasters, iron particles, aluminum powder, or gasforming agents, or promote the corrosion of steel it may come in contact with. Set time
shall be approximately 1-minute. Ten (10) minute compressive strength shall be
approximately 500-psi.
2. A siliconate-based liquid accelerator field mixed with neat Portland cement. The set
time shall be approximately 1-minute.
3. The elastomeric polyurethane resin-soaked method, using dry twisted jute oakum, or
resin-rod with polyurethane resin (water activated).
C. The following shall be used for patching, repointing, filling, and repairing non-leaking holes,
cracks, and spalls in concrete and masonry manholes:
1. A premixed non-shrink cement-based patching material consisting of hydraulic cement,
graded silica aggregates, special plasticizing and accelerating agents, which has been
formulated for vertical or overhead use. It shall not contain chlorides, gypsums, plasters,
iron particles, aluminum powder, or gas-forming agents or promote the corrosion of steel
with which it may come into contact. Set time (ASTM C-191) shall be less than 30minutes. One-hour compressive strength (ASTM C-109) shall be a minimum of 200-psi
and the ultimate compressive strengths (ASTM C-882-Modified) shall be a minimum of
1,700-psi.
D. Spray applied or centrifugally cast structural reinforced cement manhole lining
1. The material applied to the surface of the manhole shall be a cementitious blend of
calcium aluminate cement and manufactured calcium aluminate aggregates for
constructing a liner that is impervious to the flow of water, is resistant to sulfide attack,
and restores structural integrity to existing manhole walls.
2. A monolithic liner shall be formed which covers all interior manhole surfaces and shall
have the following minimum requirements at 28-days:
Compressive Strength (ASTM C-579B)
3,000-psi
Tensile Strength (ASTM C-496)
300-psi
Flexural Strength (ASTM C-293) (Modified) 600-psi
Shrinkage (ASTM C-596)
0% at 90% R.H.
Bond (ASTM C-321)
130-psi
Density, when applied
105± pcf
E. Spray applied epoxy resin system manhole lining.
1. The material sprayed onto the surface of the manhole shall be an epoxy resin system
formulated for application within a sanitary sewer environment. The resin will exhibit
suitable corrosion resistance and enhance the structural integrity of the existing manhole.
F. Multi-component stress skin panel liner system.
1. The material applied onto the surface of the manhole shall be a multi-component stress skin
panel liner system designed to withstand the effects of hydrogen sulfide without any
02775 - 3
rev: August, 2012
deterioration to the liner. The liner shall be a solvent free, two-component polymeric,
moisture/chemical barrier specifically developed for the wastewater environment.
2. The cured epoxy resin system shall conform to the following minimum Structural
Standards:
Cured Product
Tensile Stress
Flexural Stress
Flexural Modulus
Compressive Strength
Table 02775-1
Minimum Structural Standards
Test Method
ASTM D-638
ASTM D-790
ASTM D-790
ASTM D-695
Results
7,000-psi
13,000-psi
500,000-psi
13,000-psi
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
REHABILITATION OF MANHOLE STRUCTURE
A. General Procedures
1. Safety: The Contractor shall perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable
OSHA, state, local, and manufacturer’s safety standards. Each method of manhole
rehabilitation in this Section requires some degree of manhole entry by workers.
Particular attention is drawn to those safety requirements regarding confined space entry
and respiratory protection from airborne particulate materials during cleaning, product
mixing, and application.
2. Cleaning: All concrete and masonry surfaces to be rehabilitated shall be clean. All grease,
oil, laitance, coatings, loose bricks, mortar, unsound brick or concrete, and other foreign
materials shall be completely removed. Water blasting utilizing a 210°F steam unit and
proper nozzles shall be the primary method of cleaning; however, other methods such as
wet or dry sandblasting, acid wash, concrete cleaners, degreasers, or mechanical means
may be required to properly clean the surface. All surfaces on which these methods are
used shall be thoroughly rinsed, scrubbed, and neutralized to remove cleaning agents and
their reactant products. Debris resulting from cleaning shall be removed from the manhole
and not discharged downstream.
3. Stopping Infiltration: After surface preparation and prior to the application of mortars
and coatings, infiltration shall be stopped either by plugging with a waterstop compound
or chemical grout sealing.
4. Patching: All large holes or voids around joints, or pipes and all spalled areas and all
holes caused by missing or cracked brick shall be patched. All missing mortar shall be
repointed using a non-shrink patching mortar. All cracked or disintegrated material shall
be removed from the area to be patched or repointed, exposing a sound sub base. All
cracks not subject to movement and greater than 1/16-inch in width shall be routed out to
a minimum width and depth of 1/2-inch and patched with non-shrink patching mortar.
5. Flow Control: The Contractor shall be responsible for plugging or diverting the flow of
sewage as needed for repair and lining of manhole inverts and benches.
6. Remove all loose grout and rubble from existing channel. Rebuild channel if required by
reshaping and repairing slope of shelves or benches. Work shall include aligning inflow
and outflow ports in such a manner as to prevent the deposition of solids at the transition
point. All inverts shall follow the grades of the pipe entering the manhole. Changes in
direction of the sewer and entering branch or branches shall have a true curve with the
02775 - 4
rev: August, 2012
largest possible radius and shall be shaped to allow easy entrance of maintenance
equipment including buckets or T.V. camera.
7. Each lining system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation to withstand groundwater pressures. For manholes greater than 12-feet
in depth, the lining shall withstand the pressures associated with a groundwater depth
equal to the manhole depth. Linings for all other manholes shall withstand the pressures
associated with groundwater depth of 12-feet. Measure groundwater depth from
manhole bench to top of ground surface.
8. Application of products shall be by factory certified applicators.
3.02
SPRAY APPLIED LIGHT-WEIGHT STRUCTURAL REINFORCED CEMENT
A. The surface prior to spraying shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be spray-applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices, and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond.
B. The first application shall have begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen,
which could be 15-minutes to 1-hour depending upon ambient conditions) before the second
application to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2-inch. The final finished
thickness may need to be greater than 1/2-inch as recommended by the manufacturer to
withstand groundwater pressures. A depth gauge shall be used during application, at various
locations, to verify the required thickness. The surface then shall be trowelled to smooth
finish with care taken not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and
weaken it. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed whenever more than 24hours have elapsed between applications.
C. The bench covers used to catch debris shall be removed and the bench and invert sprayed
such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the
edge of the invert being no less than 1/2-inch. The wall-bench intersection shall be rounded
to a uniform radius the full circumference of the intersection.
D. No application shall be made to frozen surfaces or if freezing is expected to occur within the
manhole for 24-hours after application. If ambient temperatures are in excess of 95°F,
precautions shall be taken to keep the mix temperature at time of application below 90°F,
using ice if necessary.
E. The final application shall have a minimum of 4-hours cure time before being subjected to
active flow.
3.03
CENTRIFUGALLY CAST STRUCTURAL REINFORCED CEMENT
A. Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. The rotating casting applicator shall be positioned to evenly apply the material and be
withdrawn at a rate to assure a final minimum thickness of 1-inch. The final finished
thickness may need to be greater than 1-inch as recommended by the manufacturer to
02775 - 5
rev: August, 2012
withstand groundwater pressures. A depth gauge shall be used during application, at various
locations to verify the required thickness.
C. The bench covers used to catch debris shall be removed and the bench and invert sprayed or
hand applied so that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the
thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2-inch. The wall-bench intersection
shall be rounded to a uniform radius the full circumference of the intersection.
D. No application shall be made to frozen surfaces or if freezing is expected to occur within the
manhole for 24-hours after application. If ambient temperatures are in excess of 95°F,
precautions shall be taken to keep the mix temperature at time of application below 90°F.
E. The final application shall have a minimum of 1-hour cure time as recommended by the
manufacturer before being subjected to active flow.
3.04
SPRAYED APPLIED EPOXY RESIN SYSTEM
B. The epoxy resin shall be sprayed onto the surfaces of the manhole walls, benches, and
inverts to produce a smooth coating and yield the required structural integrity and corrosion
resistance. A depth gauge shall be used during application at various locations to verify the
required thickness.
C. The epoxy resin shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 0.125-inches (125-mils) at the
top of the manhole and gradually thickened in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations to withstand groundwater pressures. The application shall have a
minimum cure time as recommended by the manufacturer before being subjected to active
flow.
C. The sloped surface of the manhole bench shall be made non-skid by broadcasting aluminum
oxide or sand into the surface prior to gelatin/set.
3.05
MULTI-COMPONENT LINER SYSTEM
B. The liner system shall be sprayed onto the surfaces of the manhole walls, benches, and
inverts to produce a smooth surface. The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to
accurately ratio and apply the liner system.
C. Final installation shall be a minimum of 500-mils.
D. The application shall have a minimum cure time as recommended by the manufacturer
before being subjected to active flow.
3.06
SANITARY SEWER LATERAL CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
A. Sanitary sewer lateral connections to rehabilitated manholes shall be reinstated to provide a
02775 - 6
rev: August, 2012
seamless, leak free, and unobstructed flow connection between the new manhole lining or
coating system and the lateral connection per 3.01A.
B. Sanitary sewer laterals requiring rehabilitation shall be renewed per Section 02772 "CuredIn-Place Pipe (CIPP) For Lateral Renewal."
3.07
MANHOLE REHABILITATION ACCEPTANCE
A. Test all rehabilitated manholes using the vacuum test method as per ASTM C 1244
"Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure
(Vacuum) Test", following the manufacturer’s recommendations for proper and safe
procedures. Vacuum testing of manholes and structures shall be performed after curing of
linings. Any visible leakage in the manhole or structure before, during, or after the test shall
be repaired regardless of the test results.
B. All pipes for vacuum testing entering the manhole shall be installed at the top access point of
the manhole. A vacuum of 10-inches of mercury (5.0-psi) shall be drawn on the manhole,
and the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to 9-inches of mercury (4.5-psi).
Manholes will be considered to have failed the air test if the time to drop 1-inch of mercury
is less than what is shown in the following table:
Depth – feet
4
8
12
16
20
24
+ Each 2’
48-inches
30 sec.
30 sec.
30 sec.
40 sec.
50 sec.
60 sec.
+5 sec.
Table 02775-2
Vacuum Test Timetable
Vacuum Test Timetable
Manhole Diameter – Inches
60-inches
30 sec.
30 sec.
39 sec.
52 sec.
65 sec.
78 sec.
+6.5 sec.
72-inches
30 sec.
32 sec.
48 sec.
64 sec.
80 sec.
96 sec.
+8.0 sec.
96-inches
30 sec.
38 sec.
57 sec.
76 sec.
95 sec.
114 sec.
+9.5 sec.
C. Manhole depths shall be rounded to the nearest foot. Intermediate values shall be
interpolated. For depths above 24-feet, add the values listed in the last line of the table for
each 2-feet of additional depth.
D. If the manhole or structure fails the vacuum test, the Contractor shall perform additional
repairs and repeat the test procedures until satisfactory results are obtained.
E. After the manhole rehabilitation work has been completed, the manhole shall be inspected by
the Contractor in the presence of the County and the work shall be accepted if found
satisfactory to the County. No evidence of visible leaks shall be allowed. Non-uniformity,
sagging, lamination, holidays or other defects will be cause for rejection of the coating. All
surfaces shall be tested for the presence of holidays and pinholes via spark testing at 100volts per millimeter. The Contractor shall provide the testing equipment and perform the
testing in the presence of the County. Any holidays or pinholes found during the testing
shall be repaired and the surface re-tested until the surfaces are completely free of holidays
and pinholes.
02775 - 7
rev: August, 2012
3.08
CLEANUP
A. After the installation work has been completed and the testing is acceptable, the Contractor
shall clean up the entire project area. The Contractor shall dispose of all excess material and
debris. The work area shall be left in a condition equal to or better than the prior condition.
3.09
WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall guarantee his work for a warranty period of 1-year from the date of
acceptance.
B. If at anytime during the warranty period any leakage, cracking, loss of bond, or other
discontinuity is identified, the Contractor shall remove and replace the manhole liner with
new material at no cost to the County. No field repair shall be approved.
C. Furnish an extended warranty for manhole rehabilitation materials from the Contractor and
liner manufacturer for a total of 5-years from date of final completion.
END OF SECTION
02775 - 8
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 02784
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: This section specifies aluminum coated steel chain link fence, nominally 6feet high, complete with gates to be constructed around the area indicated on the Drawings.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Chain link fences and gates shall be constructed in accordance with specified standards, as
well as all pertinent codes and regulations. Where provisions of pertinent codes conflict with
the specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern.
B. Chain link fences and gates shall be manufactured by established, reputable manufacturers
that have been engaged in the manufacture of chain link fencing for at least 10-years.
1.03
B. The Contractor shall submit layout drawings of all fence and gate installations along with
details and manufacturer's literature of all fence and gate materials in the Project.
C. The Contractor shall submit all motor data, connection diagrams, wiring diagrams, and
O&M instructions for all gate operators in the Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
02784 - 1
rev: August, 2012
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Fabric: The fabric shall be aluminum coated steel chain link, 72-inches high, No. 9-gauge
wire woven in a 2-inch mesh. The fabric shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
Designation A491. The aluminum coating shall be a minimum of 0.40-ounces per square
foot of wire surface for No. 9-gauge fabric. The fabric shall have a minimum tensile strength
of 75,000-psi. The weight of the coating shall be determined by the strip test as defined in
ASTM Designation A428. The fabric shall be coated with an ultra violet stable black PVC
coating which meets ASTM standards F688 Class I.
B. Post and Other Appurtenances: All posts and other appurtenances used in the construction of
this fence shall be hot dipped galvanized with a minimum of 1.8-ounces per square foot of
surface. Pipe sections shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A120. All
posts, rails, and fittings shall be coated with an ultra violet stable black PVC coating which
meets ASTM standards F688 Class I.
C. Sizes of Posts, Gate Frames, and Rails:
COMPONENT
1. End, corner & pull posts
2. Gateposts (one leaf width 8-feet or less)
3. Intermediate posts
4. Gate Frames
5. Braces
6. Top Rails
DIMENSIONS
Nominal
NPS Pipe
Diameter
Schedule
3-inch
40
3-inch
40
2-3/8-inch
40
1-5/8-inch
40
1-5/8-inch
40
1-5/8-inch
20
D. Gates
1. Swing Gates: Gates shall be complete with latches, stops, keepers, and hinges. Gate
frames shall be constructed of round tubular members continuously welded at all corners
or assembled with fittings. Welds shall be painted with aluminum or zinc based paint
prior to application of PVC coating. Gate filler shall be of the same fabric as specified
for the fence and shall be attached securely to the gate frame with No. 9 tie wires at
intervals not exceeding 12-inches. Hinges shall be of adequate strength for the gate and
with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. The hinges shall not twist or turn
under the action of the gate. The gates shall be easily operable by one person. Latches,
stops, and keepers for all gates, along with 1-inch stainless steel chain and padlock, shall
be provided.
2. Sliding Gates: Sliding gates shall be complete with latches, stops, keepers, rollers, and
roller tracks. Gate shall ride on a double wheel carrier. Gateposts shall be 3-inch Sch.
40 and frame shall be 1-5/8-inch Sch. 40. Slide pipe tracks shall be 1-5/8-inch Sch. 40.
Safety post (outside of gatepost) shall be 3-inch Sch. 40. Fabric shall match fence.
3. Gate padlocks shall be the County standard, case brass, shackle-case hardened steel, 1inch links with 12-inch chain, 606 finish and keyed alike when more than one.
E. Top Rail: The top rail shall be provided with couplings approximately every 20-feet.
Couplings are to be the outside sleeve type, at least 6-inches long.
02784 - 2
rev: August, 2012
F. Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,500-psi at 28-days.
G. Hardware: Miscellaneous hardware shall be of steel, malleable iron or ductile iron of
standard design and conform to the requirements of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's
Institute. All parts shall be galvanized except ties and clips may be aluminum.
H. Power Gate Operators: The operators for sliding gates shall be Robot Industries, Inc. Model
LSG-100, Venco Model SJH, or acceptable equal units designed for use on cantilever sliding
gates. Operator motors shall be 1 horsepower and shall be wound for 208 volt, 3 phase, and
60 Hz power supply. Units shall provide gate speed of not less than 75-feet per minute.
Units shall be arranged for ground level mounting on 6-inch concrete pads. A quick
disconnect for manual operation with a padlock control shall be provided. The cover for the
operator shall be of galvanized steel, and the units shall be provided with electric overload
protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ARRANGEMENT
A. Posts: Posts shall be uniformly spaced, not to exceed 10-feet on centers. Intermediate posts
shall have waterproof tops, which have integrally cast openings through which the top rails
shall pass. Terminal posts shall consist of end, corner, and pull posts.
B. Braces: Braces shall be provided at each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
C. Top Rails: The top rails shall pass through the line post tops and form a continuous brace
from end to end of each stretch of fence. The top rail shall be securely fastened to the
terminal posts by heavy pressed steel brace bands and malleable end connections.
D. Bottom Tension Wire: The bottom tension wire shall be No. 7-gauge aluminum coated
spring coil or crimped wire. Minimum weight of aluminum coating shall be 0.40-ounces per
square foot of wire surface. The tension wire shall be stretched taut between terminal posts
and securely fastened to each intermediate post 2-inches above the finish grade line. Tension
wire shall be attached to the fence fabric with aluminum hog rings every 24-inches.
E. Stretcher Bars: Stretcher bars shall be no less than 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch in cross section and
shall have minimum length 2-inches longer than the fabric height. Stretcher bars shall be
used for attaching the fabric to all terminal posts by threading through the fabric and being
attached to the posts with No. 9-gauge tension bands, or other positive mechanical means,
spaced at 24-inch centers. One (1) stretcher bar shall be provided for each gate and end post
and 2 for each corner and pull post.
F. Ties and Clips: Fabric shall be fastened to all intermediate posts with 9-gauge tie wires,
spacing not to exceed 12-inches apart. Fabric shall be tied to top rail with 9-gauge tie wires,
spacing not to exceed 24-inches on centers.
02784 - 3
rev: August, 2012
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Post Setting: Line and terminal posts shall be set in holes 12-inches in diameter, 42-inches
deep with 36-inch post embedment. After the post has been set and plumbed, the hole shall
be filled with concrete. The exposed surface of the concrete shall be crowned to shed water.
B. Terminal and Gateposts: Terminal and gateposts shall be set as specified above and shall be
braced to the nearest post with a galvanized horizontal brace used as a compression member
and a galvanized 3/8-inch steel truss rod and turnbuckle used as a tension member.
C. Fabric: Fabric shall not be stretched until concrete footings have cured a minimum of 3days. Chain link fabric shall be placed on the side designated by the County and shall be
stretched taut approximately 2-inches above finish grade and securely fastened to all posts.
Rolls of wire fabric shall be joined by weaving a single strand into the ends of the rolls to
form a continuous mesh.
END OF SECTION
02784 - 4
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.02
1.
General formwork.
2.
Forms, form liners, and coatings.
3.
Form ties and accessories.
1.
Materials for built-in items of other work.
2.
Joint materials, anchors, inserts, and waterstops - Section 03250.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the ability of formwork to produce members of
the size, shape, and exterior finish required, for the structural adequacy of the forms to carry
construction loads without excessive deflection, and for the safe use of forms in connection
with completion of the concrete work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any injury or
damage arising from inadequate forms or from premature removal of formwork.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
Samples and Certifications
Samples and certifications shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and as directed
by the Engineer. Submit samples of patterned concrete form liner panels and form ties.
1.04
REFERENCED STANDARDS
Formwork design, construction, and removal shall conform to ACI 318, Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
03100-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FORMWORK
A.
Form Ties
Form ties shall be a water-sealing snap-in type. For patterned concrete, use
stainless steel snap ties.
B.
Plywood Forms and Liners
Plywood forms and liners shall be minimum grade B-B High Density Overlay
Concrete Form Panels, Class I.
C.
Lumber
Formwork lumber shall be straight and clean. All nails shall be withdrawn and
surfaces in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned before reuse.
D.
Metal Forms
Metal forms shall be fabricated from carbon steel sheets conforming to ASTM A569.
E.
Patterned Concrete Form Liners
1.
Where Patterned Finish is indicated on the Drawings, special liners shall be
used in lieu of liners required for Class A Forms. The special liners shall be
configured in such a manner as to produce patterned finish concrete that will
duplicate the surface appearance of the cut limestone building panels. The
location, extent, and configuration of the surface treatment shall be as
indicated on the Drawings. In addition to form release agents, rustication
may be slightly beveled, approximately 1 to 8 maximum, to facilitate form
release.
2.
Produce the patterned concrete with a smooth finish by using either plywood
and/or tempered hardboard, complying with requirements for Grade A
Forms, in conjunction with finished lumber, or approved fiberglass liners; or
an approved equal liner. Liner joint marks shall not be apparent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATIONS
Fastening Devices for Other Work
03100-2
Coordinate with other trades and properly place and locate in position all necessary dowels,
bolts, anchors, anchor slots, inserts, sleeves, openings, hangers, metal ties and other fastening
devices required for attachment and support of adjacent work. Securely anchor all embedded
items.
3.02
FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
General
1.
Formwork shall comply with ACI 347 and to shape, lines and dimensions of
the members as indicated on the Drawings. Joints in forms shall be
horizontal or vertical. Forms shall be properly braced or tied to maintain
position and shape under all dead and live loads and to prevent leakage.
Forms shall be assembled so their removal will not damage the concrete.
Tolerances for formed surfaces shall be in compliance with ACI 301.
2.
Lumber formwork may be used for surfaces which will not be exposed to
view. Use plywood or metal forms for exposed surfaces.
3.
Provide temporary openings at the base of forms greater than 4 feet high, if
necessary, to facilitate cleaning and inspection immediately before depositing
concrete.
4.
All external corners of concrete exposed to view shall be chamfered by using
3/4 inch by 3/4 inch by 45 degree wood stripping, except as otherwise
Grade A Forms
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, Grade A forms shall be used for all exposed
concrete.
2.
Grade A forms shall consist of steel forms lined with 3/16 inch thick
tempered hardboard or 1/4 inch thick plywood, or by using plywood forms.
3.
Full sized sheets shall be used wherever possible. The edges of all sheets
shall be straightened to insure tight, close fitting joints. Bulges or
depressions more than 1/8 inch in 4 feet will not be permitted. Open joints
which would permit leakage shall be sufficient cause for rejection of forms.
Other tolerances shall be as allowed by ACI 347.
Grade B Forms
1.
Use lumber, plywood or metal forms. All joints shall be solidly backed,
aligned and made leak-proof.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, Grade B Forms are intended for use where
concrete will not be exposed to view, such as below grade, below normal
liquid levels in water-retaining structures, or inside manholes, boxes, vaults,
03100-3
etc.
D.
Surface Treatment of Formwork
The inside surface of lumber forms shall be soaked with clean water prior to placing
concrete. All other forms shall be treated with an approved form oil or lacquer. If
oil is used, all excess oil shall be wiped off.
E.
Inspection of Formwork
Concrete shall not be placed until the forms have been inspected by the Engineer to
assure surfaces in conformance with the Contract Drawings and Contract
Documents. The inspection of formwork by the Engineer does not relate to the
structural adequacy or the safety of the formwork.
F.
Removal of Forms
Forms shall be removed in accordance with requirements of ACI 318, without
damaging the concrete. Leave shoring in place until concrete will safely support its
own weight plus any live loads that may be placed upon it.
END OF SECTION
03100-4
SECTION 03250
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.02
1.
Construction joints.
2.
Anchors and inserts.
3.
Waterstops.
1.
Materials for built-in items of other work.
2.
Form ties and accessories - Section 03100.
3.
Joint sealants - Section 07900.
SUBMITTALS
Samples and Certifications
Samples and certifications for all materials herein shall be submitted in accordance with
Division 1 and as directed by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
JOINT FILLERS
A.
B.
Joint fillers shall be products of the following manufacturers:
1.
W. R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, Illinois.
2.
W. R. Grace and Co., Cambridge, Massachusetts.
3.
Or acceptable equal.
Preformed Sponge Rubber Joint Filler
Preformed sponge rubber joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type I.
03250-1
C.
Preformed Cork Joint Filler
Preformed cork joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type II.
D.
Preformed Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler
Preformed bituminous fiber joint filler shall be non-extruding type conforming to
ASTM D1751.
E.
Control Joint Strips
Control joint strips shall have a minimum depth of 25 percent of slab thickness and
minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.
2.02
JOINT SEALANTS
Sealants for joints shall be as indicated under Execution and in accordance with Section
07900.
2.03
WATERSTOPS
A.
Waterstops shall be either rubber (SBR or Neoprene) or PVC and shall be dense,
homogeneous and uniform. PVC is preferred. Holes and imperfections shall be
cause for rejection.
B.
Waterstops for construction joints shall be 4 inch by 3/16 inch minimum split
waterstops or 6 inch by 3/8 inch minimum with hollow center bulb. Waterstops for
expansion joints shall be 9 inch by 3/8 inch with 3/4 inch hollow center bulb.
Multiple rib type of waterstop is preferred, if available. Where size and type of
waterstop are not indicated, 6 inch by 3/8 inch minimum with hollow center bulb
shall be used.
C.
Provide prefabricated tees, crosses, and other configurations as required for all
intersections of waterstop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
Remove existing concrete and provide openings for installation of new work as indicated on
Drawings. Repair all damage to existing work caused by concrete removal.
3.02
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A.
General
1.
Arrange construction joint bulkheads to allow concrete to be placed between
03250-2
construction joints in one continuous operation.
B.
2.
Provide construction joints with shear transfer keyways and waterstops as
indicated. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, spacing of
construction joints for walls shall not exceed 75 feet.
3.
Erect bulkheads where shown on the Drawings or where approved by the
Engineer. Bulkheads shall be at right angles to the main reinforcement and
shall produce a tongue and grooved joint of the configuration indicated on the
Drawings. Install waterstop as indicated.
4.
Obtain the Engineer's approval if it becomes necessary to eliminate or
relocate construction joints shown on the Drawings.
5.
Tops of edge forms, bulkheads and screeds shall be set to the finished
elevations and to provide uniform pitch to drains as indicated on
Drawings.
Horizontal Joints
Provide methods of achieving a leak-proof joint. No horizontal construction joints
will be permitted in slabs, beams, or girders.
C.
Vertical Joints
Joints in reinforced slabs, beams, and girders shall be perpendicular to the axis or
plane of the members joined.
3.03
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General
Provide expansion joints and waterstops where indicated. Joint fillers shall be placed
on each side of waterstop.
B.
Interior Horizontal Joints
Unless otherwise indicated, provide preformed sponge rubber or preformed cork
filler. Allow for installation of two component traffic grade polyurethane sealant in
compliance with Section 07900.
C.
Exterior Horizontal Joints
For drives, pavements, parking areas, walks and slabs on grade, provide preformed
non-extruding asphalt strip or bituminous fiber joint filler set 1/8-inch below finished
surface unless otherwise indicated. Tool concrete edges on each side of joint. No
sealant is required.
03250-3
D.
Interior and Exterior Vertical Joints
Unless otherwise indicated, provide preformed sponge rubber or cork filler with
allowance for installation of two-component polysulfide sealant in compliance with
Section 07900.
E.
Submerged Horizontal and Vertical Joints
Unless otherwise indicated, provide preformed sponge rubber or cork filler with
allowance for installation of two-component polysulfide sealant in compliance with
Section 07900.
3.04
WATERSTOPS
A.
Provide continuous waterstops where so indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Embed approximately half of the waterstop on each side of the joint. Field splice and
joint PVC waterstop by heat sealing butt joints. Rubber waterstop shall be spliced or
jointed with solid web rubber unions and the manufacturer's approved cold applied
cement.
C.
All splices and joints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations to produce a water-tight joint. Lap splices will not be permitted.
Support and protect the waterstop during construction. Repair or replace all
damaged waterstop.
END OF SECTION
03250-4
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
General requirements for formwork, reinforcement, accessories and cast-in-place concrete.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
B.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) latest edition:
1.
ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings
2.
ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting
3.
ACI 306 - Cold Weather Concreting
4.
ACI 315 - Detailing Manual
5.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
6.
ACI 347 - Formwork for Concrete
latest edition:
AASHTO T152 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
C.
1.
ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Reinforced Concrete
2.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars
3.
ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
4.
ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates
5.
ASTM C39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength
6.
ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete
7.
ASTM C138 - Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content
03300-1
1.03
1.04
8.
ASTM C143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
9.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
10.
ASTM C173 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
(Volumetric Method)
11.
ASTM C231 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
(Pressure Method)
12.
ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
13.
ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
14.
ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit reinforcement steel shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, the General
Conditions and prepared in accordance with ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice
for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. Drawings shall indicate bending
diagrams, shapes, dimensions, clearances, splicing and laps, accessories, and
installation notes.
B.
Submit manufacturer's literature for all admixtures proposed for the work.
C.
Submit delivery tickets in accordance with ASTM C94 for each batch of readymixed concrete. Information on the ticket shall include class of concrete, water
content, time of loading, truck number, admixtures, and quantity.
D.
At least 35 days prior to placing of concrete, the Contractor shall submit proposed
mix proportions and samples of proposed materials.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Materials and methods of mixing and placing concrete shall conform to ACI 318,
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
B.
Tests for slump shall be made when directed by the Engineer in accordance with
ASTM C143.
C.
Air content tests shall be made, when directed by the Engineer, in accordance with
ASTM C138, C173, C231, or AASHTO T-152.
03300-2
)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FORMWORK
Formwork lumber shall be straight and clean. All nails shall be withdrawn and surfaces in
contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned before reuse.
2.02
2.03
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcement bars shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars, except as
otherwise indicated.
B.
Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. Where welded wire fabric is
shown but not sized on Drawings, use 6" x 6" x W2.9 x W2.9 WWF.
C.
Accessories for proper installation of reinforcement shall conform to CRSI "Manual
of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction". Bar supports at exposed
surfaces shall be Class C-Plastic Protected.
D.
Reinforcement fabrication shall conform to ACI 315 and ACI 318, and approved
shop drawings.
JOINT FILLERS
A.
2.04
Joint fillers shall be products of the following manufacturers:
1.
W. R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, Illinois.
2.
W. R. Grace and Co., Cambridge, Massachusetts.
3.
B.
Preformed bituminous fiber joint filler shall be non-extruding type conforming to
ASTM D1751.
C.
Control joint strips shall have a minimum depth of 25 percent of slab thickness and a
minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Water shall be clean and potable.
B.
Portland cement shall be ASTM C150 Type I, II or III.
C.
Aggregate
1.
Fine and coarse aggregate shall be clean, hard, natural, or manufactured
03300-3
)
material conforming to ASTM C33.
2.
D.
The nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall not be larger than threefourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars.
Coordinate with maximum aggregate sizes specified hereafter for classes of
concrete.
Admixtures
Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260 (air entrainment) or C494 (water
reduction) and shall be products of one of the following manufacturers, or acceptable
equal:
1.
Dewey and Almy Chemical Div., W. R. Grace and Co.
2.05
2.
Euclid Chemical Co.
3.
Master Builders Co.
4.
Sika Chemical Corp.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Vapor barrier shall be polyethylene film 0.006 inches thick and shall conform to
Product Standard PS-17.
B.
Liquid Membrane Curing Compound
C.
1.
Membrane curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309, Type 1 or Type
2. Type 2 compound shall be used for P.C.C. pavement only. All
permanently exposed exterior slabs shall receive clear acrylic curing and
sealing compound. Moisture loss shall not be more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm
when applied to 200 sq. ft./gal.
2.
Products shall conform to the above and shall be products of one of the
following manufacturers, or acceptable equal:
a.
W.R. Meadows "Curettard"
b.
Sonneborn-Contech "Sonsil"
c.
Burke Co. "Res-Xnu"
d.
Lambert Corp. "Gardseal"
Chemical Hardener
1.
Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and
zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, conforming to Federal
Specifications TT-C-800A and Corps of Engineers Specification CE 204.
03300-4
)
2.
2.06
Products shall conform to the above and shall be products of one of the
following manufacturers, or acceptable equal:
a.
Euclid Chemical Co. "Surfhard"
b.
Sonneborn-Contech "Lapidolith"
c.
Master Builders "Saniseal"
d.
Lambert Corp. "Solidus"
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Concrete not indicated otherwise shall be Class A concrete.
B.
The proportions of cement, aggregate, and water shall be selected by the Contractor
in accordance with ACI 318 to provide a plastic and workable mix. Coarse
aggregate shall be limited to prevent harshness and honeycombing. Coarse aggregate
size shall not be greater than the maxima listed for the various classes of concrete
and as previously specified under aggregate.
C.
Class A Concrete
Class A structural concrete shall have a 28-day strength of 4000 psi, shall contain not
less than 658 pounds (7 bags) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, shall have a
water-cement ratio of not more than 0.41 (4.6 gallons per bag of cement), and shall
contain 4 percent to 6 percent entrained air, by volume, except interior slabs subject
to abrasion shall not contain more than 3 percent entrained air. In addition, Class A
concrete shall contain a water-reducing, densifying admixture and have a maximum
slump of 4 inches. The maximum aggregate size for slabs shall be 1 inch.
D.
Class B Concrete
Class B lean concrete shall have a 28-day strength of 3000 psi, it shall contain not
less than 508 pounds (5.4 bags) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, shall have a
water-cement ratio of not more than 0.5 (5.6 gallons per bag of cement), and shall
have a 5-inch maximum slump. The maximum aggregate size shall be 1 inch.
E.
Admixtures
1.
Water-reducing densifying admixture added to Class A concrete shall reduce
the water-cement ratio while maintaining slump and compressive strength.
Use as manufacturer recommends.
2.
Other admixtures may be proposed by the Contractor or requested by the
Engineer and shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Subject to
approval, admixtures may be used for the following:
03300-5
)
3.
a.
To increase slump up to 50% while maintaining compressive strength
and water-cement ratio.
b.
To retard set during hot weather.
Calcium chloride, admixtures containing calcium chloride, or admixtures not
approved, in writing by the Engineer, are prohibited.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
GENERAL
A.
Comply with ACI 305 or 306 for hot or cold weather concreting.
B.
Do not mix salt, chemicals, or other foreign materials with the concrete to prevent
freezing without approval of the Engineer. Maintain the temperature of concrete
above 50 degrees F for 5 days after placement. When high early strength Portland
cement concrete is used, the temperature shall not be less than 70 degrees F for 2
days or 50 degrees F for 3 days.
C.
In no case shall the temperature of concrete exceed 90 degrees F at the time of
placement.
PREPARATIONS
A.
Coordinate with other trades and properly place and locate in position all necessary
dowels, bolts, anchors, anchor slots, inserts, sleeves, openings, hangers, metal ties
and other fastening devices required for attachment and support of adjacent work.
Securely anchor all embedded items.
B.
The sub-grade and/or bedding shall be compacted and free of frost. If placement is
allowed at temperatures below freezing, provide temporary heat and protection as
required to remove all frost. Saturate the sub-grade approximately 8 hours before
placement and sprinkle ahead of the placement of concrete in areas where vapor
barrier is not used. Remove all standing water, ice, mud, and foreign matter before
concrete is deposited.
C.
On porous sub-grade or beddings, or where indicated on the Drawings, provide vapor
barrier. Lay vapor barrier sheets with 6-inch edge laps and tape or seal with mastic.
Stretch and weight edges and laps to maintain their positions until concrete have
been placed. Coordinate with placement of reinforcement.
FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS
A.
Formwork shall comply with ACI 347 and to shape, lines and dimensions as
indicated on the Drawings. Forms shall be properly braced or tied to maintain
position and shape under all dead and live loads and to prevent leakage. Forms shall
be assembled so their removal will not damage the concrete. Tolerances for formed
surfaces shall be in compliance with ACI 301.
03300-6
)
3.04
B.
Lumber formwork may be used for surfaces which will not be exposed to view. Use
plywood or metal forms for exposed surfaces.
C.
The inside surface of lumber forms shall be soaked with clean water prior to placing
concrete. All other forms shall be treated with an approved form oil or lacquer. If
oil is used, all excess oil shall be wiped off.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
The placement of reinforcing steel shall conform to "Placing Reinforcing Bars", as
published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute except as noted.
B.
Splices, Laps, and Dowels
C.
3.05
1.
Provide continuous reinforcement or dowels through construction joints.
One half of reinforcement shall be discontinued across control joints unless
otherwise indicated. All reinforcement shall be discontinued across
expansion joints.
2.
Splice laps shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
Fabric Reinforcement for Slabs
1.
Fabric reinforcement for slabs shall be overlapped at splices not less than the
spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches. Fabric shall extend to within 4
inches of concrete edges.
2.
Unless otherwise shown, place reinforcement 2 to 3 inches below the top of
the finished slab. Mesh shall either be sandwiched between two layers of
fresh concrete or supported on mesh supports. Supports that may puncture
the vapor barrier, if any, shall not be used.
JOINTS
A.
Provide construction joints with shear transfer keyways as indicated.
B.
Tops of edge forms and screeds shall be set to the finished elevations and to provide
uniform pitch to drains as indicated on Drawings.
C.
For drives, pavements, parking areas, walks and slabs on grade, provide preformed
non-extruding asphalt strip or bituminous fiber joint filler set 1/8-inch below finished
surface unless otherwise indicated. Tool concrete edges on each side of joint. No
sealant is required.
03300-7
)
3.06
3.07
3.08
BATCHING
A.
Materials for concrete shall be proportioned and batched according to the approved
design mix.
B.
Water shall be measured to within 1 pint of the total amount required per batch.
Admixtures shall be measured by weight or volume to an accuracy of 3 percent.
MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
A.
Concrete shall be ready-mixed or job-mixed at the Contractor's option. Ready-mixed
concrete shall be mixed and delivered to the project in accordance with ASTM C94.
Job-mixed concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318.
B.
Concrete shall be in its final position within one hour after the water and aggregate
have been added to the cement, except in cool weather (50`F or less).
C.
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to place of final deposit in such manner
to prevent separation or loss of ingredients.
GENERAL CONCRETE PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Concrete placement shall be as follows:
3.09
A.
All Structural Concrete:
Class A Concrete
B.
Sidewalks:
Class B Concrete
DEPOSITING CONCRETE
A.
Concrete shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 and within
ten (10) feet of its final position. Place concrete only during normal working hours
unless the Engineer is notified at least 24 hours in advance. Concrete shall not be
placed until the Engineer has approved the formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items and debris has been removed.
B.
Whenever new concrete is to be placed against existing surfaces, roughen and clean
the surface to improve bond.
C.
Depositing Slabs and Flatwork
1.
Provide runways and chutes to discharge concrete close to final position to
minimize spreading and segregation.
2.
Place slabs-on-grade using formed construction joints. Maximum size of
pour shall be 40 feet each way for slabs with wire mesh reinforcement and 75
feet each way for slabs with bar reinforcement. Allow 24 hours between
pours of adjacent slabs. Provide joints as specified or shown. Set continuous
03300-8
)
joint strips between slabs and abutting vertical surfaces as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.10
FINISHING SLABS AND FLATWORK
A.
B.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following slab finishes:
Description
Concrete Finish
Class A concrete surfaces
Class B concrete surfaces
Submerged slabs
Exposed slabs
Ramps and walks
3 trowellings
Float
1 trowelling
3 trowellings
Float & broom finish
Concrete Tolerances
1.
Concrete shall be within ¼-inch of a 10-foot straightedge in all directions
except where slabs are dished for drains. Deviations from the elevation
indicated shall not exceed ¼-inch.
2.
Slabs sloped for drainage shall not have depressions which retain water.
Screeding
1.
Immediately after placement, screed concrete with straightedges or power
strike-offs. Do not use roller screeds or vibrating screeds.
2.
Stakes for wet screeds shall be driven down flush with sub-grade or pulled
out as work progresses to avoid disturbing screeded concrete.
3.
For drains in level slabs, form a 5-foot diameter depression approximately ½inch below the adjacent slab surface.
4.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, slabs sloped for drainage shall
be uniformly pitched toward the drains at 1/8-inch per foot. Form a dished
depression at drains unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Immediately after screeding, darby surface with wood or magnesium darby to
eliminate ridges and to fill in voids left by screeding.
E.
Float Finish
1.
Float concrete using magnesium or aluminum hand floats or power floats
after the concrete has stiffened to a point where only a ¼-inch indentation can
be imparted by normal foot pressure.
2.
Float finish shall result in a uniform, smooth, granular texture. After floating,
check slab tolerances with 10-foot straightedge. Fill low spots with fresh
03300-9
)
concrete; do not sprinkle with dry cement.
F.
G.
3.11
3.12
Trowel Finish
1.
Where scheduled, or indicated, trowel with steel trowels after floating.
2.
Initial trowelling shall be done either by power or by hand with the trowel
blade kept as flat as possible against concrete surface to prevent washboard
or chatter effect.
3.
Second trowelling may be done by power if three trowellings are scheduled.
If two trowellings are specified, second trowelling shall be done by hand.
4.
Third trowelling shall be done by hand and shall continue until the concrete
is consolidated to a uniform, smooth, dense surface free of trowel marks and
irregularities.
5.
Allow sufficient time between successive trowellings to allow the concrete to
become harder. Each successive trowelling shall be done with trowels that
are progressively smaller and are tipped more to increase compaction of the
concrete surface.
Broom at right angles to direction of traffic to give a non-skid finish. Use a fine,
soft-bristled broom for pedestrian ramps and walks, and a coarse, hard-bristled
broom for vehicular pavement.
CONTROL JOINTS
A.
Control joints for non-structural slabs shall consist of partial depth plastic strips set
flush with finished surface or 1/8-inch wide joints cut with a diamond saw. Control
joints shall be one-quarter to one-third the depth of the slab unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Saw joints as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently so aggregate will not be
dislodged but before shrinkage stresses develop cracks. Sawn joints shall be filled
with joint sealant in accordance with Section 07900.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, spacing of control joints shall not
exceed 25 feet in each direction.
PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
Comply with ACI 305 and 306 for protecting and curing concrete in hot and cold
weather. Fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, premature drying and
excessively hot or cold temperatures, and shall be maintained with minimal moisture
loss for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper
hardening of the concrete. Cure all concrete for a minimum period of 7 days (3 days
for high early strength concrete) after placing.
03300-10
)
B.
C.
Flatwork
1.
Immediately after finishing, begin curing by covering with constantly
saturated moisture retaining fabrics, impervious sheeting, or membrane
curing compounds. Surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with a fine spray
before they are covered with sheeting.
2.
Sheeting shall provide complete surface coverage with all joints lapped at
least 4 inches and shall be placed and secured in a manner that will not mar
or damage the concrete surface.
Membrane Curing Compounds
1.
2.
D.
Apply compound hereinbefore specified in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Apply by spraying in a two-coat continuous operation.
Apply the coats at right angles to each other with a coverage of 200 square
feet per gallon per coat. Begin application not later than 4 hours after
finishing of the surface. The application shall result in an uninterrupted
adherent film free of defects.
On surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, paint, seamless flooring, or other
adhesive bonded finishes, either the membrane curing compound shall be
compatible with the bonding agent or the curing compound shall be removed
with sandblasting, acid etching or grinding, to the satisfaction of the installer
of the finish surfacing. Bonded surfaces that fail to adhere to the concrete
shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
Concrete Floor Hardener
Apply hardener to floors of mechanical and electrical rooms and in other areas as
required. Application shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as follows:
1.
Hardener shall be applied at original container consistency without dilution to
dry, clean surfaces no sooner than 30 days following completion of curing.
NOTE: Hardener shall not be applied over surfaces covered with membrane
curing agent.
2.
Application shall generally be a three-coat process adjusted to accommodate
extreme concrete densities only if prior review has been obtained from the
Architect. Application coverage shall be made at the approximate rate of one
gallon to 100 square feet.
3.
Apply first and second coats generously to surface, mop or squeegee standing
water to leave a uniformly wet surface, and then allow to dry. Apply third
coat in a manner similar to first two, except that surplus must be scrubbed
with stiff bristled broom and flushed from floor surface with clear water.
03300-11
)
Scrubbing and flushing shall remove all traces of effervescence. Remove
excess water and then allow to dry.
3.13
3.14
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
All concrete not formed as indicated on the Drawings within tolerances specified in
ACI 347 shall be removed and replaced.
B.
Temperature and shrinkage cracks which develop prior to final acceptance of the
work shall be repaired.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK
Provide concrete equipment pads and supports as indicated and conforming to approved shop
drawings. Fastening devices and accessories shall be located by templates or setting
diagrams furnished by the manufacturer.
3.15
CLEAN-UP
A.
B.
3.16
All concrete floor construction shall have the surfaces thoroughly scrubbed and
cleaned with clear water. After cleaning, the floors shall be protected until they are
accepted.
Clean all surfaces affected by the Concrete Work. No extraneous concrete or
discoloration shall be left on any construction.
CONCRETE TESTING
A.
Compressive Strength Tests
Conform to ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. One set of four cylinders for each 50 cu.
yds., or fraction thereof, of each strength concrete placed in any one day. Test one
specimen at seven days; test two specimens at 28 days. One specimen shall be
retained for 56 days and tested only at the direction of the Engineer.
B.
Slump Tests
Conform to ASTM C143. Perform one test for each load point of discharge and one
for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
END OF SECTION
03300-12
)
S E CT I O N 03410
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: This Section specifies the materials, labor and equipment required to
construct manholes, wetwells, valve vaults, mitered end sections, meter boxes and all other
precast concrete structures, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, all materials, workmanship and practices shall
conform to the following standards.
1. Standard Building Code
2. Local Codes and Regulations
3. ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
5. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
B. The forms, dimensions, concrete, and construction methods shall be acceptable to the County
in advance of construction.
1.03
B. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the County, showing all details of
construction, reinforcing and joints.
C. Submit manufacturer's data on certifications and testing for concrete waterproofing additive,
joint mastic, gaskets and grout material to be used.
03410 - 1
rev: August, 2012
1.04
INSPECTION
A. The quality of all materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished sections shall be
subject to inspection and acceptance by the County. Such inspection may be made at the place
of manufacture or at the site after delivery, or at both places, and the sections shall be subject
to rejection at any time due to failure to meet any of the specification requirements; even
though sample sections may have been acceptable as satisfactory at the place of manufacture.
Sections rejected after delivery to the job shall be marked for identification and shall be
removed from the job at once. All damaged sections will be rejected. If damaged sections
have already been installed; they shall be acceptably repaired if authorized by the County, or
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
B. At the time of inspection, the sections will be carefully examined for compliance with the
ASTM designation specified and the acceptable manufacturer's drawings. All sections shall
be inspected for general appearance, dimension, "scratch strength", blisters, cracks,
roughness, and soundness. The surface shall be dense and close textured.
C. Imperfections may be repaired subject to the review and acceptance of the County after
demonstration by the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. Repairs shall be
carefully inspected before final review and acceptance. Cement mortar used for repairs shall
have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000-psi at the end of 7-days and 5,000-psi at the end
of 28-days, when tested in 3-inch by 6-inch cylinders stored in the standard manner. Epoxy
mortar may be utilized for repairs subject to the review and acceptance of the County.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
2.02
PRECAST CONCRETE SECTIONS
A. Precast concrete wetwell sections, manhole barrel and eccentric top sections shall conform to
specifications for precast reinforced concrete manhole sections, ASTM Designation C478,
except as otherwise specified below or as shown on the Drawings. Details of precast
sections shown on the Drawings, including thickness and reinforcing, shall supersede ASTM
C-478 when such details are more stringent than ASTM C-478. The method of construction
shall conform to the detailed Drawings appended to these specifications and the following
additional requirements:
1. The minimum wall thickness for the various size barrel sections shall be 5-inches, or as
indicated in the Drawings.
2. Barrel sections shall have tongue and groove joints. Joints shall be sealed with cold adhesive
preformed plastic gaskets set in double rows on the tongue and in the groove prior to setting
the next section. Gaskets shall be K.T. Snyder "Ram-Nek", Conseal "CS-102" or acceptable
equal. All extension joints shall be sealed with Portland Type II cement after setting of
gasket and placement of manhole section into a watertight joint.
3. Type II cement shall be used except as otherwise accepted.
03410 - 2
rev: August, 2012
4. New concrete structures shall contain a crystalline waterproofing concrete admix for all
new concrete structures including but not limited to manholes, ARV vaults, wetwells,
and wetwell top slabs. Crystalline waterproofing concrete admix shall be added to the
concrete during the batching operation. Admixture concentration shall be added based
upon manufacturer's design percent concentration of admixture to the required weight of
cement. The amount of cement shall remain the same and not be reduced. A colorant
shall be added to verify the admixture was added to the concrete. Colorant shall be
added and provided at the admixture manufacturing facility, not at the concrete batch
plant. It is recommended that the admixture be added first to the rock and sand and
blended thoroughly before adding cement and water or per the manufacturer's
recommendations. Concrete structures without crystalline waterproofing admixture or
admixture without colorant for field verification shall be rejected. Contractor shall
provide certification from the pre-caster that the admixture was added in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. Concrete admixture shall be manufactured and
supplied by an approved manufacturer as shown in Appendix D "List of Approved
Products."
5. The date of manufacture and the name or trademark of the manufacturer shall be clearly
marked on the inside of each precast section. Each section must be inspected and
stamped by an accredited testing laboratory.
6. Sections shall be cured by an acceptable method for at least 28-days.
7. Manhole top sections shall be eccentric except that precast concrete slabs shall be used
where cover over the top of the pipe is less than 4-feet for all manholes. Lift rings or
non-penetrating lift holes shall be provided for handling precast manhole sections. Nonpenetrating lift holes shall be filled with non-shrink grout after installation of the
manhole sections.
8. Precast concrete slabs over top section, where required, shall be capable of supporting
the overburden plus a live load equivalent to ASHTO H 20 loading.
9. The tops of bases shall be suitably shaped to mate with the adjoining precast section.
10. Precast leveling rings for setting cast iron frames over manholes shall be 2-inch thick and
have 1 (one) Number 2 continuous reinforcing steel bar.
11. Concrete surfaces shall have form oil, curing compounds, dust, dirt, and other interfering
materials removed by brush sand blasting and shall be fully cured prior to delivery.
12. Interior surfaces of manholes, wetwells and valve vaults shall be lined in accordance
with Appendix D "List of Approved Products."
13. Manholes to be installed around existing gravity sewers shall consist of a cast-in-place
concrete base slab and precast concrete barrel and top sections; lined per Section 3410 –
2.01.11. The base slab shall be as shown on the Drawings and include a joint which is
compatible with the bottom barrel section and acceptable to the County. The bottom
barrel section shall include an inverted "U-shaped" slot to allow installation of the
section over existing pipes. Flow channels shall be provided within the manholes as
shown on the Drawings. Annular space between the existing pipe and slot shall be made
watertight with non-shrink grout. Existing pipes shall be removed within the manhole
and outlets plugged watertight with non-shrink grout as shown on the Drawings.
03410 - 3
rev: August, 2012
14. The manholes shall have an invert channel shaped to correspond with the lower half of
the pipe. The top of the shelf shall be at the elevation indicated and shall be sloped to
drain toward the flowing through channel. Every effort shall be made by the Contractor
to construct watertight structures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. All manholes and other precast structures shall be set in the dry.
B. Manholes and other precast structures shall be constructed to the dimensions as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
C. The base structure may be cast-in-place concrete as specified in Division 3. The concrete
structure shall be placed on the required crushed stone base as shown in the Drawings over a
dry sub base of structural fill that has been compacted to 95% (percent) of the maximum dry
density as determined by the modified proctor test, ASTM D1557. The tops of the cast in
place bases shall be shaped to mate with the precast barrel section and shall be adjusted in
grade so that the top of the dome section is at the correct elevation.
D. Precast bases conforming to all requirements of ASTM C478 and other requirements for
precast sections may be used and shall be set on a sub base as described above.
E. Precast concrete structure sections shall be set vertically with sections in true alignment with
a 1/4-inch maximum tolerance per 5-feet of depth. The outside and inside joint shall be
filled with a non-shrink mortar and finished flush with the adjoining surfaces. Allow joints
to set for 24-hours before backfilling. Backfilling shall be accomplished bringing the fill up
evenly on all sides. If leaks appear in the structures, the inside joints shall be caulked with
non-shrink grout to the satisfaction of the County. The Contractor shall install the precast
sections in a manner that will result in a watertight joint.
F. Lift rings or non-penetrating lift holes shall be provided for handling pre-cast manhole
sections. Non-penetrating lift holes shall be filled with non-shrink grout after installation.
G. Where holes must be cut in the precast sections to accommodate pipes, cutting shall be done
prior to setting them in place to prevent any subsequent jarring which may loosen the mortar
joints.
H. Cast iron frames shall be placed over precast concrete leveling rings, shimmed and set in
cement mortar to the required grade. No more than 3 courses of leveling rings shall be used.
END OF SECTION
03410 - 4
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install grout
complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Perform all sampling and furnish all testing of materials and products by an
independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer but engaged by and at the
expense of the Contractor.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork
B.
Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories
C.
Section 03300 - Concrete
D.
Section 05570 - Miscellaneous Metal Assemblies
SUBMITTALS
Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the Division 1, shop drawings and product data
showing materials of construction and details of installation for:
A.
Laboratory Test Reports
Submit laboratory test data as required under Section 03300 for concrete to be used
as concrete grout.
B.
Certifications
Certify that commercially manufactured grout products and concrete grout
admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days curing.
C.
Qualifications
Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least ten (10) years
experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts which they will supply.
03600-1
1.04
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic
Surfacings
2.
ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical
Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes.
3.
ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures
4.
ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement
Grout (Nonshrink)
5.
ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD)
CRD-C 621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Nonshrink Grout
C.
1.05
Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the
time of bid opening shall apply.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications
Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the
production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work.
B.
Pre-installation Conference
Well in advance of grouting, hold a pre-installation meeting to review the
requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each
product proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the
meeting at least ten (10) days prior to its scheduled date.
C.
Services of Manufacturer's Representative
A qualified field technician of the nonshrink grout manufacturer, specifically trained
in the installation of the products, shall attend the pre-installation conference and
shall be present for the initial installation of each type of nonshrink grout. Additional
services shall also be provided, as required, to correct installation problems.
03600-2
1.06
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with
the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed
instructions.
B.
Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Total
storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be limited to 6
months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less.
C.
Material which becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately
removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional expense
to the Owner.
D.
Nonshrink cement-based grouts shall be delivered as pre-blended, prepackaged
mixes requiring only the addition of water.
DEFINITIONS
Nonshrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in either the
plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state and bonds to a clean
base plate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
GENERAL
A.
The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the purpose
of establishing the standard of quality desired.
B.
Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to
provide standardization of appearance.
MATERIALS
A.
Nonshrink Cementitious Grout
Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM
C1107 Grades B or C and CRD-C 621. Grouts shall be Portland cement based,
contain a pre-proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage compensating
agents and shall require only the addition of water. Nonshrink cementitious grouts
shall not contain expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no
shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827.
General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated
above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set Grout by Master Builders,
03600-3
Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid
Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout Corp. or approved equal.
B.
C.
Concrete Grout
1.
Concrete grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300 except as
specified herein. It shall be proportioned with cement, pozzalan, coarse and
fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to produce a
mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi nominal
strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8-in maximum. Slump should not
exceed 5-in and should be as low as practical yet still retain sufficient
workability.
2.
Synthetic reinforcing fibers as specified in Section 03200 shall be added to
the concrete grout mix at the rate of 1.5-lbs of fibers per cubic yard of grout.
Fibers shall be added from the manufacturer's pre-measured bags and
according to the manufacturer's recommendations in a manner which will
ensure complete dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments
within the concrete grout.
Water
Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or
other deleterious substances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design strength
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B.
Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, dirt,
grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose material or
foreign matter which may affect the bond or performance of the grout.
C.
Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical means to
ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken concrete.
Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound,
free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete.
Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the oil-less type
or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from being blown onto the
surface.
D.
Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal embedments or
bottom of baseplates prior to the installation of the grout.
03600-4
E.
Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 hours
prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved
by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker hose, flooding
the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon completion of the 24
hour period, visible water shall be removed from the surface prior to grouting. The
use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of surface saturation shall only be used
when approved by the Engineer for each specific location of grout installation.
F.
Epoxy-based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. Surfaces
in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting.
G.
Construct grout forms or other leak-proof containment as required. Forms shall be
lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer. Forms
shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place and shored to resist the
forces imposed by the grout and its placement.
Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic head
and shall have chamfer strips built into forms.
3.02
H.
Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the
structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer.
I.
Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by shims,
wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and blocking devices
shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond breaking coatings
and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and this Section.
B.
Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing
and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand.
C.
Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout
between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours thereafter or as
recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take precautions to
minimize differential heating or cooling of baseplates and grout during the curing
period.
D.
Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended
by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the temperature of the
materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 90 degrees F range.
E.
Install grout in a manner which will preserve the isolation between the elements on
either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or control
joint.
03600-5
F.
3.03
3.04
Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through the
grout.
INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS
GROUTS
A.
Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand,
pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer.
B.
Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is
recommended. Pre-wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add pre-measured
amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum amount
of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum additional
water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum
recommended water content.
C.
Placements greater than 3-in in depth shall include the addition of clean, washed pea
gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be added.
D.
Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid segregation or
entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material.
Placement should proceed in a manner which will ensure the filling of all spaces and
provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as
necessary.
E.
Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement
grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (re-temper) after initial
stiffening.
F.
Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a 45
degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish.
G.
Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout
moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours
after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate the grout
surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or other approved means.
Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing
method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or
curing is finished.
INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT
A.
Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the surface
with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface clean until
placement of concrete grout.
03600-6
3.05
B.
Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt and
other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water. Flushing of
debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted.
C.
Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the concrete
grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker hoses, or by
other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just prior to
placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the
concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry
over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8-in
thick cement paste. A bonding grout composed of 1 part Portland cement, 1.5 parts
fine sand, an approved bonding admixture and water, mixed to achieve the
consistency of thick paint, may be substituted for the cement slurry.
D.
Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for
surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless
specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper
mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed.
E.
Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings.
F.
Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast-in-place concrete.
SCHEDULE
The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used:
A.
General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where non shrink
grout is called for on the plans except for base plates greater in area than 3-ft wide by
3-ft long and except for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in
concrete.
B.
Flowable nonshrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater in area
than 3-ft by 3-ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive flowable nonshrink grout
by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her option and convenience, may also
substitute flowable nonshrink grout for general purpose nonshrink cementitious
grout.
C.
Nonshrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts and
reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated to receive
epoxy grout.
D.
Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base plates for
structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for platforms, base plates
for beams, etc. It shall not be used when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on
the Drawings or for grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns
and girders.
END OF SECTION
03600-7
SECTION 04100
MORTAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.02
Work under this Section
1.
Furnishing mortar and masonry grout materials.
2.
Mixing mortars and masonry grouts.
1.
Concrete - Division 3.
2.
Unit Masonry - Section 04200.
3.
Concrete Unit Masonry - Section 04220.
SUBMITTALS
Samples
Submit samples of mortar materials as requested by the Engineer in compliance with
Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Cement
Use one brand of cement throughout the work. Portland cement shall conform to
ASTM Cl50, Type I or II. Masonry cement shall conform to ASTM C9l.
B.
Hydrated Lime
Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S or Type N. Quick-lime shall
conform to ASTM C5, slaked in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
04100-1
C.
Lime Putty
Lime putty made from quick-lime shall be slaked and allowed to soak at least 24
hours before using. Lime putty made from Type S hydrated lime may be used
immediately after mixing.
D.
E.
Admixtures
1.
Waterproofing admixtures for mortar shall comply with Fed. Spec. SS-C1960/1, consisting of water-repellent stearates and pozzolanic plasticizers in
powder form.
2.
No salt, anti-freeze liquid, accelerator, or other admixture will be permitted
without the written approval of the Engineer.
Sand
Sand shall conform to ASTM Cl44; except that sand for mortar in joints l/4-inch or
less shall pass a No. l6 sieve. Sand containing any substance which will stain the
masonry shall not be used.
F.
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C404. Aggregate
containing any substance which will stain the masonry shall not be used.
G.
Water
Water shall be clean and potable.
2.02
MORTAR
A.
Proportions
1.
2.
Mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C270 and in the proportions,
measured in parts by volume, as follows:
a.
Type M - 1 Portland cement and 1 masonry cement, (or) 1 Portland
cement and 1/4 hydrated lime or lime putty.
b.
Type S - 1/2 Portland cement and 1 masonry cement, (or) 1 Portland
cement and 1/4 to 1/2 hydrated lime or lime putty.
c.
Type N - 1 masonry cement (or) 1 Portland cement and 1/2 to 1-1/4
hydrated lime or lime putty.
The volume of sand shall be not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the
sum of the volumes of cement and lime used, measured in a loose, damp
04100-2
condition.
B.
Strength
The compressive strength of mortar cube specimens shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C91 using the same materials and proportions that will be
used for the mortar in the construction. Mortar shall have an average compressive
strength at 28 days as follows:
C.
1.
Type M -2500 psi
2.
Type S -1800 psi
3.
Type N - 750 psi
Application
Use Type S mortar for all exterior walls, load bearing partitions and interior masonry
below grade. Use Type N or S for interior non-load bearing masonry above grade,
except as otherwise noted on the Drawings. Add waterproofing admixture in
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations to all mortar to be used in
masonry exposed to weather or in contact with earth. Use Type M where indicated
on the Drawings.
2.03
MASONRY GROUT
A.
Coarse grout for masonry lintels and for filling cells in masonry units shall consist of
1 part Portland cement, 1/10 parts hydrated lime or lime putty, 1-1/2 parts of coarse
aggregate and 2-1/2 parts sand.
B.
Fine grout for bedding and grouting structural steel shall be as specified in Division
3.
C.
Add waterproofing admixture in compliance
recommendations to all grout used in exterior walls.
D.
In lieu of masonry grout, Class A concrete as specified in Division 3 may be used, or
shall be used if so indicated.
with
the
manufacturer's
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Equipment for mixing mortar and grout shall be clean and free of hardened mortar,
dirt and foreign matter.
B.
Mix all mortar and masonry grout in a mechanical batch mixer for a minimum of 5
minutes after all materials have been added. Mortar and masonry grout shall be used
within 1-1/2 hours at temperatures over 80` F and within 2-1/2 hours at temperatures
04100-3
below 80` F.
3.02
MORTAR
Adjust the consistency of the mortar to the satisfaction of the mason but add only as much
water as needed to make a workable mortar. If the mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation
or from absorption of a part of the mixing water, re-temper by adding water and remix the
mortar. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set.
3.03
MASONRY GROUT
A.
Mix all masonry grout in accordance with ASTM C476. Masonry grout shall have a
consistency at time of placement to yield a slump as required to facilitate placement
and appropriate for the absorption of the masonry units. Slump shall be between 8
inches and 10 inches when measured using ASTM C143.
B.
If Class A concrete is used in lieu of masonry grout, it shall be mixed and placed as
specified in Division 3.
END OF SECTION
04100-4
SECTION 04150
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.02
Work Under this Section
1.
Masonry reinforcement, anchors, and ties
2.
Control and expansion joints
3.
Bonding and anchorage
1.
Concrete - Division 3.
2.
Mortar - Section 04100.
3.
Unit masonry - Section 04200.
4.
Concrete unit masonry - Section 04220.
5.
Anchor bolts, bearing plates, steel lintels - Division 5.
6.
Sealants - Section 07900.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings of the following items in compliance with Division 1:
A.
Reinforcement for masonry lintels, bond beams, etc.
B.
Control and/or expansion joints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
REINFORCEMENT BARS
Reinforcement bars for lintels, bond beams, pilasters and other masonry reinforcement shall
04150-1
conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2.02
2.03
JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
Joint reinforcement shall be prefabricated from zinc-coated cold drawn steel wire in
accordance with ASTM A116, Class 2 or 3 coating. Side wires shall be 8 gage
deformed wire. Truss rods shall be 9 gage smooth or deformed wire, welded to side
wires in the same plane at 16-inch centers. Provide prefabricated pieces for corners
and intersections of walls. Reinforcement shall be truss type approximately 2 inches
narrower than the nominal thickness of the wall or partition.
B.
Reinforcement used in cavity walls shall have a drip between masonry wythes.
WIRE-MESH TIES
Wire-mesh ties shall be 16 gage or larger diameter zinc-coated steel wire woven into ½-inch
mesh and cut into strips 1-inch narrower than the width of walls in which they are used.
Zinc-coating shall conform to ASTM A116, Class 2 or 3 coating.
2.04
RIGID STEEL ANCHORS
Rigid steel anchors shall be a minimum of 1" x 1/4" x 26" long with each end turned up not
less than 2 inches. Anchors shall be zinc-coated conforming to ASTM A116, Class 2 or 3.
2.05
FLASHINGS – N/A
2.06
SEALS AND GASKETS FOR CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
Seals and gaskets for control and expansion joint shall be of closed cell natural or synthetic
rubber. Provide seals and gaskets of indicated shapes and in locations as specified or
indicated on Drawings. Seals and gaskets shall be resistant to oils and solvents and shall be
flexible after being exposed to temperature of minus 40º F.
2.07
NYLON ROPE – N/A
2.08
WIRE TIES
2.09
A.
Wire ties shall be fabricated from 3/16-inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire
conforming to ASTM A116, Class 2 or 3 coating. Ties shall be at least 4 inches wide
and embedded 4 inches into backup material, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
B.
Ties used in cavity walls shall have a drip between masonry wythes.
CORRUGATED OR CRIMPED METAL TIES
Corrugated or crimped metal ties shall be galvanized steel sheet not less than 7/8-inch wide,
22 gage thickness and 6 inches long, with plain ends. Galvanized finish shall comply with
04150-2
ASTM A153, Class B-2.
2.10
FASTENINGS FOR STONE
Furnish and install all anchors, dowels, clamps, clips, bolts, and other attachments shown or
necessary to fasten and anchor stone in place. Steel wire shall be zinc-coated in accordance
with ASTM Specification A116 for Class 2 coating. Stainless steel shall be used to fabricate
the sizes, shapes and types of all anchoring and fastenings as indicated on details and the
approved shop or setting drawings.
2.11
DOVETAIL ANCHOR SLOTS
Slots for dovetail anchors shall be of 24 gage commercial galvanized sheet metal. Furnish
staples and end caps.
2.12
DOVETAIL ANCHORS
Dovetail anchors for anchoring masonry to concrete shall be compatible with anchor slots.
Anchors shall be 16 gage zinc-coated (commercial galvanized) sheet steel, minimum 1 ½inch wide and 12 inches long with a 9-inch corrugated end.
2.13
DOVETAIL TIES
Dovetail ties for tying brick to concrete shall be compatible with anchor slots. Ties shall be
3/16-inch diameter hot dipped galvanized wire formed in a triangular configuration. Length
of ties shall be as required to extend 2 inches minimum into the brick bed joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
Install horizontal continuous joint reinforcement in all unit masonry walls, back-ups,
and partitions. Reinforcement shall start not more than 8 inches above the masonry
supporting surface and end within the top full mortar joint, or as indicated on the
Drawings, and shall be spaced at maximum 16-inch centers vertically.
B.
Reinforcement shall be placed in the first three mortar joints above lintels and below
openings. Extend the reinforcement at least 24 inches past jambs. In addition,
provide wire ties alternating with reinforcement 16 inches on centers vertically and
within 12 inches of opening jambs.
C.
Reinforcement shall be continuous but shall not pass through vertical masonry
expansion or control joints unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Side rods of
horizontal joint reinforcement shall be lapped at least 6 inches at splices.
D.
Joint reinforcement shall be placed in a manner to assure 5/8-inch mortar cover on
the exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch mortar cover on interior faces.
04150-3
E.
3.02
At intersections bond each course with wire mesh ties or prefabricated joint
reinforcement spaced not to exceed 16 inches vertically.
VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT
Install vertical reinforcement bars in the hollow cores of masonry units where indicated on
the Drawings. Fill all cells containing reinforcement with masonry grout or Class A concrete
for the full height of the reinforcement.
3.03
3.04
ANCHORAGE
A.
All masonry unit partitions that abut exterior walls, except when control joints occur
at such locations, shall be anchored once every 16 inches vertically with rigid steel
anchors. Anchors shall extend at least 4 inches into wall and not less than 18 inches
into partition.
B.
When intersecting walls are carried up separately, the vertical joint shall be regularly
toothed or bonded with 8-inch offsets and the joints provided with rigid steel anchors
spaced not more than 24 inches apart vertically.
C.
At intersecting partitions, the vertical joint shall be tied with wire mesh ties spaced at
16 inches vertically.
MASONRY ANCHORS
A.
Provide dovetail anchor slots in concrete for securing masonry facing and masonry
partitions to concrete walls, columns, beams, etc.
B.
Where concrete walls or beams more than 16 inches high are faced with masonry
veneer, place anchor slots vertically at 24-inch horizontal centers for the entire height
of wall or beam.
C.
Where concrete columns are faced with masonry or where a masonry partition or a
masonry wall abuts a concrete member, provide a continuous vertical anchor slot as
required to receive anchors for the facing or abutting masonry.
D.
Seal face of slots with tape or pack with felt filler to prevent entrance of cement or
grout. Set anchor slots straight at proper locations and securely fasten to forms to
prevent displacement while concrete is being poured. In all cases slots shall extend
for the full height of the masonry facing or masonry partitions.
E.
Masonry shall be anchored to concrete with dovetail anchors spaced at 16-inch
centers vertically along the anchor slot.
END OF SECTION
04150-4
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.
This Section includes the general construction requirements which apply
to all unit masonry work.
2.
a.
Mortar - Section 04100.
b.
Masonry Accessories - Section 04150.
c.
Concrete Unit Masonry - Section 04220.
Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Deliver, store, and handle in compliance with Division 1.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
Masonry shall be constructed to comply with all applicable local, state, and federal
codes and regulations.
B.
Allowable Tolerances
1.
Unit masonry shall be constructed within the following tolerances.
2.
Variation from plumb for lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and risers
shall not exceed the following:
a.
1/4 inch in 10 feet.
b.
3/8 inch in any story or 20 feet.
c.
04200-1
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other
conspicuous lines shall not exceed the following:
a.
1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet.
b.
Variation from level or grade elevations for exposed lintels, sills, parapets,
and other conspicuous lines shall not exceed the following:
a.
1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet.
b.
Variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and
related portions of columns, walls and partitions shall not exceed the
following:
a.
1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet.
b.
The maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and
thickness of walls shall be no less than 1/4 inch smaller and no more than 1/2
inch larger.
Sample Wall Panel
Erect a sample wall panel at least 6 feet wide by 4 feet high, separate from the
building. Sample panel shall be a typical exterior brick-face wall with block backup,
joint reinforcement and ties, wall damp-proofing, and insulation. Sample panel shall
show the proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar color, joints and workmanship.
The approved panel shall become the standard for comparison for unit masonry work
on the project. Panel shall not be altered, moved, covered, or removed until the
masonry work is complete and approved by the Engineer.
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Cold Weather
1.
No masonry work shall be done when the temperature is below 40 degrees F
or is forecast to be below 40 degrees F during the next 24 hours unless
necessary precautions are taken to protect the masonry work from freezing at
any time within 48 hours after being placed. Such precautions shall include
preheating the mortar sand and water, protecting the finished wall surfaces
with tarpaulins and heating the enclosed surfaces around the freshly laid
masonry as recommended by the Brick Institute of America in Technical
Note 1A, latest version.
04200-2
B.
2.
No salt, anti-freeze liquid, accelerator or other admixture shall be used
without written approval of the Engineer.
3.
If masonry is installed when the temperature is below 40 degrees F, do not
apply uniform roof or floor loading for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads
for at least 3 days after completing masonry columns or walls.
Hot Weather
Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in
an ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F or higher in the shade with relative
humidity less than 50%.
C.
Protection
Protect facing materials from staining. Cover top of walls with a non-staining of 2
feet down each side of the wall and shall be held securely in place. Before resuming
work, clean the top surface of masonry of loose mortar and foreign material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Prior to starting work, examine adjoining work which may affect masonry work and
report unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer in writing. Work shall not proceed
until the condition has been corrected.
B.
All scaffolding and falsework shall be ample in strength and well secured. Masonry
work exceeding 10 feet in height shall be properly braced and supported until
masonry is self-supporting. The Contractor is responsible for the strength, safety,
and conformity to law of all scaffolding and falsework.
C.
Install all lintels, anchors, flashings, ties, sleeves, hangers, frames, reinforcement,
receptacles, pipes, conduits and other accessories to be recessed or concealed in
masonry. Use a power driven cutting wheel for cutting and patching masonry as
required to accommodate work of other trades.
D.
Build masonry solidly against frames, bucks, and abutting building construction,
bedding all anchors solidly. Bearing walls shall fit tightly under structural members.
Interior non-load-bearing partitions shall terminate in an even line 1/2 inch below
structural members, and the space shall be filled with a continuous resilient joint
filler specified in Section 07900, installed in a slightly pre-compressed state to insure
complete seal.
04200-3
3.02
E.
Spaces around frames and other built-in items shall be solidly filled with mortar as
each course is laid. Provide joints between masonry and frames, and wherever
necessary for proper installation of caulking and sealants. Prepare grooves by raking
out the mortar no less than 1/4 inch and more than 3/8 inch wide to a uniform depth
of at least 3/4 inch.
F.
Before closing up any pipe or duct in inaccessible spaces or shafts with masonry,
remove all rubbish and sweep out area to be enclosed.
G.
Do not shift masonry units after lying unless both unit and mortar are removed and
the unit is laid with fresh mortar.
H.
Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean the exposed
surfaces of the set masonry to obtain the best possible bond with the new work.
Remove all loose masonry units and mortar. If it is necessary to stop-off a horizontal
run of masonry, rack back one-half masonry unit length in each course. Toothing
will not be permitted.
I.
Provide 3/8-inch nylon weep rope in the head joint mortar over the top of steel
lintels, shelf angles, and ledge supports and where flashings and waterproofing
terminate in horizontal joints. Space weeps approximately 24 inches apart
horizontally. Keep area around weeps free from mortar droppings. Upon completion
of masonry work, neatly trim all nylon rope to within 1/8 inch of masonry face.
J.
Keep masonry units as clean as possible during progress of the work. Allow all
mortar droppings that stick to masonry to set prior to removal to avoid compaction of
the mortar into the face of the unit. Protect lower wall surfaces from splashes caused
by mortar droppings.
POINTING AND CLEANING MASONRY
A.
Upon completion, all joints shall be carefully pointed, filling all holes. Cut out
defective joints, re-point them with mortar, and tool to match adjacent joints.
B.
Dry brush masonry walls at the end of each day's work and after final pointing.
Leave walls clean and free from mortar spots and droppings.
C.
Upon completion of the work, clean masonry surfaces using fiber brushes and a trisodium phosphate solution. Acid shall not be used for masonry cleaning. Not less
than 7 days prior to cleaning the entire structure, apply the proposed cleaning agent
to a small inconspicuous area to demonstrate that there will be no adverse affect on
the mortar or masonry. Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean water after cleaning.
D.
Protect adjacent work from damage. All damage resulting from cleaning and other
masonry work operations shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the
Owner.
END OF SECTION
04200-4
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.
Requirements for installing unit masonry.
2.
Concrete block masonry.
Concrete – Division 3.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
Certification
Furnish a certificate attesting compliance with the requirements stated herein and, upon
request, submit best results performed on a minimum of five (5) units of each type to
determine compliance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
STANDARD CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete masonry units shall have actual face dimensions of 7-5/8" X 15-5/8" and be
of the widths indicated on the Drawings. Provide lintel and other special units as
necessary for the conditions indicated.
B.
Units shall be free from all deleterious matter that will stain plaster or paint or
corrode metal. Faces shall be of uniform texture and free of chips, spalls or other
irregularities. Units to be painted shall have fine textured surfaces.
C.
Load-bearing concrete masonry units shall comply with ASTM C145 for solid units
and C90 (Federal Spec SS-C-621B) for hollow units. Use Grade N, Type I, for all
load-bearing masonry work.
D.
Non-load bearing concrete masonry units shall comply with ASTM C129, Type I.
(At the Contractor's option, load bearing units may be substituted for non-load
bearing units.)
04220-1
2.02
E.
Lightweight concrete masonry units shall be manufactured using aggregate
complying with ASTM C331.
F.
The moisture content shall not exceed 35 percent of total absorption. The maximum
linear drying shrinkage shall not exceed 0.045 percent when tested in accordance
with ASTM C426.
CONTROL JOINTS
Control joints shall consist of natural or synthetic rubber or plastic joint strip (shear key)
installed in sash block or control joint blocks designed to form a shear key. Resilient shear
keys shall have a durometer hardness of not less than 70 in compliance with ASTM D2240.
The shear key shall be of the shape and dimensions specified on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, units shall be laid in running
bond. Horizontal joints in interior partitions shall line up with joints of concrete
block of exterior walls. Except where control joints occur, bond all corners and
intersections with a masonry bond.
B.
Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Webs shall also be bedded in all courses of exterior walls,
bearing walls, piers, columns, pilasters, in starting course on footings and solid
foundation walls and around cells that are to be reinforced or filled with grout. Lay
solid units with full head and bed joints. Do not wet concrete block before or during
lying.
C.
Exposed outside corners of concrete block not indicated on the Drawings as bullnose
shall be slightly chamfered with a carborundum stone.
D.
Where cast-in-place masonry lintels are required, they shall be formed in place with
specially shaped bond-beam or lintel units. Except where otherwise indicated, eightinch deep masonry units may be used to construct lintels over openings not
exceeding 4'-0" in width and sixteen-inch deep masonry units shall be used over
openings 4'-0" to 6'-0" wide. Lintels for openings exceeding 6'-0" in width shall be
as indicated on the Drawings. Masonry lintels shall be reinforced as detailed on the
Drawings but the bottom reinforcing shall not be less than one No. 4 bar per each
nominal 4-inch wall thickness or fraction thereof. Cores of lintel block shall be
solidly filled with masonry grout or Class A concrete. Cores of bond beam block
shall be solidly filled with Class A concrete. Unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings, lintels shall extend no less than 8 inches beyond the edges of the clear
opening. Provide temporary supports under lintels as necessary.
E.
Provide solid level bearings directly under points of bearing. Solid bearing shall be
04220-2
of the size and thickness indicated and shall consist of not less than three courses of
concrete brick, two courses of solid concrete block, or two courses of hollow
masonry units filled solid with masonry grout. Fill cells of hollow units with grout
wherever bolts, anchors, or similar items occur.
3.02
CONTROL JOINTS
A.
Provide 3/8-inch continuous vertical control joints in masonry as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Joint reinforcement shall be discontinued at control joints unless otherwise indicated.
Control joints shall not pass through bond beams except where specifically noted on
the Drawings.
C.
The location of control joints shall be as follows and as indicated on the Drawings.
D.
3.03
1.
At all interior wall openings and where indicated at exterior wall openings,
from one end of lintel upward and from corresponding end of sill downward.
2.
At partition or wall intersections supported on slabs-on-grade, from
intersection at a distance of no less than 2 feet and no more than 1/2 the
partition height.
3.
Control joints exposed to view shall be raked to a depth of 3/8-inch and
neatly tooled square and smooth. Where concrete block is scheduled to be
painted, provide sealant for full height of joints.
On the weather side of exterior walls, control joints shall be raked out to the depth
required for caulking and sealing. On the exposed-to-_inch and neatly tooled square
and smooth.
TOOLING
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed mortar joints shall be tooled with a round
jointer to produce smooth, dense concave joints, except as otherwise noted. The
jointer shall be slightly larger than the width of the mortar joint so that complete
contact is made along the edge of the units. Avoid excessive burrs at the
intersections of head and bed joints. When stopping work, arrange to have the last
joints tooled when the mortar has set sufficiently.
B.
Exterior joints below grade may be trowel-pointed.
C.
Block to receive ceramic tile, furring, lath, or insulation shall be finished with
smooth flush joints.
END OF SECTION
04220-3
SECTION 05025
METAL MATERIALS, METHODS AND FASTENING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section includes the basic materials and methods required for the work of
Division 5, Metals.
B.
Painting - Section 09900.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
STEEL
A.
Steel shall comply with ASTM A36, unless otherwise specified.
B.
Structural steel tubing shall comply with ASTM A500, Grade B or ASTM A501.
C.
Steel pipe shall comply with ASTM A53, Grade B.
STAINLESS STEEL
Stainless steel shall comply with ASTM A167, type 316.
2.03
2.04
ALUMINUM
A.
Aluminum for structural and rolled shapes shall be Aluminum Association alloy
6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum for extruded shapes shall be Aluminum Association alloy 6063-T6.
C.
Aluminum for pipe shall be Aluminum Association alloy 6063-T6.
D.
Aluminum for castings shall be Aluminum Association alloy F-514, or approved
equal.
CAST IRON
A.
Gray iron for castings shall comply with ASTM A48, Class 30 or approved equal.
05025-1
B.
2.05
2.06
Malleable iron castings shall be made of high grade white iron, fully annealed, of
uniform ductile strength and shall comply with ASTM A197.
BOLTS
A.
High strength bolts shall comply with ASTM A325 with suitable nuts and washers,
complying with ASTM A354, Grade BC.
B.
Anchor bolts and connection bolts for steel assemblies shall comply with ASTM
A307.
C.
Anchor bolts and connection bolts for aluminum shall be stainless steel.
WELDING ELECTRODES
Filler metal for welding shall comply with AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code.
2.07
GROUT
Grout for bedding and grouting structural steel shall be non-shrink grout.
2.08
FABRICATION
A.
B.
General
1.
Fabricate all metal parts to comply with the design indicated on the
Drawings. Make field measurements and prepare templates as required to
ensure proper fit. Assemblies shall be fitted together in the shop and
delivered to the site complete and ready for installation.
2.
Form metal shapes with sharp lines and angles, and finish with smooth
surfaces. Shearings and punchings shall be clean and true. In general, holes
for bolts shall be drilled or reamed 1/16-inch larger than the diameter of the
bolt. Holes for anchor bolts shall be 1-1/3 times the anchor bolt diameter.
3.
Metal thicknesses, assembly details, and supports shall provide ample
strength and stiffness. Joints shall be designed to prevent trapping of
moisture.
Shop Coatings
1.
Prepare and shop prime ferrous metal in compliance with Section 09900. Do
not shop prime stainless steel, aluminum, galvanized or plated metals,
bronze, or machined bearing surfaces.
2.
Anchors, sleeves, and metal parts built into masonry or concrete shall be
galvanized or coated with a bituminous paint.
05025-2
C.
3.
Castings for exterior exposure shall be cleaned and coated with coal-tar-pitch
varnish.
4.
Hot-dip galvanizing for products fabricated from steel shapes, plates, bars,
and strips shall comply with ASTM A123. Hot-dip galvanizing for
assembled steel products shall comply with ASTM A386. Except for bolts
and nuts for field assembly, galvanize all subassemblies immediately after
fabrication. Hardware shall be galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153.
5.
Aluminum in direct contact with dissimilar metals, concrete, or masonry shall
be coated with a heavy-bodied bituminous paint or covered with nonabsorptive insulating tape or gasket.
Fasteners and Connections
1.
Provide fastening devices as required and in compliance with the Drawings
and shop drawings. Provide welded shop connections or concealed fastenings
wherever practicable.
2.
Power-driven fasteners shall be of the types and sizes recommended by the
manufacturer for the particular application. Power-driven fasteners that will
be exposed to view shall be set through a steel finishing disc. When set in
concrete or masonry, the minimum penetration of power-driven fasteners
shall be six times the diameter of the shank.
3.
Structural joints made using high strength bolts, hardened washers, and nuts
tightened to a high bolt tension shall comply with the "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", issued by the Research
Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation.
4.
Welded joints shall comply with AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code, and
AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings". All welds shall be made by operators who have been
previously qualified as prescribed by AWS B3.0, Welding Procedure and
Performance Qualification. All welds exposed to view shall be dressed
smooth.
Anchor holes in concrete or masonry for grouted bolts shall be a minimum of
1-1/2 times the bolt shank diameter. Anchor holes in concrete and masonry
for expansion type anchor bolts shall comply with the bolt manufacturer's
recommendations.
5.
6.
Screw heads shall be countersunk. Bolt threads shall be nicked to prevent nut
loosening.
05025-3
2.09
TEMPLATES, LEVELING PLATES, AND APPURTENANCES
Provide all templates, leveling plates, and appurtenances required for the installation of metal
work.
END OF SECTION
05025-4
SECTION 05570
MISCELLANEOUS METAL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.02
1.
Lintels, plates, and miscellaneous angles
2.
Equipment supports
3.
Fabricated frames
4.
Pit and trench covers and frames
5.
Bar screen (trash rack)
6.
Truck guards
7.
Stop plates, grooves, and stop log grooves
8.
Aluminum hatch covers
9.
Aluminum louvers
1.
Metal Materials, Methods, and Fastening - Section 05025.
2.
Painting - Section 09900.
SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings and product data for the work of this Section in compliance with
Section 01300.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND CONNECTIONS
Materials, fabrication, shop coatings, and fasteners and connections shall comply with
Section 05025.
05570-1
2.02
LINTELS, PLATES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ANGLES
Provide lintels, plates, and miscellaneous angles as indicated on the Drawings or required.
Lintels shall have a minimum 8-inch bearing at each end unless otherwise indicated. Weld
or bolt members together to form a complete assembly. Install plates and angles as indicated
on the Drawings. Where bolts and straps are shown attached to plates, angles, and lintels,
provide a 1 ¾-inch diameter by 15-inch long anchor bolt or 2 ¼-inch by 1-inch by 8-inch
long strap anchor at each end, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Properly embed
fasteners into concrete or masonry.
2.03
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Provide equipment supports as indicated on the Drawings or required to support and anchor
mechanical equipment, including roof-mounted items.
2.04
FABRICATED FRAMES
Provide fabricated frames for openings in floors and walls as indicated on the Drawings.
Construct frames of channels, angles, and flat or bent plates or combinations of shapes and
materials as detailed. Frames shall be accurately squared, mitered, butted, or coped as
necessary, shall be fully welded, and all welds on exposed surfaces shall be ground smooth.
Weld straps or anchors of sizes and spacing indicated to the back of frames for anchoring
into concrete or masonry. Where size and spacing of anchors are not indicated, use 1/4" x 2"
x 8" straps with ends hooked 2 inches, and space the straps not more than 18 inches apart.
Frames shall be aligned and accurately leveled to finish flush with adjacent surfaces.
2.05
PIT AND TRENCH COVERS AND FRAMES
Provide steel frames and non-skid steel plate covers where indicated on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1-inch x 8-inch long bent bar anchors, welded to frames
and spaced not more than 18 inches on centers. Frames shall be aligned and accurately
leveled to finish flush with adjacent surfaces. Covers shall be in sections not more than 4
feet long; allow approximately 1/8-inch between the ends of adjoining sections. Provide
hinges and suitable lift-holes near the ends of each section of cover.
2.06
BAR SCREEN (TRASH RACK) – N/A
2.07
TRUCK GUARDS
Provide truck guards where indicated on the Drawings. Fabricate truck guards of required
lengths using concrete filled steel tubing or pipe or steel angles with masonry anchors, set
flush with adjacent surfaces.
2.08
STOP PLATES, GROOVES, AND STOP LOG GROOVES
A.
B.
Stop Plates for weirs and baffles shall be fabricated from 3/8-inch minimum
aluminum alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 or fiberglass, as indicated on the Drawings.
Corners shall be rounded approximately 1/8-inch radius for smooth sliding.
Stop Plate Grooves for weirs and baffles shall be extruded aluminum alloys 6061-T6
or 6063-T6 as indicated on the Drawings. Grooves shall be one piece, have integral
05570-2
concrete anchors and welded miter corners, and be designed for the thickness of stop
plates plus 1/8-inch. Grooves shall be as manufactured by Washington Aluminum
Co., Baltimore, MD; Neenah Foundry Co., Neenah, WI; or equal. All aluminum in
contact with or embedded in concrete shall be protected in accordance with the AA
Specification.
2.09
C.
Aluminum Angles shall be attached in pairs to form grooves on the face of existing
concrete. Use 2-inch by 2-inch by 3/8-inch angles and expansion anchors, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Protect all aluminum in contact with dissimilar
materials in accordance with AA recommendations.
D.
Stop Log Grooves shall be of cast iron or fabricated metal sections of the type and
dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
ALUMINUM HATCH COVERS
A.
2.10
Provide and install aluminum hatch covers of the sizes and opening types indicated
on the Drawings. Covers shall be constructed of 1/4" aluminum diamond plate with
adequate reinforcing for a design loading of 300 lbs. per square foot. Accessories to
include the following:
1.
All stainless steel hardware and accessories.
2.
Forged brass or stainless steel hinges.
3.
Automatic hold open arm and cover release.
4.
Removable key wrench with slam lock with inside handle.
5.
Flush lifting handle.
6.
Hasp and staple lock.
B.
Hatch covers shall be as manufactured by an approved manufacturer listed in
Appendix D of Orange County’s Manual of Standards and Specifications for
Wastewater and Water Main Construction.
C.
The Contractor shall coordinate cover sizes with concrete dimensions.
ALUMINUM LOUVERS – N/A
PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not Used
END OF SECTION
05570-3
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
Sealants for joint materials in concrete, masonry and stonework, Caulking and sealants to
obtain weather-tight construction, Backups and fillers not specified elsewhere.
1.02
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 3 - Concrete
B.
Division 4 - Masonry
REFERENCES
1.04
1.05
A.
ASTM C1193 - standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
B.
ASTM C1299 - Standard Guide for Use in Selection of Liquid Applied Sealants
C.
ASTM D6690 - Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt
Pavements
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product data for sealants.
B.
Submit samples of materials for approval as requested by the E/A. Samples shall be
accompanied by a certificate of compliance with applicable ASTM or Federal
Standards where specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
All materials shall be products of one of the following manufacturers, or equal:
A.
W.R. Meadows, Inc.
B.
W.R. Grace and Co.
C.
Euclid Chemical Co.
D.
Sika Chemical Corp.
07900-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Sealants shall be compatible with adjacent materials.
B.
Sealants shall be provided as follows:
TABLE 07900-1
SEALANTS
Feature
Sealant Type
Control joints in masonry
Polysulfide
Sawed control joints in concrete slabs
Expansion joints in concrete and masonry,
interior
Expansion joints in concrete and masonry,
exterior
Submerged joints in concrete
Epoxy, 2-component
Polysulfide or rubber-asphalt
Polysulfide, 2-component
Around frames and louvers in exterior walls
Acrylic or polysulfide
Joints in sills and thresholds
Acrylic or polysulfide
Around frames in interior walls
Oil-Base caulk, butyl or acrylic
Acrylic, polysulfide or
polyurethane
Acrylic, polysulfide or
polyurethane
Polysulfide
Precast concrete panels
Ceiling joints in precast concrete deck units
Joints in precut stone panels
2.02
Polysulfide or Polyurethane
POLYSULFIDE AND POLYURETHANE SEALANT
Polysulfide and polyurethane sealants shall be one-component elastomeric sealants. Use
Type 1, self-leveling, in joints on horizontal surfaces; use Type 2, non-sag, for joints in
vertical and sloping surfaces.
2.03
EPOXY
All interior non-metallic floor slab sawed control joints shall be filled with Euco Epoxy 491
by Euclid Chemical Co., Sikadur Lo-Mod Mortar by Sika Chemical Corp., or acceptable
equal.
07900-2
2.04
ACRYLIC SEALANT
Acrylic polymer sealant shall be solvent release type.
2.05
BUTYL SEALANT
Butyl polymer sealant shall be solvent release type.
2.06
RUBBER-ASPHALT SEALANT
Hot applied sealant shall conform to ASTM D6690.
2.07
CAULKING
Oil base and resin base caulk shall conform to industry standard per material and application.
2.08
2.09
BACK-UPS AND FILLERS
A.
Back-ups and fillers shall be non-absorbent and non-staining, compatible with
sealant and primer. Do not use materials impregnated with oil or bitumen.
B.
Resilient fillers shall be closed-cell resilient urethane foam, polyvinyl chloride foam,
polyethylene foam, vinyl or sponge rubber, or polychloroprene tubes or rods. Fillers
shall be approximately 25 percent to 50 percent wider than the joint. Braiding hose
or rod stock to obtain sufficient size will not be permitted.
C.
Supporting type fillers shall be closed-cell rigid foam, cork or non-impregnated fiber
board of the size and shape indicated and as required for proper installation of
sealant.
BOND BREAKERS
Bond Breakers shall be polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive, aluminum foil or
wax paper.
2.10
PRIMERS
Primers shall be non-staining type, as recommended by manufacturer of sealant for the
material in contact.
2.11
COLORS
All sealant and caulking compounds shall be non-staining and color fast. Colors shall be
selected by the Engineer but, in general, shall match the adjacent surfaces. At least twelve
appropriate colors shall be available from which selections can be made.
07900-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION OF SURFACES
Examine all surfaces to be sealed or caulked and correct all conditions preventing proper
installation. Application of sealant or caulking shall constitute acceptance of the surface.
3.02
3.03
3.04
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.
Prepare surfaces to receive sealant or caulking in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Joints shall be raked out and cleaned to full width
and depth required to accommodate back-up and sealant materials. Remove dirt, oil,
grease, and all loose materials that would inhibit bond.
B.
Metal and non-porous surfaces shall be solvent cleaned and wiped dry to remove
residue.
C.
Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be sound and fully cured. Remove form oils,
curing compounds, water repellents, and laitance. Test for sealant adhesion; if
required the surfaces shall be completely cleaned by chemical or mechanical means.
APPLICATION OF CAULKING
A.
Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Oakum or rope yarn packing may be used to fill voids more than ¾-inch deep.
Compact to a dense, solid mass. Completely fill the joint with caulking applying
sufficient pressure to force out all air.
C.
Caulking shall be struck smooth and finished with a general appearance of mortar.
Take care to avoid over-filling, fins, overlapping on adjacent surfaces, or applying
where sealant is liable to curl, loosen or trap moisture. Caulking shall be uniformly
finished and free of wrinkles.
APPLICATION OF SEALANTS
A.
Follow manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, surface preparation, primer,
application and curing of sealants. Apply sealants in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's timing and temperature requirements.
B.
Install suitable back-up material to provide sealant dimensions as detailed. When
using back-up of hose or rod stock, roll the material into the joint to avoid lengthwise
stretching.
C.
Use bond breaker strip where required between sealant and supporting type back-up
material and in all joints where sufficient room for back-up does not exist.
07900-4
D.
E.
3.05
Protect adjacent porous surfaces by applying masking tape in continuous strips in
alignment with joint edges. Remove tape immediately after sealant has been tooled.
The depth of sealant shall be equal to joint width in joints up to ½ inch wide, ½ inch
deep for joints ½ inch to 1 inch wide and a depth of one-half the width for joints over
1 inch wide.
F.
Point or tool joint surface slightly concave. When tooling white or light colored
sealants, follow recommendations of the sealant manufacturer to avoid staining.
G.
If requested by the Engineer, prepare a stonework and/or precast panel sample joint
for approval by the Engineer. All subsequent joints shall conform to approved
samples.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Temporarily cover or protect joints from injury until the compound has set and
protective surface films have formed.
B.
Clean sealant from adjacent surfaces. Use solvent or cleaning agent as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a
neat, clean condition. Stained or damaged adjacent work shall be repaired or
replaced.
END OF SECTION
07900-5
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work under this Section includes but is not limited to painting of plaster, wood, metal,
masonry, and other surfaces designated to be painted except factory-applied finishes.
The Contractor shall provide materials and labor to produce. Painting shall be
performed at such times and in such places as the Contractor and Engineer may agree
upon in order that dust-free and neat work is obtained. All painting shall be done in
strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and shall be
performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
B.
1.02
1.
Color Coding and Identification
2.
Factory-applied finishes and certain shop primers for products are designated
in the product specifications elsewhere.
BASIS OF BID
Schedule of coating colors will be furnished by the Engineer after award. Strong colors may
be selected for doors, piping, equipment, and miscellaneous features.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Painting Schedule
1.
Within 30 days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, in writing, the name of the paint manufacturer for the Project.
2.
Prior to submitting shop drawings for any item requiring shop or field applied
primer or finish coatings, submit to the Engineer a Painting Schedule,
indicating major items to be painted, preparation, paint manufacturer, product
designation, and dry mill thickness. This submittal shall include the
manufacturer's written recommendation of the type paint for each item to be
painted.
Samples
09900-1
Submit three 8-1/2 inch x 11-inch samples of each scheduled color for approval by the
Engineer.
1.04
PAINTING CONFERENCE
The Contractor shall schedule a conference of the painter, Owner, a technical representative of
the paint supplier, and the Engineer to discuss painting requirements and finalize color
selections before painting is started.
1.05
SAMPLE ROOM FINISH – N/A
1.06
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
All materials shall be delivered to the job in original sealed and labeled containers of the paint
manufacturer, and shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. Labels shall show name of
manufacturer, type of coating, formulation, color and instructions for reducing.
1.07
1.08
ABBREVIATIONS
A.
The term "coating", as used herein, includes emulsions, enamels, paints, stains,
varnishes, sealers, and other coatings, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish
coats.
B.
SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Acceptable Manufacturers
1.09
A.
It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor use one paint manufacturer
throughout, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B.
Products shall be manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed in
Appendix D from the Orange County Manual of Standards and Specification for
Water and Wastewater Construction.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications referred to in text by the basic designation only.
A.
B.
American Water Works Association, Inc. (AWWA) Standards
1.
D100-84
Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage
2.
D102-97
Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications
09900-2
C.
1.
SSPC-SP 1
Solvent Cleaning
2.
SSPC-SP 2
Hand Tool Cleaning
3.
SSPC-SP 3
Power Tool Cleaning
4.
SSPC-SP 5
White Metal Blast Cleaning
5.
SSPC-SP 6
Commercial Blast Cleaning
6.
SSPC-SP 7
Brush Off Blast Cleaning
7.
SSPC-SP10
Near White Blast Cleaning
Unless otherwise specified, all work and materials for the preparation and coating of
all metal surfaces shall conform to the applicable requirements specified in the Steel
Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications Revised, latest
edition, published by the Steel Structures Painting Council.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
All materials used in the work except oils, thinners and driers, shall be of the brands
and qualities specified.
B.
All cleaners, thinners, driers and other additives and surface pretreatment materials
shall only be those approved for use by the manufacturer of the coatings.
C.
Do not dilute paints except as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
D.
No paint containing lead or chromate will be allowed.
E.
Work areas will be designated by the Owner/Engineer for storage and mixing of all
painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of
pertinent codes and fire regulations. The Contractor shall take all safety precautions
in accordance with Section 7 of AWWA D-102, NFPA Bulletin No. 101 and all
federal, state and local regulations. Proper containers outside of the
buildings/structures shall be provided and used by the Contractor for painting wastes.
F.
All recommendations of the paint manufacture in regard to mixing, applying, thinning
and curing as well as the health and safety of the workmen shall be followed.
G.
Protective coatings for surfaces which will be in contact with potable water shall be
listed by NSF International as approved for potable water contact in accordance with
ANSI/NSF Std. 61, Section 5 Protective (Barrier) Materials.
09900-3
H.
2.02
The Contractor shall exercise every precaution in the storing of paints, solvents,
cleaning fluids, rags, and similar materials as to eliminate the risk of spontaneous
combustion or other hazardous conditions.
PAINT SYSTEMS GUIDE
The following table illustrates the general features of the standard coating systems and is
provided as a general guideline, and may be superseded by specific coating requirements
outlined within this specification or on the Drawings:
TABLE 09900-1
PAINT SYSTEMS GUIDE
System
No.
1
Generic Type
Surface Material
Finish
Typical Function
Epoxy /
Polyurethane
Ferrous Metal, Nongalvanized
Gloss
2
Polyurethane
Ferrous Metal,
galvanized
Gloss
3
Epoxy
Semigloss
4
Alkyd
Semigloss
5
Epoxy
6
Epoxy
7
Epoxy
Ferrous Metal,
galvanized
Semigloss
Semigloss
Semigloss
8
Epoxy
Ferrous Metal,
galvanized
Semigloss
9
Epoxy
Concrete
10
Epoxy
Concrete
11
Acrylic
Concrete
Semigloss
Tile-like
gloss
Low sheen
Exterior metals not
subject to immersion
or frequent splashing
Exterior metals not
Interior metals not
or condensation
Interior metals not
or condensation
Interior metals subject
to condensation
Interior metals subject
to condensation
Metals subject to
immersion or frequent
splashing
Metals subject to
immersion or frequent
splashing
Interior
12
Elastomeric
Concrete
Low sheen
09900-4
Interior walls of
washrooms
Precast concrete
ceilings, beams,
columns
Exterior concrete
TABLE 09900-1
PAINT SYSTEMS GUIDE
System
No.
13
Generic Type
Surface Material
Finish
Typical Function
Epoxy
Masonry
Interior masonry
14
Epoxy
Masonry
15
16
17
Elastomeric
Acrylic
Acrylic
Masonry
Masonry
Drywall, plaster
Semigloss
Tile-like
gloss
Low sheen
Low sheen
Low sheen
18
Acrylic
Plaster, stucco
Low sheen
19
20
Alkyd
Alkyd
Wood
Wood
21
22
Alkyd
Alkyd
Wood
Wood
23
24
Acrylic
Acrylic
25
Coal Tar
Epoxy
Coal Tar
Epoxy
Wood
Canvas wrapped
insulation
Ferrous Metal
Gloss
Semigloss
Gloss
Semigloss
Low sheen
Semigloss
Semigloss
Semigloss
26
2.03
Concrete
27
Epoxy
Ferrous Metal
28
Epoxy
Concrete
Semigloss
Semigloss
FINISH SCHEDULE
See Drawings for room finish schedule.
2.04
COATING SCHEDULE
The following coating systems are required for this project:
09900-5
Interior walls of
washrooms
Exterior masonry
Interior masonry
Interior drywall,
plaster
Exterior plaster,
stucco
Exterior wood
Exterior wood
Interior wood
Interior wood
Interior wood
Canvas wrapped
insulated piping
Metals submerged in
non-potable water
Submerged concrete
in non-potable water
or below grade
Metals submerged in
potable water
Concrete submerged
in potable water
TABLE 09900-2
COATING SCHEDULE
Description
Application
Ferrous Metal Fabrication and
Equipment, Non-Galvanized
Equipment, Galvanized
Exterior Piping, NonGalvanized
Exterior Piping, Galvanized
Interior Piping, Non-Galvanized
Exterior, Non-Immersion
System
No.
1
Interior
3
Immersion or subject to splashing
7
Exterior, Non-Immersion
2
Interior
4
8
Non-Immersion
1
Non-Immersion
Liquid Process Piping, Water Piping, and
Other Piping Subject to Condensation
Pipe other than Liquid Process Piping,
Water Piping, and Other Piping Subject
to Condensation
Liquid Process Piping, Water Piping, and
Other Piping Subject to Condensation
Pipe other than Liquid Process Piping,
Water Piping, and Other Piping Subject
to Condensation
Insulated and Canvas Wrapped Piping
2
5
Interior Piping, Non-Galvanized
Interior Piping, Galvanized
Interior Piping, Galvanized
Interior Piping
Piping, Non-Galvanized
Piping, Galvanized
2.05
6
3
4
24
7
8
COATING SYSTEMS
A.
System No. 1
1.
System No. 1 shall be used for exterior non-galvanized ferrous metals that are
not subject to immersion or frequent splashing of water or wastewater,
including but not limited to the following:
a.
Exposed exterior piping.
09900-6
Steel storage tanks.
c.
Exterior cranes and hoists.
d.
Clarifier and sludge thickener bridge top side and railings.
e.
Gate operators.
f.
Exterior mechanical equipment, control panels, miscellaneous metal,
etc. without a factory-applied final finish.
2.
System No. 1 surface preparation shall be SP 6.
3.
System No. 1 shop primer shall be one coat of one of the following, or equal:
a.
Induron P-14 Armorguard Primer at 3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT.
b.
Tnemec 37-77 Chem-Prime Universal Primer at 2.0 mils DFT.
c.
Glidden 5205 Glid-Guard Tank and Structural Primer at 2.0 mils DFT.
4.
System No. 1 field touch-up shall be the same material as Shop Primer.
5.
System No. 1 intermediate coats shall be two (2) coats of one of the following,
or equal:
6.
B.
b.
a.
Induron Armorguard Epoxy at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
b.
Tnemec Series 2 Tneme-Gloss at 1.5 mils DFT per coat.
c.
Glidden Life Master Pro High Performance Acrylic No.6900 at 1.5
mils DFT.
System No. 1 finish shall be one full coat of High Gloss aliphatic polyurethane,
of one of the following, or equal:
a.
Induron Indurethane 5500 Gloss Enamel at 1.5 to 2.5 mils DFT.
b.
c.
Glidden Life Master Pro High Performance Acrylic No. 6900 Series at
1.5 mils dry coat.
System No. 2
1.
System No. 2 shall be used for exterior galvanized ferrous metals which are not
subject to immersion or frequent splashing of water or wastewater, including
but not limited to the following:
09900-7
Exposed galvanized piping.
b.
Exposed galvanized conduit, equipment, miscellaneous metal, etc.
without a factory-applied final finish.
2.
System No. 2 surface preparation shall be SP M1.
3.
System No. 2 field clean-up includes removing all grease, oil and contaminants
with rags soaked in Toluol or Xylol in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 Solvent
Cleaning.
4.
System No. 2 primer shall be one coat of one of the following, or equal:
5.
C.
a.
a.
Induron Vinyl Wash Primer at 0.5 to 1.0 mils DFT.
b.
Tnemec 32-1210 Tneme-Grip at 0.3 to 0.5 mil DFT.
c.
Porter 1799 V.C.-17 Wash Prime at 0.5 mil DFT.
d.
Glidden Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer No. 5205/5206/5207 at
2.0 mils DFT.
System No. 2 finish shall be two (2) coats of one of the following or equal:
a.
Induron Indurethane 5500 Gloss Enamel at 1.5 to 2.5 mils DFT per
coat.
b.
c.
Porter I.A.-24 Gloss Finish at 1.5 mils DFT per coat.
d.
Glidden 4550 Series Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel at 2.0 mils
DFT per coat.
System No. 3
1.
System No. 3 shall be used for interior, non-galvanized, ferrous metals not
subject to immersion, frequent splashing or condensation, including but not
limited to the following:
a.
Interior piping, except piping subject to condensation.
b.
Exposed structural steel.
c.
Steel stairs and railings.
d.
Interior cranes and hoists.
e.
Steel doors and frames.
09900-8
f.
D.
Interior equipment, control panels, miscellaneous metal, etc. without a
factory-applied final finish.
2.
3.
a.
b.
Induron P-14 Armorguard Primer at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
c.
Porter U-Prime Universal Primer at 2.0 mils DFT.
d.
Glidden 5210 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer 5205/5206/5207
at 2.0 mil DFT.
4.
System No. 3 field touch-up shall be the same material as the shop primer.
5.
System No. 3 finish shall be two (2) coats of one of the following, or equal:
a.
Induron Armorguard Epoxy at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT per coat.
b.
Tnemec Series 23 Enduratone at 2.0 mils DFT per coat.
c.
Porter I.A.-24 Semi-Gloss at 1.5 mils DFT per coat.
d.
Glidden Ultra Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel No. UH8000 at 1.5 mils
DFT per coat.
System No. 4
1.
System No. 4 shall be used for interior, galvanized, ferrous metals not subject
to immersion, frequent splashing or condensation, including but not limited to
the following:
a.
Interior galvanized piping, except piping subject to condensation.
b.
Interior galvanized conduit, mechanical equipment, control panels,
miscellaneous metal, etc. without a factory-applied final finish.
2.
System No. 4 surface preparation shall be SP M1.
3.
Cleaning.
4.
a.
09900-9
5.
E.
b.
Tnemec 32-1210 Tneme-Grip at 0.3 to 0.5 mil DFT.
c.
Porter 1799 V.C.-17 Wash Prime at 0.5 mil DFT.
d.
Glidden Glid-Guard Tank and Structural Primer no. 5205/5206/5207 at
2.0 mils DFT.
System No. 4 finish coat shall be two (2) coats of one of the following, or
equal:
a.
Induron Indurethane 5500 Gloss Enamel at 1.5 to 2.5 mils DFT per
coat.
b.
c.
d.
Glidden Ultra Hyde Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel UH8000 at 1.5 mils
DFT per coat.
System No. 5
1.
System No. 5 shall be used for interior, non-galvanized ferrous metals subject
to condensation, including but not limited to the following:
a.
Interior liquid process and water piping.
b.
Chemical piping.
c.
Air intake piping.
2.
3.
a.
b.
c.
Porter 4300 M.C.R.-43 Epoxy Primer at 2.0 mils DFT.
d.
Glidden 5251/5252 Glid-Guard Epoxy Chromate Metal Primer at 1.5
mils DFT.
4.
System No. 5 field touch-up shall be the same material as the shop primer.
5.
09900-10
F.
b.
Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline at 2.5 mils DFT per coat.
c.
Porter M.C.R.-43 High Build Semi-Gloss Epoxy at 3.0 mils DFT per
coat.
d.
Glidden 5250/5242 Glid-Guard Epoxy Chemical Resistant Finish at
3.0 mils DFT per coat.
System No. 6
1.
System No. 6 shall be used for interior, galvanized, ferrous metals subject to
condensation, including but not limited to interior galvanized liquid process
and water piping.
2.
System No. 6 surface preparation shall be SP M1 or SP 7.
3.
Cleaning.
4.
5.
G.
a.
a.
Induron Vinyl Wash Primer 0.5 to 1.0 mils DFT.
b.
Tnemec: Series 66 at 2.5 mils DFT.
c.
Porter 45 Galvaprep at 1000 square feet per gallon.
d.
Glidden 5251/5252 Glid-Guard Epoxy Chromate Metal Primer at 1.5
mils DFT.
a.
b.
c.
Porter M.C.R.-43 High Build Semi-Gloss Epoxy at 3.0 mils DFT per
coat.
d.
Glidden 5250/5242 Glid-Guard Epoxy Chemical Resistant Finish at
3.0 mils DFT per coat.
System No. 7
1.
System No. 7 shall be used for non-galvanized, ferrous metals subject to
immersion or frequent splashing, including but not limited to the following:
09900-11
a.
Submerged piping and piping subject to splashing.
b.
Bar screen systems.
c.
Bar screen hoists.
d.
Mechanical aerators.
e.
Mixers.
f.
Submersible pumps.
g.
Flocculators.
h.
Sludge conveyors.
i.
Clarifiers, grit collectors, and sludge thickeners:
1)
Interior mechanisms.
2)
Steel weirs, troughs, supports.
3)
Bridge underside.
j.
Sluice gates, slide gates, and flap gates.
k.
Submerged miscellaneous metal, equipment, etc. without a
factory-applied final finish.
2.
3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Glidden Glid-Guard Corrosion Resistant H.S. Epoxy No. 5465 Series
at 3.0 mils DFT.
4.
Field touch-up shall be the same material as shop primer.
5.
Finish shall be two (2) coats of one of the following, or equal:
a.
09900-12
H.
b.
c.
Porter 24770/24771 Tank Lining at 3.0 mils DFT per coat.
d.
Glidden Glid-Guard Chemical Resistant Epoxy No. 5250/5242 at 5.0
mils DFT per coat.
System No. 8
1.
System No. 8 shall be used for galvanized, ferrous metals subject to immersion
or frequent splashing, including but not limited to the following:
a.
Submerged galvanized piping and piping subject to splashing.
b.
Submerged galvanized conduit, miscellaneous metal, equipment, etc.
without a factory-applied final finish.
2.
System No. 8 surface preparation shall be SP M1 and SP 7.
3.
Cleaning.
4.
5.
a.
b.
Tnemec: Series 66 at 2.5 mils DFT.
c.
d.
Glidden Glid-Guard Corrosion Resistant H.S. Epoxy Resistant No.
5465 Series at 5.0 mils DFT.
a.
b.
c.
Porter 24770/24771 Tank Lining System at 3.0 mils DFT per coat.
d.
Glidden 5250/5242 Glid-Guard Epoxy Chemical Resistant Finish
(Double Build) at 5.0 mils DFT per coat.
I.
System No. 9 – N/A
J.
09900-13
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
System No. 24
1.
System No. 24 shall be used for insulated and canvas-wrapped piping.
2.
System No. 24 surface preparation shall be general cleaning.
3.
4.
a.
Tnemec 51-792 PVA Sealer at 1.5 mils DFT.
b.
Porter 767 Latex Primer Sealer at 3.0 mils DFT.
c.
Glidden 5116 Insul-Aid Vapor Barrier Primer-Sealer at 1.7 mils DFT.
d.
Induron AC 210 Acrylic Primer at 1.5 mils DFT.
a.
b.
c.
Glidden Ultra Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel UH-8000 at 1.5 mils
DFT per coat.
09900-14
d.
Induron AC 230 Acrylic Eggshell at 1.5 mils DFT per coat.
X.
Y.
Z.
AA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
MIXING
A.
Exercise care to keep fire hazards to a minimum. Provide an approved hand fire
extinguisher near each paint storage and mixing area. No oily waste, rags, or painting
equipment shall be left scattered throughout the premises.
B.
Mix coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Colors shall be
thoroughly mixed with no streaks or separation of color. Do not add thinners, driers or
other additives except as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Do not
incorporate in the coating any thinners or solvents used for cleaning brushes or
equipment.
C.
Protect all adjacent areas against damage and leave storage and mixing areas clean at
the completion of painting.
ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES
A.
Inspect all surfaces and adjoining work and report to the Engineer in writing any
existing unsatisfactory conditions. No painting work shall be started until the
unsatisfactory conditions are remedied.
B.
Commencement of surface preparation and painting shall constitute the acceptance of
existing conditions and any defects appearing in the painting work thereafter shall be
by the Contractor at no additional cost.
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES
A.
Provide necessary protection for completed work and all adjoining surfaces. Provide
temporary closures as required to prevent circulation of dust from adjacent areas where
other work is in progress. Where it is necessary to remove existing protection of work
of others, such protection shall be fully replaced.
B.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and avoid damage to any
and all existing water, gas, sewer, electric, telephone, and other utilities,
structures, or appurtenances.
09900-15
3.04
VENTILATION
Provide adequate ventilation for safe application and for proper drying of coatings on interior
surfaces. It is essential that the solvent vapors released during and after application of coatings
be removed from tanks or enclosed places. During coating application in enclosed areas the
capacity of ventilating fans shall be at least 300 cfm per gallon of coating applied per hour.
Continuous forced ventilation at a rate of at least one complete air change per 4 hours shall be
provided for at least 7 days after coating application is completed. Air shall be exhausted from
the lowest portions of tanks or enclosed spaces with the top openings kept open and clear.
3.05
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
General
1.
Prepare all surfaces in accordance with the coating manufacturer's instructions
and as specified. Surfaces shall be uniform texture, dry, and free from dust,
grit, oil, grease, or any material which will adversely affect adhesion or
appearance of the coating. Rough edges of metal, weld seams and sharp edges
from scaffold lugs shall be ground to a curve.
2.
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and/or otherwise prepared for
painting shall be given a coat of the first-coat material as soon as practicable
prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface.
3.
Hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and similar items in contact with coated
surfaces shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected prior to surface
preparation and painting operations.
4.
Exposed nails and other ferrous metals on surfaces to be coated shall be spotprimed with a metal primer compatible with the finish.
Surface Preparation SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning
1.
Remove all oil and grease from surface. Power tool clean the surface
removing all loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint and other detrimental
foreign matter by the methods outlined in the SSPC SP 3. Feather out edges of
chipped or abraded areas to prevent flaws from showing through finish coats.
2.
The cleaned surface shall be primed as soon as possible and before any rusting
of the surface occurs.
Surface Preparation SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.
Remove all oil and grease from the surface. Blast clean surface to a
Commercial Finish, removing mill scale, dirt, rust, and foreign matter by the
methods outlined in SSPC SP 6. Two thirds of each square inch of surface
area shall be free of all visible residues.
09900-16
D.
2.
Blasting shall be done with centrifugal wheel or compressed air blast using
either steel grit or flint silica sand. Abrasive should provide a profile depth of
1.0 to 2.0 mils. Steel Grit #G-80 or flint silica sand 20-50 mesh is
recommended to obtain proper profile depth. Remove all dust and sand by
vacuuming.
3.
The blast cleaned surface shall be primed as soon as possible and before any
rusting of the surface occurs.
Surface Preparation SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast
Prepare metal as outlined in SSPC SP 7 to provide for proper adhesion of coating.
E.
F.
Surface Preparation SP 10 - White Blast Cleaning
1.
Steel surfaces shall be dry and clean. Remove all grease, oils and
contaminants with rags soaked in toluol or xylol. Solvent Clean all surfaces per
SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning.
2.
Remove all weld spatters. Grind all rough welds and sharp edges to a smooth
rounded contour. Blast clean the surface to a Near White Metal finish,
removing nearly all mill scale, rust, rust-scale, paint or foreign matter by the
recommended methods outlined in SSPC SP l0. At least 95 percent of each
square inch shall be free of all visible residues and staining.
3.
Blasting shall be done with centrifugal wheel or compressed air blast nozzles
using either steel grit or flint silica sand. Abrasive should provide profile depth
of l.0 to 2.0 mils. Steel Grit #G-80 or flint silica sand 20-50 mesh is
recommended to obtain proper profile depth. Remove all dust and sand by
vacuuming.
4.
The blast cleaned surface should be primed as soon as possible and before any
rusting of the surface occurs.
Surface Preparation SP C1 - General Cleaning
Allow concrete and masonry to cure in place for 28 days. Remove all dirt, dust, form
oil, curing compounds, grease stains, or efflorescence from surfaces and roughen as
required to provide good adhesion of coatings. If washing of the surface is required,
use tri-sodium phosphate solution followed by a clean water rinse. Fill all minor holes
to produce uniform surface textures.
G.
Surface Preparation SP C2 - Sweep Sand Blasting
1.
Concrete surfaces must be clean, dry and free of existing coatings. Cure new
concrete a minimum of 28 days. Fill and seal structural cracks and defects.
2.
Concrete shall be cleaned and etched by sweep sandblasting (brush-off blast)
09900-17
so the surface is grainy to the touch. All dust or foreign matter shall be
removed by vacuuming.
H.
I.
Surface Preparation SP C3 - Acid Etching (Horizontal Surfaces Only)
1.
Concrete surfaces must be clean and dry. Cure new concrete a minimum of 28
days. Remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil and other contaminants from surface.
2.
Etch concrete surface with l5 to 20 percent muriatic acid. Thoroughly coat the
concrete with solution applied with a mop or brush. When foaming stops,
thoroughly neutralize with clear water to remove soluble salts. Test the rinse
water with litmus paper to verify the neutralization.
3.
After etching, the surface shall be "grainy" to the touch; if not, repeat the
treatment.
4.
Permit surface to thoroughly dry a minimum of 72 hours before coating.
Surface Preparation SP M1 - Solvent Cleaning
Non-ferrous and galvanized ferrous surfaces scheduled to receive paint shall be solvent
cleaned to remove all oils, salts, and contaminants prior to application of pretreatments
or primers.
J.
Surface Preparation SP P1 - Drywall
Fill all surface irregularities with spackling compound and sand to a smooth level
surface prior to applying finish. Care shall be exercised to avoid raising nap on the
paper.
3.06
K.
Surface Preparation SP P2 - Plaster and Stucco – N/A
L.
Surface Preparation SP W1 – Wood – N/A
APPLICATION
A.
All work shall be performed by skilled painters. Surfaces shall be free of drops, ridges,
waves, laps and brush marks. Edges of paint adjoining other colors or materials shall
be sharp and true.
B.
Do not apply coatings in temperatures below 50 degrees F. except where the
manufacturer allows lower temperatures. No exterior painting shall be done during
inclement weather when relative humidity exceeds 85%, the ambient temperature is
within 5 degrees F of the Dew Point or under conditions identified by the manufacturer
as unsuitable.
C.
The average rate of application shall not exceed the theoretical rate of coverage
recommended by the coating manufacturer for the type of surface involved, less an
allowance for losses. Average dry film thickness shall not be less than thickness set
09900-18
forth under Painting Systems. Not more than l0-20% of points inspected may be less
than 90% of the specified thickness. Deficiencies shall be corrected by application of
additional coating.
3.07
D.
Each coat shall be uniform in coverage and color. Successive coats shall perceptibly
vary in color. Each coat shall be carefully examined and faulty material, poor
workmanship, holidays, damaged areas and other imperfections shall be touched up
prior to applying succeeding coats. Comply with coating manufacturer's
recommendations for drying time between coats.
E.
Bottoms, sides and edges of doors shall receive same finish as faces of doors. If
refitting of wood doors is done prior to final acceptance, refinish at no extra cost.
F.
Incidental niches, recesses, passages, closets, etc., shall be finished to match similar or
adjacent spaces. Access doors, panels, convectors, grilles and similar items shall be
coated the same color as adjacent work, except for non-ferrous metal or where
otherwise directed by the Engineer. Primed hardware shall be coated to match
adjacent work to which they are attached.
G.
In the event that the finished surfaces are not acceptable, completely refinish entire unit
areas or sections as necessary in order to eliminate visible laps or other indications of
repairs.
H.
Mixing, thinning, pot life, application procedure, equipment, coverage, curing, recoating, storage and number of coats shall be in accordance with coating
manufacturer's instructions.
I.
Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces, and avoid between-coat
contamination. Surfaces contaminated shall be cleaned before applying next coat.
Method of cleaning contaminated surface shall be approved by the Engineer or
owner’s representative.
J.
Each application of material shall be worked into corners, crevices, joints, etc.,
and distributed evenly over flat surfaces. Spraying techniques that result in a
uniform wet pattern shall be used and dry spraying should be avoided. Dry spray
shall be removed prior to coating being applied.
K.
All bolts, welds, sharp edges, and difficult access areas shall receive a primer brush
coat or spray coat prior to primer spray application.
PIPE COLOR CODING
Coat all exposed piping, conduit and appurtenances to conform to a color code as approved by
the Engineer.
3.08
CLEAN-UP
At completion of the painting work, clean off all paint spots and other paint materials from
surfaces where they are not intended to be. Remove from the premises all rubbish and
09900-19
accumulated material and leave the work in clean orderly condition, acceptable to the
Engineer. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed
metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work, all
staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the site and/or destroyed in an
approved and legal manner.
3.09
3.10
DAMAGED COATINGS
A.
Damaged coatings, pinholes, and holidays shall have edges feathered and repaired
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer, as approved by the
Engineer.
B.
All finish coats, including touch up and damage-repair coats shall be applied in a
manner which will present a uniform texture and color-match appearance.
UNSATISFACTORY APPLICATION
A.
If the item has an improper finish, color, or insufficient film thickness, the surface
shall be cleaned and top coated with the specified material to obtain the specified
color and coverage. Specific surface preparation information to be secured from the
coatings manufacturer and the Engineer.
B.
All visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint shall be hand or power-sanded,
feathering the edges. The areas shall then be primed and finish coated in accordance
with the specifications.
Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. Evidence
of these conditions shall be cause for rejection.
C.
3.11
D.
Any defects in the coating system shall be repaired by the Contractor per written
recommendations of the coating manufacturer.
E.
Any repairs made on steel surfaces for immersion service shall be holiday detected in
accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. Areas found to have
holidays shall be marked and repaired in accordance with the paint manufacturer's
instructions. The Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he might be
present to witness testing.
GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION:
A.
All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of the
project.
B.
The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary date and
shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating system shall be
repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Should a failure occur to
25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior, the entire surface shall be
cleaned and painted in accordance with these specifications.
END OF SECTION
09900-20
S E CT I O N 09905
PUMP STATION VALVE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of providing an identification
system for pump station plug and check valves.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, and other pertinent
data in accordance with Section 01300 "Submittals."
B. Schedules:
1. Provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and
number, the valve size, type, use, and location.
C. Samples:
1. Provide a sample of each type valve tag supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PUMP STATION VALVE IDENTIFICATION (ABOVE GROUND OR IN VALVE VAULTS)
A. A coded and numbered tag attached with brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks shall be
provided on all valves.
1. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe shall be brass or anodized aluminum. Square tags
shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally
open valves.
2. Coding: In addition to the color-coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with
wording or abbreviations to indicate the valve service and number. All color and letter
coding shall be approved by the County. Valve numbering shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
09905 - 1
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 09910
PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS LINERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. The work included under this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and
materials necessary for the installation of prefabricated fiberglass wetwell and manhole liners
and appurtenances as described in the specifications herein.
1.02
A. Submit Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature and other descriptive material in
accordance with Section 01300 "Submittals."
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall follow all applicable OSHA Standards concerning confined space entry.
B. Warranty: Prior to its installation, the manufacturer shall provide a warranty for the fiberglass
wetwell liners to be free from defects and constructed as specified herein. During and after
installation, the Manufacturer shall provide a 20-year warranty on the completed installation to
cover the complete cost including costs for materials, equipment, and labor. The warranty shall
cover any and all damage to the liners resulting from manufacturing or installation issues such as
cracking, deterioration, or leaking due to settlement or chemical attack and as specified in Section
01740 "Warranties and Bonds" herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FIBERGLASS LINERS
A. General: Fiberglass reinforced polyester wetwell and manhole liners shall be manufactured from
commercial grade polyester resin or other vinyl ester resin with fiberglass reinforcements. The
resin system shall be suitable for atmospheres containing hydrogen sulfide and dilute sulfuric acid,
as well as other gases associated with the wastewater collection systems. Fiberglass products shall
be manufactured in accordance with National Bureau of Standards, Voluntary Product Standard PS
1569 and ASTM D-3753. All inserts and sleeves for piping shall be in accordance with the liner
manufacturer's recommendations and shall result in complete coverage of all pre-cast sections and
be capable of passing a spark test. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5-years experience
in manufacturing products which meet the specified standards and shall provide 3 references to
verify the qualifications of the manufacturer. All materials furnished for this Work shall be in
accordance with the "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as appended to these
Specifications.
B. Materials: Resins shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester resin. Reinforcing
materials shall be commercial grade "E" type glass in the form of mat, chopped roving,
09910-1
continuous roving, roving fabric or a combination of the above, having a coupling agent that
will provide a suitable bond between the glass reinforcement and resin. All materials
including resins, glass reinforcement, fillers and additives shall be chemically resistant to
hydrogen sulfide gas and the sanitary sewer environment. The combined thickness of the
inner surface and the interior layer shall not be less than 0.10-inch. Seams shall be sealed at
the factory with the same glass-resin jointing process.
C. Fabrication: The exterior surface shall be relatively smooth with no sharp projections and no
exposed fibers. The exterior surface shall have a gray Gel-coat coating. The interior surface
shall be resin rich with no exposed fibers. The interior and exterior surfaces shall be free of
crazing, de-laminations, blisters larger than 1/2-inch diameter, wrinkles of 1/8-inch or greater
in depth, resin runs, dry areas, sharp projections, or surface pits greater than 6 per square foot
if they are less than 1/4-inch diameter and less than 1/16-inch deep. To provide UV
protection, the exterior surface shall have a factory applied gray pigment for a minimum
thickness of 0.125-inches.
D. Physical Properties: The fiberglass reinforced wetwell and manhole liner shall be designed for
H-20 wheel loading and tested in accordance with ASTM D 3753 8.5 (note 1). The fiberglass
reinforced wetwell liner and manholes shall meet the following physical requirements:
Hoop Direction
18,000
0.6 x 106
26,000
1.4 x 106
18,000
Tensile Strength (psi)
Tensile Modulus (psi)
Flexural Strength (psi)
Flexural Modulus (psi)
Compressive (psi)
Axial Direction
5,000
0.7 x 106
4,500
0.7 x 106
12,000
E. Soundness: Following installation, the Contractor shall determine soundness by applying air
or water pressure (3-5-psi) to the wetwell liner. While holding at the established pressure,
inspect the entire wetwell and manhole for leaks, based on loss of measured pressure. Any
leakage through the laminate is cause for failure of the task. The Contractor shall be
responsible for isolating the work of this Contract from existing work and shall be solely
responsible for the method of such isolation. Refer to ASTM D-3253 8.6.
F. Chemical Resistance: When tested in accordance with ASTM D3753 8.7 the log of percent
retention of each property after immersion testing when platted against the log of immersion
time and extrapolated to 100,000-hours shall assure retention of at least 50% of the initial
properties.
2.02
NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Non-shrink grout used in the bench area of manholes and fillet areas of wetwells, or on pipe
penetrations shall be 100% calcium aluminate, un-thinned and un-altered, as manufactured
by Sewpercoat, Strong-Seal, or an approved equal.
2.03
BENCH
A. The existing concrete bench area of manholes and fillet areas of wetwells shall be removed
completely during initial preparation. Upon installation of the liner, a new bench/fillet shall be
constructed with non-shrink grout and shall be field coated with resin and fiberglass in a dry
09910-2
environment after wastewater flows are diverted. The newly constructed bench shall
sufficiently overlap the newly installed liner to prevent migration of fluids or gases between
the liner and the bench. There shall be no exposed concrete between the factory manufactured
fiberglass liner and the field installed fiberglass bench overlay.
2.04
PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Piping shall extend past the liner into the fiberglass wetwell or flush with the liner. If the
existing piping does not fully penetrate the fiberglass liner, the Contractor must extend
similar material piping into the fiberglass wetwell. Any gaps on joints must be sealed with a
non-shrink grout specified herein.
2.05
MANWAY NECK OR LIP
A. Manhole liner neck section shall extend from the ring and cover support area up to the ring
and cover. The neck section shall be designed to protect the adjustment ring(s), brick and
mortar used to bring the ring and cover to final grade.
2.06
A. Additional items of construction necessary for the complete installation of the fiberglass liner
shall conform to specific details on the Drawings and shall be constructed of first-class
materials conforming to the applicable portions of these Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Fiberglass Liner
1. The interior of the wetwell shall be pressure washed with an 800 to 1,000-psi water blast,
acid washed with a 20% muratic acid solution, and pressure washed a second time. All
loose materials, grease/fats, and hydrogen sulfide contamination shall be removed. The
existing bench/fillet areas in the wetwell/manhole shall be removed prior to pressure
washing. An inspection of the structures shall be conducted by the County prior to the
fiberglass liner installation.
2. Exterior liner diameter shall be approximately 4-inches smaller than the inside diameter
of the barrel section of the structure.
3. Liner depth shall be from invert to top elevation of manhole and wetwell. The top 12inches of the manhole liner shall be a fiberglass neck that extends from the liner corbel or
cone section to the bottom of the ring and cover. The neck is used to protect the concrete
grade rings or brick and mortar adjustments from the sewer environment.
4. The wetwell top slab and manhole corbel or cone section shall be removed and discarded
by the Contractor in accordance with all applicable regulations at the Contractor's
expense.
5. Measure and cut wetwell liner to exact length and invert configuration. Measure and cut
all incoming and outgoing line openings.
6. Lower wetwell liner into wetwell and level.
7. Extend all incoming and outgoing lines inside the liner with PVC or other approved pipe.
8. Construct new benches/fillets and tie-in and seal bottom of liner with a quick setting non09910-3
shrink grout as specified herein.
9. Tie-in and seal all lines extending into the wetwell liner with non-shrink grout.
10. Pour or pump 3,000-psi pump mix into the annular space between the liner and existing
wetwell.
11. Use concrete grade rings on top of the liner cone section to bring ring and cover to finish
grade.
12. A non-shrinking grout as specified herein shall be applied to areas that cannot be fiberglassed due to water.
3.02
SHIPPING
A. Do not drop or impact the fiberglass wet well liner. Use of chains or cables in direct contact
with the wet well is prohibited.
3.03
MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall sequence the Work so that wastewater service is maintained to existing
customers at all times.
3.04
A. Workmanship: It is imperative that the wetwell liner and appurtenances be built watertight
and that the Contractor adheres rigidly to the specifications for materials and workmanship.
Upon completion, the wetwell liner will be tested and if any damage on the liner is observed,
the fiberglass liner installation will be rejected.
B. Cleaning
1. Prior to final acceptance and final inspection of the fiberglass liner installation, flush and
clean all parts of the system. Remove all accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel,
sand, silt, and other foreign material from the wetwell.
2. Upon the County's final inspection of the fiberglass liner installation, if any foreign
matter is still present in the system, flush and clean the section and portions of the
wetwell as required.
3. Testing: Upon installation, cleaning, and visual inspection, the Contractor shall, in the
presence of the County, test the entire lined surface in accordance with subsection 2.01, E of
this specification section. Any repairs required shall be repaired in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations at the Contractor's expense. The cost for the performance
of this test shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
09910-4
SECTION 09966
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
This specification covers preparation, materials, services, and equipment required for the
application of a Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant for projects involving either old or new
construction. Any substantial deviations shall be referred to the manufacturer.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 03300 – Concrete
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with Division 1.
B.
Product Data
Submit manufacturer’s product data sheets for the specified graffiti resistant coatings
and cleaners. Submit description for protection of surrounding areas and nonmasonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final cleaning.
C.
Applicator Qualifications
Submit qualifications of applicator; stating applicator is an approved applicator from
the manufacturer being supplied. Provide a list of several most recently completed
projects, including project name and location, names of Owner and architect, and
description of products used, substrates, and method of application.
D.
Environmental Regulations
Submit applicable environmental regulations.
E.
VOC Certification
Submit certification that graffiti resistant coatings furnished comply with regulations
controlling content of volatile organic compounds (VOC).
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications
1.
Experience in the application of the specified or compatible products.
2.
Employs persons trained for the application of the specified products or
09966-1
compatible products.
B.
1.05
Contractor shall schedule a pre-application meeting a minimum of two (2) weeks
before the start of application of graffiti resistant coatings. The attendance of all
parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Engineer,
applicator, and manufacturer’s representative shall be required.
Review
environmental regulations, test panel procedures (if required), protections of
surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field
quality control, completion of warranty information, final cleaning, and coordination
with other work.
ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS
Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations.
1.06
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to the job site in original, tightly sealed, unopened containers, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Verify that the product
matches that of the original sample applied on the test panel.
B.
Store containers upright in a cool, dry place. Keep away from sparks and open flame.
Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Must use product within eight (8) hours of opening container.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Surface Preparation
Contractor or applicator shall be responsible for providing a clean, dry substrate free
from oil, dirt, grease, efflorescence or any other coating which may inhibit
penetration and adhesion of graffiti resistant coating. This requirement applies to
new construction, renovation or remedial projects. Substrate must be completely dry
prior to applying product.
B.
Environmental Requirements
1.
Temperature
Product may be applied at any temperature providing that there is no frozen
moisture present in the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40°
Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate. Optimal temperatures
should be above 40° F (5° C) or below 95° F (35° C).
2.
Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture.
Allow substrate to dry for a minimum of 48 hours after rain or power
washing.
3.
Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is
expected within 12 hours.
09966-2
4.
C.
Do not use spray methods of application under windy conditions.
Protection
1.
Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the
building being treated. Ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be
turned off and covered.
2.
Protect shrubs, metal, glass, vehicles, and other building hardware from
overspray.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS
A.
B.
Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant shall be applied in two (2) coats. Apply the
penetrating silicone rubber graffiti resistant coating on above grade vertical concrete.
The anti-graffiti coating shall be non-sacrificial and will withstand repeated cycles
of graffiti tagging and removal with no requirement to reapply the sealant. The
product will not be affected by UV rays, salts, acid rain, etc. The product should be
breathable and allow moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration.
The product shall be flexible to bridge hairline cracks and allow for building
movement. The product will provide waterproofing protection as well as a graffiti
barrier.
1.
Form: Liquid
2.
Color: Clear
3.
Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber
4.
Percent Active Material: 15%
5.
Flash Point: 105°.
The graffiti resistant coating product listed above is selected as a standard of quality.
Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with
effectiveness of testing samples submitted, recommendation of application rates
suggested, approved manufacturers standards and as a minimum, that specified
herein.
Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and
performance standards. Products must be penetrating permanent treatments using a
silicone rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes, urethanes or polysiloxanes.
Silane and siloxane based products will not be considered because of their lack of
elongation (400%), allowing for thermal expansion and contraction. Products must
be non-sacrificial, allowing for repeated cycles of tagging and cleaning without the
requirement of reapplication of the sealant.
09966-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
Verify the following:
3.02
3.03
3.04
A.
The required joint sealants have been installed.
B.
New masonry and mortar has cured a minimum of 28 days.
C.
Surface to be treated is clean, dry and contains no frozen moisture.
D.
Environmental conditions are appropriate for application.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect surrounding areas, glass, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians,
vehicles, and non-masonry surfaces during the work from contact with graffiti
resistant coatings.
B.
Special precautions should be taken to prohibit fumes from entering the building
being treated if applicable. Ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be
turned off and covered.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Clean all dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, efflorescence, or any other coating or
material from surfaces that interfere with penetration, performance, adhesion, or
aesthetics of graffiti resistant coatings. Rinse thoroughly, using pressure water spray
to remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of
graffiti resistant coatings.
B.
Repair, patch, and fill all cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas in surface as
approved by the Engineer. Allow repair materials to cure completely before
application of graffiti resistant coatings.
C.
Seal all open joints.
D.
Allow new masonry and concrete construction and repainted surfaces to cure for a
minimum of 28 days before application of graffiti resistant coatings.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply graffiti resistant coatings to substrates in accordance with manufacturer’s
written instructions and environmental regulations. Graffiti protection requires a
two-coat application.
09966-4
B.
Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces approved by
Engineer/Owner.
C.
Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute.
D.
Do not apply to below-grade surfaces.
E.
Do not apply to painted surfaces.
F.
Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrates.
G.
Do not apply to substrates such as asphalt or polystyrene, which may be affected by
the solvent carrier.
H.
Apply material using a high-volume, low pressure, pump-up sprayer (between 40-50
psi), with solvent resistant fittings, foam roller, or brush of natural bristle or foam.
Vertical Applications
Apply in a flood coat, from top to bottom, being sure to obtain a 4 to 6 inch rundown
of product from the point where the spray makes contact with the surface. Work all
the way down the wall covering the rundown as you go. Avoid excessive
overlapping. Allow first coat to dry to the touch prior to applying second coat.
Apply the second coat by flood coating from the top down.
3.05
A.
Inspection
Inspect the graffiti resistant coating work with the Contractor, Owner, applicator, and
manufacturer representative. Determine if the substrates are suitably protected by the
graffiti resistant coatings.
B.
Manufacturer’s Field Services
Provide the services of a manufacturer’s authorized field representative to verify
specified products are used; protection, surface preparation, and application of
graffiti resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.06
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of all work covered in a specification, the Contractor shall remove
all equipment, material and debris, leaving the area in an undamaged and acceptable
condition. Dispose of graffiti resistant coating containers according to state and local
environmental regulations.
B.
Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner, all materials, landscaping,
and non-masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to graffiti resistant coatings.
END OF SECTION
09966-5
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.
Safety signs.
2.
Engraved plastic laminate signs.
3.
Dedication plaque.
Related work specified elsewhere
Electrical Identification - Section 16195.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
Submit shop drawings and product data for the products of this Section in
compliance with Division 1.
B.
Samples
Submit samples of plastic laminate for approval by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SAFETY SIGNS
Provide safety signs as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Safety signs shall
comply with OSHA requirements Section 1910.145. Signs shall be 10" by 14" horizontal
signs of minimum 20-gauge steel with a baked-on enamel finish. "Caution" signs shall be
yellow and black. "Danger" signs shall be red and black.
2.02
ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS – N/A
10400-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
Install identification devices in a permanent manner as approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
10400-2
SECTION 11310
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
Submersible pumps and accessories.
1.02
1.03
1.04
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
Section 02320 – Trenching, Filling, and Backfilling
C.
Section 02535 - Sanitary Sewer Force Main Systems
D.
Division 13 – Special Construction
E.
Division 16 – Electrical
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide all material, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals to install a submersible
sewage pumping station and related appurtenances and all items shown or inferred on
the drawings and reasonably specified herein. It is the intent of these documents that
a complete and operating sewage pumping station be constructed. If any items for a
complete job are omitted or not shown, the Contractor shall furnish and install the
same without additional cost to the Owner.
B.
The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for proper functioning of the
equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's specification data and descriptive literature.
B.
Performance curves showing capacity of gpm, NPSH, head, and pump horsepower
from 0 gpm to 110% of design capacity.
C.
Motor efficiencies and power factors at all design operating points.
D.
The following data shall be submitted for each motor:
1.
Manufacturers designation
2.
Number of phases
11310-1
1.05
3.
Horsepower output
4.
Voltage
5.
Time rating
6.
Full load amperes
7.
Temperature rise
8.
Code
9.
RPM at full load
10.
Design letter
11.
Frequency
12.
Service factor
E.
Drawings showing general dimensions, openings, connections, construction details
of the equipment, wiring diagrams, piping drawings, and weights of major
components.
F.
Procedures for proper installation.
G.
Manufacturer's guarantee.
H.
Provide a notarized statement by the pump supplier which shall certify that the pump
supplier shall at all times maintain in stock at least one set of spare parts for each
model of pump furnished, and that if any of the parts are not in stock when ordered
by the Utility, the pump supplier shall either provide a pump or reimburse the Utility
for rental of a pump to maintain the station in operation until the ordered part(s) are
delivered.
QUALIFICATIONS
The equipment specified under this section shall be provided by manufacturers who are fully
experienced, reputable, qualified, and regularly engaged in the manufacture of the
components and equipment to be furnished. All equipment and manufacturers shall be an
approved supplier as listed in the latest edition of Orange County’s Appendix D List of
Approved Manufacturers and Materials.
1.06
CERTIFICATIONS
After all installation is complete, the equipment manufacturer shall provide a field service
specialist to completely inspect all related work for proper operation. The manufacturer shall
notify the Engineer, in writing, when this service is complete and that any/all deficiencies
11310-2
have been corrected.
1.07
DELIVERY TIMES
The equipment shall be placed into production as soon as the shop drawings have been
approved. The Engineer shall be notified of the estimated length of time until the delivery of
equipment in the shop drawings submitted.
1.08
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
All parts and equipment shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will
occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and
the units and equipment are ready for operation. Finished surfaces of all exposed pump
openings shall be protected by wooded planks, strongly built and securely bolted thereto.
Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and
corrosion.
1.09
WARRANTY
The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumps being supplied to the Owner and Utility
against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of five years under normal use,
operation, and service. In addition, the manufacturer shall replace certain parts which shall
become defective through normal use and wear on a progressive schedule of cost for a period
of five years; parts included are the mechanical seal, impeller, pump housing, wear ring, and
ball bearings. The warranty shall be in published form and apply to all similar units.
1.10
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The manuals shall include, but not be limited to, installation, operation, maintenance
instructions, and parts lists giving manufacturer's stock or part number for each replaceable
item, recommended spare parts lists, approval submittals and drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The pumps, motors, guide bars, and discharge elbows shall be supplied by the pump
supplier to insure unit responsibility.
B.
Acceptable pump manufacturers are in accordance with Appendix D.
GENERAL
A.
The pumps and motors shall be capable of handling raw, unscreened, sanitary sewage
containing heavy sludge and fibrous materials without injurious damage during
normal operation.
B.
Each pump motor cable shall be suitable for submersible pump application as
11310-3
indicated on the pump cable. The cable shall be sized in accordance with the NEC
Standards for the actual motor load.
2.03
C.
The pumping units required under this section shall be complete including pumps
and motors with proper alignment and balancing of the individual units. All parts
shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and
stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work to be done.
D.
The pumps shall be capable of running continuously in a non-submerged condition
under full load without damage for extended periods.
E.
Each discharge connection for each pump shall be rigidly and accurately anchored
into position. All necessary anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be 316 stainless
steel and shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer for installation by the
Contractor.
F.
Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity,
head, speed, and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump and motor.
G.
If required by the Owner or Engineer, before final acceptance, a field running test
demonstrating this ability, with 24 hours of continuous operation under the above
conditions, shall be performed for all pumps being supplied.
PUMP OPERATING CONDITIONS AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
Pump Station #3028
A.
Pump No. 1 & 2
Pump Discharge Size =
4
in. minimum
RPM
Pump Speed =
± 1750
Guarantee Point = 140
gpm at 30 TDH
Second Point = 225 gpm at 30 TDH
Shut-off Head = 42
ft. minimum
Voltage = (Dual) 230/460/3-phase
Pump Station #3202
A.
Pump No. 1 & 2
Pump Discharge Size = 4
in. minimum
RPM
Pump Speed = ± 1750
Guarantee Point = 210
gpm at 70
TDH
Second Point = 480
gpm at 50 TDH
Shut-off Head = 90
ft. minimum
Pump Station #3014
A.
Pump No. 1 & 2
Pump Discharge Size =
4
in. minimum
Pump Speed = ± 1750
RPM
Guarantee Point =
200
gpm at 92 TDH
11310-4
Second Point = 480
gpm at 72 TDH
Shut-off Head = 112
ft. minimum
2.04
PUMPS
A.
The pumps shall be totally submersible non-clog centrifugal pumps with submersible
closed coupled motors designed to pump sewage, capable of passing a minimum 3inch solid. The design shall be such that the pumping units shall be automatically
connected to the discharge piping when lowered into place on the discharge
connection. The pumps shall be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring
no bolts, nuts or other fastenings to be removed for this purpose, and no need for
personnel to enter the pump wet well.
B.
The pump shaft shall be of Series 300 or 400 stainless steel or carbon steel. If a
carbon steel shaft is provided, the pump manufacturer shall demonstrate that any part
of the shaft which will normally come in contact with the wastewater has proven to
be corrosion resistant in this application. The shaft and bearings shall be adequately
designed to meet the maximum torque required for any start-up or operating
condition and to minimize vibration and shaft deflection. As a minimum, the pump
shaft shall rotate on two (2) permanently lubricated bearings. The upper bearing
shall be a single-row ball bearing. The lower bearing shall be a two-row angular
contact ball bearing to minimize vibration and provide maximum bearing life.
C.
Only standard non-trimmed impellers shall be acceptable. Impellers can be of the
closed or open type. The closed type can be single or double vaned. The open type
shall be single vane with a self-cleaning, adjustable cast iron wear plate. All
impellers shall be non-clogged and dynamically balanced. The impeller shall be
constructed of gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 30. The design shall permit low
liquid velocities and gradual acceleration and change of flow direction of the pumped
media. The impeller/casing design shall result in a passage free of surfaces to which
solid or fibrous materials can adhere. The overall pump design shall combine high
efficiency, low required NPSH, large sphere passage and the ability to handle high
solids concentrations efficiently. All other parts shall be of close grain gray iron
construction. The impeller shall be of a centrifugal non-clog type, capable of passing
solids and fibrous material.
D.
Each pump shall be provided with a tandem double mechanical seal running in an oil
reservoir, composed of two separate lapped face seals, each consisting of one
stationary and one rotating tungsten-carbide ring with each pair held in contact by a
separate spring. Lapped seal faces must be hydrodynamically lubricated at a
constant rate. The lower seal unit, between the pump and oil chamber, shall contain
one stationary and one positively driven rotating tungsten-carbide ring.
Silicon-carbide may be used in place of tungsten-carbide for the lower seal. The
upper seal unit, between the oil pump and motor housing, shall contain one stationary
tungsten-carbide ring and one positively driven rotating carbon ring. The
compression spring shall be protected against exposure to the pumped liquid. The
pumped liquid shall be sealed from the oil reservoir by one face seal and the oil
11310-5
reservoir from the motor chamber by the other. The seals shall require neither
maintenance nor adjustment, and shall be easily replaced. Conventional double
mechanical seals with a single spring between the rotating faces, requiring constant
differential pressure to effect sealing and subject to opening and penetration by
pumping forces shall not be considered equal to tandem seals specified and required.
E.
Each pump shall be provided with a replaceable pump wear ring system to provide
efficient sealing between the volute and impeller and allow for replacement to
maintain pump efficiency. As a minimum, one stationary wear ring provided in the
pump volute or one rotating wear ring provided on the pump impeller shall be
required. A two-part wear ring system is also acceptable.
F.
A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pumping unit. The pump
casing shall have a machined connection flange to connect with the cast iron
discharge connection, which shall be bolted to the floor of the wet-well with stainless
steel anchor bolts and so designed as to receive the pump connection without the
need of any bolts or nuts. Sealing of the pumping units to the discharge connection
shall be accomplished by a simple linear downward motion of the pump with the
entire weight of the pumping unit guided by two (2) type 316 stainless steel guides.
No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor of the sump and no rotary
motion of the pump shall be required for sealing. Sealing at the discharge connection
by means of a diaphragm, o-ring, or similar method of sealing will not be accepted as
an equal to a metal-to-metal contact of the pump discharge and mating discharge
connection which is specified and required. The pump with its appurtenances and
cable shall be capable of continuous submergence under water without loss of
watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet.
G.
Pump motors shall be housed in an air-filled watertight casing and shall have invertor
duty rated insulation windings which shall be moisture resistant. Motors shall be
NEMA Design B, rated 155 degrees C maximum. Pump motors shall have cooling
characteristics suitable to permit continuous operation, in a totally, partially or
non-submerged condition. Each motor shall incorporate an ambient temperature
compensated overheat sensing device and a moisture sensing device. The protective
devices shall be wired into the pump controls in such a way that if the device
operates, the pump will shut down. The devices shall be self-resetting. The cable
shall be fixed to the pump using a watertight assembly. The pump shall be capable
of running continuously in a totally dry condition under full load without damage, for
extended periods. The pump shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of ten (10)
evenly spaced starts per hour continuously without damaging the pump or motor in
any way. Before final acceptance, a field running test demonstrating this ability,
with 24 hours of operation without failure under the above conditions, shall be
performed for all pumps being supplied, if required by the Owner. Pump motor
cable shall be suitable for submersible pump applications and shall be properly
sealed.
H.
The pump cable entry, water seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements
to ensure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall be comprised of a
single cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close
tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and
11310-6
compressed by the entry body containing a strain relief function, separate from the
function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall bear against a shoulder in the pump
top. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a stator lead
sealing gland or terminal board, which shall isolate the motor interior from foreign
material gaining access through the pump top. Control conductors shall be included
in the cable. The pump supplier shall provide a watertight connector, equal to
Crouse Hinds Type CGB, with a neoprene gland to terminate the cable in the
appropriate panel. Secondary sealing systems utilizing epoxy potting compounds
may be used, however, when such systems are used, the pump manufacturer shall
supply a cable cap as part of the spare parts for each pump. The junction chamber
containing the terminal board shall be completely leak-proof.
2.05
I.
All external bolts and nuts shall be of 316 stainless steel.
J.
Each pumping unit and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to
withstand the maximum turbine run-away speed of the unit due to back flow through
the pump.
K.
All pump bases and pumps shall be lined with 8 mils acrylic dispersion zinc
phosphate or equal in accordance with manufacturer=s recommendations. Pump
bases and pumps shall be coated with 8 mils acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate plus
two coats of polyester resin in accordance with manufacturer=s recommendations.
L.
Pumps shall be automatically controlled by float level sensors which shall signal the
motor control panel alternator for pump operation.
PUMP CONTROLS
Refer to Division 13 for control system requirements.
2.06
MOTORS
A.
All motors shall be built in accordance with latest NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and
AFBMA Standards where applicable. Pump motors shall be housed in an air-filled,
watertight casing and shall have Class F insulated windings which shall be moisture
resistant. Motors shall be NEMA Design B, rated 155 degrees C maximum. Pump
motors shall have cooling characteristics suitable to permit continuous operation in a
totally, partially or non-submerged condition.
B.
Motors shall be dual voltage 230/460 volt, 3-phase, only.
C.
Each motor shall incorporate a minimum of one ambient temperature compensated
overheat sensing device. This protective device shall be wired into the pump
controls in such a way that if excessive temperature is detected, the pump will shut
down. This device shall be self-resetting.
D.
Motors operating with variable frequency drives shall state that they are suitable for
the intended applications.
11310-7
2.07
CABLES
Cables shall be designed specifically for submersible pump applications and shall be
properly sealed. A type CGB watertight connector with a neoprene gland shall be furnished
with each pump to seal the cable entry at the control panel. The pump cable entry seal
design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible
seal. The cable entry shall be comprised of a single cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked
by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry
inside diameter and compressed by the entry body containing a strain relief function,
separate from the function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall bear against a shoulder in
the pump top. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a stator
lead sealing gland or terminal board, which shall isolate the motor interior from foreign
material gaining access through the pump top. Secondary sealing systems utilizing epoxy
potting compounds may be used. When this type of sealing system is used, the
manufacturers shall supply a cable cap as part of the spare parts for each pump. All cables
shall be continuous, without splices from the motor to the control panel, unless otherwise
approve by the Utilities Manager.
2.08
VALVES AND PIPING
Provide as required on the drawings and specified in these specification documents. The
emergency pump bypass female cam-lock and dust cover shall be compatible with the
Owner’s equipment.
2.09
2.10
SHOP PAINT
A.
Before exposure to weather and prior to shop painting, all surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned dry and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt, and other
foreign matter. All pumps and motors shall be shop coated with a corrosion resistant
paint proven to withstand an environment of raw wastewater. All nameplates shall
be properly protected during painting.
B.
Gears, bearing surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be painted shall
be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. This
coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during periods of
storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Owner up to the time of the final
acceptance test.
TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A.
One (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall
be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete
with lock and duplicate keys. The manufacturer shall furnish the following spare
parts for each pump supplied:
1.
1 - Upper bearing
11310-8
B.
2.11
2.
1 - Lower bearing
3.
1 - Set of upper and lower shaft seals
4.
1 - Set of “O-rings” or gaskets required for replacement of bearings and seals
5.
1 - Set impeller wear ring or bottom wear plate
6.
1 - Shaft sleeve (if applicable)
7.
1 - Cable cap for each pump (if applicable)
8.
1 - Set of Allen sockets
9.
1 - Impeller Puller
Spare parts shall be properly packaged and labeled for easy identification without
opening the packaging and suitably protected for long term storage under humid
conditions. Spare parts and tools shall be delivered to the Owner or Utility at or prior
to the time of pump station start-up.
ACCESS HATCHES
A.
Access hatches shall be provided for all openings in the top slab for the pump station
wet-well. Each hatch shall include an access frame complete with hinge and slide
bar equipped covers. Each wet-well hatch shall include a stainless steel pump guide
bar holder. Access hatch and valve vault, if necessary, shall have “Confined Spaced”
etched onto cover, easily readable. Hatch manufacturers shall be as approved in the
latest edition of Orange County’s Appendix D - List of Approved Manufacturers and
Materials.
B.
The pump manufacturer, to insure sole source responsibility, shall supply access
hatches and guides.
C.
The access hatch shall be as manufactured by U.S.F. Fabrication, Inc. Hialeah,
Florida or approved equal. The frame shall be ¼” thick extruded aluminum 6063 T5
with an integral anchor flange, door seat on all four (4) sides and mill finish. Door
leaf shall be ¼-inch thick aluminum diamond plate reinforced to withstand a 300
p.s.f. live load. The floor access door shall be equipped with a flush drop handle that
does not protrude above the cover, and a stainless steel hold open arm with a red
vinyl grip that automatically locks the cover in the 90-degree open position. The
door shall have stainless steel hinges with stainless steel tamper resistant
bolts/locknuts. A staple for a padlock shall be supplied for security. All stainless
steel components shall be type 316 alloy. An adhesive backed vinyl material that
protects the product during shipping and installation shall cover the entire top of the
frame and cover. Doors shall have BSU approved method to eliminate vibration of
the doors when pumps activate. Installation shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s attached instructions. The door shall be manufactured and assembled
in the United States. Manufacturer shall guarantee the door against defects in
11310-9
materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years.
D.
2.12
The access hatch shall be stamped “Confined Space”.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
The pump manufacturer shall perform the following tests on each pump before shipment
from the factory:
A.
Impeller, motor rating, and electrical connections shall first be checked out for
compliance to the customer's purchase order.
B.
Perform motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects.
C.
Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish correct rotation and
mechanical integrity.
D.
The pump shall be run for 30 minutes submerged a minimum of six (6) feet under
water.
E.
After operational test (4), the insulation test (2) is to be performed again.
F.
A written certified test report giving the above information shall be supplied with
each pump at the time of shipment.
G.
All end of pump cables will then be fitted with a rubber shrink fit boot to protect
cable prior to electrical installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
All equipment shall be installed and mounted as shown in the drawings and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Piping shall be run as shown on the plans and be
connected to all units in a manner to prevent leakage of water or sewage. Any departures
from the locations or arrangements of units or connections thereto, as shown on the plans,
shall be detailed by the Contractor and approval thereof obtained from the Engineer.
Contractor shall complete and furnish the attached Pump Station Start-Up Report to the
County at time of Start-Up.
3.02
MOUNTING
The fixtures shall incorporate stainless steel rails which will guide the pump into position.
The pump shall be automatically connected to discharge piping by means of leak-proof
sealing system. The pumps shall be equipped with stainless steel lifting chains that have a
normal working load of 200% of the pumps' operating weight. In addition, the pumps shall
be equipped with an attachment system for attaching the hoist to the lifting chains. The
system shall be the Flygt "Grip-Eye" system, or acceptable equal.
11310-10
3.03
FLOAT CONTROLS
Install away from pump leads and out of the flow of influent sewage.
3.04
3.05
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Provide two (2) working days of mechanical start-up services. Operate the pump
station a minimum of one day after all system checks to verify proper operation.
B.
Provide one (1) working day of initial instruction in one trip.
C.
Provide one (1) trip of one (1) working day each of follow-up instruction.
PUMP STATION START-UP TESTING
A.
General
The general intent of the start-up testing is for the Contractor to demonstrate to the
County the Work will function as a complete and operable system under normal as
well as emergency operating conditions and is ready for acceptance. The
demonstration shall be conducted upon completion of all systems at a date as
specified in accordance with the Appendix C procedures: Request for Inspection and
Acceptance of a W or WR System found in Orange County’s Manual of Standards
and Specifications for Wastewater and Water Main Construction. Acceptability of
the pump station will be based on the equipment performing as specified under actual
and simulated operating conditions and with no deficiencies. All material used shall
be listed in the List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers Appendix D of Orange
County’s Manual of Standards and Specifications for Wastewater and Water Main
Construction.
B.
Testing
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, fuel, energy, lubrication, water, and all other
materials, equipment, tools and instruments necessary for pump station start-up
testing. The Contractor shall conduct preliminary testing of equipment prior to startup testing and make all changes, adjustments and replacements required.
Acceptability of the pump station will be based on the equipment performing as
specified, under these actual and simulated operating conditions and with no
deficiencies. All material used shall be listed in Appendix D of Orange County’s
Manual of Standards and Specifications for Wastewater and Water Main
Construction. The testing shall demonstrate that all items of the Manual have been
met by the equipment as installed and shall include, but not be limited to the
following tests:
1.
All equipment has been properly installed and meets the design performance
requirements.
11310-11
C.
2.
All functions of the pump station mechanical and electrical equipment shall
be tested and inspected for operation and workmanship. There are no
mechanical or electrical defects.
3.
The pumps demonstrate they meet the design specifications and the pump
controls perform satisfactorily. The pumps shall be tested to verify their
performance meets the pump curve specified by the manufacturer.
4.
The Contractor shall notify the County at least 72 hours prior to performing
all testing.
5.
A factory representative knowledgeable in the mechanical and electrical
equipment furnished shall inspect and supervise a start-up of their respective
equipment. A minimum of one (1) working day shall be provided for the
testing. Additional time may be necessary due to faulty or incomplete work.
Upon satisfactory completion of the testing, the factory representatives shall
issue the required manufacturer’s warranty certificates.
6.
The units shall operate without overheating or overloading any parts and
without objectional vibration as determined by the County.
7.
The liner shall meet the testing requirements of the Manual and be approved
by the County.
8.
A boundary survey depicting all improvements to the site shall be submitted
at start-up and all corner pins shall exist.
9.
Furnish one electronic copy of an Operation and Maintenance Manual for the
pump station to the County.
Retesting
If the start-up testing does not meet the requirements of Orange County’s Manual of
Standards and Specifications for Wastewater and Water Main Construction, the
deficiencies shall be corrected and the testing procedure will begin again in
accordance with Appendix C procedures: Request for Inspection and Acceptance of
a W or WR System found in Orange County’s Manual of Standards and
Specifications for Wastewater and Water Main Construction.
11310-12
Prior to the pump station start-up, the Contractor shall complete this form, which will be provided by
County Staff at time of startup and provide it to the County along with a Request for Inspection
and Acceptance of a W or WR System form for each Pump Station. The following shall have
been successfully met: a walk through letter of acceptance, all wire checks, video inspections and
valve locates. Transfer of Utility bills after final acceptance shall be requested by presenting final
Utility billing statement to Valerie Picard-Bevis, 701 W. McCormick Road, Apopka FL, 32701.
Phone 407-882-7333 ext-221.
General Information
Station Name: Orange County Utilities
L/S #
Physical
Address:
Billing
Address: .
Power Company:
Meter Number:
Water Company:
Meter Number:
Present at Start-up
Contractor Name:
Phone Number:
Consulting Engineer:
Phone Number:
Control Panel Rep:
Phone Number:
Control Panel Name:
Serial Number:
Electrical Equipment
Main Service Voltage:
Amperage:
Main Breaker Name:
Amperage:
Pump Breaker Name:
Amperage:
Control Breaker Name:
Amperage:
Main Disconnect:
Amperage:
11310-13
O.C. #
Is Disconnect Lockable?
TVSS Type:
Transformer:
Primary:
Secondary:
K.V.A.
Alternator Name:
Phase Monitor Name:
Type:
Size:
Starter Name:
Voltage:
Heater Size:
Phase:
Amps:
Horse Power:
Pressure Transducer Manufacturer:
Pump Equipment
Pump Manufacturer:
Model #:
Impeller Size:
Number:
Pump #1 Serial #
Pump #2 Serial #
Pump #3 Serial #
Float Balls
Float Ball Manufacturer:
Off Level Depth
Lag 2 Start Depth
Lead Start Depth
Lag 1 Start Depth
High Level Depth
11310-14
Mechanical
Wet Well Length
Wet Well Width
Base Elbow Size:
Wet Well Depth
Riser Pipe Size:
Plug Valve Manufacturer:
Design Criteria
Point 1 GPM:
At TDH:
Point 2 GPM:
At TDH:
Point 3 GPM:
At TDH:
Backflow
Backflow Preventor Manufacturer:
Model #
Flow Meter
Flow Meter Manufacturer:
Flow Meter Model #:
Biofilter
Biofilter Manufacturer:
Additive Type:
Biofilter Media:
Blower Horse Power:
For County Use Only
11310-15
Pumping Capacity
GPM at Startup
#1
#2
#3
TDH at Startup
#1
#2
#3
PSI at Startup
#1
#2
#3
Electrical
# 1 Pump Amps at Startup
Phase A:
Phase B:
Phase C:
Phase A:
Phase B:
Phase C:
Phase A:
Phase B:
Phase C:
Pump Megs
Pump # 1:
Pump # 2:
Pump # 3:
Incoming Service Voltage
A to B:
A to C:
B to C:
B to GND:
C to GND:
Incoming Service Voltage
A to GND:
Mechanical
Plug Valve Size:
Plug Valve Length:
Check Valve Manufacturer:
Check Valve Size
Type:
Check Valve Lay Length:
11310-16
Oil Filled Gauges:
Manufacturer:
By-Pass Size:
Female Cam-Lock:
Pipe Size(s) entering Wet-Well
Station Pumps To:
O & M Manual Electronically: YES / NO
Property Survey Report Provided: YES / NO
COMMENTS
11310-17
LIST OF DEFICIENCIES
END OF SECTION
11310-18
SECTION 13300
PUMP CONTROL PANEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Description
A.
This section specifies the electrical power and control system requirements for
wastewater pump stations. These requirements apply to duplex pump panels.
Additional requirements shall apply to three or more pumps for a pump station.
B.
A pump station control panel shall be provided for each wastewater pump station.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A.
The manufacturer of the control panel shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
certified and provide data to indicate that the manufacturer has a minimum of three
years experience in the building of pump control panels.
B.
The pump control panel shall be housed in a white polyester powder coated finish
inside and out, NEMA 12/3R, Type 316, 14-gauge stainless steel enclosures, with
drip shield and door gasket. The control panel door shall be operated by a three point
latch. An additional remote access terminal strip with thirty additional terminal
blocks shall be added for SCADA. Enclosure shall have provisions for padlocking
the door and a dead front inner door unit for mounting controls. All exterior
hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. All LCD screens shall have an
aluminum sunshield painted white with hinged flap covering the screen surrounding
the manufacturer’s enclosure.
C.
There shall be permanently affixed to the interior side of the enclosure door both a
nameplate and a 10-inch by 12-inch pocket for log sheet storage. The nameplate
shall contain the following information, voltage, phase, rated horsepower, rpm, date
manufactured and pump and control panel manufacturer's name, pump data,
including impeller data, operating point and head, kilowatt input, and amperes at the
operating point and at least two other points on the pump curve, and pump serial
numbers.
D.
The control panel enclosure shall be UL 50 type NEMA 3R listed. Install overhead
T-8 fluorescent lighting. The lighting shall be controlled by a single pole switch
installed inside of the control panel.
E.
The control panel shall consist of a main circuit breaker and generator breaker with
mechanical interlock, an emergency power receptacle, a circuit breaker and magnetic
starter for each pump motor, and 20-ampere, 120-volt circuit breakers as required.
The main circuit breaker and generator circuit breaker shall be equal in rating. Each
panel shall contain an additional 20-ampere breaker for SCADA purposes. All
circuit breakers shall be operable through the dead front inner door. Additional
13300-1
multi-lug assemblies shall be provided to prevent more than one wire per lug. All
circuit breakers shall be molded case. The control panel shall respond to liquid level
float switches and other approved methods specified by Appendix D, “List of
Approved Products”, to automatically start and stop pumps as well as sound an alarm
upon high or low wet well levels. Control switches shall provide means to operate
each pump manually or automatically. When operated in the automatic mode, the
control assembly shall provide means to manually select or automatically alternate
the position of the “lead” and “lag” pumps after each pumping cycle. A float type
liquid level control system shall continuously monitor wet well liquid level and
control operation of the low-level cutoff for the pumps and shall operate off a 24VAC circuit.
F.
2.02
2.03
The control panel shall operate a minimum of two electrical submersible pumps at
the power characteristics stipulated. The control function shall provide for the
operation of the lead pump under normal conditions. If the incoming flow exceeds
the pumping capacity of the lead pump, the lag pump shall automatically start to
handle this increased flow. As the flow decreases, pumps shall be cut off at elevation
as shown on the PLANS. Pumps shall alternate positions as lead pump at the end of
each cycle. A failure of the alternator shall not disable the pumping system. The
alternator shall include a safe, convenient method of manual alternation and also
have provisions to prevent automatic alternation without disturbing any wiring.
Should the “pump off” regulator fail, the system shall keep the station in operation.
POWER SUPPLY AND MAIN DISCONNECT
A.
Power supply to the control panel shall be 240-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire (Delta) or 480volt, 3-phase, 4-wire (Y). Minimum service shall be 100-ampere. Single-phase power
shall not be accepted.
B.
A lockable, non-fused disconnect shall be used for service main disconnects at all
stations. In all pump stations, a main disconnect shall be installed between the meter
and the panel. Provide dual lugs on load side of disconnect for connection of TVSS
equipment. Exception: At pump stations with a generator and transfer switch,
provide molded case circuit breaker located ahead of transfer switch for service
main disconnect.
C.
Disconnect shall be rated for the maximum available fault current from the utility
serving the pump station with electrical power.
D.
On all 480-volt systems, an additional UL approved lockable, non-fused, safety type
switch utility service disconnect shall be installed ahead of the meter.
MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS
A.
Each pump motor shall be protected by a 3-pole molded case circuit breaker. (See
Appendix D, “List of Approved Products”.) The motor circuit breaker shall be
operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break
overcenter switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free from the handle so
that the contacts cannot be held closed against a short circuit and abnormal currents
which cause the motor circuit breaker to trip. Tripping shall be clearly indicated by
13300-2
the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the normal “on” and
“off” positions. All latch surfaces shall be ground and polished. All poles shall be so
constructed that they open, close, and trip simultaneously. Motor circuit breaker
must be completely enclosed in a high strength glass polyester molded case. Ampere
ratings shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy. Arc
extinction must be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A manual push-to-trip
button shall be provided for manual exercising of the trip mechanism.
2.04
MOTOR STARTER AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
2.04.1 The panel shall contain a motor starter for each motor. The motor starter shall be
across the line non reversing magnetic starter with individual mechanical overload
protection on each power leg with reset installed through the dead front inner door
unit. Provide solid-state soft start overloads for motors greater than 50 horsepower.
Local power company regulations shall govern.
2.04.2 Selector switches shall be installed on the face of the inner dead front door unit.
Selector switch shall be a heavy-duty oil tight “Hand-Off-Auto” three-position
switch to control the operation mode of each pump motor starter.
2.05
MOTOR DISCONNECT
2.05.1 Where pump motor disconnect and starter is not mounted within site of pump wet
well, (where electrical equipment is mounted within a building or other enclosure)
provide additional NEMA 4X stainless steel non-fused disconnect for each pump
within sight of pump location.
2.06
PUMP ALTERNATOR
2.06.1 A solid-state alternator shall be provided to change the pump starting sequence on
each pumping cycle. A three-position alternator test switch shall be provided to
control the alternation operation. Switch positions to include the “auto” to provide
normal automatic sequence, “off” position to disable alternator, and “test” position
with a spring return to allow the alternating of the pump sequence to check alternator
operation.
2.07
LIGHTS AND ALARMS
2.07.1 Indicator Lights - There shall be installed on the face of the dead front inner door,
heavy-duty oil tight indicator lights as shown on the STANDARD DRAWINGS.
2.07.2 High Level Alarm - A vapor proof red light shall be mounted on top of the panel and
horn shall be mounted on the side of the panel for high-level alarm. Also, there shall
be an alarm silence pushbutton on the dead front inner door and a silence relay which
will silence the horn and automatically reset when these signals are restored to
normal. The pushbutton shall be heavy-duty oil tight. The red globe shall be the
screw-on type.
13300-3
2.08
EMERGENCY POWER RECEPTACLE
2.08.1 This item shall be required on all stations as approved in Appendix D, “List of
2.09
ADDITIONAL CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS
2.09.1 Wiring:
2.09.1.1
2.09.1.2
All power wires shall be THW or THWN 75 degree Celsius insulated
stranded copper conductors and shall be appropriately sized for the
given load application. All control circuit wire shall be type
THW/THWN stranded. All wiring within the enclosure shall be
neatly routed by the use of slotted type wiring duct with snap on type
covers.
Interior wiring shall be neatly bundled with nylon ties and include
sufficient loop across the hinges to prevent wire damage, with each
end of conductor marked (ID), color: red, 24-volt; white, neutral;
black, 120-volt.
2.09.2 Terminal Points:
2.09.2.1
Terminal points of all terminal strips shall be permanently identified.
All terminal numbers and identifying nomenclature shall correspond
to and be shown on electrical diagrams. All wiring shall be
permanently identified with heat shrink preprinted labels and be
shown on electrical schematic diagrams.
2.09.3 Engraved and / or etched Nameplates:
2.09.3.1
All equipment enclosures, circuit breakers, control switches, indicator
pilot lights and other control devices shall be identified with
permanently affixed legend plates and lamicoid-type engraved
nameplates where applicable. Nameplates may also be permanently
etched into dead front cover of control panel.
2.09.4 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS):
2.09.4.1
A transient voltage surge protector shall be included and wired to
protect motors and control equipment from lighting induced line
surges. All surge protectors shall be UL approved and installed per
respective power company requirements and manufacturer’s
specifications. TVSS shall be attached to the load side of the station
main disconnect and be mounted in a separate NEMA 4X enclosure.
2.09.4.2
The TVSS unit shall be UL listed and labeled as per UL 1449-Current
edition.
2.09.4.3
The unit shall meet “Testing Requirements” of IEEE 62.41 and 62.45.
13300-4
2.09.4.4
The unit shall be certified to pass NEMA LS-1 Testing. Manufacturer
shall provide documentation of NEMA LS-1 certification.
2.09.5 Elapsed Time Meters:
2.09.5.1
Elapsed time meters shall be 115-volt not-reset type and shall totalize
pump-running time in hours and tenths of hours to 99999.9 hours.
2.09.6 Convenience Receptacle:
2.09.6.1
On the face of the dead front inner door unit, there shall be installed a
20-ampere 120-volt, duplex convenience receptacle. It shall be
provided with its own single pole, 20-ampere circuit breaker for
protection. Ground fault interrupt type shall be required.
2.09.7 SCADA Circuit Breaker:
2.09.7.1
A 20A-1P, 120-VAC circuit shall be provided for connection to
SCADA equipment provided for the pump station.
2.09.8 Control Terminal Blocks:
2.09.8.1
Control terminal blocks shall be of the clamp screw type, rated for
600 volts. Amperage rating shall accommodate the control circuit
amperage. An additional 30 space terminal strip shall be installed in
the cabinet for future use, with RTU equipment.
2.09.9 Control Power Transformers:
2.09.9.1
On 480-volt control panels, there shall be a 480/120 volt power
transformer with a minimum size of 2 KVA to provide 120 VAC
power for: coils for starters, 20 ampere duplex receptacle, indicator
pilot lights, alarm horn, alarm light, pump alternator, elapsed time
meters, SCADA control panel, etc. The secondary side shall have
one leg fused and the other grounded.
2.09.9.2
A 120/24-VAC 75 VA control power transformer shall provide
power for float switches.
2.09.10 Control Relay:
2.09.10.1
2.09.11
The level control relays shall operate from 24-VAC. They shall be
enclosed, plug-in 8-pin type with octal-style screw terminal sockets.
Electrical Schematic:
2.09.11.1
There shall be permanently affixed to the interior side of the exterior
enclosure door an electrical schematic diagram and a copy supplied to
13300-5
UTILITIES personnel at start-up. The schematic shall be laminated
and include the rated amperage and voltage for all components.
2.09.12
Phase Monitor:
2.09.12.1
2.09.13
Panel Support:
2.09.13.1
2.10
For all 240-volt stations an 8-pin plug-in type phase monitor shall be
provided for protection of electrical components due to phase loss.
Adequate dummy pin protection shall be provided to prevent
accidental interchanging of the 8-pin phase monitor with the 8-pin
alternator. All 480-volt stations shall have surface mount type phase
monitors. An approved breaker shall provide phase monitor
protection. Fuses shall not be used for phase monitor protection.
Main support posts shall be minimum 3-inch, schedule 40, 316
stainless steel with 316 stainless steel cap. All other control panel
support brackets and hardware shall be 316-stainless steel. Hardware
shall include, U-channel strut systems, brackets, nuts, bolts, washers,
toggle bolts, clamps, straps, etc.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
2.10.1 A grounding system shall be installed as per National Electrical Code, local codes
and ordinances. The STANDARD DRAWINGS shall clearly show the electrical
grounding system. A counterpoise cable grounding system installed a minimum of 30
inches below grade, shall be installed with connections to at least the following
equipment:
2.10.1.1
2.10.1.2
2.10.1.3
2.10.1.4
2.10.1.5
2.10.1.6
2.10.1.7
2.10.1.8
2.10.1.9
Wet well cover;
Valve vault cover;
Control panels;
Generator;
Electrical system grounding electrode conductor;
Main disconnect switch;
Fence;
Emergency bypass piping and station back flow preventer and water
spigot to be bonded and;
Exception: Ground connection to fencing is not required for PVC
coated chain link fence framing, concrete block wall, or wood
fencing.
2.10.2 Material and Installation:
2.10.2.1
The STANDARD DRAWINGS shall show details of material and
installation to construct a completely functional and operational
electrical grounding system.
13300-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TESTING
A.
Start Up Procedure:
1.
B.
Control Panel Testing:
1.
C.
The grounding system shall be tested to less than five ohms of resistance.
Testing results by a certified testing agency using fall of potential testing as
described by NETA (International Electrical Testing Association), shall be
provided to UTILITIES during pump station startup.
SERVICE
A.
Control panel service:
1.
3.03
After fabrication in the control panel manufacturer’s plant, an operational test
shall be performed to check out the entire panel before delivery. Panels for
three-phase source voltage shall be used for the testing.
Ground System Testing:
1.
3.02
As specified in Section 4410 “Testing and Inspection for Acceptance of
Pump Stations”.
Warranty/service center for the control panel shall be located in Orange
County, Volusia, Brevard, Lake, Polk, Seminole, or Osceola Counties and
service response shall be within two hours during NORMAL WORKING
HOURS, and provide emergency service 24 hours 7 days a week.
WARRANTY
A.
General:
1.
Equipment installed under this section shall have a one-year warranty against
defects in materials and workmanship covering parts and labor unless noted
otherwise.
END OF SECTION
13300-7
SECTION 13515
LINING EXISTING SEWER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.02
The scope of work shall include the method and process for furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to provide for the complete
rehabilitation of deteriorated sanitary sewer pipes for forming a new tight-fitting liner
within the existing pipe indicated on the Drawings by means of a cured-in-place
liner. This work shall include a temporary by-pass pumping system and traffic
control (MOT) during the installation of the liner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A flexible resin-impregnated tube shall be inserted into the pipeline to be
rehabilitated and then formed to the original conduit by the use of hydrostatic head.
The resin shall then be cured by using hot water under hydrostatic pressure within
the tube. The cured-in-place pipe (CIPP) shall be continuous and tight fitting. Each
system must provide a non-prorated 5-year materials warranty, to stop infiltration,
prohibit root intrusion, protect the existing pipeline from further deterioration, and
provide a surface coating resistant to sewer gases and chemicals.
B.
The Contractor shall provide for flow control during the time of installation. Traffic
control, equipment and personnel shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C.
Only qualified and experienced installers of the specified liner systems shall be
considered. Qualifications and experience credentials shall include:
D.
1.
Experience in the pipeline rehabilitation industry for a minimum of five (5)
years, or verifiable proficiency in installing the system to be applied, such as
certified training from manufacturer.
2.
References for a minimum of five (5) similar rehabilitation projects using the
process as proposed herein. Reference lists shall include the client name
under which the work was accomplished, contact person(s), address, and
telephone number.
Manufacturers
1.
Insituform
2.
FirstLiner, USA
3.
13515-1
1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit to the Owner, as provided in the General Conditions, Shop Drawings
showing manufacturer specifications and application procedures.
B.
Manufacturer’s Product Safety Data Sheets.
C.
List of Installers References
D.
Statement of Warranty: Unconditioned, 5-year, non-prorated warranty to stop
infiltration and deterioration.
E.
By-pass pumping plan.
F.
Traffic Control Plan (MOT).
FIELD OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Contractor shall have available on job site current manufacturer’s Material Safety
Data Sheets. These are required working documents.
B.
Contractors shall use employees who are properly trained and who are aware of
possible work, materials, and job site related hazards.
C.
Contractors shall report to the Owner any condition, which may pose a threat to the
health and welfare of employees of the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor or the
general public.
D.
Contractor shall maintain OSHA compliance of job site rules, regulations, and safety
precautions.
E.
Contractor shall keep the working area clean, safe, appropriately barricaded, and
properly lighted.
F.
Contractor shall ensure waste material is properly disposed in accordance with
applicable regulations and safety precautions.
G.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange and pay for the source of
water necessary to perform the lining operations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Tube
1.
The sewn tube shall consist of one or more layers of absorbent non-woven
felt fabric. The tube shall be constructed to withstand installation pressures,
have sufficient strength to bridge missing pipe, and stretch to fit irregular
13515-2
pipe sections.
B.
2.02
2.
The wet out tube shall have a uniform thickness that when compressed at
installation pressures will meet or exceed the design thickness.
3.
The tube shall be sewn to a size that when installed will tightly fit the internal
circumference and length of the original pipe. Allowance should be made for
circumferential stretching during inversion. Overlapped layers of felt in
longitudinal seams that cause lumps in the final products shall not be utilized.
4.
The outside layer of the tube (before wet out) shall be coated with an
impermeable, flexible membrane that will contain the resin and facilitate
monitoring of resin saturation during the resin impregnation (wet out)
procedure.
5.
The tube shall be homogeneous across the entire wall thickness containing no
intermediate or encapsulated elastomeric layers. No materials shall be
included in the tube that may cause delamination in the cured CIPP.
6.
The wall color of the interior pipe surface of CIPP after installation shall be
a light reflective color so that a clear detailed examination with closed circuit
television inspection equipment may be made.
7.
Seams in the tube shall be stronger than the non-seamed felt.
8.
The outside of the tube shall be marked for distance at regular intervals along
its entire length, not to exceed 5 ft. Such markings shall include the
Manufacturer’s name or identifying symbol.
Resin: The resin system shall be a corrosion resistant polyester, vinyl ester, or
expoxy and catalyst system that when properly cured within the tube composite
meets the requirements of ASTM F1216 and ASTM F1743, the physical properties
herein, and those which are to be utilized in the design of the cured-in-place pipe for
this project. The resin shall produce cured-in-place pipe, which will comply with the
structural, and chemical resistance requirements of this specification.
STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The CIPP design shall assume no bonding to the original pip wall.
B.
The layers of the cured CIPP shall be uniformly bonded. It shall not be possible to
separate any two layers with a probe or point of a knife blade so that the layers
separate cleanly or the probe or knife blade moves freely between the layers. If
separation of the layers occurs during testing of field samples, new samples will be
cut from the work. Any reoccurrences may cause rejection of work.
C.
The cured pipe material (CIPP) shall conform to the properties listed below:
1.
Modulus of Elasticity:
250,000 psi
13515-3
D.
2.03
2.
Flexural Stress:
4,500 psi
3.
Design Safety Factor:
2.0
Any layers of the tube that are not saturated with resin prior to insertion into the
existing pipe shall not be included in the structural CIPP wall thickness calculation.
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Chemical Resistance: The CIPP shall meet the chemical resistance requirements of
ASTM F1216. CIPP samples for testing shall be of tube and resin system similar to
that proposed for actual construction. It is required that CIPP samples with and
without plastic coating meet these chemical testing requirements.
B.
Hydraulic Capacity: Overall the hydraulic profile shall be maintained as large as
possible. The CIPP shall have a minimum of the full flow capacity of the original
pipe before rehabilitation. Calculated capacities may be derived using a commonly
accepted roughness coefficient for the existing pipe material taking into
consideration its age and condition.
C.
CIPP Field Samples: When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit test
results from field installations in the USA of the same resin system and the tube
materials as proposed for the actual installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CLEANING OF SEWER LINES
A.
3.02
BYPASSING SEWAGE
A.
3.03
The Contractor, when required, shall remove all internal debris out of the sewer line
that will interfere with the installation of the CIPP. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the removal and proper disposal of all debris.
The Contractor shall provide for the flow of sewage around the section or sections of
pipe designated for repair. The Contractor shall work at such hours as to cause the
least sewage flow control problems to the Owner. This may include night work. The
bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an existing upstream manhole and
pumping the flow into a downstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump and
bypass lines shall be adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. The Owner may
require a detail of the bypass plan to be submitted.
INSPECTION OF PIPLINES
A.
Inspection of pipelines shall be performed by the Contractor (in the presence of the
Owner) to locate breaks, obstacles, and service connections by closed circuit
television. The interior of the pipeline shall be carefully inspected to determine the
13515-4
location of any conditions, which may prevent proper installation of CIPP into the
pipelines, and it shall be noted so that these conditions can be corrected. The Owner
shall keep a videotape and suitable log for later reference.
3.04
LINE OBSTRUCTION
A.
3.05
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clear the line of obstructions such as
solids and roots that will prevent the insertion of CIPP. If pre-installation inspection
reveals an obstruction such as protruding service connection, dropped joint, or a
collapse that will prevent the inversion process, that was not evident on the pre-bid
video and it cannot be removed by conventional sewer cleaning equipment, then the
Contractor shall make a point repair excavation to uncover and remove or repair the
obstruction. Such excavations must be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to
the commencement of the work.
PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
The Contractor shall make every effort to maintain service usage throughout the duration of
the project. In the event that a service will be out, the maximum amount of time of no service
shall be 8 hours for any property served by the sewer. A public notification program shall be
implemented, and shall as a minimum, require the Contractor to be responsible for
contacting each home or business connected to the sanitary sewer and informing them of the
work to be conducted, and when the sewer will be off-line. The Contractor shall also provide
the following:
3.06
A.
Written notice to be delivered to each home or business the day prior to the
beginning of work being conducted on the section, and a local telephone number of
the Contractor they can call to discuss the project or any problems which could arise.
B.
Personal contact with any home or business, which cannot be reconnected within the
time stated in the written notice.
SERVICE CONNECTION LOCATION
The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming the locations of all branch service
connections prior to installing and curing the CIPP.
3.07
LINER INSTALLATION
The installation of the approved liner system shall in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. This shall include the preparation, installation, curing and
finishing operation for the completion of the pipeline rehabilitation process.
END OF SECTION
13515-5
SECTION 13516
REHABILITATION OF EXISTING MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this section consists of providing all labor, materials and
equipment necessary for rehabilitating existing manholes including:
1.
Manhole sealing, plugging, patching and coatings.
2.
Manhole lining and structural enhancement
a.
B.
1.02
1.03
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) or Polypropylene Random
Copolymer (PP-R) Concrete Protective Liner.
3.
Reinstallation or replacement of manhole frames (rings) and covers.
4.
Repair or replacement of manhole benching and flow channels.
Manholes requiring rehabilitation are identified on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Where the applicator/installer is required to be certified by the
manufacturer, all training, demonstration and certifications shall be in place prior to
beginning the work at the sole expense of the Contractor. Manhole rehabilitation
shall be performed by a crew under the direct supervision of a superintendent that has
experience in the rehabilitation procedures as specified herein and as considered
standard in the industry.
B.
Storage, mixing, handling, and use of all materials and compounds shall be in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and specifications.
C.
Standards: NASSCO Specification Guidelines for Sewer Collection System
Maintenance and Rehabilitation, latest edition and ISO 9001.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Shop drawings, working drawings and samples shall be submitted
in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01001 – General
Requirements of these specifications. In addition, the following shall be submitted to
the Owner for approval prior to construction:
1.
A detailed description of equipment and operational procedures to
13516-1
accomplish the manhole rehabilitation including but not limited to sealant
mixture d4esign, patching material mixture design, coatings, liner materials,
application patching/lining procedures, samples and test data.
2.
A detailed time schedule of all tasks including setup time, demolition,
rehabilitation and curing time.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
2.02
The materials used shall be designed, manufactured, and intended for sewer manhole
rehabilitation and the specific application in which they are used. The materials shall
have a proven history of performance in sewer manhole rehabilitation. The materials
shall be delivered to the job site in original unopened packages and clearly labeled
with the manufacturer’s identification and printed instructions.
SEALING, PLUGGING, PATCHING, AND LINING MATERIALS
A.
Materials used for specific applications shall be as follows:
1.
2.
Plugging holes and stopping active hydrostatic infiltration at points in
concrete and masonry manholes:
a.
A premixed portland cement-based hydraulic cement consisting of
portland cement, graded silica aggregates, special plasticizing and
accelerating agents. It shall not contain chlorides, gypsums, plasters,
iron particles, or gas-forming agents or promote the corrosion of steel
it may come in contact with. Set time approximately 50 seconds. Tenminute compressive strength approximately 500 psi.
b.
A siliconate-based liquid accelerator field mixed with neat portland
cement. Set time approximately 50 seconds.
c.
Material shall be Preco Plug as manufactured by Fosroc, Inc., StrongPlug as manufactured by Strong Systems, Inc. or an accepted equal.
Patching, filling and repairing non-infiltrating holes, cracks, and breaks in
concrete and masonry manholes.
a.
Liner shall be AGRU Sure Grip® HDPE (high-density polyethylene)
or Polypropylene Random Copolymer (PP-R) with a minimum
thickness of 2 mm or acceptable equal. All HDPE liner sheets shall
be extruded with a large number of anchoring studs, a minimum of
(420/m2, 39 ft2), manufactured during the extrusion process in one
piece with the sheet so there is no welding and no mechanical
finishing work to attach the studs to the sheet. The liner shall have a
pull-out of 112.5 lbs./anchoring stud. Minimum distance between
studs shall be no less than 2.1275”.
13516-2
b.
Flat liner sheet, non-anchored, used for overlapping joints, shall have
a minimum thickness of 3mm. All joints shall be sealed by means of
thermal welding performed by lining manufacturer’s certified
welders.
c.
The lining shall have good impact resistance, shall be flexible, and
shall have an elongation sufficient to bridge up to a ¼” settling crack,
without damage to the lining. The liner shall be able to bridge any
expansion cracks that may occur.
d.
The lining and welding rod shall be manufactured from the same
resins and meet the following properties:
Property
Density
MFI
(Melt Flow
Index)
Heat Reversion
(Dimensional
Stability
Yield Stress
Elongation of
Yield
Elongation at
Break
Fire
Classification
Maximum
Working
Temperature
2.03
Testing Method
ASTM-D792-86
Unit
g/cm3
HDPE
0.945
ASTM D1238-88
g/10min
(1905)
ASTM-D1638—83 %
<2
ASTM-D638-89
PSI
≥2,320
ASTM-D638-89
%
≥12
ASTM-D638-89
%
≥200
UL – 94
V2
C˚
F˚
60
140
e.
Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide written certification that
the liner used meets or exceeds the requirements of this specification.
f.
The lining shall be repairable at any time during the life of the
structure.
MANHOLE FRAMES (RINGS) AND COVERS
A.
Replacement frames and covers for manholes shall be gray iron castings conforming
to ASTM Designation A48, Class 30. All manhole frames and covers shall be traffic
bearing unless otherwise noted. Lifting or “pick” holes shall be provided, but shall
not penetrate the cover. The words “SANITARY” and “ORANGE COUNTY,
FLORIDA” shall be cast in all manhole covers shown on the Drawings.
B.
For all lined manholes the use of HDPE Grade rings shall be used in lieu of brick or
13516-3
precast grade rings. Grade rings shall meet HS-25 load rating. Butyl sealant shall be
used between each ring to make a watertight joint. The first grade ring will be welded
to the liner to provide a gas tight seal.
C.
2.04
Cement mortar shall comply with ASTM Designation C270, Type M, except that the
cement shall be Portland Type II only. No mortars that have stood more than one (1)
hour shall be used.
MANHOLE BENCHING AND FLOW CHANNELS
A.
Repair of existing benching and/or flow channels shall be made with fast-curing nonshrink portland cement-based hydraulic cement. One-hour compressive strength of
approximately 600 psi.
B.
Concrete for replacement of benching and/or flow channels shall be Class C, 2,500
psi with a 0.50 water cement ratio. Maximum slump shall be 4 inches plus or minus 1
inch.
C.
The fillets, benching and flow channels shall be coated with an epoxy compound that
when applied shall retain a minimum thickness of 125 mils. Material shall be
Aquatapoxy as manufactured by American Chemical Corporation or acceptable
equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
General: All interior surfaces shall be prepared in strict accordance with the
respective material manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Cleaning: All concrete and masonry surfaces must be clean. Grease, laitance, loose
bricks, mortar, unsound concrete, and other materials must be completely removed.
Water blasting utilizing proper nozzles shall be the primary method of cleaning;
however, other methods such as wet or dry sandblasting, acid wash, concrete
cleaners, degreasers or mechanical means may be required to properly clean the
surfaces. Surfaces on which these other methods are used shall be thoroughly rinsed,
scrubbed, and neutralized to remove cleaning agents and their reactant products.
Acid etching may be required to assure adherence of some materials being utilized.
C.
For all rehabilitation processes described herein, active infiltration shall be stopped
by chemical grout sealing or plugging. All large voids in the manhole wall, corbel or
rise sections shall be patched.
D.
Manhole steps, pipe ends, lifting hook or eyes or other protrusions shall be removed
flush with the manhole interior.
E..
Where the process requires interruption of flow, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary diversion or bypass pumping equipment to handle the flow for the duration
of the manhole rehabilitation, including curing time where applicable.
13516-4
3.02
3.02
F.
Where overspray or droppings may affect the benching or flow channels, the
manhole base shall be covered with plywood and braced to provide a firm working
platform.
G.
All spoil material resulting from the preparatory cleaning, plugging and patching
operation shall be removed at the manhole and not allowed to enter the collection
system. All spoils removed from the manhole shall be disposed of in a manner
acceptable to the governing authority.
H.
The Contractor shall keep his work areas neat, clean and reasonable free of odor. The
Contractor shall bear the responsibility for and provide immediate cleanup of any
spills at or near the site or during transport operations.
MANHOLE SEALING, PLUGGING, PATCHING, AND COATING
A.
Stopping infiltration: After surface preparation and prior to the application of
coatings, infiltration shall either be stopped by chemical grout sealing or plugging.
B.
Patching: Loose material shall be removed from the area to be patched or repointed
exposing a sound subbase. Holes or voids around steps, joints or pipes, spalled areas,
and cavities caused by missing or broken brick shall be patched and missing mortar
repointed using a nonshrink patching mortar conforming to the requirements of Part
2 – Products, above. Cracks not subject to movement and greater than 1/16 inch in
width shall be routed out to a minimum width and depth of ½ inch and patched with
nonshrink patching mortar as indicated above.
C.
Linings (corrosion protection): Linings systems conforming to the requirements of
Part 2 – Products shall be applied to all interior surfaces, excluding the manhole
bench and flow channels. When completed, the lining shall be free of any defects.
MANOLE LINING AND STRUCTURAL ENHANCEMENT
A.
HDPE or PP-R liner:
1.
The Contractor shall place block-outs as needed to provide pipe inlets and
outlets of the same diameter through the new lined wall. All flows through
the manhole shall remain active unless otherwise indicated.
2.
The internal form shall be sized, erected and braced as necessary to assure
that the new interior wall has an average thickness of 3 inches with a 1 ½
inch of the corbel/cone. The wall thickness may decrease to a minimum of 1
½ inches at the top of the corbel/cone and through the chimney portion of the
manhole. The finished opening shall have a minimum diameter of 20 inches
unless otherwise specified.
3.
The form shall be positioned, sealed and finished at the manhole base using
cement grout to assure that concrete does not enter the sewer during the
procedure.
4.
As the concrete is placed, it shall be consolidated to assure that it makes
13516-5
intimate contact with the form and fills all pockets, seams and cracks within
the annular space. The Contractor shall use adequate but not excessive
vibration which might cause segregation of the concrete components. The top
of the new concrete interior shall not extend into the manhole frame.
5.
When the concrete has sufficiently cured to preclude slump or damage, the
form shall be removed.
6.
The resultant concrete manhole interior shall be smooth and free of
honeycomb or other void spaces. All minor defects which do not impair
structural strength (as determined by the Engineer) shall be patched or
plugged and the resultant surface rubbed smooth to match the appearance of
unaffected concrete. Fins and other projections shall be removed to provide a
smooth manhole or wet well interior finish.
7.
Where removal or replacement of the existing frame and cover or
enlargement of the chimney/corbel/cone is required, and area of sufficient
size shall be excavated and the necessary portion of the manhole removed
and rebuilt as specified. The manhole or wet well frame and cover shall be
reinstalled or replaced and the excavation area restored as specified.
8.
All welding of the concrete protective liner shall be performed in accordance
with the published directives and procedures of the manufacturer and by
welders certified by the manufacturer. Completion of welding will provide a
one piece monolithic system that will provide excellent resistance to
hydrogen sulfide attach and will not pull off the wall in the event that
infiltration occurs.
9.
The following welding techniques are acceptable:
a.
Extrusion Welding: For sealing seams and around pipes
b.
Butt Welding: For sealing large sheets together
c.
Hot Air Welding: For tact welding and only to be used for permanent
welding in extremely tight conditions where extrusion welding is not
possible. Triple pass method must be utilized in this circumstance.
10.
Testing and supervision of the installation and welding shall be performed by
qualified staff only and must be checked when completed by visually
checking and by Spark Testing all welded joints.
11.
A lining manufacturer’s certified fabricator would custom fit the liner to the
formwork in order to protect the concrete surfaces from sewer gases. The
interior surfaces to be protected shall include the walls, ceiling, and pipe
entries.
12.
Sample welds shall be taken from each jobsite during the field welding
process and submitted to the quality assurance department for testing. The
following tests are performed: Shear and Peel Test. Sear weld test results
13516-6
shall meet or exceed at least 805 strength of parent material in a destructive
test, which pulls the sample apart to test the strength and integrity of the
extrusion wells. The peel test pulls the weld apart from the backside of the
weld using a peeling type motion. The results of this test shall meet or exceed
70% of the value of the parent material. The tensionmeter must be used to
pull the samples and carry a current calibration within twelve months. Test
results must be printed and turned in to the Owner.
13.
3.05
3.06
Welders must be certified by the lining manufacturer and furnish a welding
certification to the Owner in the submittals.
REINSTALLATION OR REPLACEMENT OF MANHOLE FRAMES (RINGS) AND
COVERS
A.
Excavation and site restoration in paved and unpaved areas shall be as specified in
the respective sections of Division 2 – Site Work herein.
B.
The Contractor shall remove the existing manhole frame and cover and, if they are
not being reused, dispose of them as directed by the Engineer. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, to repair any
damage to the chimney or corbel caused by the removal of the existing manhole
frame.
C.
If the manhole frame is to be raised, a sufficient number of new HDPE Grade rings
(HS-25 load rating) shall be installed to enable the frame and cover to meet the new
grade. Butyl sealant shall be used between each ring to make a watertight joint. The
manhole cover may also be raised to meet the grade by installing an approved steel
or iron manhole adjusting ring in the top of the existing manhole frame.
D.
New replacement frames and covers shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.
Existing frames and covers that are to be reused shall be thoroughly cleaned before
reinstallation. The Contractor shall then install the new or reused frames so that the
top of the covers are a the required grade.
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF MANHOLE BENCHING AND FLOW
CHANNELS
A.
Repair of defective benching and flow channels shall include sealing points of
infiltration, plugging leaking cracks or voids, patching cracks, holes or other
nonleaking defects and/or reworking the invert of the flow channel to provide a
smooth, uninterrupted transition through the manhole. Where uneven inverts exist
within the manhole, flumes shall be constructed to avoid direct discharge (dropping)
onto the manhole base. All repair work shall be done in a nonflow condition. The
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and facilitating all flow diversion
during the repair operation.
B.
Replacement of existing benching and flow channels shall include removal of the
existing benching and invert materials from the manhole base, reforming and pouring
new benching and flow channels meeting the requirements of Section 02530 –
Sanitary Sewer Systems, herein.
13516-7
C.
3.07
Finished and cured surfaces shall receive an interior protective coating as specified in
Part 2 – Products.
A.
Prior to demobilization from the site, the Contractor shall remove all construction
debris, stabilize any spill areas and wash roadway areas affected by the work.
B.
All manhole rehabilitative sealing and/or lining work shall be guaranteed against
faulty workmanship and/or materials for a period of one (1) year after the completion
of the work. Inspection by the Owner shall be scheduled after the work is complete,
and again within the warranty period, to verify that there is no visible leakage.
Visible leakage, if found, will be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
END OF SECTION
13516-8
S E CT I O N 15064
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A Scope of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
and test all polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping, fittings and appurtenances as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein.
B. General Design: The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard
types of PVC pipe and ductile iron fittings for use in transporting wastewater, reclaimed
water, and water.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: All of the PVC pipe and ductile iron fittings shall be furnished by
manufacturers who are fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the
materials to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed, installed in
accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as
applicable.
B. Standards:
1. AWWA C900/C905
2. ASTM D1784 / D1785 / D2241 / D2466 / D2564 / D2729 / D2774 / D3034 / D3139 /
D3212
3. NSF 14
4. UNI-B-1 through 5
C. Factory Tests: The manufacturer shall perform the factory tests described in Section 3 AWWA C900/C905.
D. Quality Control:
1. The manufacturer shall establish the necessary quality control and inspection practice to
ensure compliance with the referenced standards.
2. In addition to the manufacturer's quality control procedures, the County may select an
independent testing laboratory to inspect the material at the production facility for
compliance with these specifications. The County will pay for the cost of facility
inspection requested by the County.
15064 - 1
rev: August, 2012
1.03
A. Submittals shall be submitted to the County/Professional for review and acceptance prior to
"Submittals."
B. Materials and Shop Drawings
C. Manufacturer's Certification
1. Submit sworn certification of factory tests and their results.
1.04
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Delivery and storage of the materials shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. PVC pipe shall be covered with black plastic with a
minimum thickness of 15-mil. Joint gaskets shall be stored in a clean, dark and dry location
until use.
B. Handling: Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent damage to
the pipe or fittings and their respective coatings. Pipe or fittings shall not be rolled off the
carrier or dropped. Pipe shall be unloaded by lifting with a forklift or crane. All pipe or
fittings shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to
be defective. Pipe shall be handled to prevent damage to the pipe or coating. Accidental
damage to pipe or coating shall be repaired to the satisfaction of County or it shall be
removed from the job. When not being handled, the pipe shall be supported on timber
cradles or on level ground, graded to eliminate all rock points and to provide uniform support
along the full pipe length. When being transported, the pipe shall be supported at all times in
a manner to prevent distortion or damage to the lining or coating. Any unit of pipe that, in
the opinion of the County, is damaged beyond repair by the Contractor shall be removed
from the site.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials furnished and stored until the date of
project completion. The Contractor shall replace, at his expense, all materials found to be
defective or damaged in handling or storage. The Contractor shall, if requested by the
County, furnish certificates, affidavits of compliance, test reports, samples or check analysis
for any of the materials specified herein. All pipe delivered to project site for installation is
subject to random testing for compliance with the designated specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
1. Standards: AWWA C900/C905 and ASTM D1784/D3034/F679 (Gravity Sewer)
15064 - 2
rev: August, 2012
2. Compounds: Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B
3. PVC Gravity Pipe and Fittings: PVC gravity pipe (6-inch to 15-inch), shall conform to
ASTM D3034, maximum SDR 35. PVC gravity pipe (18-inch to 36-inch), shall conform
to ASTM F679 and uniform minimum "pipe stiffness" at 5% (percent) deflection shall be
46-psi. The joints shall be integral bell elastomeric gasket joints manufactured in
accordance with ASTM D3212 and ASTM F477. Applicable UNI Bell Plastic Pipe
Association standard is UNI B.
4. PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings: All PVC pipe of nominal diameter 4 to 12-inches shall
be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C900 and greater than 12-inches
shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C905. The PVC pipe shall
have a minimum working pressure rating of 100-psi and shall have a maximum
dimension ratio of 18. Pipe shall be the same outside diameter as ductile iron pipe.
5. Dimension Ratio/Thickness: (unless otherwise shown on the Drawings)
a. Raw Wastewater:
Pressure Systems: DR 18
(1)
(2)
Gravity Systems: DR 35 (ASTM D3034) or PS 46 (ASTM F679)
b. Treated Wastewater: DR 18
c. Reclaimed Water: DR 18
d. Raw Water: DR 18
e. Potable Water: DR 18
f. Irrigation Piping: Schedule 40 or SDR 21
6. Joints:
a. Push-on integral bell elastomeric gasket joints:
(1) Standards: ASTM D3212/D3139/F477 and UNI-B-1
(2) Gaskets:
(a) Potable and Reclaimed Water Service: Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) ring
type.
(b) Wastewater Service: Neoprene rubber ring type.
(3) Pipe Markings: Pipes shall have a manufacturer's home-mark on the spigot. On
field cut pipe, the Contractor shall provide home-mark on the spigot in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Solvent weld (nominal diameter less than 4-inches):
(1) Standards: ASTM D2466/D2564
(2) Type: Slip Fitting Socket (tapered)
(3) Exclusions: Plastic saddle and flange joints will not be used.
c. Restrained Joints:
(1) Restrained joint devices shall be made specifically for PVC pipe and meet or
exceed the requirements in ASTM F-1674.
(2) Manufacturers: Uni-flange mechanical joint restraints and bell restraints (for all
sizes); Meg-a-lug system as manufactured by EBBA Iron (sizes 12-inches or
less), or acceptable equal.
(3) Design pressure rating equal to or above test pressure as specified herein.
d. Pipe Length:
(1) Pressure systems: 20-feet maximum nominal length
(2) Gravity systems: 13-feet minimum nominal length
B. Fittings - Pressure Systems (nominal diameter 4-inches and greater):
1. Materials: Ductile iron
2. Joints: Mechanical Joint, Minimum 350-psi pressure rating
15064 - 3
rev: August, 2012
3. Gaskets:
a. Water and Reclaimed Water Service: Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) ring type
b. Wastewater Service: Neoprene rubber ring type
4. Exclusions: Standard double bell couplings will not be acceptable where the pipe will
slip completely through the coupling.
5. All fittings shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 and/or C153/A21.53,
latest revision, and shall be ductile iron.
6. All fittings shall have a date code cast (not printed or labeled), with identification of the
date, factory and unit at which it was cast and machined. Fittings shall have distinctly
cast on them the pressure rating, nominal diameter of openings, manufacturer's name, the
country where cast, and deflection angle. Ductile iron fittings shall have the letters "DI"
or "Ductile" cast on them.
7. All potable water main fittings shall have NSF certification and ISO 9001 certification
for both the foundry and manufacturer. The NSF 61 certification shall be issued on all
coatings and linings, from the said manufacturers that are used for potable water
applications.
8. All ductile iron fittings shall have exterior coatings, including markings and colors, and
interior linings in conformance with Section 15062 "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings."
C. Fittings - Pressure Systems (nominal diameter less than 4-inches)
1. Material: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
2. Joints: Slip fitting tapered socket with solvent weld
3. Solvent: Sure Guard 12 or acceptable equal
4. Exclusions: Plastic saddle and flange joint fittings shall not be used
2.03
LOCATION MARKERS, LOCATION WIRE AND IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
A. Electronic Markers and Locator System (for reclaimed water and wastewater ONLY)
1. Markers: Markers shall consist of a passive device capable of reflecting a specifically
designated repulse frequency tuned to the utility (service) being installed. Markers shall
be color coded in accordance with the American Public Works Association's "Utility
Locating and Coordinating Council Standards." Colors shall be: Wastewater and
Reclaimed Water - #1404 Green. Markers shall be full range. Markers shall be installed
directly above the centerline of the respective pipeline at intervals not to exceed 100-feet,
at each fitting (tees, wyes, crosses, reducers, plugs, caps and bends) or change in
horizontal direction and at each valve along the pipeline. Markers shall be hand
backfilled to 1-foot above the pad and have a finished depth of burial of not less than 2feet or more than 6-feet. No separate payment shall be made for furnishing and installing
the respective frequency and color-coded electronic pad type marker.
2. Locator System: Marker locator set shall be the 3M Dynatel 1420 or 3M Dynatel 1420E
Electronic Marker System Marker Locator, or acceptable equal. The Contractor shall
furnish 1 locator set for each type of service piping installed on the Project (i.e.:
reclaimed water, wastewater.) to the County. Each unit shall incorporate the following
features and accessories:
a. Unit(s) shall be tuned to the proper frequency for each type (service) of piping.
b. Field strength meter that provides visual indication of the return signal
c. Function switch for selection of operation mode
d. Sensitivity control to adjust the receiver gain
e. Audio speaker for signal response
15064 - 4
rev: August, 2012
f. Battery access panel containing condensed operating instructions
g. Auxiliary headset and heads set jack
h. Permanently attached shoulder straps
i. Rugged shockproof and weatherproof storage/carrying case
3. Manufacturer: System shall be Scotch Mark Locator System, or acceptable equal.
B. Location Detection Wire
1. Materials: Continuous, insulated 10-gauge copper wire (color to match pipe
identification).
2. Installation: Directly above (1-inch maximum) centerline of pipe terminating at top of
each valve box collar and be capable of extending 18-inches above top of box (stored
inside the 2-inch brass pipe through the valve box collar) in a manner so as not to
interfere with valve operation. For direction drilling installations, a minimum of 2 (two)
10-gauge wires shall be pulled along with the pipe.
C. Identification Markings:
1. Pipe furnished in solid color or white with color lettering as indicated below.
a. Lettering along top 90° (degrees) of pipe, minimum 3/4-inch in height with
appropriate wording appearing 1 or more times every 21-inches along the entire
length of the pipeline.
(1)
Raw Wastewater: Safety Green
(2)
Reclaimed Water: Purple (Pantone 522C)
(3)
Potable Water: Safety Blue
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Standards: AWWA C900/C905/UNI-B 3 and 4
B. Underground Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
1. Bedding: Firm, dry and even bearing of suitable material. Blocking under the pipe will
not be permitted.
2. Placement/Alignment:
a. Installation shall be in accordance with lines and grades shown on the Drawings. For
pressure systems, deflection of joints shall not exceed 75% of that recommended by
the manufacturer.
b. All pipe and fittings shall be inspected prior to lowering into trench to insure no
cracked, broken or otherwise defective materials are being used. All homing marks
shall be checked for the proper length so as to not allow a separation or over homing
of connected pipe. Homing marks incorrectly marked on pipe shall result in rejection
of pipe and removal from site. The Contractor shall clean ends of pipe thoroughly
and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe and keep clean during and
after installation.
c. Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be used for the safe and proper
protection of the Work. Pipe shall be lowered into the trench in such a manner as to
avoid any physical damage to the pipe. Pipe shall not be dropped or dumped into
trenches under any circumstances.
15064 - 5
rev: August, 2012
d. Trench Dewatering and Drainage Control: Contractor shall prevent water from
entering trench during excavation and pipe laying operations to the extent required to
properly grade the bottom of the trench and allow for proper compaction of the
backfill. Pipe shall not be laid in water.
e. Pipe Laying in Trench: Dirt or other foreign material shall be prevented from
entering the pipe or pipe joint during handling or laying operations and any pipe or
fitting that has been installed with dirt or foreign material in it shall be removed,
cleaned and re-laid. Pigging of pipe may be used to remove foreign materials in lieu
of flushing. At times when pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of the
pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or by other means approved by the County
to ensure absolute cleanliness inside the pipe. The color stripe and pipe text shall be
viewed from the top of pipe when installed. When installing PVC pipe, no additional
joints will be installed until the preceding pipe joint has been completed and the pipe
carefully embedded and secured in place.
f. Locating Wire: Locating wire, for electronically locating pipe after it is buried, or
installed by trenchless technology shall be attached along the length of and installed
with the pipe. This is applicable to all sizes and types of pressure mains. At a
minimum, the tracing wire is to be attached to the pipe with nylon wire ties. The
wire itself shall be 10-gauge single strand solid core copper wire with non-metallic
insulation. The insulation shall be color coded for the type of pipe being installed.
Continuous continuity must be maintained in the wire along the entire length of the
pipe run. Permanent splices must be made in the length of the wire using wire
connectors approved for underground applications as listed in the uniform electric
code handbook. The coiled wire shall extend to a minimum of 12-inches above the
surface and be connected to a test station box at valve locations.
g. PVC Pressure Pipe Installation and Training: PVC pipe shall be installed in
accordance with standards set forth in the UNI-BELL "Handbook of PVC Pipe",
AWWA C605, and AWWA Manual M-23. The pipe shall be laid by inserting the
spigot end into the bell flush with the insertion line or as recommended by the
manufacturer. At no time shall the bell spigot end be allowed to go past the
"insertion line" or "homing mark" for pressure pipe applications and homing mark
shall be visible.
i. Field Cutting: PVC pipe can be cut with a handsaw or power driven abrasive disc
making a square cut. The end shall be beveled with a beveling tool, wood rasp or
power sander to the same angle as provided on the factory-finished pipe. The
insertion line on the spigot shall be remarked to the same dimensions as the factorymarked spigot.
j. All Contractor pipe crews utilizing PVC pressure pipe shall be trained on an annual
basis by Uni-Bell in coordination with the County and attended by the manufacturer's
representative of the respective approved Manufacturers in Appendix D "List of
Approved Products." The Uni-Bell PVC training session will consist of proper
handling, storage, installation, and compaction as well as County requirements
regarding PVC pipe and deflection. Every person handling, installing or backfilling
PVC pipe shall not be permitted to install County owned and / or maintained pipe
without training.
k. Approved manufacturers representatives (Appendix D "List of Approved Products"),
not present at the hosted Uni-Bell training session or individuals of pipe crews not in
attendance shall be trained on every project site. On-site project training shall be for
each manufacturer of pipe utilized on-site, per crew and per project. Specifically
15064 - 6
rev: August, 2012
each crewmember shall be trained on every project by every pipe manufactures
representative regardless of previous on-site training. Every person handling,
installing or backfilling PVC pipe shall not be permitted to install County owned and
/ or maintained pipe without training.
l. PVC Gravity Pipe Installation: Gravity sewer pipe shall be installed to the homing
mark, no tolerance. Any noticeable separation shall be removed and reinstalled. The
homing mark may be disregarded to meet the maximum of 1-inch separation between
bell and spigot requirement. Joints:
m. Joint Placement:
(1) Push on joints: Pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing upstream. The gasket
shall be inserted and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated prior to placement
of the pipe. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to verify that the
gasket is correctly located.
(2) Mechanical Joints: Pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the
"Notes on Method of Installation" under ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. The
gasket shall be inserted and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated with soapy
water before tightening the bolts to the specified torque.
C. Thrust Restraint
1. Thrust restraint shall be accomplished by the use of mechanical restraining devices
unless specifically identified otherwise on the Drawings or herein.
2. Length of restrained joints shall be in accordance with the lengths listed in the table as
shown on the Drawings.
D. Installation of Pipes on Curves:
1. No joint deflection or pipe bending is allowed in PVC pipe. The maximum allowable
tolerance in the joint due to variances in installation is 0.75° (degrees) (3-inches per joint
per 20-foot stick of pipe). No bending tolerance in the pipe barrel shall be acceptable.
Alignment change shall be made only with sleeves and fittings.
3.02
CLEANING AND FIELD TESTING
At the conclusion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide all associated cleaning and field
testing as specified in associated sections of these specifications.
END OF SECTION
15064 - 7
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 15065
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section specifies stainless steel pipe and fittings.
B. Types of Service: Stainless steel piping specified in this Section shall be used for raw sewage
discharge piping in the pump station wetwell.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References: This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of
this Section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to
other standards, those documents are included as references under this Section as if
referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this Section and
those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
ANSI B16.1
ANSI B16.11.80
ANSI B31.1
ANSI B36.19M
ASME Section IX (1989)
ASTM A182/A182M
ASTM A193/A193M
ASTM A194/A194M
ASTM A240
ASTM A276
ASTM A312/A312M
ASTM A320/A320M
ASTM A403/A403M
ASTM A409/A409M
ASTM A480/A480M
ASTM A774/A774M
ASTM A778
Title
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, 250, and 800
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
Power Piping
Stainless Steel Pipe
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings,
and Valves and Parts for High Temperature Service
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High
Temperature Service
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure
and High Temperature Service
Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings
Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive
or High Temperature Service
General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and HeatResisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for
General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate
Temperatures
Welded, Un-annealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular
Products
B. Qualifications: All shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a
single manufacturer who is experienced and qualified in the manufacture and fabrication of
the items to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be shop-fabricated and field-installed in
15065 - 1
rev: August, 2012
accordance with common industry wide practices and methods and shall comply with these
specifications. Only weld procedures which have been qualified under ASME Section IX
and only welders who have successfully completed performance qualification tests per
ASME Section IX on these qualified procedures shall be utilized.
C. Testing: Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A312, ASTM A409
HT-0, or ASTM A778, depending on the size and type of stainless steel pipe provided.
1.03
"Submittals."
B. Shop fabrication drawings showing details of materials, piping, fittings, couplings, dielectric
connections, joint locations and details, and types and locations of supports.
C. Certifications specified in the following documents:
1. ASTM A403, paragraph 14.1
D. Test results as specified in this Section.
E. Names and qualification records of proposed welders.
F. Other data necessary to show conformance of the piping system to these specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
2.02
PIPE
A. Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel piping 3-inches and larger shall be manufactured
from ASTM A240 annealed and pickled sheets and plates, Type 316L, in accordance with
ASTM A778 or ASTM A409 HT-0. Only extra-low carbon (ELC) materials with 0.030%
maximum carbon shall be used. Pipe shall be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in
ANSI B36.19 and shall have nominal wall thickness corresponding to schedule 40S.
2.03
FITTINGS
A. Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel fittings 3-inch and larger shall be butt weld type
manufactured in accordance with ASTM A774 of the same material and in the same
thicknesses as the pipe. Long radius elbows less than 24-inches in diameter shall be smooth
flow. All short radius, special radius, reducing, and long radius elbows 24-inches and greater
15065 - 2
rev: August, 2012
in diameter shall be of mitered construction. Reducers shall be straight tapered cone type.
Tees, crosses, laterals, and wyes shall be shop-fabricated from pipe.
2.04
FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Connections shall be flanged as specified in Section 15062 "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings"
and be capable of being mated to ductile iron pipe flanges or pump base elbow.
2.05
GASKETS
A. Gaskets shall be as specified in Section 15062 "Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings."
2.06
BOLTS
A. Bolts, nuts, and washers for stainless steel flange assemblies shall be Type 316 stainless steel
with bolts and nuts conforming to ASTM A193 Grade B8M.
2.07
PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Unless otherwise specified, all hangers, rods, structural attachments, and other components
of support systems for stainless steel pipe shall be of the same materials as the pipe.
2.08
FINISH
A. After all shop operations have been completed, pipe and fittings shall be pickled and
passivated in the manufacturer's plant, and scrubbed and washed until discoloration and
possible iron picked up from manufacturing process are removed. The standard finish for
16-gauge through 8-gauge material shall be No. 1 or 2B per ASTM A480; 3/16-inch and
heavier plate material shall be No. 1-mil finish or better per ASTM A480.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPE CUTTING, THREADING, AND JOINTING
A. Pipe cutting, threading, and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. All
pipe threads shall be lubricated with Teflon tape.
3.02
WELDING
A. General: Piping with wall thickness up to 11-gauge (0.120-inch) shall be welded with the
TIG (GTAW) process. Unless otherwise specified, heavier walls shall be properly beveled
and have a root pass with the TIG (GTAW) process followed by subsequent passes with the
TIG (GTAW), MIG (GMAW), or Metallic Arc (SMAW) process. Filler wire of ELC grades
only shall be added to all welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or greater than
the parent metal. Weld deposit shall be smooth and evenly distributed and have a crown of
no more than 1/16-inch on the I.D. and 3/32-inch on the O.D. of the piping. Concavity,
undercut, cracks, or crevices shall not be allowed. Butt welds shall have full penetration to
15065 - 3
rev: August, 2012
the interior surface, and inert gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of
the joint. Excessive weld deposits, slag, spatter, and projections shall be removed by
grinding. Welds on gasket surfaces shall be ground smooth.
B. Field Welding: Field welding shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible by
prefabrication of pipe systems at the factory. Pipe butt welds may be performed at the job
site providing the butt welds are performed only with an inert gas shielded process and that
other applicable specified welding requirements are rigidly adhered to. All residue, oxide,
and heat stain is to be removed from any type of field weld and the affected adjacent areas by
the use of stainless steel wire brushes. The field weld shall then be cleaned with an agent
such as Eutectic Company's "Eucleen" or equal followed by complete removal of the agent.
C. Preparation of Surfaces to Be Welded: Surfaces of joints to be welded shall be free from mill
scale, slag, grease, oil, paint, rust, and other foreign material. Joints to be welded shall be
wire-brushed with stainless steel wire brushes and precisely fitted before welding.
D. Weather Conditions: Welding shall be done only when the surfaces are completely free of
any moisture. Welding of the pipe shall not be done during periods of high winds or rain
unless the areas being welded are properly shielded.
E. Tack Welds, Clips, and Other Attachments: Nicks, gouges, notches, and depressions in the
base metal in the area of the joint shall be repaired before the joint weld is made. Tack
welds, clips, and other attachments shall be removed and defects repaired, except where the
tack welds occur within the weld area and these tack welds do not exceed the size of the
completed weld. Cracked tack welds shall be removed. Areas to be repaired shall be ground
to clean metal and then repaired by building up with weld metal. The repaired areas shall be
ground smooth to form a plane surface with the base metal.
F. Defects and Repairs: Welds with cracks, slag inclusions, porosity, undercutting, incomplete
penetration, or which are otherwise deficient in quality or made contrary to any provisions of
these specifications shall be removed by chipping or grinding throughout their depth to clean
base metal. Calking or peening of welds to correct defects shall not be done. Welds found
deficient in dimension but not in quality shall be enlarged by additional welding after
thoroughly cleaning the surface of previously deposited metal and the adjoining plate. Weld
deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into the interior of the pipe shall be removed by
grinding.
3.03
MARKING, SHIPPING, AND STORAGE
A. Pipe, fittings, and fabrications shall be properly marked with type, gauge, and heat number.
Fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges secured for storage or transport
after fabrication. Fabricated piping shall be piece-marked with identifying numbers or codes
which correspond to the Contractor's layout and installation drawings. The marks shall be
located on the spools at opposite ends and 180° (degrees) apart. Pipe spools shall be loaded,
blocked, and lagged as necessary to ensure protection from damage during shipping.
Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be stored per manufacturer's recommendation. Dents,
gouges, and scratches in stainless steel pipe and fittings are not acceptable and are reason for
rejecting pipe and fittings.
15065 - 4
rev: August, 2012
3.04
FABRICATION/INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The piping supplier and the Contractor shall use extreme care to avoid the contact of any
ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping during manufacturing, fabricating, handling,
and installation stages. All saws, drills, files, and wire brushes shall be used for stainless
steel piping only. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be nonferrous, stainless steel, or
rubber-lined. Nylon slings or straps shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. After
installation, the Contractor shall wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface.
All welded joints shall be treated with a pickling solution, brushed with stainless steel wire
brushes, and rinsed clean. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, the Contractor shall pickle the
affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS, or equal, scrub with stainless steel brushes, and
rinse clean.
3.05
COATINGS
A. Painting of the stainless steel pipe is not required.
END OF SECTION
15065 - 5
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 15105
CHECK VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Scope of Work: Furnish, install, and test check valves including all appurtenances required
as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. General Design
1. Valves larger than 2-1/2-inch diameter shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA
C-508.
2. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in
controlling the flow of sewage, water, sludge, chemicals, air, etc., depending on the
applications.
3. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer and the working
pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of
the body.
4. For all buried valves in which the operating nut is deeper than 4-feet from the finish
ground surface, an extension rod with 2-inch operating nut and upper guide shall be
installed permanently in the riser section. Extend nut to 1-foot below finish grade.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All gate valves of same type and style shall be manufactured by one manufacturer.
B. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused and shall be a
standard product which has a successful record of reliable service in similar installations for
a minimum of 5-years.
1.03
"Submittals."
B. Shop Drawings and submittals shall be submitted to the County/Professional Engineer for
review and acceptance prior to construction for the following:
1. Certified Shop Drawings showing details of construction, dimensions (including laying
length), and weight.
2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs showing all valve parts and describing
material of construction by material and specification, e.g., AISI.
3. Valve coatings and linings, if any.
4. A complete bill of materials for all equipment.
15105 - 1
rev: August, 2012
1.04
UCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping
1. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during
a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed.
2. Factory assembled parts and components shall be dismantled for shipment unless
permission is received in writing from the County/Professional Engineer.
3. Finished surfaces of all exposed openings shall be protected by wooden blanks, strongly
built and securely bolted thereto.
4. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and
corrosion.
5. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment,
and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during
shipment, storage, and handling.
6. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its
contents.
B. Storage
1. Store valves and accessories in an area on the construction site protected from weather,
moisture, or possible damage.
2. Do not store valves or accessories directly on the ground.
C. Handling
1. Handle valves and accessories to prevent damage of any nature.
2. Carefully inspect all materials for:
a. Defects in workmanship and materials
b. Removal of debris and foreign material in valve openings and seats
c. Proper functioning of all operating mechanisms
d. Tightness of all nuts and bolts
1.05
WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES
A. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's for 1-year,
unless otherwise specified, commencing at the time of final acceptance by the County.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment warranty for all
equipment which lists for more than $500.00 (major equipment). The County reserves the
right to request warranties for equipment not classified as "major". The Contractor shall still
warrant equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's 1-year warranty period
even though certificates of warranty may not be required.
C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide a 1-year
warranty commencing at the date of substantial completion, the Contractor shall obtain from
the manufacturer a 2-year warranty commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job
site. This 2-year warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the 1year warranty starting at the time of County acceptance of the equipment.
D. The County shall incur no labor or equipment cost during the guarantee period.
E. Guarantee shall cover all necessary labor, equipment, and replacement parts resulting from
15105 - 2
rev: August, 2012
faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship and
materials, leakage, breakage, or other failure of equipment or components furnished by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Ball Check Valves, 2-1/2-inches and smaller.
1. Valves shall be all bronze construction with screwed ends.
2. Minimum valve working pressure shall be 150-psi.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Crane, Watts, or equal.
B. Rubber Flapper Swing Check Valves (Sewage/Sludge and Low Pressure Effluent Pumping
Application; i.e., less than 50-psi).
1. Valves shall have a cast iron body and cover meeting ASTM A126, Class B
specifications.
2. Flapper shall be Buna-N reinforced and shall be easily removed without any need to
remove the valve from line.
3. Ends shall be flanged, 125-pound ANSI B16.1. The flapper shall be Buna-N having an
"O" ring seating edge and be internally reinforced with steel.
4. Valve shall provide drip-tight shutoff.
5. Each check valve shall be provided with an NEMA 4X limit switch mounted on the
horizontal centerline of the body seat.
6. Provide a manually operated backflow device which shall positively lock open flapper
during full backflow.
7. The FLEX portion of the disc shall have a 20-year warranty.
8. Valves shall be manufactured by Apco Valve and Primer Corp., Series 100, Val-Matic
Valve and Manufacturing Corp., Swing Flex, or equal.
C. Swing Check Valves
1. Swing check valves shall conform to AWWA C508.
2. The valve body shall be 2-piece cast iron conforming to ASTM A126 with flanged ends
conforming to ANSI B16.1. The area throughout the valve body shall be equal to the full
pipe area.
3. The valve disc shall be ductile iron with bronze or resilient seating face. The disc shall
be partially balanced with a short travel to resist slamming.
4. The seat ring and disc ring shall be ASTM B763 Alloy 84400 bronze, with beveled
edges, firmly clamped or screwed into the valve body. Seat rings and disc rings shall be
field replaceable.
5. The hinge pin shall be of stainless steel with bronze bushings, allow free movement of
the disc without binding, and shall be guaranteed not to stick in the closed position.
6. The valve shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150-psi.
7. Valves shall be supplied with an outside lever and adjustable weight.
8. Valves 4-inches and larger shall be 8-mil epoxy lined.
D. Cushioned Swing Check Valves (Potable Water and High Pressure Effluent Application
greater than 50-psi).
1. All materials shall be as follows:
15105 - 3
rev: August, 2012
PART
Body, Cover, Disc
Disc Arm
Seat
Seat Ring
Hinge Shaft
Table 15105-1
Materials of Construction
MATERIAL
Cast Iron
Ductile Iron
Aluminum bronze or
Stainless Steel
Buna-N rubber or Metal
Stainless Steel
ASTM or SAE
A 126 GR.B
A 536
B 148
A 276
Type 303
2. Valve body shall have integral flanges.
3. The seat shall be centrifugally cast bronze with an o-ring seal and be locked in place with
stainless steel lock screws and be field replaceable without the use of special tools.
4. The shaft shall be single and continuous stainless steel, extending both sides of the body
with a lever and weight, using a side-mounted air cushion cylinder.
5. The air cushion cylinder shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material and the
piston shall be totally enclosed. The cylinder assembly shall be externally mounted to
the valve body and will permit adjustability to cushion the closure of the check valve.
6. The valve shall prevent backflow of water on normal pump shut-off or power failure and
shall be watertight.
7. A valve position indicator and micro switch shall be provided to remotely indicate
open/close position of check valve.
8. Valve body area shall equal or exceed the full pipe area.
9. Valve shall be Series 6,000 air cushioned swing check valve as manufactured by APCO
or acceptable equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install valves and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Owner.
B. Carefully erect all valves and support them in their respective positions free from distortion
and strain.
C. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe
run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing
flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil and
graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. Clean threaded joints by wire
brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before
installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight.
D. Support all valves connected to pumps and equipment, and in piping systems that cannot
support valves.
E. Repair any scratches, marks and other types of surface damages, etc., with original prime
coating as supplied by the factory.
15105 - 4
rev: August, 2012
F. Apply finish coating in accordance with Division 9.
3.02
DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING
A. Demonstration, start-up (adjustment) and testing shall demonstrate that all valves have been
properly installed and that check valves operate properly.
END OF SECTION
15105 - 5
rev: August, 2012
S E CT I O N 15110
PLUG VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
Wastewater force mains shall have plug valves installed as shown on the Drawings. This
Section specifies plug valves, manual actuators and associated valve boxes.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References
Reference
ANSI B16.1
ASTM A126
ASTM A276
ASTM A436
ASTM A536
AWWA C504
Title
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800
Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
Austenitic Gray Iron Castings
Ductile Iron Castings
Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
B. Proof-of-Design Tests
The Contractor shall furnish the County three (3) certified copies of a report from an
independent testing laboratory certifying successful completion of proof-of-design testing
conducted in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 5.2, except that where the word "disc"
appears in the standard, it is understood to mean "plug." In lieu of testing the valves at an
independent testing laboratory, proof-of-design testing may be performed at the valve
manufacturer's laboratory, but must be witnessed by a representative of a qualified
independent testing laboratory, and all test reports must be certified by the laboratory
representative. Proof-of-design testing shall have been performed on at least 3 (three) 6-inch
diameter valves, with all 3 (three) test units demonstrating full compliance with the test
standards. Failure to satisfactorily complete the test shall be deemed sufficient evidence to
reject all valves of the proposed make or manufacturer's model number.
1.03
"Submittals."
B. PRODUCT DATA: The following information shall be provided in accordance with 1.03 of
Section 01300 "Submittals."
1. Manufacturer's product data
2. Proof-of-design test reports specified in paragraph 1.02 B
15110 - 1
rev: August, 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A. Plug valves meeting the requirements of this Section shall be supplied from the approved
manufacturers as listed in Appendix D "List of Approved Products."
2.03
MATERIALS
A. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Component
Body
Plug
Plug facing
Body seats
3-inches and larger
Packing
2.04
Material
Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B
Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or cast iron ASTM A436
(Ni-resist), or ductile iron, ASTM A536
Neoprene
Nickel
Buna V-flex or TFE
MANUFACTURE
A. Plug Valves: Valves shall be straight-flow non-lubricated resilient plug type suitable for drip
tight, bi-directional shutoff at the specified valve design pressure.
1. Plug valves shall be eccentric, ball centric or full port. All valves shall open counterclockwise.
2. All buried valves shall be fitted with valve boxes as specified in Paragraph 2.03.B of this
Section. One 2-inch square tee-handled valve wrench, made by the valve manufacturer,
of suitable length to operate all valves within valve boxes shall be furnished for every 5
valves installed.
3. Plug valves shall be installed complete with extension stems, buried gear actuators, and
2-inch operating nuts (buried) or operating hand wheels (exposed), as required for
normal operation. All valve nuts shall be brought up to 1-foot below the proposed finish
grade.
4. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or molded
onto the valve body. A permanent plate shall be attached to the valve or operator
indicating serial number, order number, accessories, operator model and manufacturer.
5. Ball centric/eccentric plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated type. The port area for
valves 4-inches to 20-inches shall have a minimum 80% nominal pipe diameter and
valves 24-inches and larger shall have a minimum port area of 70% of nominal pipe
diameter unless noted on the Drawings as "full port". Plug valves denoted as full port
shall have a port area equal to the full area of the nominal pipe diameter.
6. Minimum pressure rating of valves 4-inches to 12-inches shall be 175-psi; valves 14inches to 72-inches shall be 150-psi. Valve bodies shall be cast iron ASTM A126, Class
B and fusion-bonded epoxy coated.
15110 - 2
rev: August, 2012
7. Valve ends shall be mechanical joint (buried) or flanged (exposed) as indicated on the
Drawings. Valve flange drilling for valves 3-inches and larger shall be per ANSI B16.1,
Class 125. Plugs shall be cast iron or ductile iron with neoprene facing and shall be of the
single piece design. The plug shall be of the same configuration for all valves and shall
require no stiffening member opposite the plug for balance or support. Valve body seats
shall have a welded-in overlay of not less than 90% nickel. Packing shall be adjustable
and safely replaceable without disassembling the valve. Bushing shall be 316 stainless
steel in both upper and lower journals and shall be protected from foreign matter with the
use of a grit seal or similar. The valve should be capable of drip tight shut off with flow in
either direction at the full pressure of the valve. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs and
washers on buried service valves shall be 304 stainless steel. All above- grade valves shall
have 316 stainless steel hardware.
8. Actuators: Manual valves shall have lever or gear actuators and tee wrenches, extension
stems, and floor stands as indicated on the Drawings. Valves 6-inch and larger shall be
equipped with buried service rated gear actuators. Buried valves shall have a 2-inch
square operating nut. All gearing shall be enclosed in a steel housing and be suitable for
running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water
into the actuator. Actuator shafts shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze
bearings. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve position and an adjustable stop shall be
provided to set closing torque. Exposed nuts, bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless
steel. Valve packing adjustment shall be accessible without disassembly of the actuator.
9. Valve Testing: Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504. Each valve
shall meet the performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests described in AWWA C504.
The leakage test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The
manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof-of-design testing as
described in AWWA C504.
B. Valve Boxes
1. All valves installed underground shall have cast iron 2-piece valve boxes. Valve boxes
shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and shall extend to such elevation at or
slightly above the finished grade surface as directed by the County. The barrel shall be
screw type only, with a 5-1/4-inch shaft. The upper section shall have a flange at the
bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling and shall be complete with
locking cast iron covers. Covers shall have "SEWER" cast into the top for all wastewater
mains which shall be so constructed as to prevent tipping or rattling.
2. A valve box with an operating nut extension is required for any size main that is 6-feet or
greater below finished grade. The extension shall be high strength, corrosion resistant steel
construction and permanently attached to the operating nut. The operating nut extension
insert shall be one complete assembled unit with a self-adjusting extension stem system
that fits inside a standard valve box. All moving parts of the extension stem shall be
enclosed in a housing to prevent contact with the soil. A valve box-centering device
designed to eliminate the shifting of the valve box against the operating nut of the valve
shall be used. The valve box assembly shall be adjustable to accommodate variable trench
depths 6-foot and greater as shown in the Drawings.
3. The stem assembly shall be of a telescoping design that allows for variable adjustment
length. The material shall be galvanized square steel tubing. The stem assembly shall
have a built-in device that prevents the stem assembly from disengaging at its fully
extended length. The extension stem must be capable of surviving a torque test to 1,000
foot-pounds without failure.
15110 - 3
rev: August, 2012
4. The valve boxes shall have locking lids.
5. Extension sections shall be cast or ductile iron only.
6. Valve boxes in non-paved areas shall be installed with a valve collar as shown in the
Drawings. The protective concrete collar with a bronze identification disc shall be
constructed of Class B concrete as shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLING VALVES AND BOXES
A. Valves: Valves shall be carefully inspected, opened wide and then tightly closed and the
various nuts and bolts shall be tested for tightness. Plug valves shall have the plug shaft
installed horizontally with the plug rotating upward to the top of the valve. Any valve that
does not operate correctly shall be removed and replaced. Seats shall face in the direction as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes and risers shall be carefully centered over the operating nuts of the
valves so as to permit a valve key to be fitted easily to the operating nut. In unpaved areas, valve
boxes shall be set to conform to the level of the finished surface and held in position by a
concrete collar placed under the support flange as shown on the Drawings. The valve box shall
not transmit surface loads to the pipe or valve. Extensions or risers for valve boxes shall be an
integral part of the box. No cut sections of ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be used in extending
the box to its proper height. Care shall be taken to prevent earth and other material from entering
the valve box. Any valve box which is out of alignment or whose top does not conform to the
finished ground surface shall be dug out and reset. Before final acceptance of the Work all valve
boxes shall be adjusted to finish grade.
END OF SECTION
15110 - 4
rev: August, 2012
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ALL WORK
A.
1.03
Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 sections in
addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
All Work must closely be coordinated among the electric utility, the construction
manager, and the Owner.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Provide the electrical utility service to the site. All work must comply with Progress
Energy of Florida, Inc. (PEF) requirements.
1.
2.
B.
Provide equipment rack with the following equipment:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Install underground electrical service to the 240 volt service.
Provide a grounding system as shown on the drawings.
Meter Can
Main Breaker (316 Nema 3R Stainless Steel)
Pump Control Panel (316 Nema 3R Stainless Steel)
Provide conduit and wiring for SCADA RTU panel for connection to the following:
1.
Wetwell float switches
E.
Provide conduits to serve the electrical system as shown on the drawings:
F.
Provide 316 NEMA 3R Stainless Steel junction boxes for each pump, for wetwell
floats. Provide Crouse Hinds EYSR conduit seals before each of the items noted
above.
G.
Provide surge suppressors where indicated on the drawings.
H.
Provide site grounding and lighting.
I.
Each bidder or his authorized representatives shall, before preparing a bid, visit all
areas of the proposed site in which work will take place and be performed to inspect
carefully the present conditions. The submission of the bid by this bidder shall be
considered evidence that the bidder has visited the project and noted the locations
16010 - 1
and conditions under which the work will be performed and that the bidder takes full
responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his work.
1.04
J.
All necessary temporary power, control and instrumentation requirements are the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be furnished at no extra cost to the Owner.
Power and controls shall be furnished to all existing equipment at all times.
K.
Pay all fees required for permits, inspections, and connections.
REFERENCES
A.
1.05
ANSI/NFPA70-National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Products List: Include products specified in the following sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.06
1.07
Section 16100 - Raceways, Boxes and Cabinets
Section 16120 - Wires and Cables
Section 16195 – Electrical Identification
Section 16476 - Disconnects and Circuit Breakers
Section 16709 – Surge Protection
B.
Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of
related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.
C.
Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
D.
Indicate applicable specification section on each submitted document.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable Building Codes for project location.
B.
Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70 - 2005 Edition.
C.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.).
D.
Utility company rules and regulations.
E.
Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
CONDUIT DRAWINGS
A.
In addition to the manufacturer's equipment shop drawings, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit for approval, electrical installation working drawings for the pump
station building and the site electrical containing the following:
1.
Concealed and buried conduit layouts shown on floor plans drawn at not less
than 1/4-inch = 1-foot-0-inch scale. The layouts shall include locations of
16010-2
process equipment, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, control
panels and equipment, motors, switches, motor starters, large junction or pull
boxes, instruments, and any other electrical devices connected to concealed
or buried conduits.
1.08
Plans shall be drawn on high quality reproducible, double sided mylar, size
36-inch x 24-inch, and shall be presented in a neat, professional manner.
3.
Concrete floors and/or walls containing concealed conduits shall not be
poured until conduit layouts are approved.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
1.09
2.
Submit complete operations and maintenance data for all equipment furnished under
this Division in accordance with Section 01340 manuals shall be prepared
specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, Drawings,
equipment lists, descriptions, complete part lists, etc. that are required to instruct
operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide a warranty for all the electrical equipment in accordance with the
requirements of other sections, but in no case less than one year from date of owner
acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Electrical systems shall be complete and operable for the intended purpose in
accordance with applicable codes at the time of acceptance.
B.
The Contractor shall coordinate all activities with the construction manager and the
Owner.
END OF SECTION
16010-3
SECTION 16100
RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.02
1.03
Provide submittals for all electrical equipment enclosures.
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
B.
Comply with NECA "Standard of Installation."
LISTING AND LABELING
A.
Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
CONDUIT
A.
Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
B.
PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; Schedule 80, match to conduit or
conduit/tubing type and material.
C.
Aluminum Rigid Conduit
BOXES
A.
Outlet and Device Boxes: Use 1 of the following:
1.
B.
C.
Nonmetallic Boxes: NEMA OS2.
PWI and Junction Boxes: Use 1 of the following:
1.
Small Boxes: NEMA OS 1, stainless steel.
2.
Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
Hinged Cover Enclosures: Stainless steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and
16100-1
flush latch. The enclosure shall be provided with stainless panel insert for mounting
equipment. Outdoor enclosures shall be 316 NEMA 3R Stainless Steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Seal all outdoor raceways using duct seal.
B.
Use the following wiring methods:
1.
Exposed- Rigid Aluminum
2.
Underground: PVC Schedule 80.
3.
Instrumentation (shielded cable): Aluminum or PVC (dependent on location)
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic,
pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Liquid tight
flexible metal conduit.
5.
Boxes and Enclosures:
a.
316 NEMA 3R stainless steel. All hardware shall be stainless steel.
C.
Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate
headroom.
E.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
F.
Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway.
G.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so
curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.
H.
Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise
indicated keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets
parallel.
I.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where
practical, and leave at least 1-inch (25 mm) concrete cover.
1.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during
concrete placement.
16100-2
J.
2.
Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete.
3.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main
reinforcement. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to
slab support.
Install underground raceways:
1.
2.
K.
At least 18" below grade.
At least 24" below driveways and roads.
Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural
members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical.
1.
Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where
practical.
2.
Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel.
Use factory elbows only where they can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field
bends for parallel raceways.
L.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints
tight.
1.
Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at
connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot
be made tight.
2.
Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
M.
Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the
raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box.
Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one
inside and one outside the box.
N.
Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub
so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so
no threads are exposed.
O.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or
monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb (90kg) tensile strength. Leave
not less than 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire.
P.
Stub-Up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to
16100-3
freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling, threaded inside for plugs,
and set flush with the finished floor. Where equipment connections are not made
under this Contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs flush with
floor.
Q.
Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in wet or damp
locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
R.
Install hinged cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
S.
Provide grounding connections for raceway, boxes, and components as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for
equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not
indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified
in UL Standard 486A.
END OF SECTION
16100-4
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
Furnish, install and test all wire, cable, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings
and as hereinafter specified.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples of proposed wire and cable shall be submitted for approval. Each sample
shall have the size, type of insulation, UL listing and voltage stenciled on the jacket.
B.
Approved samples will be sent to the project location for comparison by the Resident
Engineer with the wire actually installed.
C.
Installed, unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the
Owner.
APPLICATIONS
A.
Wire for lighting and receptacle circuits above grade shall be type THWN.
B.
Wire for all power motor circuits and below grade lighting and receptacle circuits
shall be type RHW or XHHW, stranded.
C.
Single conductor wire for control, indication and metering shall be type MTW No.
14 AWG, 19 strand or type THHN No. 14 AWG stranded.
D.
Multi-conductor control cable shall be No. 14 AWG, 19 strand.
E.
Wire for process instrumentation or shielded control cable shall be No. 16 AWG,
shielded and stranded.
MINIMUM SIZES
A.
Except for control and signal leads, no conductor smaller than No. 12 AWG shall be
used.
16120-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
2.02
2.03
2.04
All wires and cables shall be of annealed, 98 percent conductivity, soft drawn
stranded copper conductors.
600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Type RHW and XHHW shall be cross-linked polyethylene (XLP); as manufactured
by the Southwire Co., Collyer Insulated Wire Co., Rome Cable or approved equal.
B.
Type THWN shall be as manufactured by the Southwire Co., Collyer Insulated Wire
Co., Rome Cable or approved equal.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL CABLE
A.
Process instrumentation wire shall be twisted pair, 600V, cross-linked polyethylene
insulated, aluminum tape shielded, polyvinyl chloride jacketed, type "XLP" as
manufactured by the American Insulated Wire Co., Eaton Corp. "Polyset," or
approved equal. Multi-conductor cables shall be supplied with individually shielded
twisted pairs.
B.
Multi-conductor control cable shall be stranded, 600V, cross-linked polyethylene
insulated with PVC jacket, type "XLP" as manufactured by the American Insulated
Wire Co., Eaton Corp. "Polyset," or approved equal.
TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES
A.
Power Conductors: Terminations shall be die type or set screw type pressure
connectors as specified. Splices (where allowed) shall be die type compression
connector and waterproof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling.
B.
Control Conductors: Termination on saddle-type terminals shall be wired directly
with a maximum of two conductors per termination. Termination on screw type
terminals shall be made with a maximum of two spade connectors. Splices (where
allowed) shall be made with insulated compression type connectors. Heat shrink
boots shall be utilized for all outdoor splices.
C.
Instrumentation Signal Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high
level signals): Terminations permitted shall be typical of control conductors. Splices
are allowed at instrumentation terminal boxes only.
D.
Except where otherwise approved by the Engineer no splices will be allowed in
manholes, handholes or other below grade located boxes.
16120-2
E.
Splices shall not be made in push button control stations, control devices (i.e.,
pressure switches, flow switches, etc.), conduit bodies, etc.
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
All conductors shall be carefully handled to avoid kinks or damage to insulation.
B.
Lubrications shall be used to facilitate wire pulling. Lubricants shall be U.L. listed
for use with the insulation specified.
C.
Shielded instrumentation wire shall be installed from terminal to terminal with no
splicing at any intermediate point.
D.
Shielded instrumentation wire shall be installed in rigid steel conduit and pull boxes
that contain only shielded instrumentation wire. Instrumentation cables shall be
separated from control cables in manholes.
E.
Shielding on instrumentation wire shall be grounded at one end only, as directed by
supplier of the instrumentation equipment.
F.
Wire and cable connections to terminals and taps shall be made with compression
connectors. Connections of insulated conductors shall be insulated and covered. All
connections shall be made using materials and installation methods in accordance
with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the particular item of
wire and cable. The conductivity of all completed connections shall be not less than
that of the uncut conductor. The insulation resistance of all completed connections
of insulated conductors shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor.
G.
All wire and cable shall be continuous and without splices between points of
connection to equipment terminals, except a splice will be permitted by the Engineer
if the length required between the points of connection exceeds the greatest standard
shipping length available from the manufacturer specified or approved by the
Engineer as the manufacturer of the particular item of wire and cable.
H.
Steel fish tapes and/or steel pulling cables shall not be used in PVC conduit runs.
I.
All control and instrumentation circuits and wiring shall be clearly and permanently
numbered and labeled at each end so as to identify the location of the opposite end
and the function of the circuit. Individual wires in a multi-wire circuit shall be
identified with wire numbers. Labeling shall be in place prior to turnover of any
equipment, system or sub-system to Owner.
TESTS
A.
Main service, generator and motor feeders 600-volt wire insulation shall be tested
with a meg-ohmmeter after installation. Tests shall be made at not less than 1,000
VDC.
16120-3
B.
All service conductors shall be tested as in paragraph A above. These tests shall be
witnessed by the Engineer. A written report shall be submitted to the engineer for
review.
END OF SECTION
16120-4
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Nameplates and tape labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Color coding.
SCOPE
A.
Provide engraved nameplates for the following equipment as indicated on the
drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Label all compartments.
Label all outdoor junction boxes.
Label control system panels.
B.
All wires shall be marked and color-coded.
C.
All control wiring shall have wire numbers on each end.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on a white
background.
B.
Wire and Cable Markers: Pre-printed self-sticking type.
C.
Color Coding Tape: Vinyl plastic insulating tape, colors as specified in part 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels.
B.
Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines.
16195-1
C.
3.02
3.03
Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure
nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and
junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number
for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on
schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings
for control wiring.
B.
Any color coding schemes used in existing work shall be maintained in new work.
C.
Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and
branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as
follows:
240/120 Volts
120/208 Volts
Phase
480/277 Volts
Black
Blue
Red
White
Green
Black
Blue
Red
White
Green
A
B
C
Neutral
Ground
Brown
Orange
Yellow
White
Green
NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING
A.
Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment and
loads served. Letter Height: 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served for
distribution and control equipment identification.
B.
Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment
designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source.
C.
Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Panelboards,
Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify circuit and load served,
including location.
D.
Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch;
identify load served.
END OF SECTION
16195-2
SECTION 16476
DISCONNECTS TRANSFORMERS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SCOPE
A.
Circuit breakers for panelboards.
B.
Molded case circuit breakers for motor control centers.
C.
Fusible and Non-Fusible safety switches.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.03
Submit product data according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the “National Electrical
Code," Article 100.
2.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
SWITCHES
A.
Enclosed Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type GD, handle lockable with 2
padlocks.
B.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X stainless steel, unless specified or required otherwise to meet
environmental conditions of installed location.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
2.03
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: The current interrupting capacity of the breaker shall
be equal or greater to 22,000 amps, unless otherwise indicated.
TRANSFORMERS
A.
Dry Type Lighting Transformers:
16476-1
1.
Transformers shall be dry type, two-winding with KVA and voltage
ratings as shown on the Drawings.
2.
Four full capacity taps shall be furnished, two 2-1/2% above and two
2-1/2% below rated primary voltage.
3.
Transformers shall be built in accordance with ANSI C89 and NEMA
ST1-4 with a maximum insulation temperature rise of 115 degrees C.
4.
Transformers shall be manufactured by the General Electric Co., or
approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers in locations, as indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers level and plumb.
C.
Install wiring between enclosed switches and circuit breakers and control/indication
devices.
D.
Connect enclosed switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system
and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and
terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer’s
published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according
to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
END OF SECTION
16476-2
SECTION 16482
480-VOLT MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.02
1.03
Furnish, install and test the motor control centers as hereinafter specified and as
shown on the Drawings.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The motor control centers shall be the product of a manufacturer who shall also be
the manufacturer of all the circuit breakers, fused switches, variable frequency drives
and motor starters included in the motor control centers.
B
All units and sections shall be U.L. labeled when possible. Motor control centers
containing service entrance equipment shall be U.L. labeled "Suitable For Use As
Service Equipment."
C.
The motor control centers shall be manufactured by approved suppliers listed in
Orange County Appendix “D”.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete master wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics, including
coordination with other electrical control devices operating in conjunction with the
motor control centers and suitable outline drawings shall be furnished for approval
before proceeding with manufacture. Due to the complexity of the control functions,
it is imperative the above drawings be clear and carefully prepared to facilitate
interconnections with other equipment. Standard preprinted sheets or drawings
simply marked to indicate applicability to this Contract will not be acceptable.
B.
Submittals shall include a bill-of-material listing conductor material and insulation
type as well as other hardware and equipment to be furnished.
1.
Where it is not explicitly shown and completely obvious from the outline
drawings the following items shall be verified in a written statement
accompanying the shop drawings.
2.
Type of terminal blocks used and that the removal of plug-in compartments
can be performed without disconnecting or removing wires.
3.
Silver or tin plating of bus.
16482-1
1.04
4.
Insulation and isolation of vertical bus.
5.
U.L. approval.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
Lighting Panels are included in Section 16160.
Dry type lighting transformers are included in Section 16476.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
RATING
A.
2.02
The motor control centers shall be designed for 480 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire 60 Hz
service and shall have short-circuit rating of not less than 65,000 amperes RMS,
symmetrical.
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Structure:
1.
The motor control centers shall be a standard metal-enclosed, free-standing,
deadfront structure, not more than 90-inches in height, and fabricated from
formed sheet steel of not less than No. 14 gauge thickness. The enclosure
shall be NEMA I. The motor control centers shall consist of vertical sections
of equal height and 20 inches deep containing individual plug-in
compartments. Compartments shall be isolated from each other by separate
horizontal steel plates or by steel plates without openings that are a part of the
compartment itself.
2.
Plug-in compartments shall totally isolate enclosed equipment. All unused
openings to the adjacent vertical wiring space shall be plugged. All openings
used for wiring shall have insulating grommets.
3.
Vertical sections shall be mounted on steel channel sills continuous on four
sides, or with steel channel sills on two sides and end cover plates. Each
compartment shall be provided with a hinged door of pan construction on the
front and a door opening of sufficient size to permit ready removal of any of
the equipment in the compartment. Interlocks shall be provided to prevent
opening the compartment door when the disconnect device in the
compartment is in the closed position. An interlock bypass device shall be
furnished. Means of locking the disconnect device in the "Off" position shall
be provided. Disconnect device operating mechanism shall not be attached to
the compartment door.
16482-2
B.
4.
All sections shall have the same structural features with provisions for the
addition of similar sections at either end. Each compartment shall meet
NEMA Standards for the control equipment installed and units of similar size
shall be interchangeable.
5.
Each section shall be provided with a horizontal wiring space which shall line
up with a similar space in the adjacent section or sections, with openings
between so that wires may be pulled the entire length of the control centers.
There shall also be provided in each section a vertical wiring space with
separate full height door.
6.
The motor control centers shall be designed for against-the-wall mounting.
All wiring, bus joints and other mechanical parts requiring tightening or other
maintenance shall be accessible from the front or top.
7.
The motor control centers shall have engraved laminated nameplates screwed
to the doors of each individual compartment and wiring diagrams pasted
inside each door. Compartments containing panel boards shall have a card
holder on the inside of the door. Compartments containing motor starters
shall each have an overload heater selection table pasted inside the door.
8.
The motor control centers shall provide equipment of type, capacity, trip
ratings for the loads shown on the Drawings or otherwise specified.
9.
Construction shall be NEMA Class II, Type B or C. In so far as possible all
devices and components used shall be of one manufacturer. The motor
control centers shall be furnished as a completely factory assembled unit
where transportation facilities and installation requirements permit.
10.
The motor control centers shall be finished with ANSI Z55.1, No. 61 light
gray enamel over a rust resistant primer.
11.
The insulation level of the complete motor control assembly shall be such
that it will meet the field tests required under Paragraph 3.02.
Buses:
1.
All buses shall be silver on tin-plated copper. A continuous main horizontal
bus shall be furnished. Main buses shall be rated as shown on the Drawings.
2.
Each vertical section shall have a full height vertical bus rated not less than
300 amperes. Vertical buses shall be insulated and isolated with glass
polyester or equivalent continuous insulation. Taped buses will not be
acceptable. Unused stab openings shall be plugged. Lower ends of vertical
buses shall be insulated.
16482-3
C.
D.
3.
A 1/1-inch x 2-inch ground bus shall be furnished the entire length of the
motor control centers.
4.
Buses shall be braced for 65,000 amperes RMS, symmetrical, short circuit
current.
5.
All buses except neutral and ground buses shall be completely isolated by
steel plates or insulating material.
6.
The buses shall be sized for a maximum current density of 400 amperes per
square inch.
Wiring:
1.
All wiring shall be copper.
2.
Compartment wiring shall be to compartment mounted, plug-in terminal
blocks that allow compartments to be withdrawn without having to remove
wires from fixed terminal blocks.
3.
Power wiring shall be black, control wiring shall be red, wiring energized
from sources other than the starter control power transformer shall be yellow.
Signage:
1.
Each motor control center shall be furnished with a sign marked "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE." Letters shall be not less than 1-inch high, 1/4-inch
stroke. Signs shall be laminated plastic, engraved red letters with a white
background.
2.
2.03
All compartments with voltages from sources outside of the compartment,
not disconnected by the motor circuit protector, shall have a sign on the
compartment door marked "CAUTION - THIS UNIT CONTAINS A
VOLTAGE FROM A SOURCE OUTSIDE OF THIS UNIT." Letters shall
be black on a high visibility yellow background. Background shall be
laminated plastic approximately 3 inches x 5 inches.
COMPONENTS
A.
Combination Motor Starters:
1.
All motor starters shall be a combination motor circuit protector and
contactor, 3-pole, 60-Hz, 600-volt, magnetically operated, of the types shown
on the drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepowers shown
on the Drawings, but shall be not less than NEMA Size 1.
2.
All motor starters shall have a 120-volt operating coil, overload relay in each
16482-4
phase and control power transformer.
B.
3.
All motor starters shall have 1-N.O. and 1-N.C. auxiliary contacts.
Additional auxiliary contacts shall be furnished where shown on the
Drawings or as required by the control scheme.
4.
Full voltage, non-reversing starters, NEMA size 4 and smaller shall be of
plug-in design with stab-on connectors engaging the vertical buses. Larger
units shall be of fixed design.
5.
Reduced-voltage starters shall be auto-transformer type with closed circuit
transition. Auto-transformers shall be dry type with 50, 65 and 80 percent
voltage taps. Auto-transformers shall have over-temperature protection.
Timing relays shall be pneumatic, adjustable.
6.
Overload relays shall be adjustable and manually reset by push button in
compartment door. Replaceable individual overload relay heaters of the
proper size shall be installed in each phase.
7.
Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load where required.
Transformer secondaries shall be equipped with time-delay fuses.
8.
Motor circuit protectors shall be molded case with adjustable magnetic trip
only. They shall be specifically designed for use with magnetic motor
starters. Motor circuit protectors shall have auxiliary disconnect contacts
when used with starters having external control circuits.
9.
Variable Frequency Drives- see VFD specification section 16370.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
C.
Control Stations:
1.
D.
Circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic, molded case, 480 volt, with not
less than 65,000 amperes, RMS interrupting capacity. All circuit breakers
with 225 amperes frames and larger shall have interchangeable trips. Circuit
breakers shall have auxiliary disconnect contacts when used with starters
having external control circuits.
Control stations shall be standard size, heavy-duty, oiltight.
Indicating Lights:
1.
Indicating lights shall be standard size, heavy duty, oil tight, low voltage
transformer operated.
16482-5
E.
Running Time Meters:
1.
F.
G.
Voltmeters:
1.
Voltmeters, ammeters and wattmeters shall be 4-1/4-inch square, 250-degree
scale, plus or minus 1-percent accuracy switchboard instruments; General
Electric Co.'s. Type AB-40 or equal.
2.
A four-position selector switch shall be furnished and installed for selection
of three phases and off.
Instrument Transformers:
1.
H.
J.
As shown on the drawings.
Control Relays:
1.
Control relays shall be heavy-duty, machine tool type with suitably rated
convertible contacts. Time delay relays shall be pneumatic, adjustable.
2.
Relays shall be CR2810 and CR2920 as manufactured by General Electric
Co., or equal.
Nameplates:
1.
2.04
Instrument transformers shall be indoor, 600-volt, butyl-rubber molded,
metering class designed in accordance with ANSI and NEMA standards.
Surge Protection:
1.
I.
Running time meters shall be 3-1/2-inch square case; non-reset, 99,999.9
hour range; Type 236 as manufactured by the General Electric Co. or equal.
Unit nameplates shall be black and white laminated plastic having engraved
letters approximately 3/16-inch high extending through the black face into
the white layer. Nameplates shall identify equipment controlled or circuit
designation as applicable.
SPARE PARTS
A.
The following spare parts shall be furnished:
1.
2.
3.
One (1) box of power fuses of each size furnished.
One (1) set of starter contacts for each NEMA size installed.
One (1) starter coil for each NEMA size installed.
16482-6
4.
One (1) box of pilot lights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The motor control center housings shall be bolted to angle iron sills imbedded in the
concrete on the two longest sides. The sills shall be the full length of the motor
control center housing and shall be installed level in all directions.
B.
Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic
tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported such that circuit terminations are not
stressed.
C.
The motor control centers shall be maintained in an upright position at all times.
Lifting shall be only at the floor sills or the top mounted lifting angle.
D.
The motor control centers shall be protected against damage at all times. Any
damage to the paint shall be carefully repaired using touch-up paint furnished by
motor control centers manufacturer.
TESTS AND CHECKS
A.
B.
The following minimum tests and checks shall be made after the assembly of the
motor control centers, but prior to the termination of any field wiring.
1.
Megger terminals and buses after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger
voltage.
2.
A 1,000 VDC megger shall be used for these tests.
3.
The first test shall be made with main circuit breaker closed and all
remaining breakers open. A second test shall be made with all circuit
breakers closed.
4.
The test results shall be recorded and forwarded to the Engineer for his
review. Minimum megger readings shall be 100 megohms in both tests.
The following shall be done before energizing the motor control centers.
1.
Remove all current transformer shunts after completing the secondary circuit.
2.
Install overload relay heaters based on actual motor nameplate current. If
capacitors are installed between starter and motor, use overload relay heaters
based on measured motor current.
16482-7
3.
Check all mechanical interlocks for proper operation.
4.
Vacuum clean all interior equipment.
END OF SECTION
16482-8
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.02
STANDARDS
A.
1.03
Furnish and install complete lighting systems including panelboards, transformers,
lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches, contractors, clocks and all necessary
accessories and appurtenances required as hereinafter specified and shown on the
Drawings.
All lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and
shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of the Underwriters
Laboratories "Standards for Safety, Electric Lighting Fixtures." All lighting fixtures
shall be Underwriters Laboratories labeled.
RELATED WORK
A.
Panelboards shall be as specified under Section 16160.
B.
Conduit shall be as specified under Section 16100.
C.
Wire shall be as specified under Section 16120.
D.
Transformers shall be specified under Section 16108.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Switches:
1.
Wall switches shall be of the indicating, toggle action, flush mounting quiet
type. All switches shall conform to Federal Specification W-S-896-D.
2.
Wall switches shall be of the following types and manufacturer or approved
equal.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Single pole - Arrow-Hart No. 1991 or Leviton No. 1221-2.
Double pole - Arrow-Hart No. 1992 or Leviton No. 1222-2.
Three way - Arrow -Hart No. 1993 or Leviton No. 1223-2.
Four way - Arrow-Hart No. 1994 or Leviton No. 1224-2.
Single pole, key operated - Arrow-Hart No. 1991-L or Leviton No.
1221-2L.
16500-1
f.
g.
B.
Momentary contact, 2 circuit, center off - Arrow-Hart No. 1895 or
Leviton No. 1256.
Weatherproof cover for Arrow-Hart 2900 series tap action switches Arrow-Hart Catalog No. 2881-G.
Receptacles:
1.
Wall receptacles shall be of the following types and manufacturer or
approved equal.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Receptacles (Weatherproof/NEMA 4 Areas/Outside)
a.
3.
Single, 20A, 125V, 1P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No. 5361 or Leviton No.
5361.
Duplex, 20A, 125V, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No. 5362 or Leviton No.
5362.
Corrosion-resistant, duplex, 20A, 125V, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No.
5739-CR or Leviton No. 5362CR and Crouse-Hinds WLRD-1 cover.
60A, 480V, 3P, 2W; weatherproof receptacle shall be Crouse-Hinds
Catalog No. ARE6324 with Crouse-Hinds Catalog No. APJ 6385
plug.
Ground fault interrupter, duplex, 20A, 125V, 3P, 2W; Arrow-Hart
No. GF5362 or Leviton No. 6899.
Stainless steel indoor mounting plate for G.F.I. receptacle;
Arrow-Hart Catalog No. S-26.
Clock hanger, 15A, 125V, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No. 452 or Leviton
No. 628.
Single, 20A, 250V, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No. 5461 or Leviton No.
5461.
Single, 30A, 125V, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No. 5716N; cap:
Arrow-Hart No. 5717N or Leviton No. 5371.
Clothes dryer, 30A, 125/250V, 3P, 3W; Arrow-Hart No. 9344N.
Cap: Arrow-Hart No. 9352AN or Leviton No. 5209 and No. 9382-P.
General Requirements: Receptacles in wet locations shall be installed
with a hinged outlet cover/enclosure clearly marked “Suitable for
Wet Locations While In Use” and “UL Listed”. There must be a
gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface, and between
the hinged cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal.
Taymac; Specification Grade.
Special wiring devices shall be provided as noted of the drawings.
a. Tamper resistant duplex receptacle Leviton No. 5262-SG or approved
equal.
b.
Wall switch occupancy sensor Leviton No. 6775 or approve equal.
c.
Scene select microprocessor dimmer Leviton No. 17765 or approved
equal.
16500-2
d.
C.
D.
Device Plates:
1.
Plates for flush mounted devices shall be of the required number of gangs for
the application involved and shall be 302 (18-8) high nickel stainless steel of
the same manufacturer as the device.
2.
Plates for surface mounted device boxes shall be of the same material as the
box.
Lighting Fixtures:
1.
E.
F.
Surge protective duplex receptacle Leviton No. 5380 or approved
equal.
Lighting fixture types shall be as shown on the "Lighting Fixture Schedule"
on the Drawings. The catalog numbers listed are given as a guide to the
design and quality of fixture desired. Equivalent designs and equal quality
fixtures of other manufacturers will be reviewed.
Lamps:
1.
Fluorescent lamps shall be medium bi-pin and recessed double contact, rapid
start, standard cool white all as indicated on the "Fixture Schedule."
2.
Fluorescent ballasts shall be Class P, rapid start, high power factor, CBM
certified by E.T.L. and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for
operation on 120 volts or as indicated on the "Fixture Schedule."
3.
Metal halide lamps shall be deluxe white of the size and type as called for in
the Lighting Fixture schedule on the Drawings.
4.
Metal halide or high pressure sodium ballasts shall be of the constant wattage
auto-transformer type of the correct size and voltage for the fixture it is to
serve as called for in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawings. All
ballasts shall be as manufactured by Sylvania Electric Products, Inc., General
Electric Company, or Jefferson Electric Company.
5.
Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, extended service, 2500 hour life
with medium base.
6.
All lamps shall be of one manufacturer and shall be as manufactured by
Sylvania Electric Products, Inc., General Electric Company, or Westinghouse
Electric Corporation or approved equal.
Flexible Fixture Hangers:
1.
Flexible fixture hangers used in nonhazardous areas shall be Type ARB and
flexible fixture supports used in hazardous areas shall be Type ECHF as
manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Company or approved equal.
16500-3
2.
G.
H.
Steel channel, roll formed into U-shape, shall be used to span between
building steel for mounting of fixtures where required by fixture location or
as indicated on the Drawings. Channel shall be as manufactured by Unistrut
Corporation or approved equal.
Lighting Contactor:
1.
Lighting contactor shall be of the electrically operated, mechanically held
type in NEMA 1 enclosures of the number of poles as called for on the
Drawings.
2.
Contactors shall be rated for 30A-600 volt contacts and be similar and equal
to Automatic Switch Company bulletin 1255-166 RC.
Lighting Control Time Switches:
1.
Time switches for the control of lighting shall have astronomic dials, reserve
power and be similar and equal to the following types:
a.
Where time switch is indicated for SPST maintained control it shall
be similar and equal to Tork Time Controls Catalog No. 7100ZL
(120V).
b.
Where time switch is indicated for DPST maintained control it shall
be similar and equal to Tork Time Controls Catalog No. 7200ZL
(120V).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Each fixture shall be a completely finished unit with all components, mounting
and/or hanging devices necessary, for the proper installation of the particular fixture
in its designated location and shall be completely wired ready for connection to the
branch circuit wires at the outlet.
B.
When fixtures are noted to be installed flush, they shall be complete with the proper
accessories for installing in the particular ceiling involved. All flush mounted
fixtures shall be supported from the structure and shall not be dependent on the hung
ceilings for their support.
C.
Flexible fixture hangers shall be used for all pendant mounted fixtures.
D.
Conduit run in areas with hung ceilings shall be installed in the space above the hung
ceiling as close to the structure as possible. Conduits shall be supported from the
structure.
16500-4
1.02
E.
Receptacles in process areas and shops shall be mounted 36 inches above the floor
unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
F.
Receptacles in office and other like areas shall be mounted 18 inches above the floor
unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
SPARE LAMPS
A.
1.03
Spare lamps shall be provide for all fixture types supplied. Quantity shall be 15
percent of total used on project.
CLEANING UP
A.
All fixtures shall be left in a clean condition, free of dirt and defects, before
acceptance by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
16500-5
SECTION 16709
HIGH-PERFORMANCE TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.02
The specified unit shall provide effective high energy transient voltage surge
suppression, surge current diversion and high frequency noise attenuation in all
electrical modes for equipment connected downstream from the facility’s meter or
load side of the main overcurrent device. The unit shall be connected in parallel
with the facility’s wiring system.
RELATED DOCUMENTS AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A.
Systems shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in accordance with
the following applicable documents and standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL1449 3rd Addition and UL 1283)
ANSI/IEEE (C62.41 and C62.45)
Military Standards (MIL – STD 220A)
National Electric Code (NEC)
Underwriter’s Laboratories 248
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
APPROVED MANUFACTURER
Current Technologies
Power & Systems Innovations
PO Box 590223
Orlando, FL 32859-0223
Contact:
Phone
Phone
FAX
E-mail
Internet
John West Sr.
(407) 380-9200
(800) 260-2259
(407) 380-3911 FAX
[email protected]
www.psihq.com
Joslyn, AKA (Total Protection Solutions)
Total Protection Solutions
4366 LB McLeod Road
Orlando, FL 32804
Contact:
Phone
FAX
Bob Levit
407-841-4405
407-841-4407
16709-1
E-mail:
Internet
[email protected]
www.treborpowersystems.com
Surge Suppression Inc
Surge Suppression Incorporated
P.O. Box 674
Destin, FL 32540-0674
Contact:
Phone
FAX
E-mail
2.02
Mike Barton
(888) 987-8877
(888) 900-8879
[email protected]
DEVICES
A.
Surge Protection Devices (SPD’s) shall be UL listed at or above the available fault
current level at the point of SPD application by UL, Per UL 1449 latest edition.
B.
The SPD shall be a parallel design using fast-acting energy protection that will divert
and dissipate the surge energy.
C.
Units shall have:
1.
Minimum 10 mode operation for all 3 phase Y and high leg Delta
configurations and six modes of protection for all 3 phase Delta “no Neutral”
configurations.
2.
One nanosecond or less response time for any individual component, and
shall be self restoring and fully automatic.
3.
Extended noise filtration with a 10 kHz to 100 MHz range.
4.
LED indication of unit failure to indicate the continuous positive operational
status of each protected phase.
5.
System Voltage shall be as indicated on the drawings.
6.
The fusing system shall be capable of allowing the rated maximum single
impulse surge current to pass through without fuse operation.
7.
SPD’s shall be installed with leads as shorts as possible (not to exceed 24
inches). SPD’s may be mounted internally in Motor Control Centers,
switchgear and switchboards. SPD’s shall be mounted externally at
panelboards and control panels.
8.
All SPD panel units shall be guaranteed by the installing contractor and surge
suppression manufacturer to be free of defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of not less than 10 years from the date of substantial completion
of the system to which the suppressor is installed.
16709-2
9.
2.03
2.04
a.
Complete schematic data for suppressor, indicating part numbers,
dimensional drawings and mounting arrangement.
b.
Cut sheets which include Peak Surge Current “per mode”, Let
Through Current, UL tested voltage protection rating (VPR) and
maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV).
c.
Copy of Warranty Statement
APPLICATIONS
A.
Surge Current RATING OF 150 kA PER MODE AT 480 Volt distribution panels,
switchgear, switchboards and substations.
B.
Surge Current RATING OF 80 kA PER MODE AT 480 Volt Motor Control Centers.
C.
Surge Current RATING OF 80 kA PER MODE AT 480 Volt branch panels or
control panels.
D.
Surge Current RATING OF 40 kA PER MODE AT 208 or 240 Volt three phase or
single phase branch panels.
FILTERING
A.
2.05
For each SPD type or size used on this project provide the following
submittal data:
The system shall provide a UL 1283 Listed Electromagnetic Interference Filter
capable of attenuating noise levels produced by electromagnetic interference and
radio frequency interference.
FUSING
A.
Fuse component(s) identification and surge rating. The manufacture shall provide
documentation demonstrating the tested surge current rating (8x20µsec) of the fuse.
The surge rating of the fuse shall be greater than the combined surge current rating of
all downstream connected suppression elements.
B.
Fusing: Suppression component(s) identification and surge rating. The
manufacturer shall provide documentation identifying the suppression element(s)
connected in series with fuse element(s) and provide the suppression elements
published 8x20µsec surge current rating. The rating of the suppression element(s)
shall be less than the rating of upstream fusing element(s).
C.
Fusing: Surge performance. All fusing shall be required to meet the single pulse
surge current testing requirements of Section 2.2 above.
D.
Fusing: Isolation. The unit shall have each MOV fused and designed to operate
16709-3
only in the event of an MOV failure within the SPD device.
2.06
E.
Fusing Coordination: Units that can’t demonstrate MOV-fuse coordination in 2.4.a
and 2.4.d are not acceptable.
F.
Fusing: UL Rating. All fusing shall be 200kAIC UL248 Recognized.
UL 1449 SUPPRESSED VOLTAGE RATING.
A.
The unit shall be UL 1449 3rd Edition Listed and shall be as follows for L-N, L-G,
N-G, and L-L, modes, inclusive of the disconnect switch: (Select appropriate
product rating from below)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.07
IN-FIELD TESTING
A.
2.08
40kA – 80kA rated products/120/208V units: L-N = 400V, L-G=500, NG=500, and L-L=700
The unit shall be equipped with a performance data extraction protocol allowing unit
performance data, including percent of protection remaining, to be transmitted to an
internal, external status analyzer.
ENCLOSURE.
A.
B.
Outside - Units shall be provided in a NEMA type 4X plastic enclosure.
Interior – Units shall be provided in NEMA type 1 enclosure.
3.01
SYSTEM TESTING
A.
Upon completion of installation, a factory-authorized local service representative
shall provide product startup testing services. The tests shall include:
1.
On-line Testing: Verification that all suppression and filtering paths are
operating with 100% protection as well as verification of proper facility
neutral-to-ground bond by measuring neutral-to-ground current and voltage.
2.
Off-line Testing: Impulse injection to verify the system tolerances as well as
verification of proper facility neutral-to-ground bond. To be compared to
16709-4
factory benchmark test parameters supplied with each individual unit.
3.02
DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING
A.
3.03
A copy of the startup test results and the factory benchmark testing results shall be
supplied to the engineer and the owner for confirmation of proper system function.
This letter shall also clarify that the integrity of all neutral-to-ground bonds were
verified through testing and visual inspection, and that all grounding bonds were
observed to be in place.
SYSTEM WARRANTY
A.
The TVSS system manufacturer shall warranty the entire system against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years following substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION
16709-5
APPENDIX A
GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
Dated January 2, 2012
The attached Geotechnical Engineering Investigation and dewatering ground water
sampling was accomplished for the utilization of the Design Engineer during the
design phases of this project. The criteria and recommendations stated herein are not
to be construed as direction from the Design Engineer to the Contractor and are
hereby provided only as general information, furnished as a courtesy to the
Contractor.
APPENDIX B
ORANGE COUNTY UTILITIES
FORMS
Digital Data Submission
Pressure Test
Pump Station Start-up
Right of Entry Form for work on private property
Risk Management June 02
Water Main Disinfection Certification
STANDARDS AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
APPENDIX B
Digital Data Submission
FORMS
February 11, 2011
This form is to be utilized for the submittal of digital data in accordance with the requirements
outlined in Chapter 2111, “ Project Documents and Submittals”.
Date of Submittal:
Project Number:
Project Name:
Project Manager:
Consulting Firm:
Address:
City:
State:
Phone:
Email:
Type of Submittal:
Construction Plans
Zip:
Record Drawings
File Format:
B108
1 of 1
APPENDIX B
Pressure Test
FORMS
February 11, 2011
Force Main
Reclaimed Main
Water Main
Project Name: ______________________________________________
Constructed by: _____________________________________________
DATE
LINE SEGMENT
STATION
From
To
LENGTH
N
D
START
Time
PSI
Allowable Loss – 2 Hours
L = SD (P) 1/2
148,000 See Note Below
Time
END
PSI
LOSS (gal)
Allow Actual
COUNTY Inspector’s Name:
Signature:
Date:
Tester’s Name:
Signature:
Date:
Comments:
Note:
L - Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S - Length of pipe tested, in feet.
D - Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches.
P - Average test pressure during leakage test in pounds per square inch gauge.
B104
1 of 1
Pass /Fail
STATUS
APPENDIX B
Pump Station Start-Up
FORMS
February 11, 2011
Prior to the pump station start-up, the CONTRACTOR shall submit this completed form to the
COUNTY and the following shall have been successfully met.
A walk through letter of acceptance; and
All wire checks, video inspections and valve locates
Video inspections completed;
FDEP Water Clearance received;
FDEP placard for fuel tank if applicable; and
Completed “Pump Station Start-Up” form (Appendix B).
Transfer of utility bills after final acceptance shall be requested by submitting the final utility
power billing statement to Utilities Water Reclamation Operations Processing Center located at
8100 Presidents Drive, Suite A, or fax to 407-836-6819.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Inspection Date:
Final Acceptance Date:
Station Name:
PS #
Address:
Subdivision:
Power Company:
Meter Number:
Water Company:
Meter Number:
FILE #
PRESENT AT START-UP
Contractor Name:
Phone Number:
Consulting Engineer:
Phone Number:
Pump Manufacturer Rep:
Orange County
Utilities Inspector:
Phone Number:
Phone Number:
Transmission Reps:
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Control Panel Enclosure Mfg.
Control Panel SN:
Control Panel Built By
Date of Manufacture:
Main Service Voltage:
Amperage:
Main Disconnect Breaker Model #:
Amperage:
Control Panel Main Breaker Model #:
Amperage:
Emergency Circuit Breaker Model:
Amperage:
Pump Breaker Model #:
Amperage:
B101
1 of 9
APPENDIX B
FORMS
February 11, 2011
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (Continued)
Control Breaker Model #
Amperage:
SPD Type:
Transformer Model:
Transformer Model:
Model:
Primary:
Primary:
Receipt Received Yes No
Secondary:
KVA:
Secondary:
KVA:
Alternator Name:
Model:
Phase Monitor Name:
Model:
Alarm Horn Manufacturer:
Model:
Hour Meter Manufacturer:
Model:
Starter Name:
Starter Size:
Heater Size:
Starter Coil Part Number:
Pump Voltage:
Phase:
Pump F.L.A:
Pump HP.:
Pressure Transducer Manufacturer:
Model:
PUMP EQUIPMENT
Pump Manufacturer:
Model #:
Impeller Size:
Number:
Pump #1 Serial #:
Pump #2 Serial #:
Pump #3 Serial #:
Pump #4 Serial #:
Pump #5 Serial #:
Pump #6 Serial #:
FLOAT BALLS
Float Ball Manufacturer:
Float Ball Type:
Off Level Depth:
Lead Start Depth:
Lag 1 Start Depth:
Lag 2 Start Depth:
Lag 3 Start Depth:
High Level Depth:
MECHANICAL
Valve Vault Cover Mfg:
Wet Well Cover Manufacturer:
Wet Well Diameter:
Base Elbow Size:
Plug Valve Manufacturer:
Valve Vault Cover Size
Wet Well Depth:
Riser Pipe Material
B101
2 of 9
Wet Well Cover Size:
Guide Rail Size:
Riser Pipe Size:
APPENDIX B
FORMS
February 11, 2011
MECHANICAL (Continued)
Plug Valve Size:
Plug Valve Lay Length
Check Valve Manufacturer:
Check Valve Size:
Check Valve Type:
Check Valve Lay Length:
Oil Filled Gauges:
Emergency Pump Out Size:
Pipe Size Entering Wet-Well:
Gauge

invitation for bids for pump stations r/r tier 16

Transcription

Similar documents

Britco Supplies Disaster Relief Housing for Save the Children

senarai kuantiti pengurusan keselamatan dan kesihatan pekerjaan

The Contractor

DAYTON METROPOLITAN HOUSING AUTHORITY dba GREATER

invitation for bids for ssa-esa water main (meado

First choice for high efficiency abrasive slurry pumping

barney`s new york | case study

Choosing a pump

The GOMACO Full Line Brochure

CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT VISIT OUR WEBSITE AT